You also want an ePaper? Increase the reach of your titles
YUMPU automatically turns print PDFs into web optimized ePapers that Google loves.
B-TitelbildO r i g i n a l o p e r a t i n g I n s t r u c t i o n sSelf-propelledHigh-Performance Mower-ConditionerT-Typ1Big M 400T-Typ2T-Typ3T-Typ4T-Typ5(T-abMasch.-Nr.from serial no.: 810 850 )T-Bestel-Nr.Order no.: <strong>150</strong> <strong>000</strong> <strong>123</strong> <strong>02</strong> usT-Typ6T-Typ7T-Typ8T-Typ9T-Typ1011.10.2010
Pos: 1 /BA/Inhaltsverzeichnis @ 0\mod_1196861555655_78.doc @ 15165Table of Contents1 Table of Contents1 Table of Contents ................................................................................................................................... 22 Foreword ............................................................................................................................................... 143 Introduction ........................................................................................................................................... 153.1 Validity ............................................................................................................................................. 153.2 Identification Plate ........................................................................................................................... 153.3 Information Required for Questions and Orders.............................................................................. 163.4 Intended Use ................................................................................................................................... 163.5 Machine overview ............................................................................................................................ 173.6 Technical data ................................................................................................................................. 183.6.1 Technical Data / Vehicle .............................................................................................................. 183.6.2 Technical Data / Mower CV ......................................................................................................... 193.6.3 Technical Data / Mower CRI ........................................................................................................ 194 Safety ..................................................................................................................................................... 204.1 Introduction ...................................................................................................................................... 204.2 Identification of the hazard warnings ............................................................................................... 204.2.1 Re-Ordering the Adhesive Safety and Information Labels .......................................................... 214.2.2 Affixing the Adhesive Safety and Information Labels .................................................................. 214.2.3 Contact ......................................................................................................................................... 214.3 Position of the Adhesive Safety Stickers on the Machine ............................................................... 224.3.1 Basic machine „front -/ rear view“ ................................................................................................ 224.3.2 Basic machine „left and right side hand of machine” ................................................................... 244.3.3 Lateral mowing unit left / right ...................................................................................................... 264.3.4 Front mowing unit ........................................................................................................................ 284.4 Position of the General Information Labels on the Machine ............................................................ 304.4.1 Basic machine „front -/ rear view“ ................................................................................................ 304.4.2 Basic machine „left and right side hand of machine” ................................................................... 324.4.3 Lateral mowing unit left / right ...................................................................................................... 344.4.4 Front mowing unit ........................................................................................................................ 364.5 Identifying Symbols in the Operating Instructions ........................................................................... 384.6 Identification of the hazard warnings ............................................................................................... 384.6.1 Personnel Qualification and Training Fehler! Textmarke nicht definiert. ..................................... 394.6.2 Dangers in Case of Non-compliance with the Safety Instructions ............................................... 394.6.3 Safety-conscious work practices ................................................................................................. 394.7 Safety Instructions and Accident Prevention Regulations ............................................................... 404.8 Self-propelled working machine ...................................................................................................... 414.9 Autopilot ........................................................................................................................................... 424.10 Implements ...................................................................................................................................... 434.11 Hydraulic system ............................................................................................................................. 432
Table of Contents4.12 Battery .............................................................................................................................................. 444.13 Cooling system ................................................................................................................................ 444.14 Tyres ................................................................................................................................................ 444.15 Emergency exit ................................................................................................................................ 444.16 Working in the vicinity of power transmission lines ......................................................................... 454.17 Fire preventions ............................................................................................................................... 454.18 Maintenance .................................................................................................................................... 464.19 Telephone and radio sets ................................................................................................................ 464.19.1 Wheel chocks........................................................................................................................... 464.19.2 Main battery switch .................................................................................................................. 475 Cabin ...................................................................................................................................................... 495.1 Ladder to driver's cabin ................................................................................................................... 495.2 Opening the cabin door ................................................................................................................... 505.3 Operators controls ........................................................................................................................... 515.3.1 Overview ...................................................................................................................................... 515.4 Air comfort seat ................................................................................................................................ 525.4.1 Setting the left armrest ................................................................................................................. 545.4.2 Right armrest ............................................................................................................................... 545.4.3 Storage compartment for first-aid kit/operating instructions ........................................................ 555.4.4 Passenger seat ............................................................................................................................ 565.4.5 Emergency exit ............................................................................................................................ 575.4.6 Diagnosis socket – motor ............................................................................................................ 585.5 Steering column and foot pedals ..................................................................................................... 595.5.1 Steering column adjustment ........................................................................................................ 605.5.2 Horn ............................................................................................................................................. 615.5.3 Indicator switch ............................................................................................................................ 615.5.4 Full beam ..................................................................................................................................... 625.5.5 Headlamp flasher ......................................................................................................................... 625.5.6 Using the operating brake ............................................................................................................ 635.6 Switch group roof panel ................................................................................................................... 645.7 Lighting ............................................................................................................................................ 655.7.1 Overview ...................................................................................................................................... 655.7.2 Indicator, hazard warning flasher and brake light ........................................................................ 665.7.2.1 Switching on the indicator .................................................................................................... 665.7.2.2 Brake light ............................................................................................................................ 665.7.2.3 Switching on the hazard warning flasher ............................................................................. 665.7.3 Side light/dipped beam ................................................................................................................ 675.7.3.1 Switching on the parking light .............................................................................................. 675.7.3.2 Switching on the dipped beam............................................................................................. 675.7.4 Working floodlights ...................................................................................................................... 683
Table of Contents5.7.4.1 Working floodlights "down the side and at the right/left mowing units" ............................... 695.7.4.2 Working floodlights Cab ....................................................................................................... 695.7.4.3 Working floodlight Bottom front............................................................................................ 705.7.4.4 Working floodlight rear ......................................................................................................... 705.7.5 Allround lights (optional) .............................................................................................................. 715.7.6 Interior lighting ............................................................................................................................. 725.7.7 Spotlight ....................................................................................................................................... 735.8 Outside mirrors ................................................................................................................................ 745.8.1 Left outside mirror ........................................................................................................................ 745.8.2 Right outside mirror and anti-collision mirror ............................................................................... 755.8.2.1 Setting the right outside mirror ............................................................................................. 755.8.2.2 Setting the anti-collision mirror ............................................................................................ 755.9 Inside mirror ..................................................................................................................................... 755.10 Sun blind .......................................................................................................................................... 765.11 Windshield wipers ............................................................................................................................ 765.12 Washer system – windshield ........................................................................................................... 775.13 Switch panel .................................................................................................................................... 785.14 Panel switches and pilot lamps........................................................................................................ 795.14.1 Actuating release switches ...................................................................................................... 805.14.2 Release switch – road/field ...................................................................................................... 815.14.3 Autopilot release switch / - optional ......................................................................................... 825.14.4 Release switch - holding brake ................................................................................................ 835.14.5 Release switch travelling gear ................................................................................................. 845.14.6 Axle separation key ................................................................................................................. 855.14.7 Engine failure pilot lamp .......................................................................................................... 865.14.8 Charge indicator lamp .............................................................................................................. 865.14.9 Ignition lock .............................................................................................................................. 875.14.10 Cigarette lighter / 12-V socket ................................................................................................. 885.14.11 Diagnostics socket / <strong>US</strong>B connection ...................................................................................... 895.15 Multi-function lever ........................................................................................................................... 905.15.1 Multi-function lever (continued)................................................................................................ 925.15.1.1 Driving .............................................................................................................................. 925.16 Klimatronik / heating ........................................................................................................................ 935.16.1 Control and display elements .................................................................................................. 935.16.2 Operation ................................................................................................................................. 955.16.3 Switching on the System ......................................................................................................... 955.16.4 Setting the Desired Cab Temperature ..................................................................................... 955.16.5 Switch air conditioning On / Off ............................................................................................... 965.16.6 Switch REHEAT mode On / Off ............................................................................................... 975.16.7 Manual setting of evaporator fan speed .................................................................................. 984
Table of Contents5.16.8 Switching the Temperature Display to ° Fahrenheit ................................................................ 995.16.9 Showing Faults in the Display .................................................................................................. 995.17 Adjustable air jets .......................................................................................................................... 1015.18 Radio .............................................................................................................................................. 1<strong>02</strong>6 Info centre "EasyTouch" ................................................................................................................... 1046.1.1 Overview .................................................................................................................................... 1046.2 Information section ........................................................................................................................ 1066.2.1 Status line (I) .............................................................................................................................. 1076.2.2 Motor data (II) information section ............................................................................................. 1086.2.3 Information section of the travelling gear data (III) .................................................................... 1096.2.4 Information section of settings (IV and V) .................................................................................. 1106.2.5 Drive data information section (VI) ............................................................................................ 1106.3 Quick Access Keys in the Basic Screen ........................................................................................ 1116.3.1 Quick access "Reverse ventilation" ........................................................................................... 1116.3.2 Quick access "Hydraulically adjustable cutting height" (optional) ............................................. 1126.3.3 Quick access "Hydraulically adjustable lateral spring compensation" (ground pressure) (optional)1146.3.4 Quick access "Customer Data Counter" .................................................................................... 1166.3.5 Changing a customer record (1) or creating a new one ............................................................ 1176.3.5.1 Switching the counter on or off .......................................................................................... 1186.3.5.2 Delete customer counter .................................................................................................... 1196.3.6 Quick access "Hydraulic axle suspension" ................................................................................ 1206.3.6.1 From the "Road travel" basic screen ................................................................................. 1206.3.6.2 From the "Field mode" basic screen .................................................................................. 1216.3.7 Quick access "Machine settings" ............................................................................................... 1226.3.8 Menu Level ................................................................................................................................ <strong>123</strong>6.3.9 Short overview ........................................................................................................................... <strong>123</strong>6.3.10 Bringing up a Menu Level ...................................................................................................... 1246.4 Main Menu 1 "Settings" ................................................................................................................. 1256.5 Menu 1-1 "Parameters" ................................................................................................................. 1266.5.1 Entering parameters .................................................................................................................. 1276.6 Menu 1-2 "Machine setting" ........................................................................................................... 1286.6.1 Menu 1-3 "Units" ........................................................................................................................ 1336.6.2 Menu 1-4 "Language" ................................................................................................................ 1346.6.3 Menu 1-5 "Display" .................................................................................................................... 1356.6.4 Menu 1-5-1 "Contrast" ............................................................................................................... 1366.6.5 Menu 1-5-2 Beeper .................................................................................................................... 1376.6.6 Beeper limited by time ............................................................................................................... 1386.6.7 Menu 1-5-4 Direction of Rotation ............................................................................................... 1396.6.8 Menu 1-6 Date/time ................................................................................................................... 1405
Table of Contents6.7 Main Menu 2 Counters .................................................................................................................. 1416.7.1 Machine Data Counter ............................................................................................................... 1416.7.1.1 Deleting the Machine Data Counters (Sets 1 to 3) ........................................................... 1426.7.2 Switching to Customer DataCounters ...................................................................................... 1426.8 Main Menu 3 Maintenance ............................................................................................................ 1436.8.1 Menu 3-1 "Calibration of cutting height" .................................................................................... 1446.8.2 Menu 3-4 „Manual mode“ .......................................................................................................... 1476.8.3 Status display of general sensors (2) ........................................................................................ 1496.9 Main Menu 4 Service ..................................................................................................................... <strong>150</strong>6.9.1 Menu 4-1 Diagnostics ................................................................................................................ 1516.9.2 Display of Release Conditions Not Met for Diagnostics ............................................................ 1526.9.3 Display of possible faults for diagnostics ................................................................................... 1536.9.4 Menu 4-1-1 Diagnostics of axle suspension .............................................................................. 1546.9.5 Menu 4-1-3 Diagnostics of spring compensation ...................................................................... 1576.9.6 Menu 4-1-4 Diagnostics of cutting height .................................................................................. 1636.9.7 Menu 4-1-5 Diagnostics of hydraulic auger hood ...................................................................... 1716.9.8 Menu 4-1-6 Sideshift diagnostics............................................................................................... 1776.9.9 Menu 4-1-7 Diagnostics front guard flaps .................................................................................. 1826.9.10 Menu 4-1-10 Diagnostics Work ............................................................................................. 1876.9.11 Menu 4-1-11 CAN bus ........................................................................................................... 1986.9.12 Menu 4-1-12 Travelling gear .................................................................................................. 1996.9.13 Menu 4-1-13 Electronics ........................................................................................................ 2106.9.14 Menu 4-1-14 Diesel engine .................................................................................................... 2116.9.15 Menu 4-1-15 Joystick ............................................................................................................. 2136.9.16 Menu 4-1-16 Control unit console ......................................................................................... 2156.9.17 Menu 4-1-17 Display .............................................................................................................. 2176.10 Menu 4-2 Error list ......................................................................................................................... 2186.11 Menu 4-3 "Service level" ................................................................................................................ 2236.12 Menu 4-4 Information ..................................................................................................................... 2246.12.1 Menu 4-4-1 Joystick ............................................................................................................... 2256.12.2 Menu 4-4-2 Software ............................................................................................................. 2266.12.3 Menu 4-4-3 Machine .............................................................................................................. 2286.13 Menu 5 Basic Screen ..................................................................................................................... 2296.13.1 Error Messages...................................................................................................................... 2306.13.2 Information message ............................................................................................................. 2317 Commissioning ................................................................................................................................... 2337.1 Fitting the guard cloths .................................................................................................................. 2337.2 Folding Down Lateral Mowing Units .............................................................................................. 2337.2.1 Description of Installation ........................................................................................................... 2357.2.2 Guard cloths (CRI with upper roller drive) ................................................................................. 2366
Table of Contents7.2.3 Adjusting the Warning Panel ..................................................................................................... 2377.3 Installation of Cutter Blades ........................................................................................................... 2378 Start-up ................................................................................................................................................ 2388.1 Check before Start-up .................................................................................................................... 2388.2 Daily checks ................................................................................................................................... 2388.2.1 On the Basic Machine ................................................................................................................ 2398.2.2 On the mowing units .................................................................................................................. 2399 Driving and Transport ........................................................................................................................ 2409.1 Transport / Road Travel ................................................................................................................. 2409.2 Preparation for transport/road travel .............................................................................................. 2419.2.1 Folding Up the Guards ............................................................................................................... 2419.2.2 Move the front mowing unit to central position (with sideshift option) ....................................... 2429.2.3 Check lock ................................................................................................................................. 2439.2.4 Disable the shut-off valve on the front outrigger ........................................................................ 2449.2.5 Release switch – road/field ........................................................................................................ 2449.2.6 Release switch travelling gear ................................................................................................... 2459.3 Starting the engine ......................................................................................................................... 2469.3.1 Killing the engine ....................................................................................................................... 2489.3.2 Starting with an Auxiliary Battery ............................................................................................... 2489.4 Starting to Drive ............................................................................................................................. 2489.4.1 Setting the acceleration behaviour ............................................................................................ 2499.4.2 General on Driving ..................................................................................................................... 2499.4.3 Preventing an overheating of the hydrostatic system ................................................................ 2509.4.4 Driving forwards ......................................................................................................................... 2519.4.5 Reversing ................................................................................................................................... 2529.5 Cruise control ................................................................................................................................. 2539.5.1 Storing the speed for the cruise control mode ........................................................................... 2539.5.2 Activating cruise control ............................................................................................................. 2549.5.3 Deactivating cruise control ......................................................................................................... 2549.6 Stopping ......................................................................................................................................... 2559.6.1 Stopping with the multi-function lever ........................................................................................ 2559.6.2 Stopping with Foot Brakes ......................................................................................................... 2569.7 Parking Brake ................................................................................................................................ 2579.8 Switch off the engine ..................................................................................................................... 2589.9 Switch off the machine ................................................................................................................... 2589.10 Towing ........................................................................................................................................... 2599.10.1 Releasing the holding brake manually ................................................................................... 25910 Operation – Mowing Units ................................................................................................................. 26010.1 Intended Use ................................................................................................................................. 26010.2 Operation of Mowing Units ............................................................................................................ 2617
Table of Contents10.3 Folding Down Lateral Mowing Units .............................................................................................. 26210.3.1 Lowering the Lateral Mowing Units from Transport Position to Headland Position .............. 26310.3.2 Lowering the Lateral Mowing Units from Headland Position to Working Position ................. 26310.3.3 Lower the front mowing unit into working position ................................................................. 26410.4 Headland Position .......................................................................................................................... 26510.5 Mowing Unit Drive .......................................................................................................................... 26610.5.1 Switching the Mowing Unit Drives On and Off ....................................................................... 26710.5.2 Switching the Left Mowing Unit Drive On/Off ........................................................................ 26710.5.3 Switching the Right Mowing Unit Drive On/Off ...................................................................... 26810.5.4 Switching the Front Mowing Unit Drive On/Off ...................................................................... 26910.5.5 Switching All Mowing Unit Drives On/Off ............................................................................... 27010.6 Folding Up Lateral Mowing Units ................................................................................................... 27110.6.1 Checking the Lock on the Lateral Mowing Units ................................................................... 27210.6.2 Lifting the Lateral Mowing Units from working Position to Headland Position ...................... 27210.6.3 Folding the Lateral Mowing Units from Headland Position to Transport Position ................. 27310.6.4 Check lock ............................................................................................................................. 27410.7 Raising the Front Mowing Unit to Transport Position .................................................................... 27410.8 Mowing ........................................................................................................................................... 27510.9 Game animal protection ................................................................................................................. 27610.9.1 Moving the guards into the working position ......................................................................... 27710.9.2 Semi-automatic mode ............................................................................................................ 27810.9.3 Mowing with Individual Mowing Units .................................................................................... 27810.9.4 Quick stop .............................................................................................................................. 27910.9.5 Quick change of direction of travel (quick reversing)............................................................. 27910.9.6 Switching Axle Separation On and Off .................................................................................. 28011 Adjusting the mowing units .............................................................................................................. 28111.1 Special Safety Instructions ............................................................................................................ 28111.2 Adjusting the cutting height............................................................................................................ 28211.2.1 Front mowing unit .................................................................................................................. 28211.2.2 Adjusting the Lifting Height .................................................................................................... 28311.2.2.1 Front mowing unit .......................................................................................................... 28311.2.3 Adjusting the cutting height .................................................................................................... 28411.2.3.1 Lateral Mowing Unit ....................................................................................................... 28411.3 Adjusting the Compensation Springs ............................................................................................ 28611.3.1 Front mowing unit .................................................................................................................. 28711.3.2 Lateral Mowing Unit ............................................................................................................... 28811.4 Adjusting the Tedder Speed .......................................................................................................... 28911.4.1 Lateral Mowing Unit ............................................................................................................... 28911.4.2 Front mowing unit (CV).......................................................................................................... 29011.5 Adjusting the conditioner plate ...................................................................................................... 2918
Table of Contents11.6 Adjusting the roller conditioner (optional extra/Big M CRI) ............................................................ 29211.6.1 Adjusting the roller distance ................................................................................................... 29211.6.2 Adjusting the roller pressure .................................................................................................. 29311.7 Setting of the Scraper on the Cross Conveyor (Optional) ............................................................. 29411.8 Adjusting the swath width .............................................................................................................. 29511.8.1 Front mowing unit .................................................................................................................. 29511.8.2 Lateral Mowing Unit ............................................................................................................... 29611.9 Adjusting the track control arm on the lateral mowing units .......................................................... 29711.10 Deflector Plates.......................................................................................................................... 29711.10.1 Front mowing unit .................................................................................................................. 29711.11 Deactivating the axle suspension .............................................................................................. 29812 Special Equipment – Mowing Units .................................................................................................. 29912.1 Converting the Tedder Deflector Plate to an Auger-Type Cross Conveyor .................................. 29912.1.1 Removing the tedder deflector plate ...................................................................................... 30012.1.2 Releasing the tension jacks ................................................................................................... 30012.1.3 Removing the tedder deflector plate ...................................................................................... 30112.1.4 Checking the Tines ................................................................................................................ 3<strong>02</strong>12.1.5 Removing the guard .............................................................................................................. 3<strong>02</strong>12.1.6 Installing the auger-type cross conveyor ............................................................................... 30312.1.7 Locking the tension jacks ....................................................................................................... 30412.2 Tensioning the V-belts ................................................................................................................... 30412.2.1 Installing the guard ................................................................................................................ 30512.2.2 Connecting the speed sensor ................................................................................................ 30512.2.3 Removing the floor plates ...................................................................................................... 30612.2.4 Relaying the Lubrication Lines ............................................................................................... 30812.2.5 Installation Instructions – Bulge Bags for Big M 400 with BSS ............................................. 30912.2.6 Switching on the auger monitoring mode .............................................................................. 31012.2.7 Converting an Auger-Type Cross Conveyor to a "Tedder deflector plate unit" ..................... 31212.3 Additional Equipment – Mulching Device ...................................................................................... 31312.4 Removing Mowing Units ................................................................................................................ 31412.4.1 Front mowing unit .................................................................................................................. 31412.4.2 Removing of the compensation springs ................................................................................ 31512.4.3 To remove the PTO shaft: ..................................................................................................... 31612.4.4 Removing the Weiste Triangle ............................................................................................... 31812.4.5 Attaching the Front Mowing Unit ............................................................................................ 32012.4.6 Removing the Side Mowing Unit ............................................................................................ 32112.4.7 Attaching the Lateral Mowing Unit ......................................................................................... 32812.4.8 The remainder of the installation is in reverse order to the removal procedure. ................... 33013 Maintenance – Engine ........................................................................................................................ 33113.1 Maintenance Table – Engine ......................................................................................................... 3329
Table of Contents13.2 Contamination in the engine compartment .................................................................................... 33313.3 Cleaning the Engine Compartment with Compressed Air ............................................................. 33313.4 Engine oil level ............................................................................................................................... 33413.4.1 Engine oil and filter replacement ........................................................................................... 33413.5 Fuel filter/water separator .............................................................................................................. 33513.5.1 Replacing the fuel filter .......................................................................................................... 33513.5.2 Empty the water separator ..................................................................................................... 33513.6 Replacing the fuel filter element .................................................................................................... 33613.7 Fuel ................................................................................................................................................ 33713.8 Tanks ............................................................................................................................................. 33813.9 Venting the fuel system ................................................................................................................. 33913.10 Engine coolant ........................................................................................................................... 33913.11 Engine coolant - checks and controls ........................................................................................ 34013.12 Air filter ....................................................................................................................................... 34113.12.1 Safety cartridge ...................................................................................................................... 34114 Maintenance – Mowing Units ............................................................................................................ 34314.1 Special Safety Instructions ............................................................................................................ 34314.1.1 Test run .................................................................................................................................. 34414.2 Spare Parts .................................................................................................................................... 34414.3 Maintenance Table – Mowing Units .............................................................................................. 34514.4 Tool box ......................................................................................................................................... 34614.5 Tightening Torques ........................................................................................................................ 34614.6 Tightening Torques (Countersunk Screws) ................................................................................... 34714.6.1 Deviating Torque ................................................................................................................... 34714.7 Opening the Front Guard ............................................................................................................... 34814.8 Eliminating Blockages on the Cross Conveyor .............................................................................. 34914.9 Shear pins on the conditioner ........................................................................................................ 35014.10 Filling Quantities and Lubrication Designations for Gearboxes ................................................. 35114.10.1 Oil Level Check and Oil Change Intervals (Gearboxes)........................................................ 35114.11 Main gearbox ............................................................................................................................. 35214.11.1 Lateral Mowing Unit ............................................................................................................... 35214.12 Angular gearbox ........................................................................................................................ 35314.12.1 Front Mowing Unit (CV+CRI)................................................................................................. 35314.13 Input gearbox ............................................................................................................................. 35414.13.1 Front Mowing Unit (CV+CRI)................................................................................................. 35414.14 Speed gearbox........................................................................................................................... 35514.14.1 Front mowing unit (CV).......................................................................................................... 35514.15 Angular gearbox ........................................................................................................................ 35614.15.1 CRI ......................................................................................................................................... 35614.15.2 Bottom part ............................................................................................................................ 35610
Table of Contents14.16 Gearbox for Top Roller Drive ..................................................................................................... 35714.17 Oil level check and oil change on the cutter bar ........................................................................ 35814.17.1 Front mowing unit .................................................................................................................. 35814.17.2 Aligning the Cutter Bar ........................................................................................................... 35814.17.3 Checking the oil level ............................................................................................................. 35914.17.4 Oil change .............................................................................................................................. 36014.18 Oil level check and oil change on the cutter bar ........................................................................ 36114.18.1 Lateral Mowing Unit ............................................................................................................... 36114.18.2 Checking the oil level ............................................................................................................. 36214.18.3 Oil change .............................................................................................................................. 36314.19 Checking the Cutter Blades and Blade Holder .......................................................................... 36414.19.1 Cutter Blades ......................................................................................................................... 36414.19.2 Blade screw connection ......................................................................................................... 36514.19.3 Blade Quick-Fit Device .......................................................................................................... 36714.19.4 Checking the Material Thickness of the Retaining Bolts ....................................................... 36714.19.4.1 Checking the material thickness of the retaining bolts .................................................. 36814.19.5 Periodical Inspection of the Leaf Springs .............................................................................. 36914.19.6 Checking the Material Thickness of the Leaf Springs ........................................................... 36914.19.6.1 Checking the material thickness of the leaf springs ...................................................... 37014.19.7 Periodical Inspection of the Cutting Discs / Blade Drums ..................................................... 37114.19.8 Abrasion Limit ........................................................................................................................ 37214.20 Blade Changing on Cutting Discs .............................................................................................. 37314.20.1 Blade Screw Connection ....................................................................................................... 37414.20.2 Blade Quick-Fit Device .......................................................................................................... 37514.21 Replacing the linings .................................................................................................................. 37614.22 Rotary hub with shear protection ............................................................................................... 37814.22.1 After Shearing Off .................................................................................................................. 37914.22.2 Repairing the Sheared Off Bearing Unit ................................................................................ 38015 Maintenance – Basic Machine ........................................................................................................... 38115.1 Brakes ............................................................................................................................................ 38115.2 Hydraulic system ........................................................................................................................... 38215.3 Maintenance - hydraulic system .................................................................................................... 38515.3.1 System Description Operating and Brake Hydraulics............................................................ 38515.3.2 Pumps .................................................................................................................................... 38515.3.3 Main block .............................................................................................................................. 38615.3.4 Over-pressure valves ............................................................................................................. 38715.3.5 Adjustable Throttles ............................................................................................................... 38715.4 Hydraulic oil ................................................................................................................................... 38815.4.1 List of Mineral Oils for the Hydraulic System ......................................................................... 388HEPG VG 46 ....................................................................................................................................... 38811
Table of Contents15.5 Hydraulic oil level ........................................................................................................................... 38915.6 Replacing the hydraulic oil filter ..................................................................................................... 39015.7 Transfer gearbox ........................................................................................................................... 39115.8 Air intake and distribution .............................................................................................................. 39215.8.1 Fresh air fan ........................................................................................................................... 39315.8.2 Circulation filter ...................................................................................................................... 39415.9 Windscreen washer system ........................................................................................................... 39515.10 Position of Sensors (Right-Hand Side of the Machine) ............................................................. 39615.11 Position of sensors (left side of machine) .................................................................................. 39815.11.1 Adjusting the Sensors ............................................................................................................ 39915.11.1.1 Namur sensor d = 12 mm .............................................................................................. 39915.12 Maintenance - air conditioning system and heating .................................................................. 40015.13 Special Safety Instructions ........................................................................................................ 40015.13.1 Air conditioning components .................................................................................................. 40015.13.2 Refrigerant data sheet R 134a (excerpt) ............................................................................... 40115.13.3 Technical data........................................................................................................................ 40115.13.4 Refrigerant ............................................................................................................................. 4<strong>02</strong>15.13.5 Manometric switch ................................................................................................................. 4<strong>02</strong>15.13.6 Collector/drier......................................................................................................................... 40315.13.7 Checking refrigerant condition and level ............................................................................... 40415.14 Checking the capacitor .............................................................................................................. 40515.15 Belt drives .................................................................................................................................. 40615.15.1 Fan wheel drive...................................................................................................................... 40715.15.2 Outrigger arms ....................................................................................................................... 40815.15.3 Drive of mowing unit .............................................................................................................. 41015.15.4 Cross Conveyor Drive ............................................................................................................ 41115.16 Tyres .......................................................................................................................................... 41215.16.1 Checking and maintaining tyres ............................................................................................. 41315.16.2 Wheel mounting ..................................................................................................................... 41415.16.3 Retightening the Attachment Bolts on the Outrigger ............................................................. 41416 Maintenance – lubrication chart ....................................................................................................... 41516.1 Lubricating the PTO shaft .............................................................................................................. 41516.2 Lubricating the double joints on the main gearbox ........................................................................ 41516.3 Lubrication Chart ........................................................................................................................... 41617 Maintenance – electrical system ....................................................................................................... 41717.1 Electrical equipment - technical data ............................................................................................. 41717.2 Battery ............................................................................................................................................ 41817.2.1 Main battery switch ................................................................................................................ 41917.2.2 Charging Batteries ................................................................................................................. 42017.2.3 Quick charge .......................................................................................................................... 42012
Pos: 2 /BA/-----Seitenumbr uch------ @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.doc @ 4165Table of Contents17.2.4 Cleaning the battery ............................................................................................................... 42017.2.5 Check battery ......................................................................................................................... 42117.2.6 Check acid level ..................................................................................................................... 42117.2.7 Measuring Acid Density ......................................................................................................... 42217.3 Fitting the batteries and connecting the poles correctly ................................................................ 42317.4 Three-phase generator .................................................................................................................. 42417.5 Starter ............................................................................................................................................ 42517.6 Control units and fuses .................................................................................................................. 42617.6.1 MR2 engine control ................................................................................................................ 42717.6.2 Cab relay PCB ....................................................................................................................... 42717.6.3 Console Circuit Board ............................................................................................................ 42817.6.4 Cab Circuit Board .................................................................................................................. 42917.6.5 Krone Machine Controller circuit board (KMC1).................................................................... 43018 Maintenance – Central Lubrication................................................................................................... 43118.1 Lubricant fill .................................................................................................................................... 43118.2 Fill coupling .................................................................................................................................... 43118.3 Lubricant ........................................................................................................................................ 43318.3.1 Grease types, NLGIClass 2 ................................................................................................... 43418.4 Checking the fill level ..................................................................................................................... 43518.5 Changing the times of the lubricating interval ................................................................................ 43618.6 Troubleshooting ............................................................................................................................. 43719 Placing in Storage .............................................................................................................................. 43819.1 At the End of the Harvest Season ................................................................................................. 43819.2 Engine area.................................................................................................................................... 43819.3 Before the Start of the New Season .............................................................................................. 43919.4 Friction clutch –ByPy ..................................................................................................................... 44019.4.1 Venting the Friction Clutch on the PTO Shaft ........................................................................ 44<strong>02</strong>0 Appendix ............................................................................................................................................. 44120.1 Error Messages ............................................................................................................................. 44113
Pos: 3.1 /Ü berschriften/Ü berschriften 1/U-Z/Vor wort @ 0\mod_1195627720<strong>123</strong>_78.doc @ 982Pos: 3.2 /BA/Vor wort/Selbstfahr er/Verehrter Kunde BiG M 400 @ 0\mod_1195626522451_78.doc @ 925Pos: 3.3 /BA/Vor wort/Selbstfahr er/Wei ter en Verlauf Big M @ 0\mod_1195627075279_78.doc @ 963Pos: 3.4 /BA/Vor wort/Beachten Sie für Maschi ne @ 0\mod_1195626904076_78.doc @ 944Pos: 4 /BA/-----Seitenumbr uch------ @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.doc @ 4165Foreword2 ForewordDear CustomerOn buying the Self-Propelled High-Performance Mower-Conditioner Big M 400 you haveselected a quality product from KRONE.We are grateful for the confidence you have invested in us in buying this machine.It is important to read the operating instructions very carefully before you start operating themachine so that the Self-Propelled High-Performance Mower-Conditioner Big M 400 may beused to its maximum capacity.The contents of this manual are laid out in such a way that you should be able to perform anytask by following the instructions step by step. It contains extensive notes and information aboutmaintenance, how to use the machine safely, secure working methods, special precautionarymeasures and available accessories. It is essential, important and useful for the operationalsafety, reliability and durability of the Self-Propelled High-Performance Mower-Conditioner BigM 400, that these notes and information are adhered to.NoteThroughout the remainder of these operating instructions, the "Self-Propelled HighPerformance Mowing Conditioner "Big M" will also be referred to as the "machine / vehicle".Please note:The operating instructions are part of your machine.Only operate this machine after you have been trained to do so and according to theseinstructions.It is essential to observe the safety instructions!It is also necessary to observe the relevant accident prevention regulations and other generallyrecognised regulations concerning safety, occupational health and road traffic.All information, illustrations and technical data in these operating instructions correspond to thelatest state at the time of publication.We reserve the right to make design changes at any time and without notification of reasons.Should you for any reason not be able to use these operating instructions either wholly orpartially, you can receive a replacement set of operating instructions for your machine byquoting the number supplied overleaf.We hope that you will be satisfied with your KRONE machine.Maschinenfabrik Bernard Krone GmbHSpelle14
Pos: 5.1 /BA/Ei nleitung/Ei nleitung @ 0\mod_1195562498677_78.doc @ 416Pos: 5.2 /BA/Ei nleitung/Gültigkeit/Selbsfahrer/BiG M 400 @ 0\mod_11955627<strong>02</strong>177_78.doc @ 435Pos: 5.3 /Ü berschriften/Ü berschriften 2/K- O/Kennzeichnung @ 0\mod_1195564622099_78.doc @ 496Pos: 5.4 /BA/Ei nleitung/Kennzeichnung/Big M 400 @ 0\mod_1195563094865_78.doc @ 476Pos: 5.5 /BA/-----Seitenumbr uch------ @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.doc @ 4165Introduction3 IntroductionThese operating instructions contain fundamental instructions. These must be observed inoperation and maintenance. For this reason, these operating instructions must be read byoperating personnel before commissioning and use, and must be available for easy reference.Follow both the general safety instructions contained in the section on safety and the specificsafety instructions contained in the other sections.3.1 ValidityThe Operating Instructions apply to all Self-Propelled High Performance Mowing ConditionersBig M 400.3.2 Identification Plate1BM 400 <strong>02</strong>13Fig. 1The machine data are located on a nameplate (1). It is located on the lower right side of themachine on the front of the frame.15
Pos: 5.6 /BA/Ei nleitung/Angaben für Anfrage und Bestell ungen_Fahrzeugident-Nr. @ 0\mod_1195565119708_78.doc @ 515Pos: 5.7.1 /Ü berschriften/Ü berschriften 2/A- E/Bestimmungsgemäß er Gebrauch @ 0\mod_1196401545090_78.doc @ 7728Pos: 5.7.2 /BA/Ei nleitung/Besti mmungsgemäß er Gebr auch/Selbstfahr er/Besti mmungsgemäß er Gebrauch Big M 400 @ 0\mod_1195565634240_78.doc @ 536Pos: 5.7.3 /BA/Ei nleitung/Besti mmungsgemäß er Gebr auch/Nicht bestimmungs gemäss @ 0\mod_1196401324340_78.doc @ 7690Pos: 5.8 /BA/-----Seitenumbr uch------ @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.doc @ 4165Introduction3.3 Information Required for Questions and OrdersTypeYear of manufactureVehicle ID numberNoteThe entire identification plate represents a legal document and should not be altered orrendered illegible!When asking questions concerning the machine or ordering spare parts, be sure to provide typedesignation, vehicle ID number and the year of manufacture : To ensure that these data arealways available, we recommend that you enter them in the fields above.NoteAuthentic KRONE spare parts and accessories authorised by the manufacturer help to ensuresafety. The use of spare parts, accessories and other devices which are not manufactured,tested or approved by KRONE will result in the revoking of the liability for damages resultingthereof.3.4 Intended UseThe Big M II self-propelled high-performance mower-conditioner is a carrier vehicle for threedisc mowing units with a mowing conditioner. It is used to cut agricultural stalk and leaf crop.Three individual mowing units allow the working width to be adapted. Integrated mowerconditionersaccelerate the drying process of the mowed crop.The self-propelled high performance mowing conditioner is intended exclusively for theconventional use in agricultural or similar work (intended use).Any use of the machine for other purposes is deemed not to be in accordance with intendeduse. The manufacturer shall not be liable for any resulting damage; the user alone shall bearthe risk.Operation in accordance with intended use also includes observing the operating, maintenanceand service instructions specified by the manufacturer.Unauthorised modifications to the machine may affect the properties of the machine or disruptproper operation. For this reason, unauthorised modifications shall exclude any liability of themanufacturer for consequential damage.16
Pos: 5.9 /Ü berschriften/Ü berschriften 2/K- O/M aschinenübersicht @ 0\mod_1195565731130_78.doc @ 555Pos: 5.10 /BA/Einl eitung/M aschinenübersicht/BiG M 400 @ 0\mod_1195565858365_78.doc @ 575Pos: 5.11 /BA/-----Seitenumbruch------ @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.doc @ 4165Introduction3.5 Machine overview111098712135 623 41BM 400 <strong>02</strong>10Fig. 21 Lateral mowing unit right2 Right outrigger3 Lifting gear4 Front mowing unit5 Lateral mowing unit left6 Outrigger arm left7 Cabin8 Operating panel9 Engine10 Combination radiator11 Work hydraulics valves12 Main battery switch13 Shut-off valve for front outrigger17
Pos: 5.12 /BA/Einl eitung/T echnische D aten @ 0\mod_1195566374865_78.doc @ 594Pos: 5.13 /Betri ebsanleitung/Ei nleitung/Technische D aten/Sel bstfahrer/Big M 400/Big M 400 F ahrzeug/M ähwer ke @ 0\mod_1195566568365_78.doc @ 616Introduction3.6 Technical dataAll information, illustrations and technical data in these operating instructions correspond to thelatest state at the time of publication. We reserve the right to make design changes at any timeand without notification of reasons.3.6.1 Technical Data / VehiclePower {KW/PS} 295/400Transport width/length/height {mm} 3<strong>000</strong> / 8180 / 4<strong>000</strong>Weight {approx. kg.} 14<strong>000</strong>Weight distributionRunning gearSteeringTyres/air pressureTightening torque for wheelnutsHydrostatic travelling gearDrive pumpNm 630Level ILevel IIabout 9<strong>000</strong> front / 5600 rear4 wheelsDirect drive provided by radial pistonenginesRear axle steeringfront 750/65 R26 – 1.8 bar (MEGA X BIB)rear 580/70 R26 - 1.2 bar (MEGA X BIB)front 750/60 R30 - 1,0 bar (CARGO XBIB)rear 600/60 R30 - 1,0 bar (CARGO XBIB)0 to 19 km/h continuous (all-wheel drive)0 to 40 km/h continuous (all-wheel drive)Connectable axle separation in level 1max. delivery capacity 425 l/min; max.pressure 430 barFilling Quantities Filling quantities {I} Filtered oilsBrand nameBio-degradablelubricantsBrand nameDiesel tank approx. 700 see the "Engine"sectionEngine oil approx. 25.4 see the "Engine"sectionHydraulic oil approx. 80 HLP 46 HE 46 *)Coolant approx. - see the "Engine"sectionTransfer gearbox approx. 6.0 gearbox oil syntheticDIN 5<strong>150</strong>2 -PGLPISO VG 220*) Caution: Do not mix with other oils.Consult customer service before using other oils.18
Pos: 6 /BA/-----Seitenumbr uch------ @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.doc @ 4165Introduction3.6.2 Technical Data / Mower CVWorking width total/individual {mm}9720/3140 front/3520 sideTransport width {mm}3<strong>000</strong> mowerNumber of cutting discs4/side mowing units - 5 front mowing unitsNumber of blade drums4/side mowing units - 2 front mowing unitsConditioner systemV-shaped prongSpeed of the conditioner [rpm] 700 / 1<strong>000</strong>3.6.3 Technical Data / Mower CRIWorking width total/individual {mm} 9<strong>000</strong> / 3140Transport width {mm}3<strong>000</strong> mowerNumber of cutting discs5 / mowerNumber of blade drums2 / mowerConditioner systemrollersSpeed of the conditioner [rpm] 76019
Pos: 7.1 /Ü berschriften/Ü berschriften 1/P-T /Sicher hei t @ 0\mod_1195566748646_78.doc @ 635Pos: 7.2 /BA/Sicher heit/Sel bstfahrer/Sicherheit Ei nführ ung Big M 400 @ 0\mod_1195566889349_78.doc @ 654Pos: 7.3 /BA/Sicher heit/Beschädigte oder unl esbar e Aufkleber @ 0\mod_1195567214115_78.doc @ 674Pos: 7.4 /BA/Sicher heit/Kennzeichnung der Gefahrenhi nweise @ 28\mod_125<strong>02</strong>44370070_78.doc @ 274714Pos: 7.5 /BA/-----Seitenumbr uch------ @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.doc @ 4165Safety4 Safety4.1 IntroductionThe Big M 400 Self-Propelled High-Performance Mower-Conditioner is equipped with all thenecessary safety devices (protective devices). However, it is not possible to eliminate allpotential hazards on this machine as this would impair its full functional capability. Hazardwarnings are attached to the machine in the relevant areas to warn against any dangers. Thesafety instructions are provided in the form of so-called warning pictograms. Importantinformation on the position of these safety signs and what they mean is given below!Danger! - Danger zone of the machineEffect: Danger to life or serious injuries.• Immediately replace damaged or illegible adhesive labels.• Following repair work, always attach appropriate adhesive safety stickers to all thereplaced, modified or repaired components.• Never clean areas carrying an adhesive safety label using a high-pressure cleaner.• Familiarise yourself with the statement of the warning pictograms. The adjacent text andthe selected location on the machine provide information on the special danger spots onthe machine.4.2 Identification of the hazard warningsDanger!DANGER! - Type and source of the hazard!Effect: Danger to life or serious injuries.• Measures for hazard preventionWarning !WARNING! - Type and source of the hazard!Effect: Injuries, serious material damage.• Measures for hazard preventionCaution!CAUTION! - Type and source of the hazard!Effect: Property damage• Measures for risk prevention.20
Pos: 7.6 /BA/Sicher heit/N achbestellung/ Anbringung Aufkleber @ 0\mod_1195637337107_78.doc @ 1079Pos: 7.7 /Ü berschriften/Ü berschriften 3/A- E/Ansprechpartner @ 0\mod_1195569394286_78.doc @ 839Pos: 7.8 /Adr essen/Adresse Maschi nenfabri k KR ONE Spell e @ 0\mod_1195568531083_78.doc @ 734Pos: 7.9 /BA/-----Seitenumbr uch------ @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.doc @ 4165Safety4.2.1 Re-Ordering the Adhesive Safety and Information LabelsNoteEvery adhesive safety and information label is assigned an order number and can be ordereddirectly from the manufacturer or from an authorized dealer (see Section "Contact").4.2.2 Affixing the Adhesive Safety and Information LabelsNote - Affixing an adhesive labelEffect: Adhesion of the label• The surface for affixing the adhesive label must be clean and free of dirt, oil and grease.4.2.3 ContactMaschinenfabrik Bernard Krone GmbHHeinrich-Krone-Strasse 10D-48480 Spelle (Germany)Telephone: + 49 (0) 59 77/935-0 (Head Office)Fax.: + 49 (0) 59 77/935-339 (Head Office)Fax.: + 49 (0) 59 77/935-239 (Spare parts - domestic)Fax.: + 49 (0) 59 77/935-359 (Spare parts - export)Email: info.ldm@krone.de21
Pos: 7.10 /Überschriften/Überschriften 2/K-O/Lage der Sicherheitsaufkleber an der Maschi ne @ 0\mod_1195634967326_78.doc @ 1<strong>02</strong>0Pos: 7.11 /Überschriften/Überschriften 3/F-J/Gr undmaschine "Front-/ Heckansicht" @ 14\mod_<strong>123</strong>1774361478_78.doc @ 172491Pos: 7.12 /Betri ebsanleitung/Sicher hei t/Aufkl eber/Selbstfahr er/Big M 400/Sicher hei tsaufkl eber Grunmaschi ne Front Heck Big M 400_U SA @ 14\mod_<strong>123</strong>17749<strong>02</strong>400_78.doc @ 172560Safety4.3 Position of the Adhesive Safety Stickers on the Machine4.3.1 Basic machine „front -/ rear view“111078953413462BM 400 <strong>02</strong>36Fig. 3:22
Pos: 7.13 /BA/-----Seitenumbruch------ @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.doc @ 4165Safety1)2)3)WarningTo avoid Possible injuryClose valve whentransporting orservicing machineWarningTo avoid personal injury.Never put your hand into thedanger area as parts may bemoving.27 0<strong>02</strong> 062 <strong>02</strong>7 0<strong>02</strong> 057 <strong>02</strong>7 0<strong>02</strong> 062 0 (1x) Required27 0<strong>02</strong> 057 0 (2x) Required4)949 228 0 (1x) Required5)6)WarningTo avoid Possible injury.Do not stand between tractorand machine or near machinewhile changing from transportposition or to transport position.27 0<strong>02</strong> 060 0WARNINGAvoid severe injury to eyesand skin from sulfuric acid.Wear face mask, gloves andgoggles when servicing battery.942 538 -0942 538 0 (1x) Required27 0<strong>02</strong> 060 0 (2x) Required7)939 412 2 (1x) Required8)9)Before parking the machine,secure it with wheel chocksagainst unintended rolling.942 250 0(1x) RequiredBefore performing maintenanceand repair work, switch off theengine and remove the ignitionkey.942 289 0 (1x) RequiredTo avoid injury or death,do not contact electriclines.10)EMERGENCYEXIT942 537 0 (1x) Required11)27 0<strong>02</strong> 715 0Danger of falling!Do not walk on ladder step.27 0<strong>02</strong> 715 0 (1x) Required942 547 0 (1x) Required23
Pos: 7.14 /Überschriften/Überschriften 3/F-J/Gr undmaschine "linke und rechte M aschinenseite" @ 14\mod_<strong>123</strong>1774462634_78.doc @ 172514Pos: 7.15 /Betri ebsanleitung/Sicher hei t/Aufkl eber/Selbstfahr er/Big M 400/Sicher hei tsaufkl eber Grunmaschi ne rechte/li nks Sei te Big M 400_<strong>US</strong>A @ 14\mod_<strong>123</strong>1839209880_78.doc @ 172586Safety4.3.2 Basic machine „left and right side hand of machine”114312521099112610512Fig. 4:3 478BM 400 <strong>02</strong>3724
Pos: 7.16 /BA/-----Seitenumbruch------ @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.doc @ 4165942-545-0942-539-0Safety1)CAUTIONTo avoid serious injury or death- Read and understand operator´s manual before operating equipment.- Lower implement, stop tractor engine and remove key beforeleaving operator´s platform.- Keep all shields and guards in place.- Keep hands feet and clothing away from moving parts.- Keep riders off the machine.- Make certain every one is clear of the machine before startingtractor engine and starting.- Do not allow unqualified operator to run equipment.- Do not operate equipment in transport position.- Never lubricatem, adjust, unclog or service the equipment withtractor engine is running.- Wait for all movement to stop before opening shield or servicingmachine.- Never work underneath equipment without securely supporting.27 0<strong>02</strong> 054 <strong>02</strong>7 0<strong>02</strong> 054 0 (1x) Required4)WarningTo avoid Possible injury.Do not stay in the swivel areaof the outrigger arms!Keep your distance!27 003 <strong>02</strong>9 <strong>02</strong>7 003 <strong>02</strong>9 0 (2x) Required7)WARNINGAvoid bodily injuries from hydraulic oil and gasunder pressure.Before removi ng, disassembling or charging servicebrake accumulator or removing hydraulic lines ordisassembling electro-hydraulic valve stack:1. Switch ignition on without starting engine.2. Press the brake pedal down so far as it will goand release it several times.3. Check in the "Sensor Test" function whether thesystem is depressurised.3. Switch ignition off.Use only dry nitrogen for recharging accumulator.See your KRONE dealer.942 545 0 (1x) Required10)Warning2)CAUTION27 0<strong>02</strong> 059 <strong>02</strong>7 0<strong>02</strong> 059 0 (3x) Required5)When makingrepairs (weldingwork), alwaysSwitch off theengine.Disconnect themain batteryswitch andremove the twocable plugs from the PLD controlunit on the engine.942 405 0 (2x) Required8)WARNINGAvoid bodily injuries from hydraulic oil and gasunder pressure.Before removi ng, disassembling or charging parkingbrake accumulator or removing hydraulic lines ordisassembling electro-hydraulic valve stack:1. Switch ignition on without starting engine2. Activate the parking brake andrelease it again as so many times asnecessary until there is no more motionof the spring loaded parking brake zylinder.3. Switch ignition offUse only dry nitrogen for recharging accumulator.See your KRONE dealer.942 539 0 (1x) Required11)WARNING3)It is impermissible to carrypassengers on ladder steps orplatforms.27 0<strong>02</strong> 057 0 (2x) Required6)Burning hazard! Hot surface, keepsufficient distance.942 210 0 (1x) Required9)WarningHydraulic accumulators storeenergy.To AVOID explosion, depressurizethe system on the fluid side beforerepairing.Failure to comply could result indeath or serious injury.27 004 017 <strong>02</strong>7 004 017 0 (4x) Required12)To avoid Possible injury.Do not stand between tractorand machine or near machinewhile changing from transportposition or to transport position.27 0<strong>02</strong> 060 <strong>02</strong>7 0<strong>02</strong> 060 0 (2x) RequiredAvoid bodily injury fromrotating engine fan.Keep hands out of fandischarge area whenengine is running.942 546 -0942 546 0 (2x) RequiredBefore parking the machine,secure it with wheel chocksagainst unintended rolling.942 250 0(1x) Required25
Pos: 7.17 /Überschriften/Überschriften 3/P-T/Sei tenmähwer k links / rechts @ 14\mod_<strong>123</strong>1774559868_78.doc @ 172537Pos: 7.18 /Betri ebsanleitung/Sicher hei t/Aufkl eber/Selbstfahr er/Big M 400/Sicher hei tsaufkl eber Sei tenmähwer ke Big M 400_<strong>US</strong>A @ 14\mod_<strong>123</strong><strong>150</strong>1<strong>02</strong>4628_78.doc @ 172168Safety4.3.3 Lateral mowing unit left / right4<strong>123</strong>6452 154145346415314322 14BM 400 <strong>02</strong>35Fug. 5:26
Pos: 7.19 /BA/-----Seitenumbruch------ @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.doc @ 4165Safety1)2)DANGERThrown objects can cause serious injuryor death.- Stay clear of machine while in operation.- Keep discharge chute and shields in place.- Replace worn or damaged protective skirting.DANGERBlade can cause serious injuryor death.- Stay clear of machine while in operation.- Keep discharge chute and shields in place.27 0<strong>02</strong> 055 0 (6x) Required3)WarningTo avoid personal injury.Never put your hand into thedanger area as parts may bemoving.27 0<strong>02</strong> 056 0 (4x) Required4)WarningCutting blade continue to rotateafter PTO has been disengaged.To avoid personal injury.Look & listen for rotation to stop.Do not open cover until allcomponents have stopped.27 0<strong>02</strong> 057 <strong>02</strong>7 0<strong>02</strong> 057 0 (4x) Required5)WarningRotating augers can cut sheararms, hands and fingers.To avoid injury STAY AWAY fromrotating augers.Failure to comply could result indeath or serious injury.27 0<strong>02</strong> 058 <strong>02</strong>7 0<strong>02</strong> 058 0 (8x) Required6)WarningTo avoid Possible injury.Do not stand between tractorand machine or near machinewhile changing from transportposition or to transport position.27 004 016 <strong>02</strong>7 004 016 0 (4x) Required27 0<strong>02</strong> 060 <strong>02</strong>7 0<strong>02</strong> 060 0 (2x) Required27
Pos: 7.20 /Überschriften/Überschriften 3/F-J/Frontmähwer k @ 0\mod_1196675077463_78.doc @ 10648Pos: 7.21 /Betri ebsanleitung/Sicher hei t/Aufkl eber/Selbstfahr er/Big M 400/Sicher hei tsaufkl eber Fr ontmäher Big M 400_<strong>US</strong>A @ 14\mod_<strong>123</strong>1842798833_78.doc @ 172609Safety4.3.4 Front mowing unit63 56112424BM 400 <strong>02</strong>38Fig. 6:28
Pos: 7.22 /BA/-----Seitenumbruch------ @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.doc @ 4165Safety1)DANGERThrown objects can cause serious injuryor death.- Stay clear of machine while in operation.- Keep discharge chute and shields in place.- Replace worn or damaged protective skirting.2)DANGERBlade can cause serious injuryor death.- Stay clear of machine while in operation.- Keep discharge chute and shields in place.27 0<strong>02</strong> 055 0 (3x) Required3)27 0<strong>02</strong> 056 0 (3x) Required4)WarningCutting blade continue to rotateafter PTO has been disengaged.To avoid personal injury.Look & listen for rotation to stop.Do not open cover until allcomponents have stopped.27 0<strong>02</strong> 058 <strong>02</strong>7 0<strong>02</strong> 058 0 (3x) Required949 228 0 (1x) Required5)CAUTIONTo avoid serious injury or death- Read and understand operator´s manual before operating equipment.- Lower implement, stop tractor engine and remove key beforeleaving operator´s platform.- Keep all shields and guards in place.- Keep hands feet and clothing away from moving parts.- Keep riders off the machine.- Make certain every one is clear of the machine before startingtractor engine and starting.- Do not allow unqualified operator to run equipment.- Do not operate equipment in transport position.- Never lubricatem, adjust, unclog or service the equipment withtractor engine is running.- Wait for all movement to stop before opening shield or servicingmachine.- Never work underneath equipment without securely supporting.6)WarningTo avoid Possible injury.Do not stand between tractorand machine or near machinewhile changing from transportposition or to transport position.27 0<strong>02</strong> 054 <strong>02</strong>7 0<strong>02</strong> 054 0 (1x) Required27 0<strong>02</strong> 060 <strong>02</strong>7 0<strong>02</strong> 060 0 (2x) Required29
Pos: 7.23 /Überschriften/Überschriften 2/K-O/Lage der allgemeinen Hi nweisaufkleber an der Maschi ne @ 0\mod_1195635067920_78.doc @ 1039Pos: 7.24 /Überschriften/Überschriften 3/F-J/Gr undmaschine "Front-/ Heckansicht" @ 14\mod_<strong>123</strong>1774361478_78.doc @ 172491Pos: 7.25 /Betri ebsanleitung/Sicher hei t/Aufkl eber/Selbstfahr er/Big M 400/Hi nweisaufkl eber Grunmaschi ne Front H eck Big M 400_<strong>US</strong>A @ 14\mod_<strong>123</strong>1914292527_78.doc @ 172658Safety4.4 Position of the General Information Labels on the Machine4.4.1 Basic machine „front -/ rear view“651159211144 59324148710BM 400 <strong>02</strong>39Fig. 730
Pos: 7.26 /BA/-----Seitenumbruch------ @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.doc @ 416560942 408-0Safety1)2)3)27 0<strong>02</strong> 492 0 (2x)H= 68 beige4)27 0<strong>02</strong> 394 0 (2x) lg.=550 mm(beige)5)939 451 1 (2x)6)942 012-1942 012 1 (4x)7)924 320 0 (1x)lg.=600 mm (beige)924 323 0 (1x)lg.= 775 mm (green)27 0<strong>02</strong> 777 0 (1x)lg.=765 mm (beige)8)233 154 0 (1x)9)12V / 24 V12 Volt - Netz942 570 0 (1x)10)942 570 -0Bei Schweißarbeitenist der Hauptschalterauszuschalten unddie Stecker derMotorregelung PLDam Motorblockabzuziehen!942 408 0 (1x) (DE)942 412 0 (1x) (EN)942 535 0 (1x) (FR)11)924 685 0 (2x)924 634 0 (2x) side light942 574 -0942 574 0 (1x)31
Pos: 7.27 /Überschriften/Überschriften 3/F-J/Gr undmaschine "linke und rechte M aschinenseite" @ 14\mod_<strong>123</strong>1774462634_78.doc @ 172514Pos: 7.28 /Betri ebsanleitung/Sicher hei t/Aufkl eber/Selbstfahr er/Big M 400/Hi nweisaufkl eber Grunmaschi ne rechte/li nks Sei te Big M 400 U SA @ 37\mod_1265013838589_78.doc @ 342005Safety4.4.2 Basic machine „left and right side hand of machine”131<strong>02</strong>1312 10 1274113127105741210127648 97BM 400 <strong>02</strong>40_1Fig. 8:32
60Pos: 7.29 /BA/-----Seitenumbruch------ @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.doc @ 4165942 408-0Safety1)2)3)27 0<strong>02</strong> 393 0 (2x) lg.=1250 mm(green)4)27 0<strong>02</strong> 396 0 (2x)H= 140 anthracite5)27 0<strong>02</strong> 392 0 (2x)lg.=1600 mm beige6)12 Volt - NetzBei Schweißarbeitenist der Hauptschalterauszuschalten unddie Stecker derMotorregelung PLDam Motorblockabzuziehen!942 408 0 (3x) (DE)942 412 0 (3x) (EN)942 535 0 (3x) (FR)7)939 451 1 (6x)10)24 V942 571 -0942 571 0 (1x)8)Pat. 6, 644, 001942 481 (1x) (<strong>US</strong>)11)942 481-0942 573 0 (1x)9)942 134 0 (1x)12)1,2 bar942 573 -0924 634 0 (4x) side light942 378 0 (2x) 1,2 bar942 432 0 (2x) 1,8 bar942 183 0 (4x) 1,0 bar13)27 0<strong>02</strong> 475 0 (EN) (1x)Achtung!Caution!Beide Unterlegkeile nur ander Vorderachse verwenden.Use both wheel chocks forthe front axle only.N'utiliser les deux cales deAttenzione!freinage que pour l'essieu avantLet op!Beide wielwiggen uitsluitendonder de vooras gebruiken.942 287-0942 287 0 (1x)33
Pos: 7.30 /Überschriften/Überschriften 3/P-T/Sei tenmähwer k links / rechts @ 14\mod_<strong>123</strong>1774559868_78.doc @ 172537Pos: 7.31 /Betri ebsanleitung/Sicher hei t/Aufkl eber/Selbstfahr er/Big M 400/Hi nweisaufkl eber Sei tenmähwer ke Big M 400 @ 37\mod_1265014058917_78.doc @ 342030Safety4.4.3 Lateral mowing unit left / rightCV10CV34CRi53CRi32CRi39CV11CRi36CV310CRi371 8 2 12911 CV453CRi84 53CRi218 1CRi8CV63473105BM 400 <strong>02</strong>41_1Fig. 9:34
139-888 139-889Pos : 7.32 /BA/-----Seitenumbruch------ @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.doc @ 4165Safety1)2)3)27 0<strong>02</strong> 398 0 (2x) (CRi) /(4x) (CV)H= 50 anthracite27 0<strong>02</strong> 492 0 (2x) (CRi)H= 68 beige4)27 0<strong>02</strong> 394 0 (2x) (CRi) lg.=550mm (beige)27 0<strong>02</strong> 395 0 (2x) (CRi) /(4x) (CV)lg.=440 mm (beige)5)255 498 1 (2x) with blade screwconnection939 451 1 (16x) (CRI) / (8x CV)5)255 499 2 (2x) with quick bladerelease139 888-0 139 889-080939 567 1 (2x)Ø 17,5 mmmin. 14 mm255 498-18<strong>02</strong>55 499-26)7)8)27 004 081 <strong>02</strong>7 001 275 0 (2x)9)Pat. 6, 508, 050942 427-<strong>02</strong>7 001 274 0 (2x)10)+27 004 081 0 (4x)11)700942 427 0 (2x) (<strong>US</strong>)+255 497-<strong>02</strong>55 497 0 (2x)1<strong>000</strong>942 240 0 (2x)35
Pos : 7.33 /Übersc hriften/Übersc hriften 3/F-J/Frontmähwer k @ 0\mod_1196675077463_78.doc @ 10648Pos : 7.34 /Betri ebs anleitung/Sic her hei t/Aufkl eber/Selbs tfahr er/Big M 400/Hi nweisaufkl eber Fr ontmäher Big M 40 @ 14\mod_<strong>123</strong>1914146511_78.doc @ 172635Safety4.4.4 Front mowing unitCRi688734 5271CV7CV CV CV CV10 6 9 11CV12BM 400 <strong>02</strong>42Fig. 10:36
139-888 139-889Pos : 7.35 /BA/-----Seitenumbruch------ @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.doc @ 4165Safety1)2)3)27 0<strong>02</strong> 398 0 (1x)H= 50 anthracite4)27 0<strong>02</strong> 395 0 (3x) lg.=440 mm(beige)5)255 498 1 (2x) bei with bladescrew connection942 341 0 (1x)lg.= 893 mm beige5)255 499 2 (2x) with quick bladerelease139 888-0 139 889-080939 567 1 (1x)Ø 17,5 mmmin. 14 mm255 498-18<strong>02</strong>55 499-26)7)8)Bei Hangausgleich diesePosition verwenden.Take this position by usinglevelling mechanism.942 404 0939 451 1 (1x)9)+924 634 0 (2x) side light10)942 625 0 (1x) (CV)942 404 0 (2x)12)700+255 497-<strong>02</strong>55 497 0 (1x) (CV)11)942 626 0 (1x) (CV)1<strong>000</strong>942 240 0 (1x) (CV)37
Pos : 7.36 /BA/Sicher heit/Kennz eic hnung von Hi nweis en in der Betriebsanlei tung Ei nführ ungstext @ 0\mod_1195637804826_78.doc @ 1098Pos : 7.37 /BA/Sicher heit/Kennz eic hnung der G efahr enhi nweis e @ 28\mod_125<strong>02</strong>44370070_78.doc @ 274714Pos : 7.38 /BA/Sicher heit/Allgemeine F unktions hinweis e @ 0\mod_1196869714452_78.doc @ 15185Pos : 7.39 /BA/-----Seitenumbruch------ @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.doc @ 4165Safety4.5 Identifying Symbols in the Operating InstructionsThe safety instructions contained in this manual which could result in personal injury if notfollowed are identified by the general danger sign:4.6 Identification of the hazard warningsDanger!DANGER! - Type and source of the hazard!Effect: Danger to life or serious injuries.• Measures for hazard preventionWarning !WARNING! - Type and source of the hazard!Effect: Injuries, serious material damage.• Measures for hazard preventionCaution!CAUTION! - Type and source of the hazard!Effect: Property damage• Measures for risk prevention.General function instructions are indicated as follows:Note!Note - Type and source of the noteEffect: Economic advantage of the machine• Actions to be takenInstructions which are attached to the machine need to be followed and kept fully legible.38
Pos : 7.40.1 /BA/Sicherheit/Personalqualifi kati on und-Sc hul ung @ 0\mod_1195639383185_78.doc @ 1136Pos : 7.40.2 /BA/Sicherheit/G efahr en bei Nic htbeac htung der Sic her heitshi nweise @ 0\mod_1195639434013_78.doc @ 1155Pos : 7.40.3 /BA/Sicherheit/Sic her hei tsbewußtes Arbeiten @ 0\mod_1195639792576_78.doc @ 1174Pos : 7.40.4 /BA/-----Seitenumbruc h------ @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.doc @ 4165Safety4.6.1 Personnel Qualification and Training Fehler! Textmarke nicht definiert.The machine may be used, maintained and repaired only by persons who are familiar with itand have been instructed about the dangers connected with it. The operator must define areasof responsibility and monitoring of personnel. Should personnel lack the required knowledge,they must receive the required training and instruction. The operator must ensure that thecontents of these operating instructions have been fully understood by personnel.Repair work not described in these operating instructions should only be performed byauthorised service centres.4.6.2 Dangers in Case of Non-compliance with the Safety InstructionsFailure to follow the safety instructions could result in personal injury and environmentalhazards as well as damage to the machine. If the safety instructions are not respected, thiscould result in the forfeiture of any claims for damages.Failure to follow the safety instructions could result, for example, in the following hazards:• Endangering of persons due to not protected working areas.• Breakdown of important machine functions• Failure of prescribed methods for repair and maintenance• Endangering of persons due to mechanical and chemical effects• Damage to the environment due to leaking hydraulic oil4.6.3 Safety-conscious work practicesAlways observe the safety instructions set out in these operating instructions, all existingaccident prevention rules and any internal work, operating and safety rules issued by theoperator.The safety and accident prevention regulations of the responsible professional associations arebinding.The safety instructions provided by the vehicle manufacturer should also be observed.Observe the applicable traffic laws when using public roads.Be prepared for emergencies. Keep the fire extinguisher and first aid box within reach. Keepemergency numbers for doctors and fire brigade close to the telephone.39
Pos : 7.40.5 /BA/Sicherheit/Sic her hei ts- und U nfall ver hütungs-Vorschriften @ 0\mod_1195638684<strong>123</strong>_78.doc @ 1193Safety4.7 Safety Instructions and Accident Prevention Regulations1 Please follow all generally applicable safety and accident prevention regulations inaddition to the safety instructions contained in these operating instructions!2 The attached warning and safety signs provide important information for safe operation.Pay attention to these for your own safety!3 When using public roads, make sure to observe the applicable traffic regulations!4 Make sure that you are familiar with all equipment and controls as well as with theirfunctions before you begin working with the machine. It is too late to learn this when youare using the machine for work!5 The user should wear close fitting clothes. Avoid wearing loose or baggy clothing.6 Keep the machine clean to prevent the danger of fire!7 Before starting or moving the machine, make certain that nobody is in the vicinity of themachine! (Watch for children!) Make sure that you have a clear view!8 You may carry passengers during operation and transport on the working implement onlyif they use the passenger seat provided.9 Couple implements correctly! Attach and secure implements to specified devices only!10 When attaching or detaching implements, place the supporting devices in the correctpositions!11 Always attach ballast weights properly to the fixing points provided!12 Observe permitted axle loads, gross weight and transport dimensions!13 Check and install transport equipment, such as lighting, warning devices and protectiveequipment!14 Actuating mechanisms (ropes, chains, linkage, etc.) for remotely operated devices mustbe designed in such a way that, in whatever transport and working position, they cannottrigger accidental movements.15 Ensure that implements are in the prescribed condition for on-road travel and lock them inplace in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions!16 Never leave the driver's seat when the vehicle is moving!17 Always drive at the correct speed for the prevailing driving conditions! Avoid suddenchanges in direction when travelling uphill or downhill or across a gradient!18 Hitched implements and ballast weights affect the driving, steering and braking responseof the machine. Make sure that you are able to brake and steer the machine as required!19 Take into account the extension radius and/or inertia of an implement when turningcorners!20 Start up implements only when all protective devices have been attached and set in therequired position!21 Keep safety equipment in good condition. Replace missing or damaged parts.22 Keep clear of the working range of the machine at all times!23 Do not stand within the turning and swivel range of the implement!24 Never operate the hydraulic folding frames if anyone is inside the swivel range!40
Pos : 7.40.7 /BA/Sicherheit/Selbs tfahr er/Selbstfahrende Arbeits masc hine @ 0\mod_1195643474451_78.doc @ <strong>123</strong>2Pos : 7.40.8 /BA/-----Seitenumbruc h------ @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.doc @ 4165Safety25 Parts operated by external power (e.g. hydraulically) can cause crushing and shearinginjuries!26 Before leaving the mower, lower the front mower onto the ground, firmly step on theparking brake pedal. Switch off the engine and remove the ignition key!27 No one should stand between the mower and the implement unless the vehicle has beensecured against rolling by means of the parking brake and/or wheel chocks!Pos : 7.40.6 /BA/Sicherheit/Sic her hei ts- und U nfall ver hütungs-Vorschriften BiG M 400 @ 0\mod_1199698247366_78.doc @ 3322428. Caution: When the front mower P.T.O shaft has been removed, the drive shaft at the frontof the machine continues to turn if the engine is running.4.8 Self-propelled working machine1 The warning flashers and warning beacon must be used in accordance with local trafficlaws when using public highways.2 Switch on the lighting so that the vehicle can be easily recognised.3 Safety equipment.4 Always check the machine for driving and operational safety before use.5 Hold the hand-grip firmly when climbing in and out of the mower.6 It is not permitted to transport people on the platform.7 The road safety switch must be in road position during road travel to ensure that allhydraulic functions - except for the steering and brakes – are deactivated.8 Only drive the machine at the permitted speed.9 Implements must be in transport position and locked in accordance with themanufacturer's instructions for road travel.10 If the engine is running in an enclosed space, divert the exhaust fumes and ensuresufficient ventilation.11 When using starting fluid, avoid ignition sources and naked flames. Keep starting fluidclear of batteries and electrical cables.12 When driving around bends, always take the width of the front mower into account, andalso the fact that the rear of the mower will swing out. Ground conditions influence thehandling of the mower.13 Beware of holes, ditches and obstacles, since these could cause the mower to tip over.This is particularly important on slopes.41
Pos : 7.40.9 /BA/Sicherheit/Selbs tfahr er/Autopilot @ 0\mod_1195646567591_78.doc @ 1384Pos : 7.40.10 /BA/-----Seitenumbruc h------ @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.doc @ 4165Safety4.9 Autopilot1 Autopilot must only be used for its intended purpose. It must only be used in open fields,off public and semi-public roads, away from open areas frequented by people and faraway from any persons that could be endangered. They must only be used for theirintended purpose: - Automatic guide of the machine by GPS (Global Positioning System).2 Before placing the autopilot in service, check the functionality of safety elements that canbe checked and make a visual inspection of all the components.To do this, the user should proceed as follows:• Check switching off of the autopilot when the steering wheel is moved and the seatswitch engages• Check for proper operating condition - i.e. free of mechanical damages and leaks3 When autopilot is in operation, there must be on one within 50 m of the machine in anydirection.4 The operator is not permitted to leave the driver's cabin of the machine while autopilot isin operation.5 While the autopilot is in operation, the driver must regularly check the direction in whichthe machine is moving and its travel path to be able to take over manual control of themachine immediately if obstructions or interruptions come up in the vehicle's path.6 After autopilot has been in operation and before leaving the field, autopilot must alwaysbe switched off on the autopilot release switch on the console.7 Manipulating safety-related elements of the autopilot is prohibited, as is making changesto the hydraulic, electrical or electronic components.8 The autopilot should only be installed by an authorised service centre.42
Pos : 7.40.11 /BA/Sic herheit/Arbeitsger äte @ 0\mod_1195643623216_78.doc @ 1270Pos : 7.40.12 /BA/Sic herheit/H ydrauli kanl age M ähaufber eiter (BiG M400 / BiG M500) @ 38\mod_1265362557136_78.doc @ 348614Pos : 7.40.13 /BA/-----Seitenumbruc h------ @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.doc @ 4165Safety4.10 Implements1 Caution! The flywheel will continue to rotate for some time even after the drive has beendisengaged! Keep away from the implement during this time. Do not work on the machineuntil it has come to a standstill.2 Cleaning, lubricating and adjusting the implements must be carried out only when thedrive is switched off, the engine switched off and the ignition key removed!4.11 Hydraulic system1 The hydraulic system is pressurised!2 When connecting hydraulic cylinders and engines, make sure that the hydraulic hosesare connected correctly!3 When connecting the hydraulic hoses to the mower-conditioner hydraulics, take care thatthe hydraulic system is depressurised both on the tractor side and on the device side!4 When functions are connected hydraulically between the mower-conditioner and theaccessory equipment, connecting parts should be identified so that faulty operation isexcluded! If the connectors are interchanged, the functions will be reversed (e.g.raising/lowering) - Risk of accident!5 Check the hydraulic hose lines at regular intervals and replace them if damaged or worn!The new hoses must fulfil the technical requirements set by the manufacturer of theimplement!6 When searching for leaks, use suitable aids to avoid the risk of injury!7 Liquids escaping under high pressure (hydraulic oil) can penetrate the skin and causeserious injury! Seek medical help immediately should injuries occur! Danger of infection!8 Before working on the hydraulic system, depressurise the system and switch off theengine!43
Pos : 7.40.14 /BA/Sic herheit/Sel bstfahrer/Batterie @ 0\mod_1195646320763_78.doc @ 1308Pos : 7.40.15 /BA/Sic herheit/Sel bstfahrer/Kühls ystem @ 0\mod_1195646385154_78.doc @ 1327Pos : 7.40.16 /Ü berschriften/Ü berschriften 2/P-T/Rei fen @ 0\mod_1197357995667_78.doc @ 18075Pos : 7.40.17 /BA/Sic herheit/R eifen @ 0\mod_1195646435716_78.doc @ 1346Pos : 7.40.18 /BA/Sic herheit/Sel bstfahrer/N otaussti eg @ 0\mod_1195646495279_78.doc @ 1365Pos : 7.40.19 /BA/-----Seitenumbruc h------ @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.doc @ 4165Safety4.12 Battery1 Maintenance work on the batteries requires sufficient knowledge and the availability ofproper tools!2 Keep naked flames, burning matches and spark sources clear of the battery; Risk ofexplosion!3 Never check the charging level of the battery by connecting the two poles with a metalobject. Use an acid tester or voltmeter.4 Do not charge a frozen battery; Risk of explosion! Warm the battery to 16 °Cbeforehand.5 Battery acid can cause severe injuries by burning your skin and eyes. For this reason,wear suitable protective clothing.4.13 Cooling systemThe heated cooling system is pressurised – Risk of burns! - For this reason, only remove theradiator cap with the engine switched off and after the engine has been able to cool.4.14 Tyres4.15 Emergency exit1 When working on the tyres, make sure that the implement is safely lowered and securedagainst rolling (wheel chocks).2 Installing wheels and tyres requires adequate knowledge and suitable tools!3 Repair work on the tyres and wheels should be done by specially trained personnel usingappropriate installation tools only!4 Check tyre pressure regularly! Inflate the tyres to the recommended pressures!5 Check the wheel nuts periodically! Missing wheel nuts can result in a wheel falling off andthe machine tipping over.The right hand side window in the cabin is designed for being an emergency exit. In case of anemergency the cabin can be left over the emergency exit. To do this, the right hand side windowmust be manually unlocked before opening.44
Pos : 7.40.20 /BA/Sic herheit/Arbeiten im Bereic h von H ochspannungsl eitungen @ 11\mod_1223357468516_78.doc @ 145505Pos : 7.40.21 /BA/Sic herheit/Brandschutzmaß nahmen @ 0\mod_1195646926716_78.doc @ 1423Pos : 7.40.22 /BA/-----Seitenumbruc h------ @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.doc @ 4165Safety4.16 Working in the vicinity of power transmission lines1 Always take great care when working under or in the vicinity of power transmission lines.2 Ensure that when in operation or being transported, the machine cannot exceed a totalheight of approx. 4m.3 If there is any need to travel under overhead lines, the machine operator must requestinformation on the rated voltage and the minimum height of the overhead lines from theoverhead line operator.4 Always keep the safety distances according to the table.Rated voltagekVSafe distance from overhead linesmTo 1 1Above 1 to 110 2Above 101 to 220 3Above 220 to 380 44.17 Fire preventions1 Keep the machine clean to prevent the danger of fire! In particular, remove any cropwound around rotating parts.2 The build-up of dust, oil and grass inside the engine compartment is combustible andpresents an increased fire hazard. Keep the engine and the engine compartment clean atall times.3 The fire hazard can be reduced by removing accumulated crop from the machine severaltimes a day (interval depends on the type of crop) and checking the machine componentsfor overheating. Check for oil leaks or exiting oil and take corrective action. Heed thelubricating instructions.4 Frequently check the hydraulic oil lines thoroughly for proper condition and position withsufficient clearance to contact edges that may be sharp.5 Check the vicinity of the hot zones of the engine, the exhaust system and pipes and theturbo charger, and remove crop residues.6 Take great care when handling fuels. Never fill in fuel in the vicinity of unshielded flamesor sparks that may cause ignition. Do not smoke when filling in fuel! Extreme fire hazard.45
Pos : 7.40.23 /BA/Sic herheit/Wartung/Wartung Mäher mit Gas speic her+ Aus wec hs eln von Arbeits wer kz eugen @ 0\mod_1195647075607_78.doc @ 1442Pos : 7.40.24 /BA/Sic herheit/Sel bstfahrer/Tel efon und Funkg eräte @ 0\mod_1195647114060_78.doc @ 1461Pos : 7.40.25 /Ü berschriften/Ü berschriften 3/U-Z/U nterleg keile @ 33\mod_12542<strong>02</strong>555660_78.doc @ 318451Pos : 7.40.26 /BA/Sic herheit/Sel bstfahrer/U nterleg keile BM 400 Bild @ 49\mod_1287039256859_78.doc @ 464398Pos : 7.40.27 /BA/Sic herheit/Sel bstfahrer/U nterleg keile BM 400 T ext @ 0\mod_1195640618779_78.doc @ 1480Safety4.18 Maintenance1 Always make certain that the drive and the engine are switched off before doing anyrepairs, maintenance or cleaning! - Remove the ignition key!2 Regularly check that nuts and bolts are properly seated and tighten if necessary!3 When carrying out maintenance work on a raised mowing unit, always use suitablemeans to secure it against falling.4 When replacing working tools with cutting edges, use suitable tools and gloves!5 Oils, greases and filters must be disposed of correctly!6 Always disconnect the power supply before working on the electrical system!7 If protective devices and guards are subject to wear, check them regularly and replacethem in good time!8 When performing electrical welding work on the vehicle and mounted devices, turn thepower supply off at main battery switch or disconnect generator cable and battery!9 Replacement parts must at least comply with the technical requirements set by themanufacturer of the implements! This is guaranteed by original KRONE spare parts!10 Only use nitrogen for filling pneumatic accumulators - risk of explosion!4.19 Telephone and radio setsTelephones and radio equipment not connected to the outside antenna may lead to functionaltroubles in the vehicle's electronic system, thus jeopardising the operational safety of thevehicle.4.19.1 Wheel chocksFig. 11• The machine features 2 wheel chocks.• The wheel chocks (1) are located in driving direction front right on the platform.• The wheel chocks must always be carried along.• When parking the machine always secure it against rolling with both wheel chocks.• Place the wheel chocks (1) on the wheels in a way that the machine cannot roll away.46
Pos : 7.41 /Übersc hriften/Übersc hriften 3/A-E/Batterie-H auptschalter @ 45\mod_1276841104984_78.doc @ 409039Pos : 7.42 /BA/Wartung/Sel bstfahrer/Wartung - Elektri k/Batteri e-Hauptsc halter BM 400 Bild @ 49\mod_1287041480828_78.doc @ 464450Pos : 7.43 /BA/Wartung/Sel bstfahrer/Wartung - Elektri k/Batteri e-Hauptsc halter BM 400 T ext @ 49\mod_1287041651562_78.doc @ 464476Pos : 7.44 /BA/Wartung/Sel bstfahrer/Wartung - Elektri k/Batteri e-Hauptsc halter Hi nweis @ 49\mod_1287041037031_78.doc @ 464424Safety4.19.2 Main battery switchFig. 12The main battery switch is used to turn on or interrupt the machine ’s power supplyThe main battery switch is on the left rear side as seen in direction of travelI – Electrical power circuit turned onII – Electrical power circuit interruptedNote - Ignition to level 1 or 2Effect: Battery discharges• The battery is discharging even when the main battery switch interrupts the electricalpower circuit. (Position II)).• Before extended times with no usage, disconnect the electrical power circuit with themain battery switch (position II).• Disconnect cables from battery terminal for winter storage (you may wish to charge ordischarge the battery).47
Pos : 8 /BA/-----Seitenumbr uc h------ @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.doc @ 4165Safety48
Pos : 9.1 /Ü bers chriften/Ü bersc hriften 1/K- O/Kabine @ 0\mod_1195650476560_78.doc @ 1556Pos : 9.2 /BA/Sic her heit/Aufstiegsl eiter/Aufs tiegslei ter z ur F ahrer kabi ne BM 400 @ 0\mod_1195647599076_78.doc @ 1499Pos : 9.3 /BA/Kabi ne/Aufstiegsl eiter /Aufs tiegsleiter Big M 400 @ 0\mod_1195648056716_78.doc @ 1518Pos : 9.4 /BA/-----Seitenumbr uc h------ @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.doc @ 4165Cabin5 Cabin5.1 Ladder to driver's cabinDanger! - Access to cabEffect: Danger to life or serious injuries.• Do not access or leave (the machine) over ladder during travel.• It is impermissible to carry passengers on ladder steps or platforms.• Always make certain the ladders are clean. Take special care that no grease or otherslippery materials accumulates on the ladders.• When leaving the cab, always switch off the engine and remove the ignition key.1BM 400 0<strong>123</strong>Fig. 13• Ladder (1) to the driver’s cab49
Pos : 9.5 /Ü bers chriften/Ü bersc hriften 2/K- O/Kabinentür öffnen @ 0\mod_1195650425<strong>02</strong>9_78.doc @ 1537Pos : 9.6 /BA/Kabi ne/T ür Ö ffnen von innen/außen @ 0\mod_1195651571638_78.doc @ 1633Pos : 9.7 /BA/-----Seitenumbr uc h------ @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.doc @ 4165Cabin5.2 Opening the cabin door1Fig. 14BM 400 0182• From the outside:Use the door key to unlock the door lock (1); press in the button (1) and open the door.1BM 400 0183Fig. 15• From the inside:Lift the door opening lever (1) and open the door.50
Pos : 9.8 /Ü bers chriften/Ü bersc hriften 2/A- E/Bedienungs elemente @ 0\mod_1195651806826_78.doc @ 1652Pos : 9.9 /Ü bers chriften/Ü bersc hriften 3/U-Z/Ü bersic ht @ 0\mod_1195651857513_78.doc @ 1671Pos : 9.10 /BA/Kabi ne/Bedi enel emente Ü bersic ht Big M 400 @ 0\mod_1195651896076_78.doc @ 1690Pos : 9.11 /BA/-----Seitenumbruch------ @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.doc @ 4165Cabin5.3 Operators controls5.3.1 Overview12510 1196 74 3 12Fig. 168BM 400 <strong>000</strong>11 Driver’s seat2 Steering column3 Operating brake4 Foot switch for sideshift (optional)5 Switch group roof panel6 Info Centre7 Switch panel8 Multi-function lever9 Switch group – air conditioning/heating10 Interior lighting11 Cooling compartment12 ISO compartment for radio51
Pos : 9.12 /BA/Kabi ne/Luft- Komfort- Sitz @ 41\mod_127234737<strong>02</strong>64_78.doc @ 375755Cabin5.4 Air comfort seatDanger! - Brief distractionEffect: Danger to life, injuries or damage to the machine.• The driver’s seat must only be adjusted when the machine is stopped.1<strong>02</strong>18394567BX5<strong>000</strong>10Fig. 17The air-cushioned comfort seat (1) can be individually adapted to the requirements of the driver.Weight adjustmentIn order to prevent health problems, the individual driver’s weight adjustment should be checkedand adjusted prior to operation of the machine. The adjustment should be carried out whilstsitting absolutely stationary.• Pull the lever (6) upwards briefly (position I).Height adjustmentThe height can be adjusted continuously by means of a hydraulic system. In order to preventdamage, actuate the compressor for a maximum of 1 minute.• Pull the lever (6) upwards completely (position I) to move the driver’s seat (1) up. Pressthe lever (6) down completely (position II) to move the driver’s seat (1) down. When theupper or lower end position of the height adjustment mechanism is reached, the heightwill be adjusted automatically in order to ensure a minimum spring travel.52
CabinHorizontal suspensionThe shock load in direction of travel through the driver’s seat (1) is cushioned better by thehorizontal suspension.• Swing the lever (5) to the front - the horizontal suspension is active; swing the lever (5)back – the horizontal suspension is switched off.Longitudinal adjustment• Pull the locking lever (4) up, and push the driver’s seat (1) forward or backward into therequested position. Permit the locking lever (4) to snap into place; after locking, thedriver’s seat must not be movable into any other position.Seat angle adjustment• Pull the left key (3) up and at the same time set the angle of the sitting surface byincreasing or decreasing the pressure on the seat surface.Seat depth adjustment• Pull the right key (2) up and at the same time bring the sitting surface into the requiredposition by pushing forward and backward.HeadrestSet the headrest in such a way that the upper edges of the head and the headrest are on thesame height, if possible.• Adjust the height of the headrest (10) by pulling out and pressing down across thenoticeable snaps.Lumbar support• The height as well as the intensity of the arching in the backrest can be adaptedindividually by turning the hand wheel (9) to the left or right.Adjustment of the backrest• Pull the locking lever (7) up to set the inclination of the backrest. Permit the locking lever(7) to snap into place – after locking, the backrest must not move into a different positionany more.53
Pos : 9.13 /BA/-----Seitenumbruch------ @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.doc @ 4165Cabin5.4.1 Setting the left armrest811Fig. 18BX100520• Tilt the armrest (8) up or down as requested.• Remove the cover cap (1) to adjust the height of the armrest.• Undo the hexagon nut; move the armrest into the requested position and tighten thehexagon nut again. Press the cover cap (11) onto the hexagon nut again.5.4.2 Right armrest12BX5<strong>000</strong>11Fig. 19The right armrest (1) and the multi-function lever are one unit.Setting the right armrest• Undo the clamping screw (2); move the armrest (1) into the requested height and tightenthe clamping screw (2) again.54
Pos : 9.14 /BA/Kabi ne/Ablagefach für Verbands kas ten / Betriebs anleitung BM 400 @ 41\mod_1272347178248_78.doc @ 375730Pos : 9.15 /BA/-----Seitenumbruch------ @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.doc @ 4165Cabin5.4.3 Storage compartment for first-aid kit/operating instructions12BX10<strong>02</strong>80Fig. 20The storage compartment for the first-aid kit and the operating instructions (2) are located belowthe front of the driver’s seat (1).55
Pos : 9.16 /Übersc hriften/Übersc hriften 3/A-E/Beifahr ersitz @ 42\mod_1272431192081_78.doc @ 377235Pos : 9.17 /BA/Kabi ne/Beifahr ersitz Gefahr @ 42\mod_1272431347659_78.doc @ 377260Pos : 9.18 /BA/Kabi ne/Beifahr ersitz Bild BM 400 @ 42\mod_1272431465237_78.doc @ 377285Pos : 9.19 /BA/Kabi ne/Beifahr ersitz T ext @ 42\mod_1272431601096_78.doc @ 377310Pos : 9.20 /BA/-----Seitenumbruch------ @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.doc @ 4165Cabin5.4.4 Passenger seatDanger! - Hindrance to driver in the cabEffect: Danger to life, injuries or damage to the machine.• Other than the driver, only one other person is permitted on the passenger’s seat in thecab during work and transport travel.1BX10<strong>02</strong>90Fig. 21Folding down the passenger’s seat (1).56
Pos : 9.21 /BA/Kabi ne/Notaussti eg BM 400 @ 0\mod_1195653995248_78.doc @ 1747Pos : 9.22 /BA/-----Seitenumbruch------ @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.doc @ 4165Cabin5.4.5 Emergency exitab211c1d23BM 400 0171Fig. 22In case of an emergency, the side window on the RH side in the direction of travel, next to thedriver's seat, can be opened as an exit door.To do this:• Swivel the lever (1) upward.• Press the lever (1) outwards and open the side window (2) slightly.• Pull the lever (1) from the pin (3).• Open the side window (2) completely57
Pos : 9.23 /BA/Kabi ne/Diagnos estec kdose – M otor @ 0\mod_1195654116482_78.doc @ 1766Pos : 9.24 /BA/-----Seitenumbruch------ @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.doc @ 4165Cabin5.4.6 Diagnosis socket – motor1Fig. 23:BM 400 0173The diagnostics socket (1) for the engine is located in the driver's cab on the bottom right in theswitch panel next to the driver's seat in the direction of travel.58
Pos : 9.25 /BA/Kabi ne/Lenksäul e und F ußpedal e BM 400 @ 0\mod_1195655010107_78.doc @ 1804Cabin5.5 Steering column and foot pedals15362481011BM 400 0016Fig. 24:1 Button for horn2 Indicator switch3 Pilot lamp indicator4 Full beam5 Headlamp flasher6 Full beam indicator light7 Pilot lamp – trailer function8 Release lever for horizontal steering column adjustment9 Release lever for horizontal and vertical steering column adjustment10 Operating brake11 Foot pedal for sideshift (optional)59
Cabin5.5.1 Steering column adjustmentDanger! - Loss of control over the machineEffect: Danger to life, injuries or damage to the machine.• Adjust the steering column only when the machine is at a standstill.• The steering column (1) is held in vertical position by spring pressure. Before actuatingthe pedal (2), hold the steering wheel with both hands.132Fig. 25:BX100300Horizontal and vertical steering column adjustment• Use the pedal (2) to release the steering column (1), and adjust to the desired position.After the pedal (2) has been released, the steering column (1) will be locked.Horizontal steering column adjustment• Loosen unlocking lever (3). Move the steering column (1) into the requested position.Lock the release lever (3) again.60
Cabin5.5.2 Horn1BX10<strong>02</strong>10Fig. 26:• When the push-button (1) is pressed, the horn is sounded.5.5.3 Indicator switch12Fig. 27:BX10<strong>02</strong>13NoteIn road traffic the change of travelling direction is indicated by a flashing light.• Switch (1) forward – right indicator• Switch (1) backward – left indicator• Set the switch to neutral position by hand.The indicator pilot lamp (2) will light up when the indicator has been switched on.61
Pos : 9.26 /BA/-----Seitenumbruch------ @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.doc @ 4165Cabin5.5.4 Full beam12BX10<strong>02</strong>12Fig. 28:NoteHigh beam only when dipped beam is turned on.Turn off high beam when a vehicle is approaching from the opposite direction.• Switching high beam on – press lever (1) down.• Switching high beam off – press lever (1) up.When high beam is switched on, the blue pilot lamp (2) will be lit.5.5.5 Headlamp flasherFig. 29:BX2<strong>000</strong>40• Pull the headlamp flasher lever (1) up.62
Pos : 9.27 /Übersc hriften/Übersc hriften 3/A-E/Betriebs brems e betätigen @ 49\mod_1286779662750_78.doc @ 463113Pos : 9.28 /BA/Kabi ne/Betriebs brems e betätigen Bil d BM 400 @ 41\mod_1271748561915_78.doc @ 372424Pos : 9.29 /BA/Kabi ne/Betriebs brems e betätigen Text @ 41\mod_1271748511086_78.doc @ 372399Pos : 9.30 /BA/-----Seitenumbruch------ @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.doc @ 4165Cabin5.5.6 Using the operating brake1BM 400 0017Fig. 30In road trafficDanger! - Function of service brake is limited.Effect: Danger to life, injuries or damage to the machine.• Check the brake function before starting every trip.63
Pos : 9.31.1 /BA/Kabi ne/Beleuc htung/Schaltergruppe D achkons ole Bild BM 400 @ 0\mod_1195658356216_78.doc @ 1861Pos : 9.31.3 /BA/-----Seitenumbruc h------ @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.doc @ 4165Cabin5.6 Switch group roof panel2 547 9Fig. 31Pos : 9.31.2 /BA/Kabi ne/Beleuc htung/Schaltergruppe D achkons ole T ext BM 400/420 @ 48\mod_1286515585281_78.doc @ 4616051 Working floodlights pointing down the side, and working floodlights pointing at the rightand left mowing units2 Cab roof floodlights3 Bottom working floodlight pointing to the front4 Mirror adjustment (right outside mirror only)5 Rear working floodlights6 Side light/dipped beam7 Allround lights (optional)8 Hazard warning flasher9 Windshield wipers10 Windshield washer unit64
Pos : 9.31.4 /Übersc hriften/Übersc hriften 2/A-E/Beleuc htung @ 0\mod_1195658399935_78.doc @ 1881Pos : 9.31.5 /Übersc hriften/Übersc hriften 3/U-Z /Übersic ht @ 0\mod_1195651857513_78.doc @ 1671Pos : 9.31.6 /BA/Kabi ne/Beleuc htung/Bel euchtung Übersic ht BM 400 @ 0\mod_1195658459795_78.doc @ 1900Pos : 9.31.7 /BA/-----Seitenumbruc h------ @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.doc @ 4165Cabin5.7 Lighting5.7.1 Overview64 7 8 8 7 4231 359 10 9 101312 11 1212abcBM 400 0187Fig. 321 Working floodlights for mowing unit right2 Working floodlights for mowing unit left3 Working floodlights, side lower4 Bottom working floodlight pointing to the front5 Rear working floodlights6 Cab roof floodlights7 Dipped beam8 Full beam9 Front parking light (clearance lamp)10 Indicators / hazard warning lights11 Licence plate lamp12a) Brake lightb) Indicators / hazard warning lightsc) Tail light / rear parking light (clearance lamp)13 Allround light (optional)65
Pos : 9.31.8 /Übersc hriften/Übersc hriften 3/A-E/Bli nker, War nbli nkanl age und Bremslic ht @ 48\mod_1286516373468_78.doc @ 461657Pos : 9.31.9 /BA/Kabi ne/Beleuc htung/Blinker/Br emslicht/Warnblinkanl age/Blinker Hi nweis Fahrtric htungs wechsel bei Straß enfahrt mi t Bli nklicht anz eigen. @ 48\mod_1286516520484_78.doc @ 461683Pos : 9.31.10 /BA/Kabine/Bel euchtung/Bli nker /Bremslicht/War nbli nkanl age/Blinker, Warnblinkanl age und Br emslicht Bild BM 400 @ 48\mod_1286516823156_78.doc @ 461709Pos : 9.31.11 /BA/Kabine/Bel euchtung/Bli nker /Bremslicht/War nbli nkanl age/Blinker einsc halten @ 48\mod_1286517252328_78.doc @ 461735Pos : 9.31.13 /Ü berschriften/Ü berschriften 4/U-Z/Warnblinkanlage @ 48\mod_1286518286593_78.doc @ 461813Pos : 9.31.14 /BA/Kabine/Bel euchtung/Bli nker /Bremslicht/War nbli nkanl age/Warnblinkanl age Bild BM 400 @ 48\mod_1286518214734_78.doc @ 461787Pos : 9.31.15 /BA/Kabine/Bel euchtung/Bli nker /Bremslicht/War nbli nkanl age/Blinker, Warnblinkanl age und Br emslicht BM 400 @ 0\mod_1195658983248_78.doc @ 1921Pos : 9.31.16 /BA/-----Seitenumbruc h------ @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.doc @ 4165Cabin5.7.2 Indicator, hazard warning flasher and brake lightNoteIn road traffic the change of travelling direction is indicated by a flashing light.12a12bFig. 3310 10 BM 400 01845.7.2.1 Switching on the indicator• Actuate the direction indicator on the steering wheel; the indicators (10, 12b) will flash onone side (right/left).Pos : 9.31.12 /BA/Kabine/Bel euchtung/Bli nker /Bremslicht/War nbli nkanl age/Bremslic ht @ 48\mod_1286517961515_78.doc @ 4617615.7.2.2 Brake lightWhen the ignition is switched on, the brake lights (12a) will light up as soon as the operatingbrake is pressed.5.7.2.3 Switching on the hazard warning flasher11012bFig. 34BM 400 0185The switch (1) for the hazard warning flasher is located in roof panel switch group.• Actuate the rocker switch (1). The red pilot lamp in the switch (1) will start flashing.• When the hazard warning flasher has been switched on, all indicators (10, 12b) will flashat the same time.66
Pos : 9.31.17 /Ü berschriften/Ü berschriften 3/P-T/Standlicht / Abbl endlicht @ 47\mod_1285679225203_78.doc @ 457241Pos : 9.31.18 /BA/Kabine/Bel euchtung/Standlicht / Abbl endlicht Bild BM 400 @ 48\mod_1286522167828_78.doc @ 462<strong>02</strong>3Pos : 9.31.19 /BA/Kabine/Bel euchtung/Standlicht / Abbl endlicht T ext @ 48\mod_1286520637718_78.doc @ 461971Pos : 9.31.20 /BA/-----Seitenumbruc h------ @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.doc @ 4165Cabin5.7.3 Side light/dipped beam17 711912cBM 400 0189Fig. 35The rocker switch (1) for the parking light and the dipped beam is located in the roof panelswitch group.The switch has three positions:I - OffII - Parking lightIII – Dipped beam5.7.3.1 Switching on the parking light• Set the rocker switch (1) to position II:The following lamps will light up when the parking light is switched on:9 Front parking light12c Rear parking light5.7.3.2 Switching on the dipped beam• Set the rocker switch (1) to position III.When dipped beam is turned on, the following are lit:7 Dipped beam9 Front parking light11 Licence plate lamp12c Tail lightNoteThe dipped beam can be switched on only when the ignition has been switched on.67
Pos : 9.31.21 /Ü berschriften/Ü berschriften 3/A-E/Arbeitss cheinwerfer @ 48\mod_1286522984234_78.doc @ 462049Pos : 9.31.22 /BA/Kabine/Bel euchtung/Ar bei tssc hei nwerfer/Arbeitssc heinwerfer Bil d BM 400 @ 48\mod_1286526564453_78.doc @ 462257Pos : 9.31.23 /BA/Kabine/Bel euchtung/Ar bei tssc hei nwerfer/Arbeitssc heinwerfer Text BM 400 / 420 / 500 @ 48\mod_1286526713171_78.doc @ 462283Pos : 9.31.24 /BA/-----Seitenumbruc h------ @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.doc @ 4165Cabin5.7.4 Working floodlightsIII2 4Fig. 36The rocker switch (1,2,3,4) for the working floodlights is located in the roof panel switch group.1 Working floodlights pointing down the side, and working floodlights pointing at the rightand left mowing units2 Cab roof floodlights3 Bottom working floodlight pointing to the front4 Rear working floodlightsIt has 2 settings:IIIOffOnNoteAlways switch the working floodlights off during road travel!68
Pos : 9.31.25 /Ü berschriften/Ü berschriften 4/A-E/Arbeitss cheinwerfer s eitlich unten und Mähwer ke rec hts /links @ 48\mod_1286524157656_78.doc @ 462101Pos : 9.31.26 /BA/Kabine/Bel euchtung/Ar bei tssc hei nwerfer/Arbeitssc heinwerfer setlich unten und M ähwer ke rec hts /links Bil d BM 400 @ 48\mod_1286526923421_78.doc @ 462309Pos : 9.31.27 /BA/Kabine/Bel euchtung/Ar bei tssc hei nwerfer/Arbeitssc heinwerfer setlich unten und M ähwer ke rec hts /linksT ext BM 400/420 @ 48\mod_128652709<strong>02</strong>34_78.doc @ 462335Pos : 9.31.29 /BA/Kabine/Bel euchtung/Ar bei tssc hei nwerfer/Arbeitssc heinwerfer Kabine Bil d BM 400 @ 48\mod_1286527383343_78.doc @ 462361Pos : 9.31.30 /BA/Kabine/Bel euchtung/Ar bei tssc hei nwerfer/Arbeitssc heinwerfer Kabine T ext BM 400 @ 48\mod_1286527558312_78.doc @ 462387Pos : 9.31.31 /BA/-----Seitenumbruc h------ @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.doc @ 4165Cabin5.7.4.1 Working floodlights "down the side and at the right/left mowing units"III12 3 34BM 400 0190Fig. 37The two working floodlights (2,3,4) can be switched on only when the parking light is switchedon.• Set the rocker switch (1) to position II:When the rocker switch (1) is turned on, the following are lit:1 Working floodlights for mowing unit right2 Working floodlights for mowing unit left3 Working floodlights, side lowerPos : 9.31.28 /Ü berschriften/Ü berschriften 4/A-E/Arbeitss cheinwerfer Kabine @ 48\mod_1286524163921_78.doc @ 4621275.7.4.2 Working floodlights CabIII26Fig. 38BM 400 0191The 7 working floodlights (6) on the cab roof can only be switched on when the parking light isswitched on.• Set the rocker switch (2) to position II:When the rocker switch (2) is turned on, the following are lit:6 Cab roof floodlights69
Pos : 9.31.32 /Ü berschriften/Ü berschriften 4/A-E/Arbeitss cheinwerfer unten Front @ 48\mod_1286524169140_78.doc @ 462153Pos : 9.31.33 /BA/Kabine/Bel euchtung/Ar bei tssc hei nwerfer/Arbeitssc heinwerfer unten Front Bild BM 400 @ 48\mod_1286527858296_78.doc @ 462413Pos : 9.31.35 /Ü berschriften/Ü berschriften 4/A-E/Arbeitss cheinwerfer Hec k @ 48\mod_1286525<strong>02</strong>7906_78.doc @ 462205Pos : 9.31.36 /BA/Kabine/Bel euchtung/Ar bei tssc hei nwerfer/Arbeitssc heinwerfer Hec k Bild BM 400 @ 48\mod_1286529294187_78.doc @ 462465Pos : 9.31.38 /BA/-----Seitenumbruc h------ @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.doc @ 4165Cabin5.7.4.3 Working floodlight Bottom front3III4 4BM 400 0192Fig. 39Pos : 9.31.34 /BA/Kabine/Bel euchtung/Ar bei tssc hei nwerfer/Arbeitssc heinwerfer unten Front Text @ 48\mod_1286528985921_78.doc @ 462439• Set the rocker switch (3) to position II:When the rocker switch (3) is turned on, the following are lit:4 Working floodlight front (right and left)5.7.4.4 Working floodlight rearIII4 5BM 400 0193Fig. 40Pos : 9.31.37 /BA/Kabine/Bel euchtung/Ar bei tssc hei nwerfer/Arbeitssc heinwerfer Hec k T ext BM 400 @ 48\mod_1286529514968_78.doc @ 462491• Set the rocker switch (4) to position II:When the rocker switch (4) is turned on, the following are lit:5 Working floodlight rear70
Pos : 9.31.39 /Ü berschriften/Ü berschriften 4/P-T/Runduml euchten optional @ 48\mod_1286524188234_78.doc @ 462179Pos : 9.31.40 /BA/Kabine/Bel euchtung/Ar bei tssc hei nwerfer/R undumleuc hte Bil d BM 400 @ 49\mod_1286529737828_78.doc @ 462517Pos : 9.31.41 /BA/Kabine/Bel euchtung/Ar bei tssc hei nwerfer/R undumleuc hte T ext BM 400 @ 49\mod_1286530440406_78.doc @ 462543Pos : 9.31.42 /BA/-----Seitenumbruc h------ @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.doc @ 4165Cabin5.7.5 Allround lights (optional)113BM 400 0125Fig. 41Option depends on user’s countryIn some countries the allround lights must be switched on in road traffic.Switch on the allround lights (13)The switch (1) for the allround lights is located in the roof panel switch group.• Actuate the rocker switch (1). The orange pilot lamp in the switch (1) will light up.71
Pos : 9.31.43 /BA/Kabine/Bel euchtung/Innen-Raumbeleuc htung BM 400 @ 32\mod_1253517432294_78.doc @ 313695Pos : 9.31.44 /BA/-----Seitenumbruc h------ @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.doc @ 4165Cabin5.7.6 Interior lightingII0I3 412BM 400 0145Fig. 42The interior lighting control (1) is located on the cab roof. It consists of a 3-level switch.Overview:I = Continuous lighting0 = Lighting offII = Delayed switch-off (after ignition stage II is turned off, interior lighting will stay on for theamount of time set on time relay (2))The time for switch-off delay can be adjusted with the time relay (2).To do this:• Open the cover on the left next to the driver’s seat.• Move switch (3) S1 and S2 to the desired position (see table).S1 S2 (s)Off Off 110…900On On 14…110On Off 2,5 14Off On 0…2,5Use a screwdriver to make fine adjustments to the speed potentiometer (4) of the time relay (2)that controls the switch-off delay (amount of time) to match time intervals t(s).72
Pos : 9.31.45 /BA/Kabine/Bel euchtung/Spotlight BM 400/500 @ 32\mod_1253516205575_78.doc @ 313640Pos : 9.32 /BA/-----Seitenumbruch------ @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.doc @ 4165Cabin5.7.7 Spotlight1BMII-338Fig. 43The spotlight (1) is on the cab roof.• The spotlight can be turned on and off at any time by activating the switch built into it.73
Pos : 9.33.1 /Übersc hriften/Übersc hriften 2/A-E/Auß ens pieg el @ 32\mod_1253519080403_78.doc @ 313745Pos : 9.33.2 /BA/Sicherheit/Fahren und Transport/G efahr- Auß enspi egel @ 32\mod_1253519267091_78.doc @ 313770Pos : 9.33.3 /BA/Kabi ne/Spiegel /Außens pieg el links BM 400 @ 32\mod_1253519561013_78.doc @ 313795Pos : 9.33.4 /BA/-----Seitenumbruc h------ @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.doc @ 4165Cabin5.8 Outside mirrorsDanger! - Impaired visionEffect: Danger to life, injuries or damage to the machine.• Before starting to drive, adjust the mirror so that the rear driving area is fully visible.5.8.1 Left outside mirror1BM 400 0194Fig. 44• Adjust the left outside mirror (1) manually.74
Pos : 9.33.5 /Übersc hriften/Übersc hriften 3/P-T/R ec hter Auß ens pi egel und Anfahrspi egel BM 400 @ 49\mod_1286776268859_78.doc @ 462873Pos : 9.33.6 /BA/Kabi ne/Spiegel /Rec hter Auß enspi egel und Anfahrs pieg el Bil d BM 400 @ 49\mod_1286777326484_78.doc @ 462977Pos : 9.33.7 /BA/Kabi ne/Spiegel /Außens pieg el rec hts @ 49\mod_1286777019984_78.doc @ 462951Pos : 9.33.8 /BA/Kabi ne/Spiegel /Anfahrs pieg el ei nstellen @ 49\mod_1286776763796_78.doc @ 462925Pos : 9.33.9 /BA/Kabi ne/Spiegel /Anfahrs pieg el Hinweis @ 49\mod_1286776577265_78.doc @ 462899Pos : 9.33.10 /BA/Kabine/Spi egel/Innens pieg el @ 0\mod_1195711607577_78.doc @ 2043Pos : 9.34 /BA/-----Seitenumbruch------ @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.doc @ 4165Cabin5.8.2 Right outside mirror and anti-collision mirror<strong>123</strong>BM 400 0146_1Fig. 455.8.2.1 Setting the right outside mirrorThe right outside mirror (1) is electrically adjustable. The switch (3) is located in the roof panel.• Turn the switch (3) to the right (arrow to the right).• Press the switch (3) up, down and to the side until the outside mirror (1) is set correctly.5.8.2.2 Setting the anti-collision mirrorThe anti-collision mirror (2) must be adjusted manually.NoteSet the anti-collision mirror in such a way that the ground area next to the right front wheel canbe checked prior to starting.5.9 Inside mirrorBMII-197Fig. 46:Adjust the inside mirror manually.Adjust the inside mirror according to requirements.75
Pos : 9.35 /BA/Kabi ne/Sonnenblende BM 400 @ 0\mod_11957125<strong>123</strong>74_78.doc @ 2081Pos : 9.36 /BA/Kabi ne/Frontsc heibenwis cher @ 0\mod_1195712885140_78.doc @ 2100Pos : 9.37 /BA/-----Seitenumbruch------ @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.doc @ 4165Cabin5.10 Sun blind1BMII-196Fig. 47:Adjust the sun blind according to requirements.5.11 Windshield wipersFig. 48:The rocker switch (1) for the windshield wipers is located in the roof panel.The switch has three positions:I - OffII - IntervalIII - Continuous operationSwitching on the windshield wipers• Actuate the rocker switch (1).76
Pos : 9.38 /BA/Kabi ne/Sc heibenwasc hanl age – Fr ontsc hei be @ 0\mod_1195713188280_78.doc @ 2119Pos : 9.39 /BA/-----Seitenumbruch------ @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.doc @ 4165Cabin5.12 Washer system – windshieldFig. 49:The rocker switch (1) for the windshield washer system is located in the roof panel.Switching on the windshield washer system• Actuate the rocker switch (1).77
Pos : 9.40.1 /BA/Kabi ne/Sc hal ter konsol e/Schalter kons ole BM 400 @ 0\mod_1195717034537_78.doc @ 2164Pos : 9.40.2 /BA/-----Seitenumbruc h------ @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.doc @ 4165Cabin5.13 Switch panel1273456BM 400 <strong>000</strong>4Fig. 50:1 Panel switches2 Pilot lamps3 Ignition lock4 Cigarette lighter5 12 V socket6 CAN diagnostics socket7 <strong>US</strong>B connection78
Pos : 9.40.3 /BA/Kabi ne/Sc hal ter konsol e/Kons olensc hal ter und Kontrollleuc hten BM 400 @ 0\mod_1195717338990_78.doc @ 2183Pos : 9.40.4 /BA/-----Seitenumbruc h------ @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.doc @ 4165Cabin5.14 Panel switches and pilot lamps1 2 3894 56 7BM 400 <strong>000</strong>5Fig. 51:1 Release switch – road/field2 Autopilot release switch (optional)3 Release switch – holding brake4 Travelling gear release switch5 Axle separation key6 Switch hydraulic auger hood left (optional)7 Switch hydraulic auger hood right (optional)8 Engine failure pilot lamp9 Charge indicator lamp79
Pos : 9.40.5 /BA/Kabi ne/Sc hal ter konsol e/Betätigung Fr eigabesc halter @ 0\mod_1195717535303_78.doc @ 22<strong>02</strong>Pos : 9.40.6 /BA/-----Seitenumbruc h------ @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.doc @ 4165Cabin5.14.1 Actuating release switches112BX 400 <strong>000</strong>6Fig. 52:Note - Locked release switchEffect: Release switches cannot be activated.• To actuate the release switches (1), push the lock (2) forward and press the releaseswitch.80
Pos : 9.40.7 /Übersc hriften/Übersc hriften 3/F-J/Freigabesc halter Straße/Fel d @ 0\mod_1196320452967_78.doc @ 6351Pos : 9.40.8 /BA/Sicherheit/G efahr enhinweis e/Stellung Freigabeschalter bei Str aßenfahr t @ 0\mod_1196320338201_78.doc @ 6332Pos : 9.40.9 /BA/Kabi ne/Sc hal ter konsol e/Fr eigabesc halter Str aße/Fel d @ 0\mod_1195717693209_78.doc @ 2221Pos : 9.40.10 /BA/-----Seitenumbruc h------ @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.doc @ 4165Cabin5.14.2 Release switch – road/fieldDanger! - Release switches for road travel not in position (I) "Road travel"Effect: Danger to life or serious injuries.• The road/field release switch must be in position "I" for road travel.• This ensures that only the travelling gear, steering and brakes are activated.1IIIBM 400 <strong>000</strong>7Fig. 53The road/field release switch (1) is used to switch from road travel to field operation and viceversa.I - Road travelII - Field modeNoteDepending on the position of the "Road/field" release switch, the "Road travel or field mode"basic screen appears in the Info Centre.81
Pos : 9.40.11 /BA/Kabine/Schalter kons ole/Freigabesc halter Autopilot / - optional @ 0\mod_1195717962350_78.doc @ 2240Pos : 9.40.12 /BA/-----Seitenumbruc h------ @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.doc @ 4165Cabin5.14.3 Autopilot release switch / - optional1IIIFig. 54:BM 400 <strong>000</strong>9Actuating the autopilot release switch (1) releases the autopilot function.Note - Autopilot is not released• Autopilot is only available in Field mode with the travelling gear turned on• The road/field release switch must be active in field operation and the travelling gearrelease switch must be switched on.I - Autopilot offII - Autopilot releasedNote - Autopilot is not released• For further information, please consult the operating instruction "Autopilot BriefIntroduction" included with delivery82
Pos : 9.40.13 /BA/Kabine/Schalter kons ole/Freigabesc halter F ests tell brems e @ 0\mod_1195718259850_78.doc @ 2259Pos : 9.40.14 /BA/-----Seitenumbruc h------ @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.doc @ 4165Cabin5.14.4 Release switch - holding brakeFig. 55:Note - Parking brake engagedEffect: Brake overheating• Do not drive with the parking brake engaged.• The holding brake is applied automatically when the ignition is switched off.83
Pos : 9.40.15 /Ü berschriften/Ü berschriften 3/F-J/Freigabes chalter F ahr antrieb @ 0\mod_1196319179092_78.doc @ 6293Pos : 9.40.16 /BA/Sic herheit/Gefahrenhinweise/Ung ewolltes beweg en der Maschi ne @ 0\mod_1196319463264_78.doc @ 6313Pos : 9.40.17 /BA/Kabine/Schalter kons ole/Freigabesc halter F ahr antrieb @ 0\mod_1195720600131_78.doc @ 2278Pos : 9.40.18 /BA/-----Seitenumbruc h------ @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.doc @ 4165Cabin5.14.5 Release switch travelling gearDanger! - Unintentional movement of the machineEffect: Danger to life, injuries or damage to the machine.• No persons may be present in the direct hazardous area of the machine when thetravelling gear release switch is actuated!• Always remove the ignition key before leaving the cabin.To turn off the machine:• Activate the parking brake switch; move the travelling gear switch (1) to position off (I).1IIIBM 400 0010Fig. 56:When the travelling gear release switch (1) is actuated, the travelling gear is released.I - Travelling gear offII - Travelling gear onNote - Mower drives cannot be switched on.• When the travelling gear is switched off (position II), the mowing unit drive cannot beswitched on.84
Pos : 9.40.19 /BA/Kabine/Schalter kons ole/Taste Achs trennung @ 0\mod_1195722759115_78.doc @ 2297Pos : 9.40.20 /BA/-----Seitenumbruc h------ @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.doc @ 4165Cabin5.14.6 Axle separation keyFig. 57:Actuating the axle separation key switches axle separation on or off.Note - Axle separation does not turn on• Axle separation can only be activated in drive level 1 (field mode).• When activating the axle separation, the maximum top speed is 14 km/h (instead of 19 km/h).• If the axle separation is switched when travelling faster than 14 km/h, the electronics preventthe axle separation from being activated. Only after the speed has been reduced to below 14km/h, are the electronics, the valves, and the axle separation activated.• Actuate axle separation key (1) – axle separation switched on• Actuate axle separation key (1) again – axle separation switched off85
Pos : 9.40.21 /BA/Kabine/Schalter kons ole/Kontrollleuc hte M otorstörung /Ladekontr ollleuchte @ 0\mod_1195723288303_78.doc @ 2317Pos : 9.40.22 /BA/-----Seitenumbruc h------ @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.doc @ 4165Cabin5.14.7 Engine failure pilot lampCaution! - "Engine failure" pilot lamp (1) is litEffect: Damages to the machine• Switch off engine immediately.• Rectify the fault.12Fig. 58:5.14.8 Charge indicator lampBM 400 0012The charge indicator light (2) will light up, if the output voltage of the three-phase generator isnot sufficient to charge the batteries.• Check the cables and connections on the three-phase generator and on the battery.• Check the V-belt on the three-phase generator.86
Pos : 9.40.23 /BA/Kabine/Schalter kons ole/Zündsc hloss @ 0\mod_1195724199693_78.doc @ 2336Pos : 9.40.24 /BA/-----Seitenumbruc h------ @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.doc @ 4165Cabin5.14.9 Ignition lock1BM 400 0013Fig. 59:The ignition lock (1) has four positions:0 - OffI - Electric circuit for electronics is switched onII The ignition is switched onIII -Start position87
Pos : 9.40.25 /Ü berschriften/Ü berschriften 3/U-Z/Zigar ettenanz ünder / 12 V Stec kdos e @ 42\mod_1272437710878_78.doc @ 377567Pos : 9.40.26 /BA/Kabine/Schalter kons ole/Zigarettenanzünder / 12 V Stec kdose Ac htung @ 42\mod_1272438967737_78.doc @ 377642Pos : 9.40.27 /BA/Kabine/Schalter kons ole/Zigarettenanzünder / 12 V Stec kdose Bild BM 400 @ 42\mod_1272437984253_78.doc @ 377617Pos : 9.40.28 /BA/Kabine/Schalter kons ole/Zigarettenanzünder / 12 V Stec kdose Text @ 0\mod_1195725058068_78.doc @ 2355Pos : 9.40.29 /BA/Kabine/Schalter kons ole/Stec kdos e 12 V Hinweis BM 400 @ 42\mod_1272437828268_78.doc @ 377592Pos : 9.40.30 /BA/-----Seitenumbruc h------ @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.doc @ 4165Cabin5.14.10 Cigarette lighter / 12-V socketCaution! - Hot cigarette lighter!Effect: Burns• Only hold the hot cigarette lighter by the handle.• Never hold onto the cigarette lighter (1) when it is pushed in.Fig. 60Press the cigarette lighter (1) in; when the required temperature is reached the insert will comeout by itself.The socket (2) can be used to connect other power consumers with 12 volts and a maximum of10 amperes. When the engine has been switched off, the battery will be discharged. Use thespecified plug to connect accessory units.NoteAn additional 12-V socket is located in the driver’s cab on the bottom left next to the driver’sseat facing in the direction of travel.88
Pos : 9.40.31 /BA/Kabine/Schalter kons ole/Diagnos estec kdose / U SB- Anschl uss BM 400 @ 0\mod_1195725557209_78.doc @ 2374Pos : 9.41 /BA/-----Seitenumbruch------ @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.doc @ 4165Cabin5.14.11 Diagnostics socket / <strong>US</strong>B connection12BM 400 0015Fig. 61:• CAN interface (1)• <strong>US</strong>B connection (2)89
Pos : 9.42.1 /BA/Kabi ne/M ultifunkti ons hebel/ALT E Ausführ ung/M ultifunktions hebel BM 400 @ 7\mod_1215437651153_78.doc @ 1<strong>02</strong>372Cabin5.15 Multi-function lever136 71<strong>02</strong>458112213 14BM 400 <strong>000</strong>32315917 1618121920 21Fig. 62:1 Switch off all mowing unit drives2 Retrieve pre-setting "I" cutting height (optional)3 Retrieve pre-setting "II" cutting height (optional)4 To lower left mower: Hold down the "12" key and switch from transport position toheadland position without "12" key from headland position to working position5 To lift left mower: Hold down the "12" key and switch from headland position to transportposition Without "12" key from working position to headland position6 To lower right mower: Hold down the "12" key and switch from transport position toheadland position without "12" key from headland position to working position7 To lift right mower: Hold down the "12" key and switch from headland position to transportposition without "12" key from working position to headland position8 Lift front mower9 To lift all mowers: Hold down the "12" key and lift only the right and left mower fromheadland position to transport position. Without the "12" key, lift all mowers (including thefront mower) from working position to headland position.10 To lower all mowers: Hold down the "12" key and lift only the right and left mower fromtransport position to headland position. Without the "12" key, lower all mowers (includingthe front mower) from headland position to working position.90
Pos : 9.42.2 /BA/-----Seitenumbruc h------ @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.doc @ 4165Cabin11 Lower front mower12 Additional function for keys "4 to 7, 9 and 10"13 Switching between semi-automatic and automatic14 LED lit semi-automatic activeLED not lit automatic active15 Actuation key for travelling gear16 Selector switch acceleration ramp17 Additional function: Mowing units - release18 Activation key for Autopilot (optional)19 In Field mode only: Increase engine speed inching until nominal speed is reached20 In Field mode only: Switch from nominal speed to idle speed and vice versa21 In Field mode only: Reduce engine speed inching until idle speed22 Free23 Cross switch lever91
Pos : 9.42.3 /BA/Kabi ne/M ultifunkti ons hebel/ALT E Ausführ ung/M ultifunktions hebel (Fortsetzung) BM 400/500 @ 31\mod_1251979200570_78.doc @ 3<strong>02</strong>347Pos : 9.43 /BA/-----Seitenumbruch------ @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.doc @ 4165Cabin5.15.1 Multi-function lever (continued)5.15.1.1 DrivingEFG H JDKLM231517 16ABCBM 400 0133Fig. 6315 Actuation key for traction drive.16 Selector switch for acceleration ramp.A - Acceleration (for forward travel) / deceleration (for reverse) / start traction drive withactuation key (15) pressed.B - Multi-function lever – central position.C - Acceleration (for reverse) / deceleration (for forward travel) / start traction drive withactuation key (15).D - Deceleration to 0 km/h / fast reversing with the actuation key (15) pressed (in Field modeonly).E - Multi-function lever – central position.F - Switch on cruise control / save current speed for cruise control – press actuation key (15)and rotate multi-function lever in direction F.G - Without key (17) pressed, switch off left mower drive / switch on left mower drive withpressed key (17).H - Central position.J - Without key (17) pressed, switch off right mower drive / switch on right mower drive withpressed key (17).K - Without key (17) pressed, switch off front mower drive / switch on front mower drive withpressed key (17).L - Central position.M - Without key (17) pressed, switch off all mower drives / switch on all mower drives withpressed key (17).92
Pos : 9.44.1 /BA/Kabi ne/Kli maanlage/Heiz ung/Kli matroni k / Heiz ung Übersicht @ 0\mod_1195728661475_78.doc @ 2453Cabin5.16 Klimatronik / heating5.16.1 Control and display elementsThe Klimatronik is a control unit for air conditioning and heating systems in modern vehiclecabs. The driver’s work is made easier through clear, intuitive control of all tasks and optimumclimate control in the driver’s cab.NoteIf the electrical power supply to the control unit is interrupted, the control unit automaticallyperforms a self test after power is restored. After the self test is complete, the last setting to besaved appears.Fig. 64Key function key1 Key to switch air conditioning on and off2 Key to adjust the desired cab temperature upward.Alternative: Manual settings "Up"3 Key to adjust the desired cab temperature downward.Alternative: Manual settings "Down"4 Key to switch the controller on and off5 Key to switch the evaporator fan speed Manual / Automatic6 Key to switch REHEAT mode on and off (demoisturising the cab air)78 Covered key to switch the temperature display to ° Fahrenheit93
Pos : 9.44.2 /BA/-----Seitenumbruc h------ @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.doc @ 4165CabinLCD function of LCD displayFig. 659 Icon indicates REHEAT mode10 Icon indicates air conditioning11 Icon indicates fully automatic mode is turned on12 Bar indicates fan speed in manual mode13 Icon indicates manual fan mode14 4-place seven segment display shows setpoint value or error code15 Icon indicates unit of measure for temperature (°)16 Indicates the icon for vehicle cab94
Pos : 9.44.3 /BA/Kabi ne/Kli maanlage/Heiz ung/Anlage ei nsc hal ten @ 0\mod_1195729216365_78.doc @ 2491Pos : 9.44.4 /BA/Kabi ne/Kli maanlage/Heiz ung/Ei nstellen der g ewünsc hten Kabinentemper atur @ 0\mod_1195729761475_78.doc @ 2510Pos : 9.44.5 /BA/-----Seitenumbruc h------ @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.doc @ 4165Cabin5.16.2 Operation5.16.3 Switching on the SystemFig. 66Press thekeyNoteAfter the system is switched on, the control unit performs a self test and the software version isdisplayed for about 5 seconds, for example:Then the operating hours of the air conditioning system are displayed for 5 seconds (forexample 6 operating hours).Then the last saved setting appears in the display.5.16.4 Setting the Desired Cab TemperatureFig. 67The set cab temperature is shown in °C, for example 26°C. The control unit is in Automaticmode.To lower the desired cab temperature to 21°C, for example, press thevalue appears in the display. (press key 5 x)key until the desired95
Pos : 9.44.6 /BA/Kabi ne/Kli maanlage/Heiz ung/Kli mabetrieb Ein- / Auss chalten @ 0\mod_1195730018068_78.doc @ 2529Pos : 9.44.7 /BA/-----Seitenumbruc h------ @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.doc @ 4165Cabin5.16.5 Switch air conditioning On / OffFig. 68You can switch on the air conditioning with thekey.Air conditioning is now turned on; icon indicates air conditioning.The compressor is turned on by the control unit if necessary.Pressing theicon disappears.key again turns off air conditioning (compressor is deactivated). The96
Pos : 9.44.8 /BA/Kabi ne/Kli maanlage/Heiz ung/REH EAT - Betrieb Ein- / Aussc halten @ 0\mod_1195733396084_78.doc @ 2548Pos : 9.44.9 /BA/-----Seitenumbruc h------ @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.doc @ 4165Cabin5.16.6 Switch REHEAT mode On / OffFig. 69REHEAT mode = (demoisturising the cab air)Switch on REHEAT mode with thekey.The display appears like this:REHEAT mode is now turned on. Theicon indicates REHEAT mode.NoteThe compressor is permanently turned on. The evaporator fan speed is raised to 100%. Ifnecessary, the control unit turns the heating on to keep room temperature at the setpoint value.REHEAT mode is automatically limited to 10 minutes.Pressing thekey again turns off REHEAT mode.Theicon no longer appears.97
Pos : 9.44.10 /BA/Kabine/Klimaanl age/H eiz ung/M anuelles Einstellen der Ver dampferlüfter drehz ahl @ 0\mod_1195733653506_78.doc @ 2567Pos : 9.44.11 /BA/-----Seitenumbruc h------ @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.doc @ 4165Cabin5.16.7 Manual setting of evaporator fan speedFig. 70Switch on manual evaporator fan speed with theThe manual setting for fan speed is now active. The currently set fan speed appears in bardisplay (full bar display = 100%). The AUTO icon no longer appears.key.Fanflashes for 5 seconds. During this time the fan speed can be increased with thekey or lowered with the key in increments of 10%.NoteThe lowest fan speed that can be set is 30% (three bars are displayed).Pressing the key twice reactivates AUTO mode. The Auto icon appears ; theandicons are no longer displayed.98
Pos : 9.44.12 /BA/Kabine/Klimaanl age/H eiz ung/U msc halten der T emperaturanz eige i n ° F ahr enhei t @ 0\mod_1195734049209_78.doc @ 2586Pos : 9.44.13 /BA/Kabine/Klimaanl age/H eiz ung/Anzeige von Störungen i m Dis play @ 0\mod_1195734281959_78.doc @ 2605Cabin5.16.8 Switching the Temperature Display to ° Fahrenheit8Fig. 71The current set-point temperature is shown in ° Celsius.Press and hold the covered key (8) and press the key as well. The display switches to °Fahrenheit.The current set-point temperature is shown in ° Fahrenheit.Pressing the (8) key andkey again switches the display back to ° Celsius.5.16.9 Showing Faults in the DisplayError code (F0)´Fig. 72Error in room temperature sensor is indicated by flashing indicator (F0).NoteThe control unit has recorded an error in the room temperature sensor. Controller is no longerready for operation.Cause of sensor fault:Short circuit or interruption in sensor line, plug connection on the sensor or control unit ,temperature sensor defective. The controller will not be ready for operation again until the erroris eliminated. Then the sensor fault no longer appears.NoteIf a sensor fault occurs, the controller continues working with the setting that was valid beforethe fault was recorded.99
Pos : 9.45 /BA/-----Seitenumbruch------ @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.doc @ 4165CabinError code (FI)Fig 73Error in blow-out temperature sensor is indicated by flashing indicator (F1).NoteThe control unit has recorded an error in the blow-out temperature sensor. The control is nolonger ready for operation.Cause of sensor fault:Short circuit or interruption in sensor line, plug connection on the sensor or control unit ,temperature sensor defective. The controller will not be ready for operation again until the erroris eliminated. Then the sensor fault no longer appears.NoteIf a sensor fault occurs, the controller continues working with the setting that was valid beforethe fault was recorded.100
Pos : 9.46 /BA/Kabi ne/Verstellbare Lüftdüsen BM 400 @ 0\mod_1195735466631_78.doc @ 2625Pos : 9.47 /BA/-----Seitenumbruch------ @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.doc @ 4165Cabin5.17 Adjustable air jetsCA/BCA/BBMII-200_1Fig. 74A Knurled wheel to control the amount of airB Adjustment of the louversC Air slotsNoteSet the louvers in such a way that the panes do not mist up.101
Pos : 9.48 /BA/Kabi ne/Radioeinbau @ 0\mod_1195735722428_78.doc @ 2644Pos : 10 /BA/-----Sei tenumbruch------ @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.doc @ 4165Cabin5.18 Radio1BM 400 <strong>02</strong>15Fig. 75:1 ISO compartment for radioNoteTelephones and radio equipment not connected to the outside antenna may lead to functionaltroubles in the vehicle's electronic system, thus jeopardising the operational safety of thevehicle.1<strong>02</strong>
===== Ende der Stüc kliste =====Cabin103
Pos : 1.1 /Ü bers chriften/Ü bersc hriften 1/F-J/Info-C enter „ Eas yTouc h“ @ 0\mod_1195737815318_78.doc @ 2663Pos : 1.2 /Ü bers chriften/Ü bersc hriften 3/U-Z/Ü bersic ht @ 0\mod_1195651857513_78.doc @ 1671Pos : 1.3 /BA/Info-Center/Bi G M 400 / Bi G M 500/Info-Center Eas y Touc h Ü bersicht @ 0\mod_1195737934803_78.doc @ 2682Pos : 1.4 /BA/-----Seitenumbr uc h------ @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.doc @ 4165Info centre "EasyTouch"6 Info centre "EasyTouch"6.1.1 OverviewIIIIIIVIVBM 400 0099Fig. 76• I = Display• II = Keys 1 to 88(1 - 8)D• III = Keys toD (A - D)• IV = Rotary potentiometer• V = Menu key104
Pos : 1.5 /BA/Info-Center/Bi G M 400 / Bi G M 500/Allgemeine Bes chr eibung der Tasten_Drehpoti _M enütaste @ 0\mod_1195738501881_78.doc @ 2701Pos : 1.6 /BA/-----Seitenumbr uc h------ @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.doc @ 4165Info centre "EasyTouch"Fig. 77The Info Centre informs you about the current actions and the current operating condition of themachine. You can use the Info Centre to make settings for the machine and start or stopactions. Its main components are:Keys 1-8Keys 1-8 are used to activate the softkeys located in the right column (IV). For the assignmentof the keys, see the illustration. If there is no softkey next to the key, it has no function.Keys A-DThe keys A-D are used to activate the softkeys located in the line just above them (V). For theassignment of the keys, see the illustration. If there is no softkey above the key it has nofunction.Rotary potentiometer (1)The rotary potentiometer has two functions:1 The rotary potentiometer can be turned to change settings and to select the desiredmenu in the menu level.2 Pressing the rotary potentiometer activates and saves the settings.Menu key (2)You can use the key with the rotary potentiometer to call or close the menu level or to go to thepreceding menu level. Holding the key down slightly longer takes you back to the basic screen.1105
Pos : 1.7.1 /BA/Info-C enter /BiG M 400 / Bi G M 500/Besc hrei bung Infobereic he/Dis play Besc hrei bung @ 0\mod_1195739127068_78.doc @ 2740Pos : 1.7.2 /BA/Info-C enter /BiG M 400 / Bi G M 500/Besc hrei bung Infobereic he/Infor mationsberei ch BiG M 400 @ 46\mod_1283245522484_78.doc @ 447769Pos : 1.7.3 /BA/-----Seitenumbr uch------ @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.doc @ 4165Info centre "EasyTouch"IIIVIIII IVV5 67 8B C D BM 400 0114Fig. 78Display (screen display)The display is divided up into the following sections:Status line (I):• Time, number of errors, status display of mowing unitsInformation section:6.2 Information section• Engine information (II)• Travelling gear information (III)• Settings (IV and V)• Drive information (VI) (only in Field mode basic screen)Basic screen - road travelField mode basic screenFig. 79After the ignition is switched on, depending on the position of the "Road / field" release switch,the basic screen "Road travel" or "Field mode" appears in the display.106
Pos : 1.7.4 /BA/Info-C enter /BiG M 400 / Bi G M 500/Besc hrei bung Infobereic he/Statuszeil e BiG M 400 @ 0\mod_1195740052740_78.doc @ 2785Pos : 1.7.5 /BA/-----Seitenumbr uch------ @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.doc @ 4165Info centre "EasyTouch"6.2.1 Status line (I)I 15:36 15 67 8B C DBM 400 01<strong>02</strong>Fig. 80= Error – at least one error occurred. The number of errors present appears before theicon.= Central lubrication (lit briefly when switching from Road basic screen to Field basicscreen).Headland PositionWorking positionFolded upLateral mowing unitleftFront mowing unit Lateral mowing unitrightDrive off drive on Drive off drive on Drive off drive on107
Pos : 1.7.6 /BA/Info-C enter /BiG M 400 / Bi G M 500/Besc hrei bung Infobereic he/Infober eich Motordaten BiG M 400 @ 0\mod_1195795736848_78.doc @ 2805Pos : 1.7.7 /BA/-----Seitenumbr uch------ @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.doc @ 4165Info centre "EasyTouch"6.2.2 Motor data (II) information sectionIIUPM1080<strong>02</strong>0406080100100755 65<strong>02</strong>5070°C7 8B C DBM 400 0115Fig. 811080Engine speedRoad mode: 850 - 1650 rpmField mode: 850 - 1900 rpm0 20 40 60 80 100 Engine capacity as %Cooling water temperature display If the cooling water temperature reaches the criticalrange, the background of the cooling water temperature displaychanges to red.Fuel gauge108
Pos : 1.7.8.1 /BA/Info-C enter /BiG M 400 / Bi G M 500/Besc hrei bung Infobereic he/Infober eich Fahrantriebs daten (III)/Infober eich Fahrantri ebsdaten (III) Bil d BM 400 @ 29\mod_1251200813705_78.doc @ 281322Pos : 1.7.8.2 /BA/Info-C enter /BiG M 400 / Bi G M 500/Besc hrei bung Infobereic he/Infober eich Fahrantriebs daten (III)/T empomat @ 29\mod_1251199726596_78.doc @ 281172Pos : 1.7.8.3 /BA/Info-C enter /BiG M 400 / Bi G M 500/Besc hrei bung Infobereic he/Infober eich Fahrantriebs daten (III)/F ahrgesc hwindigkeit @ 29\mod_1251199875752_78.doc @ 281197Pos : 1.7.8.4 /BA/Info-C enter /BiG M 400 / Bi G M 500/Besc hrei bung Infobereic he/Infober eich Fahrantriebs daten (III)/Beschl eunigungsrampe @ 29\mod_1251199880768_78.doc @ 281222Pos : 1.7.8.5 /BA/Info-C enter /BiG M 400 / Bi G M 500/Besc hrei bung Infobereic he/Infober eich Fahrantriebs daten (III)/F ahrtrichtung @ 29\mod_1251199885768_78.doc @ 281247Pos : 1.7.8.6 /BA/Info-C enter /BiG M 400 / Bi G M 500/Besc hrei bung Infobereic he/Infober eich Fahrantriebs daten (III)/Antriebsart @ 29\mod_1251199893346_78.doc @ 281272Pos : 1.7.8.7 /BA/Info-C enter /BiG M 400 / Bi G M 500/Besc hrei bung Infobereic he/Infober eich Fahrantriebs daten (III)/Bergab - M odus @ 29\mod_1251199904408_78.doc @ 281297Pos : 1.7.9 /BA/-----Seitenumbr uch------ @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.doc @ 4165Info centre "EasyTouch"6.2.3 Information section of the travelling gear data (III)III0.0km/h0.04 N5 67 8Fig. 82B C DBM 400 0116Cruise control active; the number after the icon is the savedspeed for Cruise control operation in km/h.Cruise control inactiveTravelling speedRoad mode: 0 - 40 km/hField mode: 0 - 19 km/hAcceleration ramp1 = Lowest acceleration ramp 2 = ... 3 = ... = Highest acceleration rampDirection of travel= Forward travel = Neutral (stopped) = Reverse travelType of driveAxle sep. active(only possible in Fieldmode)Parking brake isappliedEmergency mode; allows the driver todrive the vehicle out of the dangerzone even if there are serious driveproblems.Downhill modeThe Downhill mode symbol indicates to the driver that the speed of the machine isautomatically restricted to 40 km/h when travelling downhill.109
Pos : 1.7.10 /BA/Info-C enter/BiG M 400 / BiG M 500/Beschr eibung Infobereic he/Infobereic h Eins tell ung en @ 0\mod_11958<strong>000</strong>21723_78.doc @ 2862Pos : 1.7.11 /BA/Info-C enter/BiG M 400 / BiG M 500/Beschr eibung Infobereic he/Infobereic h Antriebsdaten Bi G M 400 @ 0\mod_1195801418567_78.doc @ 2886Pos : 1.8 /BA/-----Seitenumbr uc h------ @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.doc @ 4165Info centre "EasyTouch"6.2.4 Information section of settings (IV and V)IIIIIIIVVIV5 67 8B C D BM 400 0114Fig. 83(see Chapter "Settings").6.2.5 Drive data information section (VI)VI5 67 8Fig. 84B C D BM 400 0105Drive information appears only in the "Field mode" basic screen.1100 1100 1100Speed of drive left Speed of drive front Speed of drive right880 880Speed auger leftSpeed auger right110
Pos : 1.9.1 /BA/Info-C enter /BiG M 400 / Bi G M 500/Sc hnellz ugrifftasten/Sc hnellz ugrifftasten am Grundbil d @ 0\mod_1195803032<strong>02</strong>0_78.doc @ 2907Pos : 1.9.3 /BA/-----Seitenumbr uch------ @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.doc @ 4165Info centre "EasyTouch"6.3 Quick Access Keys in the Basic ScreenThe quick access keys can be used to perform functions directly from the basic screen or tobring up the appropriate submenu.Pos : 1.9.2 /BA/Info-C enter /BiG M 400 / Bi G M 500/Sc hnellz ugrifftasten/U mkehrlüfter @ 46\mod_1283246682171_78.doc @ 4477966.3.1 Quick access "Reverse ventilation"Fig. 85Appears only in basic screen "Field mode"• Activating the or . key starts the reversing fan.The icon "Reversing fan inactive" disappears. The icon "Reversing fan active"appears.The compressor is turned on and the cleaning time begins. After cleaning is complete, theicon "Reversing fan active" disappears.The "Pause time" icon appears. After the pause time has expired, the icon "Pause time"disappears and theicon "Reversing fan inactive" appears.Then the process can be restarted if necessary.111
Pos : 1.9.4 /BA/Info-C enter /BiG M 400 / Bi G M 500/Sc hnellz ugrifftasten/H ydr aulisc h ei nstellbare Sc hnitthöhe Seite 1/2 Bil d BiG M 400 @ 46\mod_1283247663375_78.doc @ 447851Pos : 1.9.5 /BA/Info-C enter /BiG M 400 / Bi G M 500/Sc hnellz ugrifftasten/H ydr aulisc h ei nstellbare Sc hnitthöhe Seite 1/2 T ext BiG M 400/420/500 @ 51\mod_1288092208171_78.doc @ 477914Pos : 1.9.6 /BA/-----Seitenumbr uch------ @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.doc @ 4165Info centre "EasyTouch"6.3.2 Quick access "Hydraulically adjustable cutting height" (optional)Fig. 86Appears only in basic screen "Field mode".• Activating the or key brings up hydraulically adjustable cutting height.Submenu "Hydraulically adjustable cutting height" appears.1. = saved values of pre-setting I2. = saved values of pre-setting II3. = current values of cutting heightYou can use theA andBB keys to save pre-settings for cutting height.I = Save pre-setting for Cutting height III = Save pre-setting II cutting height112
Pos : 1.9.7 /BA/Info-C enter /BiG M 400 / Bi G M 500/Sc hnellz ugrifftasten/H ydr aulisc h ei nstellbare Sc hnitthöhe Seite 2/2 Bi G M 400/420/500 @ 46\mod_1283247964984_78.doc @ 447877Pos : 1.9.8 /BA/-----Seitenumbr uch------ @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.doc @ 4165Info centre "EasyTouch"Activating keys 1-8 sets the inclination of the mowing units.Fig. 87InclinationMowing unitslateral leftFront mowingunitMowing unitslateral rightMowing unit allreduce Key5Key Key Key7increase Key6Key Key Key8NoteIf All Mowing Units is selected, the inclination for the front mowing unit is set first. Then thelateral mowing units are automatically adjusted to the value of the front mowing unit.• Activating theDkey brings up the basic screen.• Pressing the key on the rotary potentiometer takes you one menu level back.113
Pos : 1.9.9 /BA/Info-C enter /BiG M 400 / Bi G M 500/Sc hnellz ugrifftasten/H ydr aulisc h ei nstellbare s eitlic he Federentl astung T 1 BM400/420 @ 51\mod_1288093469796_78.doc @ 477992Pos : 1.9.10 /BA/Info-C enter/BiG M 400 / BiG M 500/Sc hnellzugrifftas ten/H ydraulisc h eins tell bar e s eitliche F eder entlas tung T 2 Bil d BM 400 @ 46\mod_1283248221156_78.doc @ 447903Pos : 1.9.11 /BA/Info-C enter/BiG M 400 / BiG M 500/Sc hnellzugrifftas ten/H ydraulisc h eins tell bar e s eitliche F eder entlas tung T 3 BM 400/420 @ 51\mod_1288093474375_78.doc @ 478018Pos : 1.9.12 /BA/-----Seitenumbruc h------ @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.doc @ 4165Info centre "EasyTouch"6.3.3 Quick access "Hydraulically adjustable lateral spring compensation" (ground pressure)(optional)Appears only in basic screen "Field mode"Lateral spring compensation can be used to adjust the ground pressure of the lateral mowingunits to local conditions. In order to protect the sward, the load on the lateral mowing units mustbe relieved so that they do not jump when mowing, yet do not leave any brush marks on theground.NoteTo set the pressure, lower both lateral mowing units to the ground and set the front axle toworking position.Fig. 88• Pressing thecompensation.55 or66 key brings up hydraulically adjustable lateral springSubmenu "Hydraulically adjustable lateral spring compensation" appears.(1) = saved values of pre-setting I(2) = saved values of pre-setting II(3) = current values of spring compensationBYou can use theA and B keys to save pre-settings (I and II) for hydraulically adjustablelateral spring compensation (ground pressure).I = Save pre-setting III = Save pre-setting II• Activating the7key forbrings up pre-setting (I).• Activating the8key forbrings up pre-setting (II).114
Pos : 1.9.13 /BA/Info-C enter/BiG M 400 / BiG M 500/Sc hnellzugrifftas ten/H ydraulisc h eins tell bar e s eitliche F eder entlas tung T 4 BM 400/420 @ 51\mod_1288093635187_78.doc @ 478044Pos : 1.9.14 /BA/-----Seitenumbruc h------ @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.doc @ 4165Info centre "EasyTouch"NoteDifferent lateral mower weights for mowing units with roller conditioner and swath grouping(BSS) Effect: Different group pressure.With option "Mowing units with roller conditioner and swath grouping", the weight of the rightmowing unit is greater than the weight of the left mowing unit. This is caused by the movementof the drive. Accordingly the compensation pressure must be set about 5 bar higher for the rightmowing unit.Fig. 89:Activating keys 1-4 increases or reduces the pressure of the lateral mowing units.Pressure Mowing units lateral left Mowing units lateral rightreduce Key Keyincrease Key KeyHigh compensation pressure = lower ground pressureLower compensation pressure =higher ground pressure115
Pos : 1.9.15 /BA/Info-C enter/BiG M 400 / BiG M 500/Sc hnellzugrifftas ten/Kundendaten-Zähler @ 29\mod_1251274559046_78.doc @ 282105Pos : 1.9.16 /BA/Info-C enter/BiG M 400 / BiG M 500/Sc hnellzugrifftas ten/Kundendaten-Zähler Infozeil e @ 29\mod_1251277121718_78.doc @ 282418Pos : 1.9.17 /BA/-----Seitenumbruc h------ @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.doc @ 4165Info centre "EasyTouch"6.3.4 Quick access "Customer Data Counter"Fig. 90Appears in basic screen "Road mode and field mode"• Activating theBB key under softkey brings up the customer counter.Customer record (1)Status display (2)10Counter stoppedA counter is activatedFreely usable numeric input field (for example to assign several different cultivatedareas to the customer record)Counter (active counters are highlighted colour)= operating hour counter (h)= working hours counter (h)= surface counter (ha)= kilometre counter (km)= fuel consumption (l)• (3)= absolute fuel consumption• (4)= current average consumption (l/h)Info line (5) (display information of the counter which is currently active)Counter stoppedCounter is activated5.1 Display of the activated customer counter (e.g. Client 1).5.2 Selected surface counter.116
Pos : 1.9.20 /BA/Info-C enter/BiG M 400 / BiG M 500/Sc hnellzugrifftas ten/Z ähler ein- bz w. auss chalten @ 9\mod_1219756842585_78.doc @ 122557Pos : 1.9.21 /BA/-----Seitenumbruc h------ @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.doc @ 4165Info centre "EasyTouch"6.3.5.1 Switching the counter on or offFig. 92• Use the5and6keys to turn the counter on and off .• Activating theBkey brings up the basic screen.• Pressing the key on the rotary potentiometer takes you one menu level back.118
Pos : 1.9.22 /BA/Info-C enter/BiG M 400 / BiG M 500/Sc hnellzugrifftas ten/Kundenz ähl er löschen @ 29\mod_1251278493296_78.doc @ 282523Pos : 1.9.23 /BA/-----Seitenumbruc h------ @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.doc @ 4165Info centre "EasyTouch"6.3.5.2 Delete customer counter10Only the counters of the selected cultivated area in the selected customer record (inthe example shown here, the tenth cultivated area) are deleted.Fig. 93•CPress key located under softkey (the information message “Delete?” appears)• Confirm the deletion process by pressing the key located under the softkey•BAbort the deletion process by pressing the key located under the softkeyNoteRepeat deletion of the counters for each previously created cultivated area as necessary.119
Pos : 1.9.24 /BA/Info-C enter/BiG M 400 / BiG M 500/Sc hnellzugrifftas ten/H ydraulisc he Ac hs feder ung Str aßenfahrt BM 400 @ 0\mod_1196055253118_78.doc @ 3085Pos : 1.9.25 /BA/-----Seitenumbruc h------ @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.doc @ 4165Info centre "EasyTouch"6.3.6 Quick access "Hydraulic axle suspension"6.3.6.1 From the "Road travel" basic screenFig. 94:When travelling on public roads, the front axle must be lowered to reach a transport height ofmax. 4 m.• Activating theCkey lowers axle suspension with inching.120
Pos : 1.9.26 /BA/Info-C enter/BiG M 400 / BiG M 500/Sc hnellzugrifftas ten/H ydraulisc he Ac hs feder ung Grundbil d Bil d BM 400 @ 46\mod_1283252574921_78.doc @ 447929Pos : 1.9.27 /BA/Info-C enter/BiG M 400 / BiG M 500/Sc hnellzugrifftas ten/H ydraulisc he Ac hs feder ung Grundbil d T ext BM 400/420 @ 51\mod_1288095723421_78.doc @ 478122Pos : 1.9.28 /BA/-----Seitenumbruc h------ @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.doc @ 4165Info centre "EasyTouch"6.3.6.2 From the "Field mode" basic screenFig. 95• Activating theCkey brings up the "Hydraulic axle suspension" submenu.The "Hydraulic axle suspension" menu appears.• Activating the or key for lifting axle suspension. (inching)• Activating the or key to approaching mowing position. (inching)• Activating the5or6key forlowering axle suspension. (inching)= Sensor B20 axle suspension= Sensor alive (axle suspension is located under the working position)= Sensor not alive (axle suspension is located above the working position)• Activating theDkey brings up the basic screen.• Pressing the key on the rotary potentiometer takes you one menu level back.121
Pos : 1.9.29 /BA/Info-C enter/BiG M 400 / BiG M 500/Sc hnellzugrifftas ten/Eins tell ung en Masc hi ne BM 400 @ 0\mod_1196058055462_78.doc @ 3<strong>123</strong>Pos : 1.10 /BA/-----Seitenumbruch------ @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.doc @ 4165Info centre "EasyTouch"6.3.7 Quick access "Machine settings"Fig. 96:Appears in basic screen "Road mode and field mode"• Activating theDkey brings up menu level "Machine setting".The "Machine settings" menu appears.NoteFor more information, see chapter "Machine settings"122
Pos : 1.11 /BA/Info-C enter/BiG M 400 / BiG M 500/M enüebene Kurzüberblic k @ 46\mod_1283255<strong>150</strong>984_78.doc @ 447983Pos : 1.12 /BA/-----Seitenumbruch------ @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.doc @ 4165Info centre "EasyTouch"6.3.8 Menu Level6.3.9 Short overview11-11-21-1-1<strong>02</strong>1-333-11-43-41-51-624 MärzMontag1-5-11-5-21-5-44 4-14-1-14-24-1-34-1-134-34-1-44-1-144-4 4-4-14-1-54-1-154-4-24-1-64-1-164-4-34-1-74-1-104-1-174-1-11CAN54-1-12BM 4<strong>000</strong>018_2Fig. 97<strong>123</strong>
Pos : 1.13 /BA/Info-C enter/BiG M 400 / BiG M 500/M enüebene aufr ufen @ 0\mod_1196058555821_78.doc @ 3161Pos : 1.14 /BA/-----Seitenumbruch------ @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.doc @ 4165Info centre "EasyTouch"6.3.10 Bringing up a Menu LevelFig. 98• You can bring up a menu level with the key on the rotary potentiometer.The display indicates the menu level.The menu level is divided into five main menus:= Main menu 1 "Settings"= Main menu 2 "Counters"= Main menu 3 "Maintenance"= Main menu 4 "Service"= Main menu 5 "Basic screen"• You can close the menu level that was called withon the rotary potentiometer.124
Pos : 1.15.1 /BA/Info-C enter/H auptmenüs /Hauptmenü 1 Eins tell ungen/H auptmenü „Ei nstellungen“ @ 0\mod_1196059117696_78.doc @ 3200Pos : 1.15.2 /BA/-----Seitenumbruc h------ @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.doc @ 4165Info centre "EasyTouch"6.4 Main Menu 1 "Settings"Fig. 99The main menu level is active.• Select main menu 1 with the rotary potentiometer.• Press the rotary potentiometer.The display shows menu level 1 "Settings".The main menu, "Settings", is divided up into six menus:= Menu 1-1 "Parameters"= Menu 1-2 "Machine setting"= Menu 1-3 "Units"= Menu 1-4 "Language"= Menu 1-5 "Display"= Menu 1-6 "Date/time"• Pressing the key on the rotary potentiometer takes you one menu level back.125
Pos : 1.15.3 /BA/Info-C enter/BiG M 400 / BiG M 500/H auptmenüs /Hauptmenü 1 Eins tell ungen/1-1 Parameter Big M 400 / 500/Menü 1- 1 Par ameter BiG M 400 @ 9\mod_1219816874593_78.doc @ 122840Pos : 1.15.4 /BA/-----Seitenumbruc h------ @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.doc @ 4165Info centre "EasyTouch"6.5 Menu 1-1 "Parameters"1-1-10 1-1-65 67 8B C DBM 400 0019_1Fig. 100:Main menu 1 "Settings" appears:• Select menu 1-1 "Parameters" with the rotary potentiometer.• Press the rotary potentiometer.The display indicates the menu level "Parameters".The "Parameter" menu is divided into two sub-menus:= Menu 1-1-10 "Work parameters"• You can use the rotary potentiometer to select the desired menu.Pressing the rotary potentiometer causes the parameters of the selected menu to be displayedor• Pressing the key on the rotary potentiometer takes you one menu level back.126
Pos : 1.15.5 /BA/Info-C enter/BiG M 400 / BiG M 500/H auptmenüs /Hauptmenü 1 Eins tell ungen/1-1 Parameter Big M 400 / 500/Ei ngabe von Par ameter n @ 41\mod_1271221822261_78.doc @ 368585Pos : 1.15.6 /BA/-----Seitenumbruc h------ @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.doc @ 4165Info centre "EasyTouch"6.5.1 Entering parametersFig. 101NoteAs long as data is being read, the current process can be stopped by pressing thekeynext to the softkey.• Pressing the rotary potentiometer allows you to jump to the input field.• You can use the rotary potentiometer to set the desired value.• When you press the rotary potentiometer, you exit the input field and the value that wasentered is applied.NoteTo apply the default setting values, press the5key next to thesoftkey.• To jump back to the screen that was previously displayed, press the7key next to thesoftkey.• Pressing the key on the rotary potentiometer takes you one menu level back.NoteFor additional information on the individual parameters, please refer to the parameter list inappendix "Parameter List".127
Pos : 1.15.7 /BA/Info-C enter/H auptmenü 1 Ei nstellungen/1-2 Eins tell ung M asc hine Big M 400/M enü 1-2 Ei nstellung Mas chi ne BM 400 @ 46\mod_1283257258968_78.doc @ 448093Pos : 1.15.8 /BA/Info-C enter/BiG M 400 / BiG M 500/M enüer kär ung für Sei te 1 bis 3 @ 51\mod_1288099830734_78.doc @ 478252Pos : 1.15.9 /BA/Info-C enter/H auptmenü 1 Ei nstellungen/1-2 Eins tell ung M asc hine Big M 400/M enü 1-2 Menüer kärung Tasten Einstellung Masc hi ne @ 28\mod_1250603053175_78.doc @ 275901Pos : 1.15.10 /BA/-----Seitenumbruc h------ @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.doc @ 4165Info centre "EasyTouch"6.6 Menu 1-2 "Machine setting"CVSemi50cmFig. 1<strong>02</strong>Main menu 1 "Settings" appears:• Select main menu 1-2 "Machine setting" with the rotary potentiometer.• Press the rotary potentiometer.The display shows menu level "Machine setting".The "Machine setting" menu is divided into 3 pages:Explanation of menu for pages 1 to 3:• Press the• Press theBCkey to bring up the previous page of the "Machine setting" menu.key to bring up the next page of the "Machine setting" menu.• Activating theDkey brings up the basic screen.• You can use the rotary potentiometer to select the desired setting. The selection box ishighlighted in colour.• Pressing the rotary potentiometer allows you to jump to the selection box.• You can use the rotary potentiometer to set the desired value.• Pressing the rotary potentiometer causes the setting to be applied and returns you fromthe selection box• Pressing the key on the rotary potentiometer takes you one menu level back.128
Pos : 1.15.11 /BA/Info-Center/Bi G M 400 / BiG M 500/Ei nstell möglichkeiten (Seite1/3) @ 51\mod_12881<strong>02</strong>051312_78.doc @ 478382Pos : 1.15.12 /BA/Info-Center/Hauptmenü 1 Eins tell ung en/1- 2 Ei nstellung M aschi ne Big M 400/Menü 1-2 ( Seite 1a) Bi G M 400/420 @ 46\mod_1283260105593_78.doc @ 448172Pos : 1.15.13 /BA/-----Seitenumbruc h------ @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.doc @ 4165Info centre "EasyTouch"Setting options (page 1/3)Fig. 1031) Select betweenandCV = tines conditionerCRI= roller conditioner2) Setting for lifting mechanism, front axle on headlandFront axle can only be raised in manual mode.SemiSemi-automatic lifting:The semi-automatic lifting mechanism moves the front axle into the operating positionas soon as at least one mowing unit drive is connected.AutoAutomatic lifting:The automatic lifting mechanism moves the front axle into the operating position,or• as soon as at least one mowing unit drive is connected• a mowing unit is lowered from the headland position into the operating position. Inaddition, the automatic lifting mechanism lifts the front axle again as soon as the"lift all mowing units" function is actuated on the multi-function lever.129
Pos : 1.15.14 /BA/Info-Center/Hauptmenü 1 Eins tell ung en/1- 2 Ei nstellung M aschi ne Big M 400/Menü 1-2 ( Seite 1b/3) Bi G M 400 @ 46\mod_1283258564343_78.doc @ 448146Pos : 1.15.15 /BA/-----Seitenumbruc h------ @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.doc @ 4165Info centre "EasyTouch"CVSemi50cmPic. 1043) Spring compensation settinghydraulically adjustable spring compensation switched on.hydraulically adjustable spring compensation switched off.4) Adjust overcut in cm / inch5) Selection of mowing unit additional equipment (optional)Both augers selectedOnly right hand auger selectedOnly left hand auger selectedBoth augers selectedHay hood selected6) Switch hydraulically adjustable cutting height on and offhydraulically adjustable cutting height switched on.hydraulically adjustable cutting height switched off.130
Pos : 1.15.16 /BA/Info-Center/Bi G M 400 / BiG M 500/Ei nstell möglichkeiten (Seite2/3) @ 51\mod_1288101419671_78.doc @ 478330Pos : 1.15.17 /BA/Info-Center/Hauptmenü 1 Eins tell ung en/1- 2 Ei nstellung M aschi ne Big M 400/Menü 1-2 Bild Fahrhebel alt @ 0\mod_1197530936835_78.doc @ 24136Pos : 1.15.18 /BA/Info-Center/Hauptmenü 1 Eins tell ung en/1- 2 Ei nstellung M aschi ne Big M 400/Menü 1-2 ( Seite 2/3) T ext BM 400/420/500 @ 51\mod_1288100911312_78.doc @ 478304Pos : 1.15.19 /BA/-----Seitenumbruc h------ @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.doc @ 4165Info centre "EasyTouch"Setting options (page 2/3)Fig. 1051) Setting time / distance controlThe following descriptions refer to function (9,10) "Raise/lower all mowing units" on the multifunctionlever.Time control (determines the delay time of lifting or lowering the lateral mowing units tothe front mowing unit)Distance control (determines the distance still to be covered before the lateral mowingunits are raised or lowered to the front mowing unit).2) Input field: Delay time to raise lateral mowing units.3) Input field: Delay time to lower lateral mowing units.4) Input field: Distance to be covered before lifting lateral mowing units.5) Input field: Distance to be covered before lowering lateral mowing units.131
Pos : 1.15.20 /BA/Info-Center/Bi G M 400 / BiG M 500/Ei nstell möglichkeiten (Seite3/3) @ 51\mod_12881<strong>02</strong>821890_78.doc @ 478434Pos : 1.15.21 /BA/Info-Center/Hauptmenü 1 Eins tell ung en/1- 2 Ei nstellung M aschi ne Big M 400/Menü 1-2 ( Seite 3/3) BiG M 400 @ 0\mod_1197532536804_78.doc @ 24198Pos : 1.15.22 /BA/-----Seitenumbruc h------ @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.doc @ 4165Info centre "EasyTouch"Setting options (page 3/3)5 6<strong>123</strong>7 8B C D BM 400 0037Fig. 106To set automatic cleaning time:You can set the cleaning time, pause time and window time here.1) Cleaning time = The time the compressor is running.2) Pause time = The time in which no automatic cleaning is performed.3) Window time =• If the "Raise mower" function is triggered within the window time, the cleaning timebegins.• If the "Raise mower" function is not triggered within the window time, the cleaningtime begins no later than when the window time elapses.The time interval begins as soon as at least one of the mowing unit drives has been turned on.NoteThe time interval until the cleaning time begins consists of the pause time and the window time.132
Pos : 1.15.23 /BA/Info-Center/Hauptmenüs/H auptmenü 1 Ei nstellungen/M enü 1-3 „Einheiten“ @ 0\mod_1197532786335_78.doc @ 24301Pos : 1.15.24 /BA/-----Seitenumbruc h------ @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.doc @ 4165Info centre "EasyTouch"6.6.1 Menu 1-3 "Units"Fig. 107Main menu 1 "Settings" appears:• Select menu 1-3 "Units" with the rotary potentiometer.• Press the rotary potentiometer.The display indicates the selected measuring units. The currently set measuring unit ishighlighted in colour.= Anglo-American units active= English/American units active= Metric (SI) units= Metric (SI) units inactiveSetting the measuring units:• You can use the rotary potentiometer to select the desired setting.• Pressing the rotary potentiometer causes the setting to be applied. (The selection box ishighlighted in colour.)• Pressing the key on the rotary potentiometer takes you one menu level back.133
Pos : 1.15.25 /BA/Info-Center/Hauptmenüs/H auptmenü 1 Ei nstellungen/M enü 1-4 „Sprac he“ @ 0\mod_1197534666632_78.doc @ 24320Pos : 1.15.26 /BA/-----Seitenumbruc h------ @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.doc @ 4165Info centre "EasyTouch"6.6.2 Menu 1-4 "Language"Fig. 108Main menu 1 "Settings" appears:• Select menu 1-4 "Language" with the rotary potentiometer.• Press the rotary potentiometer.The display shows the language selection.Set language(1) = currently set language(2)= shows the selected language• You can select the language you want with the rotary potentiometer.• To confirm the selection, press the rotary potentiometer.• Pressing the key on the rotary potentiometer takes you one menu level back.NoteThe selected language will be active after the machine is restarted (ignition off and on again)134
Pos : 1.15.27 /BA/Info-Center/Hauptmenüs/H auptmenü 1 Ei nstellungen/M enü 1-5 „Display“ @ 9\mod_1219818725062_78.doc @ 122955Pos : 1.15.28 /BA/-----Seitenumbruc h------ @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.doc @ 4165Info centre "EasyTouch"6.6.3 Menu 1-5 "Display"5 67 8B C DBM4<strong>000</strong>225Fig. 109Main menu 1 "Settings" appears:• Select menu 1-5 "Display" with the rotary potentiometer.• Press the rotary potentiometer.The display shows menu level 1-5 "Display".The "Display" menu is divided into two sub-menus:= menu 1-5-1 "Contrast"= menu 1-5-2 "Beeper"= menu 1-5-4 "Direction of Rotation"• Pressing the key on the rotary potentiometer takes you one menu level back.135
Pos : 1.15.29 /BA/Info-Center/Hauptmenüs/H auptmenü 1 Ei nstellungen/M enü 1-5- 1 „Kontras t“ @ 9\mod_1219844730062_78.doc @ 124157Pos : 1.15.30 /BA/-----Seitenumbruc h------ @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.doc @ 4165Info centre "EasyTouch"6.6.4 Menu 1-5-1 "Contrast"Fig. 110You can adjust the brightness of the display in the "Contrast" Diagnostics menu.Menu 1-5 "Display" is active.• Select menu 1-5-1 "Contrast" with the rotary potentiometer.• Press the rotary potentiometer.The "Contrast" setting appears.= Day design= Night designThe value after the symbols / indicates the set brightness value.Setting and saving the brightnessThe higher the value after the / symbols the greater the brightness of the display.• You can use the rotary potentiometer to make the desired selection. (The selection box ishighlighted in colour.)• Pressing the rotary potentiometer allows you to jump to the selection box. (The selectionbox is highlighted in colour.)• Turning the rotary potentiometer increases or reduces the value.• Pressing the rotary potentiometer causes the setting to be applied and returns you fromthe selection box.• Pressing the key on the rotary potentiometer takes you one menu level back.136
Pos : 1.15.31 /BA/Info-Center/Hauptmenüs/H auptmenü 1 Ei nstellungen/M enü 1-5- 2 Beeper @ 41\mod_1271226151715_78.doc @ 368686Pos : 1.15.32 /BA/-----Seitenumbruc h------ @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.doc @ 4165Info centre "EasyTouch"6.6.5 Menu 1-5-2 BeeperPic. 111The acoustic signal (beeper) for alarm messages, information messages and for pressing a keycan be activated and deactivated in this menu. For alarm messages and information messagesthe duration of the tone can be set additionally.Menu 1-5 "Display" is active.• Select menu 1-5-2 "Beeper" with the rotary potentiometer• Press the rotary potentiometerThe display indicates the beeper settings.= Key pressedBeeper function= Alarm Message= Information message= Beeper inactive = Beeper active = Beeper limited by timeActivate / deactivate beeper• Pressing the rotary potentiometer allows you to jump to the selection box. (The selectionbox is highlighted in colour)• You can use the rotary potentiometer to adjust the desired function• Pressing the rotary potentiometer causes the setting to be applied and returns you fromthe selection box• Pressing the key on the rotary potentiometer takes you one menu level back137
Pos : 1.15.33 /BA/Info-Center/Hauptmenüs/H auptmenü 1 Ei nstellungen/M enü 1-5- 2 Beeper z eitlic h begrenz en @ 41\mod_1271228361090_78.doc @ 368764Pos : 1.15.34 /BA/-----Seitenumbruc h------ @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.doc @ 4165Info centre "EasyTouch"6.6.6 Beeper limited by timeFig. 112• Pressing the rotary potentiometer allows you to jump to the selection box. (The selectionbox is highlighted in colour.)• You can use the rotary potentiometer to select the desired setting ( ).• Press the rotary potentiometer (a new input field appears).• Press the rotary potentiometer to jump to a new input field. (The input box is highlightedin colour.)• Press the rotary potentiometer. (The input box is highlighted in colour.)• You can use the rotary potentiometer to set the desired value.• Pressing the rotary potentiometer causes the setting to be applied and returns you fromthe selection box.• Pressing the key on the rotary potentiometer takes you one menu level back.138
Pos : 1.15.35 /BA/Info-Center/Hauptmenüs/H auptmenü 1 Ei nstellungen/M enü 1-5- 4 Drehrichtung @ 9\mod_1219834882312_78.doc @ <strong>123</strong>583Pos : 1.15.36 /BA/-----Seitenumbruc h------ @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.doc @ 4165Info centre "EasyTouch"6.6.7 Menu 1-5-4 Direction of RotationFig. 113The direction of rotation of the rotary potentiometer for scrolling can be changed in this menu.The rotary potentiometer is set in the factory so that turning it to the left scrolls down and turningit to the right scrolls up (as indicated by the blue arrow) (1).Menu 1-5 "Display" is active.• Select menu 1-5-4 "Direction of rotation" with the rotary potentiometer.• Press the rotary potentiometer.The display shows a list for which the direction of rotation can be changed for the rotarypotentiometer.• Activating the or key to change the direction of rotation for theparameter list• Activating the or key to change the direction of rotation for inputfields.• Activating the5or6key tochange the direction of rotation for menus.NoteThe blue arrow (1) indicates the direction of rotation for the rotary potentiometer to scroll down.• Pressing theBkey under thesoftkey brings up the basic screen.• To apply the default setting values, press the key under the softkey.139
Pos : 1.15.37 /BA/Info-Center/Hauptmenüs/H auptmenü 1 Ei nstellungen/M enü 1-6 „Datum/U hrzei t“ @ 0\mod_1197537588241_78.doc @ 25174Pos : 1.16 /BA/-----Seitenumbruch------ @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.doc @ 4165Info centre "EasyTouch"6.6.8 Menu 1-6 Date/timeFig. 114Main menu 1 "Settings" appears:• Select menu 1-6 "Date/time" with the rotary potentiometer.• Press the rotary potentiometer.The display shows the date and the time.To set date/time• You can use the rotary potentiometer to select the desired setting. The entry box ishighlighted in colour.• Pressing the rotary potentiometer allows you to jump to the input field.• Set the desired date/time with the rotary potentiometer.• Pressing the rotary potentiometer causes the setting to be applied and returns you fromthe selection field.• Pressing the key on the rotary potentiometer takes you one menu level back.140
Pos : 1.17.1 /BA/Info-C enter/H auptmenüs /Hauptmenü 2 Z ähl er/H auptmenü 2 „Z ähl er“ @ 0\mod_1197538825007_78.doc @ 25234Pos : 1.17.2 /BA/-----Seitenumbruc h------ @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.doc @ 4165Info centre "EasyTouch"6.7 Main Menu 2 CountersFig. 115• You can bring up a menu level with the key on the rotary potentiometer.• Select main menu 2 "Counter" with the rotary potentiometer.• Press the rotary potentiometer.The display shows various counters.Counter level (sets)= total bale counter (cannot be deleted)= counter level 1 (can be deleted)= counter level 2 (can be deleted)= counter level 3 (can be deleted)6.7.1 Machine Data CounterCounter (active counters are highlighted colour)= operating hour counter (h)= working hours counter (h)= surface counter (ha)= odometer (both road and field mode)= fuel consumption (l)141
Pos : 1.17.3 /BA/Info-C enter/H auptmenüs /Hauptmenü 2 Z ähl er/H auptmenü 2 Lösc hen der Masc hi nendatenzähl er @ 0\mod_1197539919085_78.doc @ 25253Pos : 1.18 /BA/-----Seitenumbruch------ @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.doc @ 4165Info centre "EasyTouch"6.7.1.1 Deleting the Machine Data Counters (Sets 1 to 3)Fig. 116Machine data for counter levels (sets) 1 to 3 can be deleted in this menu.• You can bring up a menu level with the key on the rotary potentiometer.• Select main menu 2 "Counter" with the rotary potentiometer.• Press the rotary potentiometer.The display shows various counters.• Activate the key for or the key to select the counter level (1) to bedeleted.• Pressing theC key under the softkey deletes all counters in a set. (Only thecounters of sets 1 to 3 can be deleted.)• Pressing the key on the rotary potentiometer takes you one menu level back.• Pressing theBkey under thesoftkey brings up the basic screen6.7.2 Switching to Customer DataCounters• Pressing the key under the softkey brings up the "Customer data counter"menu.For more information, see Section "Customer Data Counters"142
Pos : 1.19.1 /BA/Info-C enter/BiG M 400 / BiG M 500/H auptmenüs /Hauptmenü 3 Wartung/Menü 3/H auptmenü 3 „ Wartung“ Bi G M 400 @ 46\mod_1283264566453_78.doc @ 448281Pos : 1.19.2 /BA/-----Seitenumbruc h------ @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.doc @ 4165Info centre "EasyTouch"6.8 Main Menu 3 MaintenanceFig. 117• You can bring up a menu level with the key on the rotary potentiometer.• Select main menu 3 "Maintenance" with the rotary potentiometer.• Press the rotary potentiometer.The display shows menu level 3 "Maintenance".The main menu “Maintenance” is divided up into two menus:=Menu 3-1 "Calibration of cutting height"= Menu 3-2 „Manual mode“• Pressing the key on the rotary potentiometer takes you one menu level back.143
Pos : 1.19.3 /BA/Info-C enter/BiG M 400 / BiG M 500/H auptmenüs /Hauptmenü 3 Wartung/Menü 3-1/M enü 3- 1 „Kalibrier ung Sc hni tthöhe“ BiG M 400 @ 46\mod_1283265079671_78.doc @ 448307Info centre "EasyTouch"6.8.1 Menu 3-1 "Calibration of cutting height"Danger! - Unexpected switching on of drivesEffect: Danger to life or serious injuries.• Travelling gear release switch must be switched off.• Observe the following instructions very precisely!The sensors have been adjusted to record cutting height in the factory. Heavy demand and thesetting of components may cause an offset in the cutting pattern of the right / left and frontmowing unit. If this happens, the sensors must be recalibrated.NotePerform calibration on an even and solid surface.• Switch off the travelling gear release switchC• You can use the "Hydraulic axle suspension" key to move from the basic screen tomowing position. (See chapter "Quick Access to Hydraulic Axle Suspension".)• Use the multi-function lever to move the 3 mowing units into working position (floatsetting).144
Pos : 1.19.4 /BA/-----Seitenumbruc h------ @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.doc @ 4165Info centre "EasyTouch"Adjust all mowing units to 0°.Fig. 118To do this:• You can bring up a menu level with the key on the rotary potentiometer.• Select main menu 3 "Maintenance" with the rotary potentiometer.• Press the rotary potentiometer.• Select menu 3-1 "Calibration of cutting height" with the rotary potentiometer.• Press the rotary potentiometer.The display shows the cutting height setting.145
Pos : 1.19.5 /BA/Info-C enter/BiG M 400 / BiG M 500/H auptmenüs /Hauptmenü 3 Wartung/Menü 3-1/M enü 3- 1 All e M ähwer ke auf 0° eins tell en ausrichten @ 46\mod_1283317596765_78.doc @ 448365Pos : 1.19.6 /BA/-----Seitenumbruc h------ @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.doc @ 4165Info centre "EasyTouch"Aligning the Mowing UnitsFig. 119Front mowing unit:• Place a manual spirit level centred on the cutter bar.• Use the 1 or 2 key to align the cutter bar horizontally.Lateral mowing unit right:• Place a manual spirit level centred on the cutter bar.• Use the 3 or 4 key to align the cutter bar horizontally.Lateral mowing unit left:• Place a manual spirit level centred on the cutter bar.• Use the 51 25or 66key to align the cutter bar horizontally.• Loosen the angle of rotation sensors on the right and left mowing unit and set them inthe oblong hole until a value (1) of about 2900 mV to 3100 mV appears in the display(calibration screen).• Screw the angle of rotation sensors tightly into place.Save sensor value (2) for inclination 0°• Turn the rotary potentiometer to jump to the appropriate input field (2) (the input field ishighlighted in colour).• Press the rotary potentiometer. (The input box is highlighted in colour.)• When you press the rotary potentiometer again, the value (1) for inclination 0° is appliedin the input field (2).NoteThe sensor for the front mowing unit is not adjustable. However, the value must be accepted atthis point.146
Pos : 1.19.7 /BA/Info-C enter/BiG M 400 / BiG M 500/H auptmenüs /Hauptmenü 3 Wartung/Menü 3-4/BM 400/M enü 3- 4 „Handbetrieb“ BM 400 @ 46\mod_1283322224656_78.doc @ 448391Pos : 1.19.8 /BA/-----Seitenumbruc h------ @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.doc @ 4165Info centre "EasyTouch"6.8.2 Menu 3-4 „Manual mode“Fig. 120Under this menu item, mowing units can be lowered (inching) from transport into headlandposition and further into working position with the display. Or raised from working position intoheadland position and further into transport position.NoteLifting/lowering the mowing units is inching, which means there is no float position for lowermowing units.• You can bring up a menu level with the key on the rotary potentiometer.• Select main menu 3 "Maintenance" with the rotary potentiometer.• Press the rotary potentiometer.• Select menu 3-4 "Manual mode" with the rotary potentiometer.• Press the rotary potentiometer.The display indicates Manual mode.147
Pos : 1.19.9 /BA/Info-C enter/BiG M 400 / BiG M 500/H auptmenüs /Hauptmenü 3 Wartung/Menü 3-4/BM 400/M enü 3- 4 Symboler kl ärung @ 0\mod_1197552930351_78.doc @ 26011Pos : 1.19.10 /BA/-----Seitenumbruc h------ @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.doc @ 4165Info centre "EasyTouch"Explanation of symbols:Fig. 121= raise front mowing unit inching with the key.= lower front mowing unit inching with the key.= fold down left mowing unit inching from transport position to headland position with thekey.= fold down right mowing unit inching from transport position to headland position with thekey.= lower left mowing unit inching from headland position to working position with thekey.5= lower right mowing unit inching from headland position to working position with thekey.6= raise left mowing unit inching from working position to transport position with thekey.7= raise right mowing unit inching from working position to transport position with thekey.8148
Pos : 1.19.11 /Ü berschriften/Ü berschriften 3/P-T/Status anz eige der allgemei nen Sensor en (2) @ 0\mod_1197556508007_78.doc @ 26092Pos : 1.19.12 /BA/Info-Center/Bi G M 400 / BiG M 500/Hauptmenüs/H auptmenü 3 Wartung/Menü 3- 4/BM 400/M enü 3-4 Sensor B14_15_48_49 @ 9\mod_1219909987241_78.doc @ 124321Pos : 1.19.13 /BA/Info-Center/Bi G M 400 / BiG M 500/Status anz eige der allgemei nen Sensor en @ 0\mod_1197556322007_78.doc @ 26073Pos : 1.19.14 /BA/Info-Center/Bi G M 400 / BiG M 500/Aufr ufen Gr undbil d/M enüebene zur üc k @ 0\mod_1197556942913_78.doc @ 26130Pos : 1.20 /BA/-----Seitenumbruch------ @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.doc @ 4165Info centre "EasyTouch"6.8.3 Status display of general sensors (2)Fig. 122= Sensor B15 position mowing unit left= Sensor B14 position mowing unit right= Sensor B49 position transport position mowing unit left= Sensor B48 position transport position mowing unit right= Broken cable sensor= Sensor alive= Sensor not alive= Sensor short circuit• Activating theDkey brings up the basic screen.• Pressing the key on the rotary potentiometer takes you one menu level back.149
Pos : 1.21.1 /BA/Info-C enter/BiG M 400 / BiG M 500/H auptmenüs /Hauptmenü 4 Ser vic e/M enü 4-1- 1/H auptmenü 4 Ser vice @ 0\mod_1197557899632_78.doc @ 26358Pos : 1.21.2 /BA/-----Seitenumbruc h------ @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.doc @ 4165Info centre "EasyTouch"6.9 Main Menu 4 ServiceFig. <strong>123</strong>• You can bring up a menu level with the key on the rotary potentiometer.• Select main menu 4 "Service" with the rotary potentiometer.• Press the rotary potentiometer.The display shows menu level 4 "Service".The main menu "Service" is divided up into four menus:= Menu 4-1 "Diagnostics"= Menu 4-2 "Error list"= Menü 4-3 "Fitter's section (password-protected")= Menu 4-4 "Information"• Pressing thekey on the rotary potentiometer takes you one menu level back.<strong>150</strong>
Pos : 1.21.3 /BA/Info-C enter/BiG M 400 / BiG M 500/H auptmenüs /Hauptmenü 4 Ser vic e/M enü 4-1- 1/M enü 4-1 „Diagnos e“ BM 400 @ 46\mod_1283322738812_78.doc @ 448447Pos : 1.21.4 /BA/-----Seitenumbruc h------ @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.doc @ 4165Info centre "EasyTouch"6.9.1 Menu 4-1 DiagnosticsPic. 124Main menu 4 "Service" is called.• Select main menu 4-1 with the rotary potentiometer• Press the rotary potentiometerThe display shows menu level 4-1 "Diagnostics".The "Diagnostics" main menu is divided into thirteen menus:= Menu 4-1 "Front axle"= Menu 4-1-3 "Spring compensation"= Menu 4-1-4 "Cutting height"= Menu 4-1-5 "Swath hood"= Menu 4-1-6 "Levelling system"= Menu 4-1-7 “Front guard flaps"= Menu 4-1-10 "Work"= Menu 4-1-11 "CAN bus"= Menu 4-1-12 “Traction drive"= Menu 4-1-13 "Electronics"= Menu 4-1-14 "Diesel engine"= Menu 4-1-15 "Joystick"= Menu 4-1-16 "Control unit console"= Menu 4-1-17 "Terminal"• Pressing the key on the rotary potentiometer takes you one menu level back151
Pos : 1.21.5 /BA/Info-C enter/BiG M 400 / BiG M 500/H auptmenüs /Hauptmenü 4 Ser vic e/M enü 4-1- 1/M enü 4-1 Anz eige nicht erfüllter Fr eigabebeding ungen für di e Diag nos e @ 0\mod_1197560595085_78.doc @ 26530Pos : 1.21.6 /BA/-----Seitenumbruc h------ @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.doc @ 4165Info centre "EasyTouch"6.9.2 Display of Release Conditions Not Met for Diagnostics5 67 8Fig. 125B C D BM 400 0120Menu field (I) shows conditions that have not yet been met but which must be met to be able toperform diagnostics. An appropriate remedy must be found in each case.2<strong>000</strong>RPMDiesel engine speed not at 2<strong>000</strong> rpmGODiesel engine has not been startedSTOPDiesel engine is not offV > 0Speed of vehicle is not correctSwitch the axle separation release switch on or offSwitch the release switch autopilot on or offSwitch the travelling gear release switch on or offSwitch the road/field release switch on or offTurn release switch for parking brake on or offSeat switch (driver's seat is unoccupied)Open or close door152
Pos : 1.21.7 /BA/Info-C enter/BiG M 400 / BiG M 500/H auptmenüs /Hauptmenü 4 Ser vic e/M enü 4-1- 1/M enü 4-1 Anz eige möglicher Störungen für die Diagnos e BM 400 @ 0\mod_1197877645252_78.doc @ 29595Pos : 1.21.8 /BA/-----Seitenumbruc h------ @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.doc @ 4165Info centre "EasyTouch"6.9.3 Display of possible faults for diagnostics5 67 8Fig. 126:B C D BM 400 0121The faults listed below may appear in menu field (I).ADM1= Error CAN to ADM 1BEK= Error CAN to CUDIOM= Error CAN to DIOM= Error CAN to JoystickKMC1= Error CAN to KMC1SD= Error CAN to SD153
Pos : 1.21.9.1 /BA/Info-Center/BiG M 400 / BiG M 500/H auptmenüs /Hauptmenü 4 Ser vic e/M enü 4-1- 1/M enü 4-1- 1 „Diagnos e Ac hsfederung“ BM 400 @ 46\mod_1283323788093_78.doc @ 448535Pos : 1.21.9.2 /BA/Info-Center/BiG M 400 / BiG M 500/Fr eigabebeding ung en nic ht erfüllt @ 0\mod_1197561545538_78.doc @ 26549Pos : 1.21.9.3 /BA/Info-Center/BiG M 400 / BiG M 500/nächs te_vorherige M enüebene z ur üc k @ 0\mod_1197561687804_78.doc @ 26587Pos : 1.21.9.4 /BA/-----Seitenumbruc h------ @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.doc @ 4165Info centre "EasyTouch"6.9.4 Menu 4-1-1 Diagnostics of axle suspensionFig. 127Call the "Diagnostics" main menu 4.Select menu 4-1-1 "Diagnostics of axle suspension" with the rotary potentiometer.• Press the rotary potentiometer.Axle suspension diagnostics appears.The "Axle suspension" diagnostics menu is divided into 2 pages.Page 1: Sensor testPage 2: Actuator testMenu control for pages 1 to 2:NoteFor release conditions (1) not met see Section "Display of Release Conditions Not Met forDiagnostics"For faults (1) see Section "Display of Possible Faults for Diagnostics"• Press theCkey to bring up the next page of the menu.• Press the B key to bring up the previous page of the menu.• Pressing the key on the rotary potentiometer takes you one menu level back.154
Pos : 1.21.9.5 /BA/Info-Center/BiG M 400 / BiG M 500/H auptmenüs /Hauptmenü 4 Ser vic e/M enü 4-1- 1/Sens or B20 Achs federung @ 0\mod_1197610185837_78.doc @ 26645Pos : 1.21.9.6 /BA/Info-Center/BiG M 400 / BiG M 500/Statusanz eige der allgemeinen Sensor en @ 0\mod_1197556322007_78.doc @ 26073Pos : 1.21.9.7 /BA/Info-Center/BiG M 400 / BiG M 500/H auptmenüs /Aktor entest (Seite 2/2) @ 0\mod_1197610625431_78.doc @ 26684Pos : 1.21.9.8 /BA/Sicherheit/G efahr enhinweis e/Aktortest @ 47\mod_1285134152781_78.doc @ 455729Pos : 1.21.9.9 /BA/Info-Center/H auptmenüs /Hauptmenü 4 Ser vic e/Achtung: Vor dem Aktortest M asc hine g egen Wegroll en sichern, und die Mähwer ke auf den Boden abs enken @ 47\mod_1285136923281_78.doc @ 455755Pos : 1.21.9.10 /BA/Info-Center/Bi G M 400 / BiG M 500/Hauptmenüs/Hi nweis z u Aktoren @ 0\mod_1197611086806_78.doc @ 26722Pos : 1.21.9.11 /BA/-----Seitenumbr uc h------ @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.doc @ 4165Info centre "EasyTouch"Sensor Test (page 1/2)Fig. 128Status display of general sensors (2)= Sensor B20 axle suspension= Broken cable sensor= Sensor alive= Sensor not alive= Sensor short circuitActuator test (page 2/2)Danger! - Unexpected actions on the machine.Effect: Danger to life or serious injuries.• Only persons familiar with the machine are permitted to perform the actuator test• The person performing the test must know which machine parts are moved by actuatingthe actuators. If necessary, secure the actuated machine components againstunintentional lowering• The actuator test must only be performed from a safe position outside the area that isaffected by machine parts moved by the actuators• Make certain there are no persons, animals or objects in the danger zoneCAUTION!Secure the machine against rolling and lower the mowing units to the ground prior to theactuator test.Release conditions which have not been met (display in menu field (1)), but are necessary forthe actuator test, need to be realised.NoteIf an actuator is turned on, the next or previous page cannot be called. (If necessary, turn theactuator off and repeat the process)155
Pos : 1.21.9.12 /BA/Info-Center/Bi G M 400 / BiG M 500/Hauptmenüs/H auptmenü 4 Ser vice/Menü 4-1-1/Aktor entes t Achsfederung BM 400 @ 0\mod_1197611281618_78.doc @ 26741Pos : 1.21.9.13 /BA/Info-Center/Bi G M 400 / BiG M 500/Hauptmenüs/M ögliche Statusanz eige des angewählten Aktors @ 0\mod_1197611486993_78.doc @ 26760Pos : 1.21.9.14 /BA/Info-Center/Bi G M 400 / BiG M 500/Hauptmenüs/H auptmenü 4 Ser vice/Menü 4-1-1/Tabelle Ac hsfederung BM 400 @ 0\mod_1197611724790_78.doc @ 26779Pos : 1.21.10 /BA/-----Seitenumbruc h------ @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.doc @ 4165Info centre "EasyTouch"The actuator test is used to test actuators that have been attached to the machine for the “Axlesuspension” function.15 67 8B C D BM 400 0041Fig. 129(1) Shows required voltage for the actuators.Possible status display of the selected actuatorActuator turned offActuator turned onNoteThe status displays described above are valid for all actuators related to axle suspension.Valve Icon Description Switch on theactuatorTurn off theactuatorY19Main valveY15Lifting axle suspensionY16Lowering axle suspension5 6156
Pos : 1.21.11.1 /BA/Info-Center/Bi G M 400 / BiG M 500/Hauptmenüs/H auptmenü 4 Ser vice/Menü 4-1-3/Menü 4- 1-3 „Diagnos e F ederendtlas tung" @ 46\mod_1283325482906_78.doc @ 448591Pos : 1.21.11.2 /BA/Info-Center/Bi G M 400 / BiG M 500/Freigabebedingungen nicht erfüllt @ 0\mod_1197561545538_78.doc @ 26549Pos : 1.21.11.3 /BA/Info-Center/Bi G M 400 / BiG M 500/näc hste_vor herige Menüebene z urüc k @ 0\mod_1197561687804_78.doc @ 26587Pos : 1.21.11.4 /BA/-----Seitenumbr uc h------ @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.doc @ 4165Info centre "EasyTouch"6.9.5 Menu 4-1-3 Diagnostics of spring compensationFig. 130Call the "Diagnostics" main menu 4.• Select menu 4-1-3 "Diagnostics of spring compensation" with the rotary potentiometer.• Press the rotary potentiometer.Spring compensation diagnostics appears.The "Spring compensation" diagnostics menu is divided into 3 pages.PagePagePage1: Sensor Test2: Actuator test3: Actuator testMenu control for pages 1 to 3NoteFor release conditions (1) not met see Section "Display of Release Conditions Not Met forDiagnostics"For faults (1) see Section "Display of Possible Faults for Diagnostics"• Press theCkey to bring up the next page of the menu.• Press the B key to bring up the previous page of the menu.• Pressing the key on the rotary potentiometer takes you one menu level back.157
Pos : 1.21.11.5 /BA/Info-Center/Bi G M 400 / BiG M 500/Hauptmenüs/H auptmenü 4 Ser vice/Menü 4-1-3/Sensortest F ederentl astung ( 2) (Seite 1/3) @ 0\mod_1197617848837_78.doc @ 28267Pos : 1.21.11.6 /BA/-----Seitenumbr uc h------ @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.doc @ 4165Info centre "EasyTouch"Sensor test spring compensation (2) (page 1/3)Fig. 131:The sensor test is used to test sensors that have been attached to the machine for the springcompensation function.SensorSensor OKgreenSensor inactivetransparentSensor not OKredDescriptionB44Spring compensation leftB45Spring compensation right158
Pos : 1.21.11.7 /BA/Info-Center/Bi G M 400 / BiG M 500/Hauptmenüs/Aktorentest (Seite 2/3) @ 0\mod_1197618444<strong>02</strong>5_78.doc @ 28286Pos : 1.21.11.8 /BA/Sic herheit/Gefahrenhinweise/Aktortes t @ 47\mod_1285134152781_78.doc @ 455729Pos : 1.21.11.9 /BA/Info-Center/Hauptmenüs/H auptmenü 4 Ser vice/Ac htung: Vor dem Aktor tes t M asc hine gegen Wegrollen sic hern, und die M ähwer ke auf den Boden abs enken @ 47\mod_1285136923281_78.doc @ 455755Pos : 1.21.11.10 /BA/Info-C enter/BiG M 400 / Bi G M 500/H auptmenüs/Hinweis zu Aktor en @ 0\mod_1197611086806_78.doc @ 26722Pos : 1.21.11.11 /BA/-----Sei tenumbr uch------ @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.doc @ 4165Info centre "EasyTouch"Actuator test (page 2/3)Danger! - Unexpected actions on the machine.Effect: Danger to life or serious injuries.• Only persons familiar with the machine are permitted to perform the actuator test• The person performing the test must know which machine parts are moved by actuatingthe actuators. If necessary, secure the actuated machine components againstunintentional lowering• The actuator test must only be performed from a safe position outside the area that isaffected by machine parts moved by the actuators• Make certain there are no persons, animals or objects in the danger zoneCAUTION!Secure the machine against rolling and lower the mowing units to the ground prior to theactuator test.Release conditions which have not been met (display in menu field (1)), but are necessary forthe actuator test, need to be realised.NoteIf an actuator is turned on, the next or previous page cannot be called. (If necessary, turn theactuator off and repeat the process)159
Pos : 1.21.11.12 /BA/Info-C enter/BiG M 400 / Bi G M 500/H auptmenüs/H auptmenü 4 Ser vic e/M enü 4- 1-3/Aktorentest Federentl astung ( 2/3) @ 0\mod_1197618876212_78.doc @ 28305Pos : 1.21.11.13 /BA/Info-C enter/BiG M 400 / Bi G M 500/H auptmenüs/M ögliche Status anzeige des angewählten Aktors @ 0\mod_1197611486993_78.doc @ 26760Pos : 1.21.11.14 /BA/Info-C enter/BiG M 400 / Bi G M 500/H auptmenüs/T abelle Aktor en Hauptventile_Zus ats ventil 1+2 BM 400 @ 0\mod_1197619057915_78.doc @ 28325Pos : 1.21.11.15 /BA/-----Sei tenumbr uch------ @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.doc @ 4165Info centre "EasyTouch"The actuator test is used to test actuators that have been attached to the machine for the“Spring compensation” function.Fig. 1321. Shows required voltage for the actuators.2. Shows current flow with the actuator activated.Possible status display of the selected actuatorActuator turned offActuator turned onNoteThe status displays described here apply to all actuators related to valves (main valve,additional valve1 and additional valve2).Valve Icon Description Switch on theactuatorTurn off theactuatorY19Main valveY30 Additional valve 1Y41 Additional valve 25 6160
Pos : 1.21.11.16 /BA/Info-C enter/BiG M 400 / Bi G M 500/H auptmenüs/Aktorentest ( Sei te 3/3) @ 0\mod_1197620396431_78.doc @ 28345Pos : 1.21.11.17 /BA/Sic her heit/G efahr enhi nweis e/Aktortest @ 47\mod_1285134152781_78.doc @ 455729Pos : 1.21.11.18 /BA/Info-C enter/H auptmenüs/H auptmenü 4 Ser vic e/Ac htung: Vor dem Aktortest Mas chi ne gegen Wegrollen sic her n, und di e M ähwer ke auf den Boden absenken @ 47\mod_1285136923281_78.doc @ 455755Pos : 1.21.11.19 /BA/Info-C enter/BiG M 400 / Bi G M 500/H auptmenüs/Hinweis zu Aktor en @ 0\mod_1197611086806_78.doc @ 26722Pos : 1.21.11.20 /BA/-----Sei tenumbr uch------ @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.doc @ 4165Info centre "EasyTouch"Actuator test (page 3/3)Danger! - Unexpected actions on the machine.Effect: Danger to life or serious injuries.• Only persons familiar with the machine are permitted to perform the actuator test• The person performing the test must know which machine parts are moved by actuatingthe actuators. If necessary, secure the actuated machine components againstunintentional lowering• The actuator test must only be performed from a safe position outside the area that isaffected by machine parts moved by the actuators• Make certain there are no persons, animals or objects in the danger zoneCAUTION!Secure the machine against rolling and lower the mowing units to the ground prior to theactuator test.Release conditions which have not been met (display in menu field (1)), but are necessary forthe actuator test, need to be realised.NoteIf an actuator is turned on, the next or previous page cannot be called. (If necessary, turn theactuator off and repeat the process)161
Pos : 1.21.11.21 /BA/Info-C enter/BiG M 400 / Bi G M 500/H auptmenüs/H auptmenü 4 Ser vic e/M enü 4- 1-3/Aktorentest Federentl astung ( 3/3) @ 0\mod_1197621399243_78.doc @ 28384Pos : 1.21.11.22 /BA/Info-C enter/BiG M 400 / Bi G M 500/H auptmenüs/M ögliche Status anzeige des angewählten Aktors @ 0\mod_1197611486993_78.doc @ 26760Pos : 1.21.11.23 /BA/Info-C enter/BiG M 400 / Bi G M 500/H auptmenüs/H auptmenü 4 Ser vic e/M enü 4- 1-3/T abell e Aktoren F ederentl astung @ 0\mod_1197620752884_78.doc @ 28364Pos : 1.21.12 /BA/-----Seitenumbruc h------ @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.doc @ 4165Info centre "EasyTouch"The actuator test is used to test actuators that have been attached to the machine for the“Spring compensation” function.1 25 67 8B C D BM 400 0045Fig. 1331. Shows required voltage for the actuators.2. Shows current flow with the actuator activated.Possible status display of the selected actuatorActuator turned offActuator turned onNoteThe status displays described here apply to all actuators related to spring compensation.Valve Icon Description Switch on theactuatorTurn off theactuatorY31Spring compensation rightY42Spring compensation left162
Pos : 1.21.13.1 /BA/Info-Center/Bi G M 400 / BiG M 500/Hauptmenüs/H auptmenü 4 Ser vice/Menü 4-1-4/Menü 4- 1-4 Diagnos e Schnitthöhe Bild BM 400 @ 46\mod_1283328540437_78.doc @ 448674Pos : 1.21.13.2 /BA/Info-Center/Bi G M 400 / BiG M 500/Hauptmenüs/H auptmenü 4 Ser vice/Menü 4-1-4/Menü 4- 1-4 Diagnos e Schnitthöhe Text BM 400/500 @ 30\mod_1251361156886_78.doc @ 284896Pos : 1.21.13.4 /BA/Info-Center/Bi G M 400 / BiG M 500/näc hste_vor herige Menüebene z urüc k @ 0\mod_1197561687804_78.doc @ 26587Pos : 1.21.13.5 /BA/-----Seitenumbr uc h------ @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.doc @ 4165Info centre "EasyTouch"6.9.6 Menu 4-1-4 Diagnostics of cutting height4-1-45 67 8Fig. 134B C D BM 400 0052_1Call the "Diagnostics" main menu 4.• Select menu 4-1-4 "Diagnostics of cutting height" with the rotary potentiometer.• Press the rotary potentiometer.Cutting height diagnostics appears.The "Cutting height" diagnostics menu is divided into 4 pages.Page 1: Sensor testPage 2: Actuator testPage 3: Actuator testPage 4: Actuator testMenu control for pages 1 to 4Pos : 1.21.13.3 /BA/Info-Center/Bi G M 400 / BiG M 500/Freigabebedingungen nicht erfüllt @ 0\mod_1197561545538_78.doc @ 26549NoteFor release conditions (1) not met see Section "Display of Release Conditions Not Met forDiagnostics"For faults (1) see Section "Display of Possible Faults for Diagnostics"• Press theCkey to bring up the next page of the menu.• Press the B key to bring up the previous page of the menu.• Pressing the key on the rotary potentiometer takes you one menu level back.163
Pos : 1.21.13.6 /BA/Info-Center/Bi G M 400 / BiG M 500/Hauptmenüs/H auptmenü 4 Ser vice/Menü 4-1-4/Sensortest Schnitthöhe ( 2) (Seite 1/4) BM 400 @ 46\mod_1283329291171_78.doc @ 4487<strong>02</strong>Pos : 1.21.13.7 /BA/-----Seitenumbr uc h------ @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.doc @ 4165Info centre "EasyTouch"Sensor test cutting height (2) (page 1/4)Fig. 135The sensor test is used to test sensors that have been attached to the machine for the functionof the cutting height.SensorSensor OKgreenSensorinactivetransparentSensor not OKredDescriptionB43Cutting height – frontmowing unitB42Cutting height – rightlateral mowing unitB41Cutting height – left lateralmowing unit164
Pos : 1.21.13.8 /BA/Info-Center/Bi G M 400 / BiG M 500/Hauptmenüs/Aktorentest (Seite 2/4) @ 0\mod_1197622785056_78.doc @ 28464Pos : 1.21.13.9 /BA/Sic herheit/Gefahrenhinweise/Aktortes t @ 47\mod_1285134152781_78.doc @ 455729Pos : 1.21.13.10 /BA/Info-C enter/H auptmenüs/H auptmenü 4 Ser vic e/Ac htung: Vor dem Aktortest Mas chi ne gegen Wegrollen sic her n, und di e M ähwer ke auf den Boden absenken @ 47\mod_1285136923281_78.doc @ 455755Pos : 1.21.13.11 /BA/Info-C enter/BiG M 400 / Bi G M 500/H auptmenüs/Hinweis zu Aktor en @ 0\mod_1197611086806_78.doc @ 26722Pos : 1.21.13.12 /BA/-----Sei tenumbr uch------ @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.doc @ 4165Info centre "EasyTouch"Actuator test (page 2/4)Danger! - Unexpected actions on the machine.Effect: Danger to life or serious injuries.• Only persons familiar with the machine are permitted to perform the actuator test• The person performing the test must know which machine parts are moved by actuatingthe actuators. If necessary, secure the actuated machine components againstunintentional lowering• The actuator test must only be performed from a safe position outside the area that isaffected by machine parts moved by the actuators• Make certain there are no persons, animals or objects in the danger zoneCAUTION!Secure the machine against rolling and lower the mowing units to the ground prior to theactuator test.Release conditions which have not been met (display in menu field (1)), but are necessary forthe actuator test, need to be realised.NoteIf an actuator is turned on, the next or previous page cannot be called. (If necessary, turn theactuator off and repeat the process)165
Pos : 1.21.13.13 /BA/Info-C enter/BiG M 400 / Bi G M 500/H auptmenüs/H auptmenü 4 Ser vic e/M enü 4- 1-4/D er Aktortest dient zum Testen, der an der M asc hine für die Funkti on „Sc hnitthöhe“, verbauten Aktore @ 30\mod_1251366727948_78.doc @ 285519Pos : 1.21.13.14 /BA/Info-C enter/BiG M 400 / Bi G M 500/H auptmenüs/H auptmenü 4 Ser vic e/M enü 4- 1-4/Aktorentest Sc hnitthöhe (2/4) Bild BM 400 @ 46\mod_1283339395546_78.doc @ 449317Pos : 1.21.13.16 /BA/Info-C enter/BiG M 400 / Bi G M 500/H auptmenüs/M ögliche Status anzeige des angewählten Aktors @ 0\mod_1197611486993_78.doc @ 26760Pos : 1.21.13.17 /BA/Info-C enter/BiG M 400 / Bi G M 500/H auptmenüs/T abelle Aktor en Hauptventile_Zus ats ventil 1+2 BM 400 @ 0\mod_1197619057915_78.doc @ 28325Pos : 1.21.13.18 /BA/-----Sei tenumbr uch------ @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.doc @ 4165Info centre "EasyTouch"The actuator test is used to test actuators that have been attached to the machine for the“Cutting height” function.125 67 8B C DBM 400 0047_1Fig. 136Pos : 1.21.13.15 /BA/Info-C enter/BiG M 400 / Bi G M 500/H auptmenüs/H auptmenü 4 Ser vic e/M enü 4- 1-4/Anzeige Spannung/Stromfluss @ 30\mod_1251367035870_78.doc @ 2855441. Shows required voltage for the actuators.2. Shows current flow with the actuator activated.Possible status display of the selected actuatorActuator turned offActuator turned onNoteThe status displays described here apply to all actuators related to valves (main valve,additional valve1 and additional valve2).Valve Icon Description Switch on theactuatorTurn off theactuatorY19Main valveY30 Additional valve 1Y41 Additional valve 25 6166
Pos : 1.21.13.19 /BA/Info-C enter/BiG M 400 / Bi G M 500/H auptmenüs/Aktorentest ( Sei te 3/4) @ 0\mod_1197622875243_78.doc @ 28484Pos : 1.21.13.20 /BA/Sic her heit/G efahr enhi nweis e/Aktortest @ 47\mod_1285134152781_78.doc @ 455729Pos : 1.21.13.21 /BA/Info-C enter/H auptmenüs/H auptmenü 4 Ser vic e/Ac htung: Vor dem Aktortest Mas chi ne gegen Wegrollen sic her n, und di e M ähwer ke auf den Boden absenken @ 47\mod_1285136923281_78.doc @ 455755Pos : 1.21.13.22 /BA/Info-C enter/BiG M 400 / Bi G M 500/H auptmenüs/Hinweis zu Aktor en @ 0\mod_1197611086806_78.doc @ 26722Pos : 1.21.13.23 /BA/-----Sei tenumbr uch------ @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.doc @ 4165Info centre "EasyTouch"Actuator test (page 3/4)Danger! - Unexpected actions on the machine.Effect: Danger to life or serious injuries.• Only persons familiar with the machine are permitted to perform the actuator test• The person performing the test must know which machine parts are moved by actuatingthe actuators. If necessary, secure the actuated machine components againstunintentional lowering• The actuator test must only be performed from a safe position outside the area that isaffected by machine parts moved by the actuators• Make certain there are no persons, animals or objects in the danger zoneCAUTION!Secure the machine against rolling and lower the mowing units to the ground prior to theactuator test.Release conditions which have not been met (display in menu field (1)), but are necessary forthe actuator test, need to be realised.NoteIf an actuator is turned on, the next or previous page cannot be called. (If necessary, turn theactuator off and repeat the process)167
Pos : 1.21.13.24 /BA/Info-C enter/BiG M 400 / Bi G M 500/H auptmenüs/H auptmenü 4 Ser vic e/M enü 4- 1-4/D er Aktortest dient zum Testen, der an der M asc hine für die Funkti on „Sc hnitthöhe“, verbauten Aktore @ 30\mod_1251366727948_78.doc @ 285519Pos : 1.21.13.25 /BA/Info-C enter/BiG M 400 / Bi G M 500/H auptmenüs/H auptmenü 4 Ser vic e/M enü 4- 1-4/Aktorentest Sc hnitthöhe (3/4) Bild BM 400 @ 46\mod_1283340117671_78.doc @ 449399Pos : 1.21.13.27 /BA/Info-C enter/BiG M 400 / Bi G M 500/H auptmenüs/M ögliche Status anzeige des angewählten Aktors @ 0\mod_1197611486993_78.doc @ 26760Pos : 1.21.13.28 /BA/Info-C enter/BiG M 400 / Bi G M 500/H auptmenüs/H auptmenü 4 Ser vic e/M enü 4- 1-4/T abell e Aktoren Schnitthöhe 3/4 @ 46\mod_1283340572046_78.doc @ 449425Pos : 1.21.13.29 /BA/-----Sei tenumbr uch------ @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.doc @ 4165Info centre "EasyTouch"The actuator test is used to test actuators that have been attached to the machine for the“Cutting height” function.1 25 627 8B C D BM 400 0048_1Fig. 137Pos : 1.21.13.26 /BA/Info-C enter/BiG M 400 / Bi G M 500/H auptmenüs/H auptmenü 4 Ser vic e/M enü 4- 1-4/Anzeige Spannung/Stromfluss @ 30\mod_1251367035870_78.doc @ 2855441. Shows required voltage for the actuators.2. Shows current flow with the actuator activated.Possible status display of the selected actuatorActuator turned offActuator turned onNoteThe status displays described here apply to all Actuators related to cutting height.Valve Icon Description Switch on theactuatorTurn off theactuatorY34 Cutting height right 1Y36 Cutting height right 2Y37 Cutting height – front mowing unit 15 6Y38 Cutting height – front mowing unit 278168
Pos : 1.21.13.30 /BA/Info-C enter/BiG M 400 / Bi G M 500/H auptmenüs/Aktorentest ( Sei te 4/4) @ 0\mod_1197622923400_78.doc @ 28504Pos : 1.21.13.31 /BA/Sic her heit/G efahr enhi nweis e/Aktortest @ 47\mod_1285134152781_78.doc @ 455729Pos : 1.21.13.32 /BA/Info-C enter/H auptmenüs/H auptmenü 4 Ser vic e/Ac htung: Vor dem Aktortest Mas chi ne gegen Wegrollen sic her n, und di e M ähwer ke auf den Boden absenken @ 47\mod_1285136923281_78.doc @ 455755Pos : 1.21.13.33 /BA/Info-C enter/BiG M 400 / Bi G M 500/H auptmenüs/Hinweis zu Aktor en @ 0\mod_1197611086806_78.doc @ 26722Pos : 1.21.13.34 /BA/-----Sei tenumbr uch------ @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.doc @ 4165Info centre "EasyTouch"Actuator test (page 4/4)Danger! - Unexpected actions on the machine.Effect: Danger to life or serious injuries.• Only persons familiar with the machine are permitted to perform the actuator test• The person performing the test must know which machine parts are moved by actuatingthe actuators. If necessary, secure the actuated machine components againstunintentional lowering• The actuator test must only be performed from a safe position outside the area that isaffected by machine parts moved by the actuators• Make certain there are no persons, animals or objects in the danger zoneCAUTION!Secure the machine against rolling and lower the mowing units to the ground prior to theactuator test.Release conditions which have not been met (display in menu field (1)), but are necessary forthe actuator test, need to be realised.NoteIf an actuator is turned on, the next or previous page cannot be called. (If necessary, turn theactuator off and repeat the process)169
Pos : 1.21.13.35 /BA/Info-C enter/BiG M 400 / Bi G M 500/H auptmenüs/H auptmenü 4 Ser vic e/M enü 4- 1-4/D er Aktortest dient zum Testen, der an der M asc hine für die Funkti on „Sc hnitthöhe“, verbauten Aktore @ 30\mod_1251366727948_78.doc @ 285519Pos : 1.21.13.36 /BA/Info-C enter/BiG M 400 / Bi G M 500/H auptmenüs/H auptmenü 4 Ser vic e/M enü 4- 1-4/Aktorentest Sc hnitthöhe (4/4) BM 400 @ 46\mod_1283341098734_78.doc @ 449481Pos : 1.21.13.38 /BA/Info-C enter/BiG M 400 / Bi G M 500/H auptmenüs/M ögliche Status anzeige des angewählten Aktors @ 0\mod_1197611486993_78.doc @ 26760Pos : 1.21.13.39 /BA/Info-C enter/BiG M 400 / Bi G M 500/H auptmenüs/H auptmenü 4 Ser vic e/M enü 4- 1-4/T abell e Aktoren Schnitthöhe 4/4 @ 46\mod_1283341654625_78.doc @ 449507Pos : 1.21.14 /BA/-----Seitenumbruc h------ @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.doc @ 4165Info centre "EasyTouch"The actuator test is used to test actuators that have been attached to the machine for the“Cutting height” function.15 67 8Fig. 138B C D BM 400 0049_1Pos : 1.21.13.37 /BA/Info-C enter/BiG M 400 / Bi G M 500/H auptmenüs/H auptmenü 4 Ser vic e/M enü 4- 1-4/Anzeige Spannung @ 30\mod_1251373725917_78.doc @ 2862741. Shows required voltage for the actuators.Possible status display of the selected actuatorActuator turned offActuator turned onNoteThe status displays described here apply to all Actuators related to cutting height.Valve Icon Description Switch on theactuatorTurn off theactuatorY39 Cutting height – left lateral mowing unit 1Y34 Cutting height – left lateral mowing unit 2170
Pos : 1.21.15.1 /BA/Info-Center/Bi G M 400 / BiG M 500/Hauptmenüs/H auptmenü 4 Ser vice/Menü 4-1-5/Menü 4- 1-5 Diagnos e hydraulische Sc hnec kenhaube Bil d BM 400 @ 46\mod_12833440<strong>02</strong>875_78.doc @ 449562Pos : 1.21.15.2 /BA/Info-Center/Bi G M 400 / BiG M 500/Hauptmenüs/H auptmenü 4 Ser vice/Menü 4-1-5/Menü 4- 1-5 Diagnos e hydraulische Sc hnec kenhaube T ext BM 400/500 @ 30\mod_12513768755<strong>02</strong>_78.doc @ 287117Pos : 1.21.15.3 /BA/Info-Center/Bi G M 400 / BiG M 500/Freigabebedingungen nicht erfüllt @ 0\mod_1197561545538_78.doc @ 26549Pos : 1.21.15.4 /BA/Info-Center/Bi G M 400 / BiG M 500/näc hste_vor herige Menüebene z urüc k @ 0\mod_1197561687804_78.doc @ 26587Pos : 1.21.15.5 /BA/-----Seitenumbr uc h------ @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.doc @ 4165Info centre "EasyTouch"6.9.7 Menu 4-1-5 Diagnostics of hydraulic auger hoodFig. 139Call the "Diagnostics" main menu 4.• Select menu 4-1-5 "Diagnostics of hydraulic auger hood" with the rotary potentiometer.• Press the rotary potentiometer.Diagnostics for the hydraulic auger hood appears.The "Diagnostics of hydraulic auger hood" diagnostics menu is divided into 3 pages.Page 1: Sensor TestPage 2: Actuator testPage 3: Actuator testMenu control for pages 1 to 3NoteFor release conditions (1) not met see Section "Display of Release Conditions Not Met forDiagnostics"For faults (1) see Section "Display of Possible Faults for Diagnostics"• Press theCkey to bring up the next page of the menu.• Press the B key to bring up the previous page of the menu.• Pressing the key on the rotary potentiometer takes you one menu level back.171
Pos : 1.21.15.6 /BA/Info-Center/Bi G M 400 / BiG M 500/Hauptmenüs/H auptmenü 4 Ser vice/Menü 4-1-5/Sensortest hydr aulisc he Schnec kenhauben ( 2) (Seite 1/3) BM 400 @ 0\mod_1197628159400_78.doc @ 28695Pos : 1.21.15.7 /BA/-----Seitenumbr uc h------ @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.doc @ 4165Info centre "EasyTouch"Sensor test - hydraulic auger hoods (2) (page 1/3)Fig. 140The sensor test is used to test sensors that have been attached to the machine for the hydraulicauger hoods function.SwitchSwitchactivated greenSwitch not activatedtransparentDescriptionS2Hydraulic auger hoods leftS5Hydraulic auger hoods right172
Pos : 1.21.15.8 /BA/Info-Center/Bi G M 400 / BiG M 500/Hauptmenüs/Aktorentest (Seite 2/3) @ 0\mod_1197618444<strong>02</strong>5_78.doc @ 28286Pos : 1.21.15.9 /BA/Sic herheit/Gefahrenhinweise/Aktortes t @ 47\mod_1285134152781_78.doc @ 455729Pos : 1.21.15.10 /BA/Info-C enter/H auptmenüs/H auptmenü 4 Ser vic e/Ac htung: Vor dem Aktortest Mas chi ne gegen Wegrollen sic her n, und di e M ähwer ke auf den Boden absenken @ 47\mod_1285136923281_78.doc @ 455755Pos : 1.21.15.11 /BA/Info-C enter/BiG M 400 / Bi G M 500/H auptmenüs/Hinweis zu Aktor en @ 0\mod_1197611086806_78.doc @ 26722Pos : 1.21.15.12 /BA/-----Sei tenumbr uch------ @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.doc @ 4165Info centre "EasyTouch"Actuator test (page 2/3)Danger! - Unexpected actions on the machine.Effect: Danger to life or serious injuries.• Only persons familiar with the machine are permitted to perform the actuator test• The person performing the test must know which machine parts are moved by actuatingthe actuators. If necessary, secure the actuated machine components againstunintentional lowering• The actuator test must only be performed from a safe position outside the area that isaffected by machine parts moved by the actuators• Make certain there are no persons, animals or objects in the danger zoneCAUTION!Secure the machine against rolling and lower the mowing units to the ground prior to theactuator test.Release conditions which have not been met (display in menu field (1)), but are necessary forthe actuator test, need to be realised.NoteIf an actuator is turned on, the next or previous page cannot be called. (If necessary, turn theactuator off and repeat the process)173
Pos : 1.21.15.13 /BA/Info-C enter/BiG M 400 / Bi G M 500/H auptmenüs/H auptmenü 4 Ser vic e/M enü 4- 1-5/D er Aktortest /Tes ten, Funkti on „hydr aulisc he Schnec kenhauben“ @ 30\mod_1251378341908_78.doc @ 288297Pos : 1.21.15.14 /BA/Info-C enter/BiG M 400 / Bi G M 500/H auptmenüs/H auptmenü 4 Ser vic e/M enü 4- 1-5/Aktorentest hydr aulisc he Schnec kenhaube (2/3) Bild BM 400 @ 30\mod_1251378923174_78.doc @ 288847Pos : 1.21.15.16 /BA/Info-C enter/BiG M 400 / Bi G M 500/H auptmenüs/M ögliche Status anzeige des angewählten Aktors @ 0\mod_1197611486993_78.doc @ 26760Pos : 1.21.15.17 /BA/Info-C enter/BiG M 400 / Bi G M 500/H auptmenüs/T abelle Aktor en Hauptventile_Zus ats ventil 1+2 BM 400 @ 0\mod_1197619057915_78.doc @ 28325Pos : 1.21.15.18 /BA/-----Sei tenumbr uch------ @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.doc @ 4165Info centre "EasyTouch"The actuator test is used to test actuators that have been attached to the machine for the"Hydraulic auger hoods" function.125 67 8B C D BM 400 0055Fig. 141Pos : 1.21.15.15 /BA/Info-C enter/BiG M 400 / Bi G M 500/H auptmenüs/H auptmenü 4 Ser vic e/M enü 4- 1-4/Anzeige Spannung/Stromfluss @ 30\mod_1251367035870_78.doc @ 2855441. Shows required voltage for the actuators.2. Shows current flow with the actuator activated.Possible status display of the selected actuatorActuator turned offActuator turned onNoteThe status displays described here apply to all actuators related to valves (main valve,additional valve1 and additional valve2).Valve Icon Description Switch on theactuatorTurn off theactuatorY19Main valveY30 Additional valve 1Y41 Additional valve 25 6174
Pos : 1.21.15.19 /BA/Info-C enter/BiG M 400 / Bi G M 500/H auptmenüs/Aktorentest ( Sei te 3/3) @ 0\mod_1197620396431_78.doc @ 28345Pos : 1.21.15.20 /BA/Sic her heit/G efahr enhi nweis e/Aktortest @ 47\mod_1285134152781_78.doc @ 455729Pos : 1.21.15.21 /BA/Info-C enter/H auptmenüs/H auptmenü 4 Ser vic e/Ac htung: Vor dem Aktortest Mas chi ne gegen Wegrollen sic her n, und di e M ähwer ke auf den Boden absenken @ 47\mod_1285136923281_78.doc @ 455755Pos : 1.21.15.22 /BA/Info-C enter/BiG M 400 / Bi G M 500/H auptmenüs/Hinweis zu Aktor en @ 0\mod_1197611086806_78.doc @ 26722Pos : 1.21.15.23 /BA/-----Sei tenumbr uch------ @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.doc @ 4165Info centre "EasyTouch"Actuator test (page 3/3)Danger! - Unexpected actions on the machine.Effect: Danger to life or serious injuries.• Only persons familiar with the machine are permitted to perform the actuator test• The person performing the test must know which machine parts are moved by actuatingthe actuators. If necessary, secure the actuated machine components againstunintentional lowering• The actuator test must only be performed from a safe position outside the area that isaffected by machine parts moved by the actuators• Make certain there are no persons, animals or objects in the danger zoneCAUTION!Secure the machine against rolling and lower the mowing units to the ground prior to theactuator test.Release conditions which have not been met (display in menu field (1)), but are necessary forthe actuator test, need to be realised.NoteIf an actuator is turned on, the next or previous page cannot be called. (If necessary, turn theactuator off and repeat the process)175
Pos : 1.21.15.24 /BA/Info-C enter/BiG M 400 / Bi G M 500/H auptmenüs/H auptmenü 4 Ser vic e/M enü 4- 1-5/D er Aktortest /Tes ten, Funkti on „hydr aulisc he Schnec kenhauben“ @ 30\mod_1251378341908_78.doc @ 288297Pos : 1.21.15.26 /BA/Info-C enter/BiG M 400 / Bi G M 500/H auptmenüs/H auptmenü 4 Ser vic e/M enü 4- 1-5/Aktorentest hydr aulisc he Schnec kenhauben ( 3/3) Bil d BM 400 @ 30\mod_1251379241424_78.doc @ 289052Pos : 1.21.15.27 /BA/Info-C enter/BiG M 400 / Bi G M 500/H auptmenüs/M ögliche Status anzeige des angewählten Aktors @ 0\mod_1197611486993_78.doc @ 26760Pos : 1.21.15.28 /BA/Info-C enter/BiG M 400 / Bi G M 500/H auptmenüs/H auptmenü 4 Ser vic e/M enü 4- 1-5/T abell e Aktoren hydr aulisc he Schnec kenhauben BM 400 @ 0\mod_1197631161806_78.doc @ 28755Pos : 1.21.16 /BA/-----Seitenumbruc h------ @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.doc @ 4165Info centre "EasyTouch"The actuator test is used to test actuators that have been attached to the machine for the"Hydraulic auger hoods" function.Pos : 1.21.15.25 /BA/Info-C enter/BiG M 400 / Bi G M 500/H auptmenüs/H auptmenü 4 Ser vic e/M enü 4- 1-4/Anzeige Spannung/Stromfluss @ 30\mod_1251367035870_78.doc @ 2855441. Shows required voltage for the actuators.2. Shows current flow with the actuator activated.1 25 67 8B C DBM 400 0056Fig. 142Possible status display of the selected actuatorActuator turned offActuator turned onNoteThe status displays described above are valid for all actuators related to the hydraulic augerhood.Valve Icon Description Switch on theactuatorTurn off theactuatorY32Auger hoods rightY33 Auger hoods left 3176
Pos : 1.21.17.1 /BA/Info-Center/Bi G M 400 / BiG M 500/Hauptmenüs/H auptmenü 4 Ser vice/Menü 4-1-6/Menü 4- 1-6 Diagnos e H ang ausgl eich @ 46\mod_1283347867062_78.doc @ 449617Pos : 1.21.17.2 /BA/Info-Center/Bi G M 400 / BiG M 500/Freigabebedingungen nicht erfüllt @ 0\mod_1197561545538_78.doc @ 26549Pos : 1.21.17.3 /BA/Info-Center/Bi G M 400 / BiG M 500/näc hste_vor herige Menüebene z urüc k @ 0\mod_1197561687804_78.doc @ 26587Pos : 1.21.17.4 /BA/-----Seitenumbr uc h------ @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.doc @ 4165Info centre "EasyTouch"6.9.8 Menu 4-1-6 Sideshift diagnosticsFig. 143Call the "Diagnostics" main menu 4.• Select menu 4-1-6 "Diagnostics sideshift" with the rotary potentiometer.• Press the rotary potentiometer.Sideshift diagnostics appears.The "Sideshift" diagnostics menu is divided into 3 pages.Page 1: Sensor TestPage 2: Actuator testPage 3: Actuator testMenu control for pages 1 to 3NoteFor release conditions (1) not met see Section "Display of Release Conditions Not Met forDiagnostics"For faults (1) see Section "Display of Possible Faults for Diagnostics"• Press theCkey to bring up the next page of the menu.• Press the B key to bring up the previous page of the menu.• Pressing the key on the rotary potentiometer takes you one menu level back.177
Pos : 1.21.17.5 /BA/Info-Center/Bi G M 400 / BiG M 500/Hauptmenüs/H auptmenü 4 Ser vice/Menü 4-1-6/Sensortest Hangausgleic h ( 2) (Seite 1/3) @ 0\mod_1197632068728_78.doc @ 28816Pos : 1.21.17.6 /BA/Info-Center/Bi G M 400 / BiG M 500/Hauptmenüs/Aktorentest (Seite 2/3) @ 0\mod_1197618444<strong>02</strong>5_78.doc @ 28286Pos : 1.21.17.7 /BA/Sic herheit/Gefahrenhinweise/Aktortes t @ 47\mod_1285134152781_78.doc @ 455729Pos : 1.21.17.8 /BA/Info-Center/Hauptmenüs/H auptmenü 4 Ser vice/Ac htung: Vor dem Aktor tes t M asc hine gegen Wegrollen sic hern, und die M ähwer ke auf den Boden abs enken @ 47\mod_1285136923281_78.doc @ 455755Pos : 1.21.17.9 /BA/Info-Center/Bi G M 400 / BiG M 500/Hauptmenüs/Hi nweis z u Aktoren @ 0\mod_1197611086806_78.doc @ 26722Pos : 1.21.17.10 /BA/-----Sei tenumbr uch------ @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.doc @ 4165Info centre "EasyTouch"Sensor Test – Sideshift (2) (page 1/3)Fig. 144The sensor test is used to test sensors that have been attached to the machine for the sideshiftfunction.SwitchSwitch activatedgreenSwitch not activatedtransparentDescriptionS73SideshiftActuator test (page 2/3)Danger! - Unexpected actions on the machine.Effect: Danger to life or serious injuries.• Only persons familiar with the machine are permitted to perform the actuator test• The person performing the test must know which machine parts are moved by actuatingthe actuators. If necessary, secure the actuated machine components againstunintentional lowering• The actuator test must only be performed from a safe position outside the area that isaffected by machine parts moved by the actuators• Make certain there are no persons, animals or objects in the danger zoneCAUTION!Secure the machine against rolling and lower the mowing units to the ground prior to theactuator test.Release conditions which have not been met (display in menu field (1)), but are necessary forthe actuator test, need to be realised.NoteIf an actuator is turned on, the next or previous page cannot be called. (If necessary, turn theactuator off and repeat the process)178
Pos : 1.21.17.11 /BA/Info-C enter/BiG M 400 / Bi G M 500/H auptmenüs/H auptmenü 4 Ser vic e/M enü 4- 1-6/Aktorentest Hangausgleic h ( 2/3) @ 0\mod_1197632300884_78.doc @ 28836Pos : 1.21.17.12 /BA/Info-C enter/BiG M 400 / Bi G M 500/H auptmenüs/M ögliche Status anzeige des angewählten Aktors @ 0\mod_1197611486993_78.doc @ 26760Pos : 1.21.17.13 /BA/Info-C enter/BiG M 400 / Bi G M 500/H auptmenüs/T abelle Aktor en Hauptventile_Zus ats ventil 1+2 BM 400 @ 0\mod_1197619057915_78.doc @ 28325Pos : 1.21.17.14 /BA/-----Sei tenumbr uch------ @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.doc @ 4165Info centre "EasyTouch"The actuator test is used to test actuators that have been attached to the machine for the“Sideshift” function.125 67 8B C D BM 400 0059Fig. 1451. Shows required voltage for the actuators.2. Shows current flow with the actuator activated.Possible status display of the selected actuatorActuator turned offActuator turned onNoteThe status displays described here apply to all actuators related to valves (main valve,additional valve1 and additional valve2).Valve Icon Description Switch on theactuatorTurn off theactuatorY19Main valveY30 Additional valve 1Y41 Additional valve 25 6179
Pos : 1.21.17.15 /BA/Info-C enter/BiG M 400 / Bi G M 500/H auptmenüs/Aktorentest ( Sei te 3/3) @ 0\mod_1197620396431_78.doc @ 28345Pos : 1.21.17.16 /BA/Sic her heit/G efahr enhi nweis e/Aktortest @ 47\mod_1285134152781_78.doc @ 455729Pos : 1.21.17.17 /BA/Info-C enter/H auptmenüs/H auptmenü 4 Ser vic e/Ac htung: Vor dem Aktortest Mas chi ne gegen Wegrollen sic her n, und di e M ähwer ke auf den Boden absenken @ 47\mod_1285136923281_78.doc @ 455755Pos : 1.21.17.18 /BA/Info-C enter/BiG M 400 / Bi G M 500/H auptmenüs/Hinweis zu Aktor en @ 0\mod_1197611086806_78.doc @ 26722Pos : 1.21.17.19 /BA/-----Sei tenumbr uch------ @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.doc @ 4165Info centre "EasyTouch"Actuator test (page 3/3)Danger! - Unexpected actions on the machine.Effect: Danger to life or serious injuries.• Only persons familiar with the machine are permitted to perform the actuator test• The person performing the test must know which machine parts are moved by actuatingthe actuators. If necessary, secure the actuated machine components againstunintentional lowering• The actuator test must only be performed from a safe position outside the area that isaffected by machine parts moved by the actuators• Make certain there are no persons, animals or objects in the danger zoneCAUTION!Secure the machine against rolling and lower the mowing units to the ground prior to theactuator test.Release conditions which have not been met (display in menu field (1)), but are necessary forthe actuator test, need to be realised.NoteIf an actuator is turned on, the next or previous page cannot be called. (If necessary, turn theactuator off and repeat the process)180
Pos : 1.21.17.20 /BA/Info-C enter/BiG M 400 / Bi G M 500/H auptmenüs/H auptmenü 4 Ser vic e/M enü 4- 1-6/Aktorentest Hangausgleic h ( 3/3) @ 0\mod_1197632459321_78.doc @ 28856Pos : 1.21.17.21 /BA/Info-C enter/BiG M 400 / Bi G M 500/H auptmenüs/M ögliche Status anzeige des angewählten Aktors @ 0\mod_1197611486993_78.doc @ 26760Pos : 1.21.17.22 /BA/Info-C enter/BiG M 400 / Bi G M 500/H auptmenüs/H auptmenü 4 Ser vic e/M enü 4- 1-6/T abell e Aktoren H ang ausgleic h ( 3/3) @ 0\mod_1197873505393_78.doc @ 29515Pos : 1.21.18 /BA/-----Seitenumbruc h------ @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.doc @ 4165Info centre "EasyTouch"The actuator test is used to test actuators that have been attached to the machine for the"Sideshift" function.15 67 8B C D BM 400 0060Fig. 1461. Shows required voltage for the actuators.Possible status display of the selected actuatorActuator turned offActuator turned onNoteThe status displays described above are valid for all actuators related to the sideshift.Valve Icon Description Turn on theactuatorTurn off theactuatorY28Sideshift leftY29Sideshift right181
Pos : 1.21.19.1 /BA/Info-Center/Bi G M 400 / BiG M 500/Hauptmenüs/H auptmenü 4 Ser vice/Menü 4-1-7/BM 400/Menü 4- 1-7 Diagnos e Fr ontsc hutz klappen @ 46\mod_1283348927<strong>000</strong>_78.doc @ 449807Pos : 1.21.19.2 /BA/Info-Center/Bi G M 400 / BiG M 500/Freigabebedingungen nicht erfüllt @ 0\mod_1197561545538_78.doc @ 26549Pos : 1.21.19.3 /BA/Info-Center/Bi G M 400 / BiG M 500/näc hste_vor herige Menüebene z urüc k @ 0\mod_1197561687804_78.doc @ 26587Pos : 1.21.19.4 /BA/-----Seitenumbr uc h------ @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.doc @ 4165Info centre "EasyTouch"6.9.9 Menu 4-1-7 Diagnostics front guard flapsCANPic. 147The "Diagnostics" main menu 4 is called.• Select menu 4-1-7 “Diagnostics front guard flaps" with the rotary potentiometer• Press the rotary potentiometerFront guard flaps diagnostics appears.The diagnostics menu “Front guard flaps” is divided into 3 pages.Page 1: Sensor testPage 2: Actuator testPage 3: Actuator testMenu control for pages 1 to 3NoteFor release conditions (1) not met see Section "Display of Release Conditions Not Met forDiagnostics"For faults (1) see Section "Display of Possible Faults for Diagnostics"• Press theCkey to bring up the next page of the menu.• Press the B key to bring up the previous page of the menu.• Pressing the key on the rotary potentiometer takes you one menu level back.182
Pos : 1.21.19.5 /BA/Info-Center/Bi G M 400 / BiG M 500/Hauptmenüs/H auptmenü 4 Ser vice/Menü 4-1-7/BM 400/Sensortes t Fronts chutz kl appen (2) ( Seite 1/3) @ 46\mod_1283348928359_78.doc @ 449833Pos : 1.21.19.6 /BA/Info-Center/Bi G M 400 / BiG M 500/Hauptmenüs/Aktorentest (Seite 2/3) @ 0\mod_1197618444<strong>02</strong>5_78.doc @ 28286Pos : 1.21.19.7 /BA/Sic herheit/Gefahrenhinweise/Aktortes t @ 47\mod_1285134152781_78.doc @ 455729Pos : 1.21.19.8 /BA/Info-Center/Hauptmenüs/H auptmenü 4 Ser vice/Ac htung: Vor dem Aktor tes t M asc hine gegen Wegrollen sic hern, und die M ähwer ke auf den Boden abs enken @ 47\mod_1285136923281_78.doc @ 455755Pos : 1.21.19.9 /BA/Info-Center/Bi G M 400 / BiG M 500/Hauptmenüs/Hi nweis z u Aktoren @ 0\mod_1197611086806_78.doc @ 26722Pos : 1.21.19.10 /BA/-----Sei tenumbr uch------ @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.doc @ 4165Info centre "EasyTouch"Sensor test front guard flaps (2) (page 1/3)Fig. 148The sensor test is used to test sensors that have been attached to the machine for the functionof the front guard flaps.SwitchSwitchactivatedgreenSwitch notactivatedtransparentDescriptionS8Front guard flapsActuator test (page 2/3)Danger! - Unexpected actions on the machine.Effect: Danger to life or serious injuries.• Only persons familiar with the machine are permitted to perform the actuator test• The person performing the test must know which machine parts are moved by actuatingthe actuators. If necessary, secure the actuated machine components againstunintentional lowering• The actuator test must only be performed from a safe position outside the area that isaffected by machine parts moved by the actuators• Make certain there are no persons, animals or objects in the danger zoneCAUTION!Secure the machine against rolling and lower the mowing units to the ground prior to theactuator test.Release conditions which have not been met (display in menu field (1)), but are necessary forthe actuator test, need to be realised.NoteIf an actuator is turned on, the next or previous page cannot be called. (If necessary, turn theactuator off and repeat the process)183
Pos : 1.21.19.11 /BA/Info-C enter/BiG M 400 / Bi G M 500/H auptmenüs/H auptmenü 4 Ser vic e/M enü 4- 1-7/BM 400/Aktorentest Fronts chutz kl appen (2/3) @ 46\mod_1283348924562_78.doc @ 449755Pos : 1.21.19.12 /BA/Info-C enter/BiG M 400 / Bi G M 500/H auptmenüs/M ögliche Status anzeige des angewählten Aktors @ 0\mod_1197611486993_78.doc @ 26760Pos : 1.21.19.13 /BA/Info-C enter/BiG M 400 / Bi G M 500/H auptmenüs/T abelle Aktor en Hauptventile_Zus ats ventil 1+2 BM 400 @ 0\mod_1197619057915_78.doc @ 28325Pos : 1.21.19.14 /BA/-----Sei tenumbr uch------ @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.doc @ 4165Info centre "EasyTouch"The actuator test is used to test actuators that have been attached to the machine for thefunction of the “Front guard flaps”.125 67 8B C D BM 400 <strong>02</strong>62Fig. 1491. Shows required voltage for the actuators.2. Shows current flow with the actuator activated.Possible status display of the selected actuatorActuator turned offActuator turned onNoteThe status displays described here apply to all actuators related to valves (main valve,additional valve1 and additional valve2).Valve Icon Description Switch on theactuatorTurn off theactuatorY19Main valveY30 Additional valve 1Y41 Additional valve 25 6184
Pos : 1.21.19.15 /BA/Info-C enter/BiG M 400 / Bi G M 500/H auptmenüs/Aktorentest ( Sei te 3/3) @ 0\mod_1197620396431_78.doc @ 28345Pos : 1.21.19.16 /BA/Sic her heit/G efahr enhi nweis e/Aktortest @ 47\mod_1285134152781_78.doc @ 455729Pos : 1.21.19.17 /BA/Info-C enter/H auptmenüs/H auptmenü 4 Ser vic e/Ac htung: Vor dem Aktortest Mas chi ne gegen Wegrollen sic her n, und di e M ähwer ke auf den Boden absenken @ 47\mod_1285136923281_78.doc @ 455755Pos : 1.21.19.18 /BA/Info-C enter/BiG M 400 / Bi G M 500/H auptmenüs/Hinweis zu Aktor en @ 0\mod_1197611086806_78.doc @ 26722Pos : 1.21.19.19 /BA/-----Sei tenumbr uch------ @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.doc @ 4165Info centre "EasyTouch"Actuator test (page 3/3)Danger! - Unexpected actions on the machine.Effect: Danger to life or serious injuries.• Only persons familiar with the machine are permitted to perform the actuator test• The person performing the test must know which machine parts are moved by actuatingthe actuators. If necessary, secure the actuated machine components againstunintentional lowering• The actuator test must only be performed from a safe position outside the area that isaffected by machine parts moved by the actuators• Make certain there are no persons, animals or objects in the danger zoneCAUTION!Secure the machine against rolling and lower the mowing units to the ground prior to theactuator test.Release conditions which have not been met (display in menu field (1)), but are necessary forthe actuator test, need to be realised.NoteIf an actuator is turned on, the next or previous page cannot be called. (If necessary, turn theactuator off and repeat the process)185
Pos : 1.21.19.21 /BA/Info-C enter/BiG M 400 / Bi G M 500/H auptmenüs/M ögliche Status anzeige des angewählten Aktors @ 0\mod_1197611486993_78.doc @ 26760Pos : 1.21.19.22 /BA/Info-C enter/BiG M 400 / Bi G M 500/H auptmenüs/H auptmenü 4 Ser vic e/M enü 4- 1-7/BM 400/T abell e Aktoren Frontschutz klappen (3/3) @ 46\mod_1283348929593_78.doc @ 449859Pos : 1.21.20 /BA/-----Seitenumbruc h------ @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.doc @ 4165Info centre "EasyTouch"Pos : 1.21.19.20 /BA/Info-C enter/BiG M 400 / Bi G M 500/H auptmenüs/H auptmenü 4 Ser vic e/M enü 4- 1-7/BM 400/Aktorentest Fronts chutz kl appen (3/3) @ 46\mod_1283348925843_78.doc @ 449781The actuator test is used to test actuators that have been attached to the machine for thefunction of the “Front guard flaps”.15 67 8B C D BM 400 <strong>02</strong>63Fig. <strong>150</strong>1. Shows required voltage for the actuators.Possible status display of the selected actuatorActuator turned offActuator turned onNoteThe status displays described above are valid for all actuators related to the front guard flaps.Valve Symbol Description Switch on theactuatorSwitch off theactuatorY43 Front guard flaps 1Y44 Front guard flaps 2186
Pos : 1.21.21.1 /BA/Info-Center/Bi G M 400 / BiG M 500/Hauptmenüs/H auptmenü 4 Ser vice/Menü 4-1-10/M enü 4-1- 10 Diag nos e Arbeit BM 400 @ 46\mod_1283351935531_78.doc @ 450048Pos : 1.21.21.2 /BA/Info-Center/Bi G M 400 / BiG M 500/Freigabebedingungen nicht erfüllt @ 0\mod_1197561545538_78.doc @ 26549Pos : 1.21.21.3 /BA/Info-Center/Bi G M 400 / BiG M 500/näc hste_vor herige Menüebene z urüc k @ 0\mod_1197561687804_78.doc @ 26587Pos : 1.21.21.4 /BA/-----Seitenumbr uc h------ @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.doc @ 4165Info centre "EasyTouch"6.9.10 Menu 4-1-10 Diagnostics WorkFig. 151Call the "Diagnostics" main menu 4.• Select menu 4-1-6 "Diagnostics work" with the rotary potentiometer.• Press the rotary potentiometer.Work diagnostics appears.The "Work" diagnostics menu is divided into 6 pages.Page 1: Sensor TestPage 2: Sensor TestPage 3: Actuator testPage 4: Actuator testPage 5: Actuator testPage 6: Actuator testMenu control for pages 1 to 6NoteFor release conditions (1) not met see Section "Display of Release Conditions Not Met forDiagnostics"For faults (1) see Section "Display of Possible Faults for Diagnostics"• Press theCkey to bring up the next page of the menu.• Press the B key to bring up the previous page of the menu.• Pressing the key on the rotary potentiometer takes you one menu level back.187
Pos : 1.21.21.5 /BA/Info-Center/Bi G M 400 / BiG M 500/Hauptmenüs/H auptmenü 4 Ser vice/Menü 4-1-10/Sens ortest Arbeit (2) (Seite 1/6) BM 400 @ 0\mod_1197876567174_78.doc @ 29575Pos : 1.21.21.6 /BA/-----Seitenumbr uc h------ @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.doc @ 4165Info centre "EasyTouch"Sensor test work (2) (page 1/6)Fig. 152The sensor test is used to test sensors that have been attached to the machine for the workfunction.SensorSensor OKgreenSensor inactivetransparentSensor not OKredDescriptionB10Suction return air filterB33Hydraulic tank filling level188
Pos : 1.21.21.7 /BA/Info-Center/Bi G M 400 / BiG M 500/Hauptmenüs/H auptmenü 4 Ser vice/Menü 4-1-10/Sens ortest Arbeit (2) (Seite 2/6) @ 9\mod_1219915289585_78.doc @ 124432Pos : 1.21.21.8 /BA/Info-Center/Bi G M 400 / BiG M 500/Hauptmenüs/Ü berschrift Statusanz eige der allgemeinen Sensor en (2) @ 0\mod_1197884083518_78.doc @ 29633Pos : 1.21.21.9 /BA/Info-Center/Bi G M 400 / BiG M 500/Status anzeig e der allgemei nen Sens or en @ 0\mod_1197556322007_78.doc @ 26073Pos : 1.21.21.10 /BA/-----Sei tenumbr uch------ @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.doc @ 4165Info centre "EasyTouch"Sensor test work (2) (page 2/6)2 25 67 8B C DBM 400 0063_1Fig. 153Sensor designation:= Sensor B11 speed – front mowing unit= Sensor B12 speed – right lateral mowing unit= Sensor B13 speed – left lateral mowing unit= Sensor B14 position – right lateral mowing unit= Sensor B15 position – left lateral mowing unit= Sensor B28 speed – right auger= Sensor B29 speed – left auger= Sensor B49 position transport position mowing unit left= Sensor B48 position transport position mowing unit rightStatus display of general sensors (2)= Broken cable sensor= Sensor alive= Sensor not alive= Sensor short circuit189
Pos : 1.21.21.11 /BA/Info-C enter/BiG M 400 / Bi G M 500/H auptmenüs/Aktorentest ( Sei te 3/6) @ 0\mod_1197884281565_78.doc @ 29671Pos : 1.21.21.12 /BA/Sic her heit/G efahr enhi nweis e/Aktortest @ 47\mod_1285134152781_78.doc @ 455729Pos : 1.21.21.13 /BA/Info-C enter/H auptmenüs/H auptmenü 4 Ser vic e/Ac htung: Vor dem Aktortest Mas chi ne gegen Wegrollen sic her n, und di e M ähwer ke auf den Boden absenken @ 47\mod_1285136923281_78.doc @ 455755Pos : 1.21.21.14 /BA/Info-C enter/BiG M 400 / Bi G M 500/H auptmenüs/Hinweis zu Aktor en @ 0\mod_1197611086806_78.doc @ 26722Pos : 1.21.21.15 /BA/-----Sei tenumbr uch------ @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.doc @ 4165Info centre "EasyTouch"Actuator test (page 3/6)Danger! - Unexpected actions on the machine.Effect: Danger to life or serious injuries.• Only persons familiar with the machine are permitted to perform the actuator test• The person performing the test must know which machine parts are moved by actuatingthe actuators. If necessary, secure the actuated machine components againstunintentional lowering• The actuator test must only be performed from a safe position outside the area that isaffected by machine parts moved by the actuators• Make certain there are no persons, animals or objects in the danger zoneCAUTION!Secure the machine against rolling and lower the mowing units to the ground prior to theactuator test.Release conditions which have not been met (display in menu field (1)), but are necessary forthe actuator test, need to be realised.NoteIf an actuator is turned on, the next or previous page cannot be called. (If necessary, turn theactuator off and repeat the process)190
Pos : 1.21.21.16 /BA/Info-C enter/BiG M 400 / Bi G M 500/H auptmenüs/H auptmenü 4 Ser vic e/M enü 4- 1-10/Aktorentest Arbeit ( 3/6) @ 0\mod_1197884924049_78.doc @ 29747Pos : 1.21.21.17 /BA/Info-C enter/BiG M 400 / Bi G M 500/H auptmenüs/M ögliche Status anzeige des angewählten Aktors @ 0\mod_1197611486993_78.doc @ 26760Pos : 1.21.21.18 /BA/Info-C enter/BiG M 400 / Bi G M 500/H auptmenüs/H auptmenü 4 Ser vic e/M enü 4- 1-10/T abelle Aktor en Ar beit Hinweis @ 46\mod_1283405898156_78.doc @ 450075Pos : 1.21.21.19 /BA/Info-C enter/BiG M 400 / Bi G M 500/H auptmenüs/H auptmenü 4 Ser vic e/M enü 4- 1-10/T abelle Aktor en Ar beit (3/6) @ 0\mod_1197885546643_78.doc @ 29807Pos : 1.21.21.20 /BA/-----Sei tenumbr uch------ @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.doc @ 4165Info centre "EasyTouch"The actuator test is used to test actuators that have been attached to the machine for the"Work" function.15 67 8B C D BM 400 0064Fig. 1541. Shows required voltage for the actuators.Possible status display of the selected actuatorActuator turned offActuator turned onNoteThe status displays described above are valid for all actuators related to the work.Valve Icon Description Turn on theactuatorTurn off theactuatorY19Main valveY22Lateral mowing unit right liftY23Lateral mowing unit right lower5 6Y27Lateral mowing unit right fold down78191
Pos : 1.21.21.21 /BA/Info-C enter/BiG M 400 / Bi G M 500/H auptmenüs/Aktorentest ( Sei te 4/6) @ 0\mod_1197884308393_78.doc @ 29690Pos : 1.21.21.22 /BA/Sic her heit/G efahr enhi nweis e/Aktortest @ 47\mod_1285134152781_78.doc @ 455729Pos : 1.21.21.23 /BA/Info-C enter/H auptmenüs/H auptmenü 4 Ser vic e/Ac htung: Vor dem Aktortest Mas chi ne gegen Wegrollen sic her n, und di e M ähwer ke auf den Boden absenken @ 47\mod_1285136923281_78.doc @ 455755Pos : 1.21.21.24 /BA/Info-C enter/BiG M 400 / Bi G M 500/H auptmenüs/Hinweis zu Aktor en @ 0\mod_1197611086806_78.doc @ 26722Pos : 1.21.21.25 /BA/-----Sei tenumbr uch------ @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.doc @ 4165Info centre "EasyTouch"Actuator test (page 4/6)Danger! - Unexpected actions on the machine.Effect: Danger to life or serious injuries.• Only persons familiar with the machine are permitted to perform the actuator test• The person performing the test must know which machine parts are moved by actuatingthe actuators. If necessary, secure the actuated machine components againstunintentional lowering• The actuator test must only be performed from a safe position outside the area that isaffected by machine parts moved by the actuators• Make certain there are no persons, animals or objects in the danger zoneCAUTION!Secure the machine against rolling and lower the mowing units to the ground prior to theactuator test.Release conditions which have not been met (display in menu field (1)), but are necessary forthe actuator test, need to be realised.NoteIf an actuator is turned on, the next or previous page cannot be called. (If necessary, turn theactuator off and repeat the process)192
Pos : 1.21.21.26 /BA/Info-C enter/BiG M 400 / Bi G M 500/H auptmenüs/H auptmenü 4 Ser vic e/M enü 4- 1-10/Aktorentest Arbeit ( 4/6) @ 0\mod_1197885483846_78.doc @ 29787Pos : 1.21.21.27 /BA/Info-C enter/BiG M 400 / Bi G M 500/H auptmenüs/M ögliche Status anzeige des angewählten Aktors @ 0\mod_1197611486993_78.doc @ 26760Pos : 1.21.21.28 /BA/Info-C enter/BiG M 400 / Bi G M 500/H auptmenüs/H auptmenü 4 Ser vic e/M enü 4- 1-10/T abelle Aktor en Ar beit Hinweis @ 46\mod_1283405898156_78.doc @ 450075Pos : 1.21.21.29 /BA/Info-C enter/BiG M 400 / Bi G M 500/H auptmenüs/H auptmenü 4 Ser vic e/M enü 4- 1-10/T abelle Aktor en Ar beit (4/6) @ 0\mod_1197885035893_78.doc @ 29767Pos : 1.21.21.30 /BA/-----Sei tenumbr uch------ @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.doc @ 4165Info centre "EasyTouch"The actuator test is used to test actuators that have been attached to the machine for the"Work" function.15 67 8B C D BM 400 0065Fig. 1551. Shows required voltage for the actuators.Possible status display of the selected actuatorActuator turned offActuator turned onNoteThe status displays described above are valid for all actuators related to the work.Valve Icon Description Turn on theactuatorTurn off theactuatorY24Lateral mowing unit left lift1Y25Lateral mowing unit left lowerY26Lateral mowing unit left fold down5 6193
Pos : 1.21.21.31 /BA/Info-C enter/BiG M 400 / Bi G M 500/H auptmenüs/Aktorentest ( Sei te 5/6) @ 0\mod_1197884337908_78.doc @ 29709Pos : 1.21.21.32 /BA/Sic her heit/G efahr enhi nweis e/Aktortest @ 47\mod_1285134152781_78.doc @ 455729Pos : 1.21.21.33 /BA/Info-C enter/H auptmenüs/H auptmenü 4 Ser vic e/Ac htung: Vor dem Aktortest Mas chi ne gegen Wegrollen sic her n, und di e M ähwer ke auf den Boden absenken @ 47\mod_1285136923281_78.doc @ 455755Pos : 1.21.21.34 /BA/Info-C enter/BiG M 400 / Bi G M 500/H auptmenüs/Hinweis zu Aktor en @ 0\mod_1197611086806_78.doc @ 26722Pos : 1.21.21.35 /BA/-----Sei tenumbr uch------ @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.doc @ 4165Info centre "EasyTouch"Actuator test (page 5/6)Danger! - Unexpected actions on the machine.Effect: Danger to life or serious injuries.• Only persons familiar with the machine are permitted to perform the actuator test• The person performing the test must know which machine parts are moved by actuatingthe actuators. If necessary, secure the actuated machine components againstunintentional lowering• The actuator test must only be performed from a safe position outside the area that isaffected by machine parts moved by the actuators• Make certain there are no persons, animals or objects in the danger zoneCAUTION!Secure the machine against rolling and lower the mowing units to the ground prior to theactuator test.Release conditions which have not been met (display in menu field (1)), but are necessary forthe actuator test, need to be realised.NoteIf an actuator is turned on, the next or previous page cannot be called. (If necessary, turn theactuator off and repeat the process)194
Pos : 1.21.21.36 /BA/Info-C enter/BiG M 400 / Bi G M 500/H auptmenüs/H auptmenü 4 Ser vic e/M enü 4- 1-10/Aktorentest Arbeit ( 5/6) @ 0\mod_1197886146908_78.doc @ 29827Pos : 1.21.21.37 /BA/Info-C enter/BiG M 400 / Bi G M 500/H auptmenüs/M ögliche Status anzeige des angewählten Aktors @ 0\mod_1197611486993_78.doc @ 26760Pos : 1.21.21.38 /BA/Info-C enter/BiG M 400 / Bi G M 500/H auptmenüs/H auptmenü 4 Ser vic e/M enü 4- 1-10/T abelle Aktor en Ar beit Hinweis @ 46\mod_1283405898156_78.doc @ 450075Pos : 1.21.21.39 /BA/Info-C enter/BiG M 400 / Bi G M 500/H auptmenüs/H auptmenü 4 Ser vic e/M enü 4- 1-10/T abelle Aktor en Ar beit (5/6) @ 0\mod_1197886205518_78.doc @ 29847Pos : 1.21.21.40 /BA/-----Sei tenumbr uch------ @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.doc @ 4165Info centre "EasyTouch"The actuator test is used to test actuators that have been attached to the machine for the"Work" function.15 67 8B C D BM 400 0066Fig. 1561. Shows required voltage for the actuators.Possible status display of the selected actuatorActuator turned offActuator turned onNoteThe status displays described above are valid for all actuators related to the work.Valve Icon Description Turn on theactuatorTurn off theactuatorY20Lateral mowing unit left lift1Y21Lateral mowing unit left lower195
Pos : 1.21.21.41 /BA/Info-C enter/BiG M 400 / Bi G M 500/H auptmenüs/Aktorentest ( Sei te 6/6) @ 0\mod_1197884374705_78.doc @ 29728Pos : 1.21.21.42 /BA/Sic her heit/G efahr enhi nweis e/Aktortest @ 47\mod_1285134152781_78.doc @ 455729Pos : 1.21.21.43 /BA/Info-C enter/H auptmenüs/H auptmenü 4 Ser vic e/Ac htung: Vor dem Aktortest Mas chi ne gegen Wegrollen sic her n, und di e M ähwer ke auf den Boden absenken @ 47\mod_1285136923281_78.doc @ 455755Pos : 1.21.21.44 /BA/Info-C enter/BiG M 400 / Bi G M 500/H auptmenüs/Hinweis zu Aktor en @ 0\mod_1197611086806_78.doc @ 26722Pos : 1.21.21.45 /BA/-----Sei tenumbr uch------ @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.doc @ 4165Info centre "EasyTouch"Actuator test (page 6/6)Danger! - Unexpected actions on the machine.Effect: Danger to life or serious injuries.• Only persons familiar with the machine are permitted to perform the actuator test• The person performing the test must know which machine parts are moved by actuatingthe actuators. If necessary, secure the actuated machine components againstunintentional lowering• The actuator test must only be performed from a safe position outside the area that isaffected by machine parts moved by the actuators• Make certain there are no persons, animals or objects in the danger zoneCAUTION!Secure the machine against rolling and lower the mowing units to the ground prior to theactuator test.Release conditions which have not been met (display in menu field (1)), but are necessary forthe actuator test, need to be realised.NoteIf an actuator is turned on, the next or previous page cannot be called. (If necessary, turn theactuator off and repeat the process)196
Pos : 1.21.21.46 /BA/Info-C enter/BiG M 400 / Bi G M 500/H auptmenüs/H auptmenü 4 Ser vic e/M enü 4- 1-10/Aktorentest Arbeit ( 6/6) BM 400 @ 0\mod_1197886393111_78.doc @ 29867Pos : 1.21.21.47 /BA/Info-C enter/BiG M 400 / Bi G M 500/H auptmenüs/M ögliche Status anzeige des angewählten Aktors @ 0\mod_1197611486993_78.doc @ 26760Pos : 1.21.21.48 /BA/Info-C enter/BiG M 400 / Bi G M 500/H auptmenüs/H auptmenü 4 Ser vic e/M enü 4- 1-10/T abelle Aktor en Ar beit Hinweis @ 46\mod_1283405898156_78.doc @ 450075Pos : 1.21.21.49 /BA/Info-C enter/BiG M 400 / Bi G M 500/H auptmenüs/H auptmenü 4 Ser vic e/M enü 4- 1-10/T abelle Aktor en Ar beit (6/6) BM 400 @ 0\mod_1197886452393_78.doc @ 29887Pos : 1.21.22 /BA/-----Seitenumbruc h------ @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.doc @ 4165Info centre "EasyTouch"The actuator test is used to test actuators that have been attached to the machine for the"Work" function.15 67 8B C D BM 400 0067Fig. 1571. Shows required voltage for the actuators.Possible status display of the selected actuatorActuator turned offActuator turned onNoteThe status displays described above are valid for all actuators related to the work.Valve Icon Description Turn on theactuatorTurn off theactuatorY8Front mowing unit driveY9Side mowing unit drive, rightY10Side mowing unit drive, left5 6M11Compressor reversing fan78197
Pos : 1.21.23 /BA/Info-Center/Bi G M 400 / BiG M 500/Hauptmenüs/H auptmenü 4 Ser vice/Menü 4-1-11/M enü 4- 1-11 „CAN- Bus“ BM 400 @ 46\mod_1283409945937_78.doc @ 450128Pos : 1.21.24 /BA/-----Seitenumbruc h------ @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.doc @ 4165Info centre "EasyTouch"6.9.11 Menu 4-1-11 CAN busCANFig. 158Call the "Diagnostics" main menu 4.• Select menu 4-1-11 "CAN bus" with the rotary potentiometer.• Press the rotary potentiometer.Diagnostics CAN bus appears.CAN bus user:activeinactive or disconnected from CANbusNameJoystickC<strong>US</strong>martDriveDIOMTerminalKMC1ADM1• Pressing the key on the rotary potentiometer takes you one menu level back.198
Pos : 1.21.25.1 /BA/Info-Center/Bi G M 400 / BiG M 500/Hauptmenüs/H auptmenü 4 Ser vice/Menü 4-1-12/BM 400/M enü 4- 1-12 F ahr antrieb BM 400 @ 46\mod_1283429065437_78.doc @ 45<strong>02</strong>60Pos : 1.21.25.2 /BA/Info-Center/Bi G M 400 / BiG M 500/Freigabebedingungen nicht erfüllt @ 0\mod_1197561545538_78.doc @ 26549Pos : 1.21.25.3 /BA/Info-Center/Bi G M 400 / BiG M 500/näc hste_vor herige Menüebene z urüc k @ 0\mod_1197561687804_78.doc @ 26587Pos : 1.21.25.4 /BA/-----Seitenumbr uc h------ @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.doc @ 4165Info centre "EasyTouch"6.9.12 Menu 4-1-12 Travelling gearFig. 159Call the "Diagnostics" main menu 4.• Select menu 4-1-12 "Drive" with the rotary potentiometer.• Press the rotary potentiometer.Drive diagnostics appears.The "Travelling Gear" diagnostics menu is divided into 4 pages.Page 1: Sensor TestPage 2: Actuator testPage 3: Actuator testPage 4: Actuator testMenu control for pages 1 to 4NoteFor release conditions (1) not met see Section "Display of Release Conditions Not Met forDiagnostics"For faults (1) see Section "Display of Possible Faults for Diagnostics"• Press theCkey to bring up the next page of the menu.• Press the B key to bring up the previous page of the menu.• Pressing the key on the rotary potentiometer takes you one menu level back.199
Pos : 1.21.25.5 /BA/Info-Center/Bi G M 400 / BiG M 500/Hauptmenüs/H auptmenü 4 Ser vice/Menü 4-1-12/F ahrantrieb-Sc halter (1) (Seite 1/4) @ 30\mod_1251718644413_78.doc @ 295583Pos : 1.21.25.6 /BA/Info-Center/Bi G M 400 / BiG M 500/Hauptmenüs/H auptmenü 4 Ser vice/Menü 4-1-12/BM 400/F ahrantrieb-Sc halter (1) Bild BM 400 @ 46\mod_1283429105500_78.doc @ 45<strong>02</strong>86Pos : 1.21.25.7 /BA/Info-Center/Bi G M 400 / BiG M 500/Hauptmenüs/H auptmenü 4 Ser vice/Menü 4-1-12/F ahrantrieb-Sc halter (1) BM 400/BM 500 @ 0\mod_1197893098455_78.doc @ 30395Pos : 1.21.25.8 /BA/-----Seitenumbr uc h------ @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.doc @ 4165Info centre "EasyTouch"Travelling gear switch (1) (page 1/4)Fig. 160= Road/Field release switch not activated= Road/Field release switch activated= Release switch travelling gear not activated.= Travelling gear release switch activated= Parking brake release switch not activated.= Parking brake release switch activated= Key axle separation not activated.= Key axle separation activated200
Pos : 1.21.25.9 /BA/Info-Center/Bi G M 400 / BiG M 500/Hauptmenüs/H auptmenü 4 Ser vice/Menü 4-1-12/F ahrantrieb ( 2) (Seite 1/4) @ 30\mod_1251720587648_78.doc @ 295633Pos : 1.21.25.10 /BA/Info-C enter/BiG M 400 / Bi G M 500/H auptmenüs/H auptmenü 4 Ser vic e/M enü 4- 1-12/BM 400/F ahr antrieb-Sc halter ( 1) Bil d BM 400 @ 46\mod_1283429105500_78.doc @ 45<strong>02</strong>86Pos : 1.21.25.12 /BA/-----Sei tenumbr uch------ @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.doc @ 4165Info centre "EasyTouch"Travelling gear (2) (page 1/4)Fig. 161Pos : 1.21.25.11 /BA/Info-C enter/BiG M 400 / Bi G M 500/H auptmenüs/H auptmenü 4 Ser vic e/M enü 4- 1-12/F ahr antrieb (2) BM 400/ BM 500 @ 41\mod_127<strong>123</strong>6251527_78.doc @ 368967• Direction of travel; the number after the symbol is the current travel speed.= Forward travel= Neutral (stopped)= Reverse travel=Cruise control active; the number after the icon is the saved speed for Tempomatoperation in km/h.= Cruise control inactiveType of drive= Axle separation active (only possible in Field mode)= Parking brake is applied=Emergency mode; allows the driver to drive the vehicle out of the danger zone evenif there are serious drive problems..Green active Transparent inactive DescriptionD <strong>02</strong>5Downhill mode201
Pos : 1.21.25.13 /BA/Info-C enter/BiG M 400 / Bi G M 500/H auptmenüs/H auptmenü 4 Ser vic e/M enü 4- 1-12/Sens ortes t F ahr antrieb (3) ( Sei te1/4) @ 30\mod_1251716592773_78.doc @ 295533Pos : 1.21.25.14 /BA/Info-C enter/BiG M 400 / Bi G M 500/H auptmenüs/H auptmenü 4 Ser vic e/M enü 4- 1-12/BM 400/Sens ortes t F ahr antrieb (3) Tabellen BM 400 @ 41\mod_127<strong>123</strong>6003152_78.doc @ 368942Pos : 1.21.25.15 /BA/-----Sei tenumbr uch------ @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.doc @ 4165Info centre "EasyTouch"Drive sensor test (3) (page1/4)Drive sensor test (3) (page1/3)Fig. 162The sensor test is used to test sensors that have been attached to the machine for the travellinggear function.Sensor SensorOKgreenSensornot OKredSensorunknowntransparentDescriptionB5Flush valve temperatureB7High pressureB22Braking pressureB25Brake tank pressureB38Pivoting angle pump front axleB39Pivoting angle pump, rear axleSensor SwitchactivatedgreenSwitch notactivatedyellowSwitchunknowntransparentDescriptionB40Brake pedal switchK43Travelling gear switchGreen activeTransparentinactiveDescriptionD 017Power limitation2<strong>02</strong>
Pos : 1.21.25.16 /BA/Info-C enter/BiG M 400 / Bi G M 500/H auptmenüs/H auptmenü 4 Ser vic e/M enü 4- 1-12/Sens ortes t F ahr antrieb (4) ( Sei te1/4) @ 30\mod_1251721794976_78.doc @ 295683Pos : 1.21.25.17 /BA/Info-C enter/BiG M 400 / Bi G M 500/H auptmenüs/H auptmenü 4 Ser vic e/M enü 4- 1-12/BM 400/F ahr antrieb-Sc halter ( 1) Bil d BM 400 @ 46\mod_1283429105500_78.doc @ 45<strong>02</strong>86Pos : 1.21.25.19 /BA/-----Sei tenumbr uch------ @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.doc @ 4165Info centre "EasyTouch"Drive sensor test (4) (page1/4)Fig. 163Pos : 1.21.25.18 /BA/Info-C enter/BiG M 400 / Bi G M 500/H auptmenüs/H auptmenü 4 Ser vic e/M enü 4- 1-12/Besc hrei bung der Zeil e (4) @ 41\mod_127<strong>123</strong>4519480_78.doc @ 368865D018 = SD transmiss. Status (1 OK) (2 not OK)D019 = drive level (1= drive level 1) (2=drive level 2)D<strong>02</strong>3 = Safety signal ( OK) ( not OK)D700 = Saf. IO Toggle analogue val. to digital203
Pos : 1.21.25.20 /BA/Info-C enter/BiG M 400 / Bi G M 500/H auptmenüs/Aktorentest ( Sei te 2/4) @ 0\mod_1197622785056_78.doc @ 28464Pos : 1.21.25.21 /BA/Sic her heit/G efahr enhi nweis e/Aktortest @ 47\mod_1285134152781_78.doc @ 455729Pos : 1.21.25.22 /BA/Info-C enter/H auptmenüs/H auptmenü 4 Ser vic e/Ac htung: Vor dem Aktortest Mas chi ne gegen Wegrollen sic her n, und di e M ähwer ke auf den Boden absenken @ 47\mod_1285136923281_78.doc @ 455755Pos : 1.21.25.23 /BA/Info-C enter/BiG M 400 / Bi G M 500/H auptmenüs/Hinweis zu Aktor en @ 0\mod_1197611086806_78.doc @ 26722Pos : 1.21.25.24 /BA/-----Sei tenumbr uch------ @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.doc @ 4165Info centre "EasyTouch"Actuator test (page 2/4)Danger! - Unexpected actions on the machine.Effect: Danger to life or serious injuries.• Only persons familiar with the machine are permitted to perform the actuator test• The person performing the test must know which machine parts are moved by actuatingthe actuators. If necessary, secure the actuated machine components againstunintentional lowering• The actuator test must only be performed from a safe position outside the area that isaffected by machine parts moved by the actuators• Make certain there are no persons, animals or objects in the danger zoneCAUTION!Secure the machine against rolling and lower the mowing units to the ground prior to theactuator test.Release conditions which have not been met (display in menu field (1)), but are necessary forthe actuator test, need to be realised.NoteIf an actuator is turned on, the next or previous page cannot be called. (If necessary, turn theactuator off and repeat the process)204
Pos : 1.21.25.25 /BA/Info-C enter/BiG M 400 / Bi G M 500/H auptmenüs/H auptmenü 4 Ser vic e/M enü 4- 1-12/BM 400/Aktorentest Fahrantrieb ( 2/3) BM 400 @ 0\mod_1197900763705_78.doc @ 31005Pos : 1.21.25.26 /BA/Info-C enter/BiG M 400 / Bi G M 500/H auptmenüs/M ögliche Status anzeige des angewählten Aktors @ 0\mod_1197611486993_78.doc @ 26760Pos : 1.21.25.27 /BA/Info-C enter/BiG M 400 / Bi G M 500/H auptmenüs/H auptmenü 4 Ser vic e/M enü 4- 1-12/BM 400/T abelle Aktor en Fahrantri eb (2/3) BM 400 @ 0\mod_1197901<strong>02</strong>6377_78.doc @ 31<strong>02</strong>5Pos : 1.21.25.28 /BA/-----Sei tenumbr uch------ @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.doc @ 4165Info centre "EasyTouch"The actuator test is used to test actuators that have been attached to the machine for the“Travelling gear” function.5 67 8B C D BM 400 0069Fig. 164Possible status display of the selected actuatorActuator turned offActuator turned onNoteThe status displays described above are valid for all actuators related to the travelling gear.Valve Icon Description Turn on theactuatorTurn off theactuatorY5Axle separationY61/2 absorption volume front axleY71/2 absorption volume rear axle5 6205
Pos : 1.21.25.29 /BA/Info-C enter/BiG M 400 / Bi G M 500/H auptmenüs/Aktorentest ( Sei te 3/4) @ 0\mod_1197622875243_78.doc @ 28484Pos : 1.21.25.30 /BA/Sic her heit/G efahr enhi nweis e/Aktortest @ 47\mod_1285134152781_78.doc @ 455729Pos : 1.21.25.31 /BA/Info-C enter/H auptmenüs/H auptmenü 4 Ser vic e/Ac htung: Vor dem Aktortest Mas chi ne gegen Wegrollen sic her n, und di e M ähwer ke auf den Boden absenken @ 47\mod_1285136923281_78.doc @ 455755Pos : 1.21.25.32 /BA/Info-C enter/BiG M 400 / Bi G M 500/H auptmenüs/Hinweis zu Aktor en @ 0\mod_1197611086806_78.doc @ 26722Pos : 1.21.25.33 /BA/-----Sei tenumbr uch------ @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.doc @ 4165Info centre "EasyTouch"Actuator test (page 3/4)Danger! - Unexpected actions on the machine.Effect: Danger to life or serious injuries.• Only persons familiar with the machine are permitted to perform the actuator test• The person performing the test must know which machine parts are moved by actuatingthe actuators. If necessary, secure the actuated machine components againstunintentional lowering• The actuator test must only be performed from a safe position outside the area that isaffected by machine parts moved by the actuators• Make certain there are no persons, animals or objects in the danger zoneCAUTION!Secure the machine against rolling and lower the mowing units to the ground prior to theactuator test.Release conditions which have not been met (display in menu field (1)), but are necessary forthe actuator test, need to be realised.NoteIf an actuator is turned on, the next or previous page cannot be called. (If necessary, turn theactuator off and repeat the process)206
Pos : 1.21.25.34 /BA/Info-C enter/BiG M 400 / Bi G M 500/H auptmenüs/H auptmenü 4 Ser vic e/M enü 4- 1-12/Aktortes t dient zum Tes ten, für die Funkti on „Fahrantrieb“, ver bauten Aktoren @ 30\mod_1251713178148_78.doc @ 295483Pos : 1.21.25.35 /BA/Info-C enter/BiG M 400 / Bi G M 500/H auptmenüs/H auptmenü 4 Ser vic e/M enü 4- 1-12/BM 400/Aktorentest Fahrantrieb ( 3/3) Bil d BM 400 @ 46\mod_1283430681187_78.doc @ 450341Pos : 1.21.25.36 /BA/Info-C enter/BiG M 400 / Bi G M 500/H auptmenüs/M ögliche Status anzeige des angewählten Aktors @ 0\mod_1197611486993_78.doc @ 26760Pos : 1.21.25.37 /BA/Info-C enter/BiG M 400 / Bi G M 500/H auptmenüs/H auptmenü 4 Ser vic e/M enü 4- 1-12/Hinweis Status anzi ege G ültigkeit Fahrantri eb @ 30\mod_1251708457351_78.doc @ 295<strong>123</strong>Pos : 1.21.25.38 /BA/Info-C enter/BiG M 400 / Bi G M 500/H auptmenüs/H auptmenü 4 Ser vic e/M enü 4- 1-12/BM 400/T abelle Aktor en Fahrantri eb (3/3) BM 400 @ 0\mod_1197901795565_78.doc @ 31095Pos : 1.21.25.39 /BA/-----Sei tenumbr uch------ @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.doc @ 4165Info centre "EasyTouch"The actuator test is used to test actuators that have been attached to the machine for the“Travelling gear” function.5 67 8B C D BM 400 0070_1Fig. 165Possible status display of the selected actuatorActuator turned offActuator turned onNoteThe status displays described above are valid for all actuators related to the travelling gear.Valve Icon Description Turn on theactuatorTurn off theactuatorBrake lightreversing lightsY45Stop valve front axle5 6Y46Stop valve rear axle78207
Pos : 1.21.25.40 /BA/Info-C enter/BiG M 400 / Bi G M 500/H auptmenüs/Aktorentest ( Sei te 4/4) @ 0\mod_1197622923400_78.doc @ 28504Pos : 1.21.25.41 /BA/Sic her heit/G efahr enhi nweis e/Aktortest @ 47\mod_1285134152781_78.doc @ 455729Pos : 1.21.25.42 /BA/Info-C enter/H auptmenüs/H auptmenü 4 Ser vic e/Ac htung: Vor dem Aktortest Mas chi ne gegen Wegrollen sic her n, und di e M ähwer ke auf den Boden absenken @ 47\mod_1285136923281_78.doc @ 455755Pos : 1.21.25.43 /BA/Info-C enter/BiG M 400 / Bi G M 500/H auptmenüs/Hinweis zu Aktor en @ 0\mod_1197611086806_78.doc @ 26722Pos : 1.21.25.44 /BA/-----Sei tenumbr uch------ @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.doc @ 4165Info centre "EasyTouch"Actuator test (page 4/4)Danger! - Unexpected actions on the machine.Effect: Danger to life or serious injuries.• Only persons familiar with the machine are permitted to perform the actuator test• The person performing the test must know which machine parts are moved by actuatingthe actuators. If necessary, secure the actuated machine components againstunintentional lowering• The actuator test must only be performed from a safe position outside the area that isaffected by machine parts moved by the actuators• Make certain there are no persons, animals or objects in the danger zoneCAUTION!Secure the machine against rolling and lower the mowing units to the ground prior to theactuator test.Release conditions which have not been met (display in menu field (1)), but are necessary forthe actuator test, need to be realised.NoteIf an actuator is turned on, the next or previous page cannot be called. (If necessary, turn theactuator off and repeat the process)208
Pos : 1.21.25.45 /BA/Info-C enter/BiG M 400 / Bi G M 500/H auptmenüs/H auptmenü 4 Ser vic e/M enü 4- 1-12/Aktortes t dient zum Tes ten, für die Funkti on „Fahrantrieb“, ver bauten Aktoren @ 30\mod_1251713178148_78.doc @ 295483Pos : 1.21.25.46 /BA/Info-C enter/BiG M 400 / Bi G M 500/H auptmenüs/H auptmenü 4 Ser vic e/M enü 4- 1-12/BM 400/Aktorentest Fahrantrieb ( 4/4) BM 400 Bil d @ 46\mod_1283433331343_78.doc @ 450396Pos : 1.21.25.47 /BA/Info-C enter/BiG M 400 / Bi G M 500/H auptmenüs/M ögliche Status anzeige des angewählten Aktors @ 0\mod_1197611486993_78.doc @ 26760Pos : 1.21.25.48 /BA/Info-C enter/BiG M 400 / Bi G M 500/H auptmenüs/H auptmenü 4 Ser vic e/M enü 4- 1-12/Hinweis Status anzi ege G ültigkeit Fahrantri eb @ 30\mod_1251708457351_78.doc @ 295<strong>123</strong>Pos : 1.21.25.49 /BA/Info-C enter/BiG M 400 / Bi G M 500/H auptmenüs/H auptmenü 4 Ser vic e/M enü 4- 1-12/BM 400/T abelle Aktor en Fahrantri eb (4/4) BM 400 @ 46\mod_1283435088921_78.doc @ 450448Pos : 1.21.26 /BA/-----Seitenumbruc h------ @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.doc @ 4165Info centre "EasyTouch"The actuator test is used to test actuators that have been attached to the machine for the“Travelling gear” function.Fig. 166Possible status display of the selected actuatorActuator turned offActuator turned onNoteThe status displays described above are valid for all actuators related to the travelling gear.Valve Symbol Description Switch on theactuatorSwitch off theactuatorY1Front axle backwardY2Front axle forwardY3Rear axle backward5 6Y4Rear axle forward78209
Pos : 1.21.27.1 /BA/Info-Center/Bi G M 400 / BiG M 500/Hauptmenüs/H auptmenü 4 Ser vice/Menü 4-1-13/M enü 4-1- 13 „El ektr oni k“ Bild BM 400 @ 30\mod_1251724003570_78.doc @ 295789Pos : 1.21.27.2 /BA/Info-Center/Bi G M 400 / BiG M 500/Hauptmenüs/H auptmenü 4 Ser vice/Menü 4-1-13/M enü 4-1- 13 „El ektr oni k“ T ext @ 0\mod_1197903920096_78.doc @ 31372Pos : 1.21.27.3 /BA/Info-Center/Bi G M 400 / BiG M 500/Freigabebedingungen nicht erfüllt @ 0\mod_1197561545538_78.doc @ 26549Pos : 1.21.27.4 /BA/Info-Center/Bi G M 400 / BiG M 500/Hauptmenüs/H auptmenü 4 Ser vice/Menü 4-1-13/M enü 4-1- 13 El ektr oni k Bil d Seite 1 und 2 BM 400 @ 30\mod_1251722625366_78.doc @ 295708Pos : 1.21.27.5 /BA/Info-Center/Bi G M 400 / BiG M 500/Hauptmenüs/H auptmenü 4 Ser vice/Menü 4-1-13/M enü 4-1- 13 El ektr oni k Text blättern @ 0\mod_1197904126361_78.doc @ 31410Pos : 1.21.27.6 /BA/Info-Center/Bi G M 400 / BiG M 500/Hauptmenüs/Mit Drehpoti Menüebene z urüc k @ 29\mod_1251353619073_78.doc @ 283963Pos : 1.21.28 /BA/-----Seitenumbruc h------ @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.doc @ 4165Info centre "EasyTouch"6.9.13 Menu 4-1-13 ElectronicsFig. 167Call the "Diagnostics" main menu 4.• Select menu 4-1-13 "Electronics" with the rotary potentiometer.• Press the rotary potentiometer.Electronics diagnostics appears.NoteFor release conditions (1) not met see Section "Display of Release Conditions Not Met forDiagnostics"For faults (1) see Section "Display of Possible Faults for Diagnostics"Fig. 168• The symbol identifies diagnostic values that lie within a valid range.• The symbol identifies diagnostic values that do not lie within a valid range.• To scroll forward, use the key. To scroll backward, use the B key.• Pressing the key on the rotary potentiometer takes you one menu level back.210
Pos : 1.21.29 /BA/Info-Center/Bi G M 400 / BiG M 500/Hauptmenüs/H auptmenü 4 Ser vice/Menü 4-1-14/M enü 4- 1-14 Diesel motor (1/2) BM 400 @ 0\mod_1197957897981_78.doc @ 31499Pos : 1.21.30 /BA/-----Seitenumbruc h------ @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.doc @ 4165Info centre "EasyTouch"6.9.14 Menu 4-1-14 Diesel engineFigure 169Call the "Diagnostics" main menu 4.• Select menu 4-1-14 "Diesel engine" with the rotary potentiometer.• Press the rotary potentiometer."Diesel engine Diagnostics" appears.Diesel engine page 1= Engine speed= Engine cooling water temperature= Engine oil pressure= Engine oil temperature= Engine oil level• Activating theC key for causes the next page to be displayed.• Activating the key for causes the next maintenance interval to be displayed.211
Pos : 1.21.31 /BA/Info-Center/Bi G M 400 / BiG M 500/Hauptmenüs/H auptmenü 4 Ser vice/Menü 4-1-14/M enü 4- 1-14 Diesel motor (2/2) BM 400 @ 46\mod_1283437104625_78.doc @ 450500Pos : 1.21.32 /BA/-----Seitenumbruc h------ @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.doc @ 4165Info centre "EasyTouch"Diesel engine page 2Fig. 170= Diesel tank fuel level= Diesel fuel consumption= Temperature of air intake= Engine oil temperature• Maximum engine capacity• Engine capacity, speedSensorSensor OKgreenSensor notOK redDescriptionB34Diesel tank fuel levelB36Air intake• Activating the for key causes the diesel engine Diagnostics to bedisplayed.• Activating theBforcauses the previous page to be displayed.• Pressing the key on the rotary potentiometer takes you one menu level back.212
Pos : 1.21.33 /BA/Info-Center/Bi G M 400 / BiG M 500/Hauptmenüs/H auptmenü 4 Ser vice/Menü 4-1-15/M enü 4- 1-15 J oystic k (1/2) @ 0\mod_1197962274731_78.doc @ 31709Pos : 1.21.34 /BA/-----Seitenumbruc h------ @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.doc @ 4165Info centre "EasyTouch"6.9.15 Menu 4-1-15 JoystickFig. 171The key functions of the joystick can be checked in the "Joystick" Diagnostics menu.NoteWhen bringing up the "Joystick" Diagnostics menu, the diesel engine must be stopped. Nofunctions are performed when the joystick is activated in the "Joystick" Diagnostics menu.Call the "Diagnostics" main menu 4.• Select menu 4-1-15 "Joystick" with the rotary potentiometer.• Press the rotary potentiometer."Joystick Diagnostics" appears.• Pressing the key on the rotary potentiometer takes you one menu level back.213
Pos : 1.21.35 /BA/Info-Center/Bi G M 400 / BiG M 500/Hauptmenüs/H auptmenü 4 Ser vice/Menü 4-1-15/M enü 4- 1-15 J oystic k (2/2) @ 0\mod_1197962925700_78.doc @ 31728Pos : 1.21.36 /BA/-----Seitenumbruc h------ @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.doc @ 4165Info centre "EasyTouch"Menu control:Fig. 172• Pressing the key under the softkey brings up the "Work" menu.• Press themenu.C key under the softkey to bring up the next page of the "Joystick"• Press themenu.C key under the softkey to bring up the next previous of the "Joystick"A representation of the joystick appears in the display. If a function is activated on the joystick,the status of the function that is performed appears in the display.Possible status display of the activated keyKey not activatedKey activatedBroken cableShort circuit214
Pos : 1.21.37 /BA/Info-Center/Bi G M 400 / BiG M 500/Hauptmenüs/H auptmenü 4 Ser vice/Menü 4-1-16/M enü 4- 1-16 „Bedi enei nheit Kons ol e“ (1/2) Bild BM 400 @ 46\mod_1283492169265_78.doc @ 450591Pos : 1.21.38 /BA/Info-Center/Bi G M 400 / BiG M 500/Hauptmenüs/H auptmenü 4 Ser vice/Menü 4-1-16/M enü 4- 1-16 „Bedi enei nheit Kons ol e“ (1/2) @ 0\mod_1197963604168_78.doc @ 31756Pos : 1.21.39 /BA/-----Seitenumbruc h------ @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.doc @ 4165Info centre "EasyTouch"6.9.16 Menu 4-1-16 Control unit console4-1-1615 625 67 87 8B C D BM 400 0081B C D BM 400 0082_1Fig. 173Both the release switches and the keys on the console can be checked for their functionality inthe "Control unit console" Diagnostics menu.NoteWhen bringing up the "Control unit console" Diagnostics menu, the diesel engine must bestopped. No functions are performed in the "Control unit console" Diagnostics menu when therelease switches or keys are activated.Call the "Diagnostics" main menu 4.• Select menu 4-1-16 "Control unit console" with the rotary potentiometer.• Press the rotary potentiometer.Control unit console diagnostics appears.215
Pos : 1.21.40 /BA/Info-Center/Bi G M 400 / BiG M 500/Hauptmenüs/H auptmenü 4 Ser vice/Menü 4-1-16/M enü 4- 1-16 Bedi enkonsol e Fr eigabesc halter (2/2) BM 400 @ 46\mod_1283492678718_78.doc @ 450617Pos : 1.21.41 /BA/Info-Center/Bi G M 400 / BiG M 500/Hauptmenüs/H auptmenü 4 Ser vice/Menü 4-1-16/Anzeige der Spannung en Konsol e @ 30\mod_1251791240708_78.doc @ 296666Pos : 1.21.42 /BA/-----Seitenumbruc h------ @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.doc @ 4165Info centre "EasyTouch"125 67 8B C D BM 400 0082_1Pic. 174Release switch (1)activated inactive Release switchRoad/fieldAutopilotParking brakeFoot pedalTraction driveAxle separationSwath hoodSeat switchDoor switchFront guard flaps (optional)Display of voltages (2)Display (voltage – ignition stage 1)Display (voltage – ignition stage 2)Display (voltage – electronics)Display (fixed voltage regulator)216
Pos : 1.21.43 /BA/Info-Center/Bi G M 400 / BiG M 500/Hauptmenüs/H auptmenü 4 Ser vice/Menü 4-1-17 /Menü 4- 1-17 „Dis play“ @ 0\mod_1197973595090_78.doc @ 31795Pos : 1.21.44 /BA/-----Seitenumbruc h------ @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.doc @ 4165Info centre "EasyTouch"6.9.17 Menu 4-1-17 DisplayThe "Display" diagnostics menu is used to check key functions , the rotary potentiometer andthe key next to the rotary potentiometer.Fig. 175NoteWhen bringing up the "Display" Diagnostics menu, the diesel engine must be stopped. Nofunctions are performed when keys are activated in the "Display" Diagnostics menu.Call the "Diagnostics" main menu 4.• Select menu 4-1-17 "Display" with the rotary potentiometer.• Press the rotary potentiometer."Display diagnostics" appears.A representation of the display appears in the display. If a function is activated on the display,the status of the function that is performed appears in the display.Possible status display of the activated keyKey not activatedKey activated• Pressing the key on the rotary potentiometer takes you one menu level back.217
Pos : 1.21.45.1 /BA/Info-Center/Bi G M 400 / BiG M 500/Hauptmenüs/H auptmenü 4 Ser vice/Menü 4-2/M enü 4-2 „Fehlerliste“ @ 31\mod_1251804579052_78.doc @ 298124Pos : 1.21.45.3 /BA/-----Seitenumbr uc h------ @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.doc @ 4165Info centre "EasyTouch"6.10 Menu 4-2 Error listFig. 176The main menu level is active.• Select main menu 4-2 with the rotary potentiometer.• Press the rotary potentiometer.The "Error list" appears.= Current error= Fault storage= Current error, diesel engine= Error storage, diesel engineCurrent errorsThe display shows the fault list with the current faults. The time, status, error number anddesignation are shown.• StatusC = Error has come (Come)G = Error has gone (Gone)A = Error acknowledgedPos : 1.21.45.2 /BA/Info-Center/Bi G M 400 / BiG M 500/Hauptmenüs/H auptmenü 4 Ser vice/Menü 4-2/D urch Drüc ken der Tas te 7 bz w. 8 für Softkey die allgemeinen Infomel dungen aufrufen. @ 31\mod_1251798076490_78.doc @ 297679• The general information messages are displayed by pressing the key7or8forsoftkey218
Pos : 1.21.45.4 /BA/Info-Center/Bi G M 400 / BiG M 500/Hauptmenüs/H auptmenü 4 Ser vice/Menü 4-2/F ehlers peic her @ 31\mod_12518047623<strong>02</strong>_78.doc @ 298179Pos : 1.21.45.5 /BA/Info-Center/Bi G M 400 / BiG M 500/Hauptmenüs/H auptmenü 4 Ser vice/Menü 4-2/M enüs teuer ung Pfeile er kl ären @ 31\mod_1251803909068_78.doc @ 298009Pos : 1.21.45.6 /BA/-----Seitenumbr uc h------ @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.doc @ 4165Info centre "EasyTouch"Error StorageFig. 177• To display error storage, activate theBkey under the softkey.Error storage is arranged chronologically. The date, time, status, error numbers, anddesignation are shown.• StatusC = Error has come (Come)G = Error has gone (Gone)A = Error acknowledgedMenu control:= Activating the key allows you to scroll up.= Activating the key allows you to scroll up one line at a time.= Activating the6key allows you to scroll down one line at a time.= Activating the8key allows you to scroll down one page at a time.219
Pos : 1.21.45.7 /BA/Info-Center/Bi G M 400 / BiG M 500/Hauptmenüs/H auptmenü 4 Ser vice/Menü 4-2/aktuelle F ehler Di es elmotor @ 31\mod_1251804983474_78.doc @ 298224Pos : 1.21.45.8 /BA/-----Seitenumbr uc h------ @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.doc @ 4165Info centre "EasyTouch"Current diesel engine errorsFig. 178• To display current errors of the diesel engine, press theCkey under the softkey.The display shows the error list with the current errors of the diesel engine. Error codes aredisplayed with a sequential number.Menu field (1) indicates the number of alarms present.220
Pos : 1.21.45.9 /BA/Info-Center/Bi G M 400 / BiG M 500/Hauptmenüs/H auptmenü 4 Ser vice/Menü 4-2/F ehlers peic her Dies el motor @ 31\mod_1251805083974_78.doc @ 298269Pos : 1.21.45.10 /BA/-----Sei tenumbr uch------ @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.doc @ 4165Info centre "EasyTouch"Diesel engine error storageFig. 179• To display diesel engine error storage, activate the.Dkey under the softkeyThe display shows the error storage of the diesel engine. Error codes, the status, date and timeare indicated with a sequential number.Menu field (1) indicates the number of alarms present.Status1 = Error set2 = Error deleted• You can use thescroll up.7forto scroll to the end of the list and the8key for to• To display current errors, use the A key under the softkey.• Pressing the key on the rotary potentiometer takes you one menu level back.221
Pos : 1.21.45.11 /BA/Info-C enter/BiG M 400 / Bi G M 500/H auptmenüs/H auptmenü 4 Ser vic e/M enü 4- 2/Infomel dungen Allgemei n/Ser vic e Bild @ 31\mod_1251805475755_78.doc @ 298888Pos : 1.21.45.12 /BA/Info-C enter/BiG M 400 / Bi G M 500/H auptmenüs/H auptmenü 4 Ser vic e/M enü 4- 2/Status der Allgemei nen-Infomel dungen @ 31\mod_1251808882552_78.doc @ 298912Pos : 1.21.45.13 /BA/Info-C enter/BiG M 400 / Bi G M 500/H auptmenüs/H auptmenü 4 Ser vic e/M enü 4- 2/Status der Ser vic e-Infomel dungen @ 31\mod_1251809979693_78.doc @ 299120Pos : 1.21.45.14 /BA/Info-C enter/BiG M 400 / Bi G M 500/H auptmenüs/H auptmenü 4 Ser vic e/M enü 4- 2/Menüsteuer ung Pfeile er klär en @ 31\mod_1251803909068_78.doc @ 298009Pos : 1.21.45.15 /BA/Info-C enter/BiG M 400 / Bi G M 500/H auptmenüs/H auptmenü 4 Ser vic e/M enü 4- 2/Bl ätern über di e T asten A bis D @ 31\mod_1251809467<strong>02</strong>1_78.doc @ 298956Pos : 1.21.46 /BA/-----Seitenumbruc h------ @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.doc @ 4165Info centre "EasyTouch"Fig. 180General information messagesService information messagesGeneral information messagesThe general information message is arranged chronologically. The date, time, status, errornumbers, and designation are shown.Status:C = Error has comeG = Error has goneA = Error acknowledgedService information messagesService information messages are arranged chronologically. The date, time, error number anddesignation are shown.Menu control:= Activating the key allows you to scroll up.= Activating the key allows you to scroll up one line at a time.= Activating the6key allows you to scroll down one line at a time.= Activating the8key allows you to scroll down one page at a time.• Activating the key brings up the basic screen• By pressing the keyByou get back to menu “Error list”• By pressing keyCthe next page “Service information message” will be displayedPos : 1.21.45.16 /BA/Info-C enter/BiG M 400 / Bi G M 500/H auptmenüs/Mit Dr ehpoti M enüebene zur üc k @ 29\mod_1251353619073_78.doc @ 283963•DBy pressing key the previous page “General information message” will be displayed• Pressing the key on the rotary potentiometer takes you one menu level back.222
Pos : 1.21.47 /BA/Info-Center/Bi G M 400 / BiG M 500/Hauptmenüs/H auptmenü 4 Ser vice/Menü 4-3/M enü 4- 3 „Ser viceebene“ @ 0\mod_1197981326387_78.doc @ 32370Pos : 1.21.48 /BA/-----Seitenumbruc h------ @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.doc @ 4165Info centre "EasyTouch"6.11 Menu 4-3 "Service level"Fig. 181The main menu level is active.• Select main menu 4-3 with the rotary potentiometer.• Press the rotary potentiometer.The "Service level" is protected by a password and is accessible only to the Krone service staff.• Pressing the key on the rotary potentiometer takes you one menu level back.223
Pos : 1.21.49.1 /BA/Info-Center/Bi G M 400 / BiG M 500/Hauptmenüs/H auptmenü 4 Ser vice/Menü 4-4/M enü 4-4 „Infor mati on“ @ 0\mod_1197981647856_78.doc @ 32390Pos : 1.21.49.2 /BA/-----Seitenumbr uc h------ @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.doc @ 4165Info centre "EasyTouch"6.12 Menu 4-4 InformationFig. 182The main menu level is active.• Select main menu 4-4 with the rotary potentiometer.• Press the rotary potentiometer.The display shows menu level 4-4 "Information".The main menu, "Settings", is divided up into three menus:= Menu 4-4-1 "Joystick"= Menu 4-4-2 "Software"= Menu 4-4-3 "Machine"• Pressing the key on the rotary potentiometer takes you one menu level back.224
Pos : 1.21.49.3 /BA/Info-Center/Bi G M 400 / BiG M 500/Hauptmenüs/H auptmenü 4 Ser vice/Menü 4-4/M enü 4-4- 1 „J oystic k“ @ 0\mod_1197983553856_78.doc @ 32409Pos : 1.21.49.4 /BA/-----Seitenumbr uc h------ @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.doc @ 4165Info centre "EasyTouch"6.12.1 Menu 4-4-1 JoystickFig. 183The main menu "Information" is active.• Select menu 4-4-1 "Joystick" with the rotary potentiometer.• Press the rotary potentiometer."Joystick information" appears.• Pressing the key on the rotary potentiometer takes you one menu level back.225
Pos : 1.21.49.5 /BA/Info-Center/Bi G M 400 / BiG M 500/Hauptmenüs/H auptmenü 4 Ser vice/Menü 4-4/M enü 4-4- 2 „ Softwar e“ Bil d BM 400 @ 0\mod_1197984085700_78.doc @ 32447Pos : 1.21.49.6 /BA/Info-Center/Bi G M 400 / BiG M 500/Hauptmenüs/H auptmenü 4 Ser vice/Menü 4-4/M enü 4-4- 2 „ Softwar e“ T ext BM 400/500 @ 31\mod_1251872307697_78.doc @ 299807Pos : 1.21.49.7 /BA/Info-Center/Bi G M 400 / BiG M 500/Hauptmenüs/H auptmenü 4 Ser vice/Menü 4-4/Sei te 1 BM 400 @ 31\mod_1251867821525_78.doc @ 299652Pos : 1.21.49.8 /BA/-----Seitenumbr uc h------ @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.doc @ 4165Info centre "EasyTouch"6.12.2 Menu 4-4-2 SoftwareFig. 184The main menu "Information" is active.• Select menu 4-4-2 "Software" with the rotary potentiometer• Press the rotary potentiometer"Software information" appears. The display shows the software versions of the variouscontrollers.Page 1= TerminalNoteIf the versions of resources and DLLs do not match for the terminal, the version numbersappear in red.= SmartDrive= KMC1NoteIf the KMC1 software is not designed for your machine type, the version numbers appear in red.• Activating theBkey or turning the rotary potentiometer causes the second page to bedisplayed on the rotary potentiometer226
Pos : 1.21.49.9 /BA/Info-Center/Bi G M 400 / BiG M 500/Hauptmenüs/H auptmenü 4 Ser vice/Menü 4-4/M enü 4-4- 2 Sei te ( 1/2/3/4) Bil d BM 400 @ 31\mod_1251866857510_78.doc @ 299627Pos : 1.21.49.10 /BA/Info-C enter/BiG M 400 / Bi G M 500/H auptmenüs/H auptmenü 4 Ser vic e/M enü 4- 4/Seite 2 BM 400/500 @ 31\mod_1251868059010_78.doc @ 299677Pos : 1.21.49.11 /BA/Info-C enter/BiG M 400 / Bi G M 500/H auptmenüs/H auptmenü 4 Ser vic e/M enü 4- 4/Seite 3 BM 400 @ 31\mod_1251868241056_78.doc @ 2997<strong>02</strong>Pos : 1.21.49.12 /BA/Info-C enter/BiG M 400 / Bi G M 500/H auptmenüs/H auptmenü 4 Ser vic e/M enü 4- 4/Seite 4 BM 400/500 @ 31\mod_1251868464775_78.doc @ 299727Pos : 1.21.49.13 /BA/Info-C enter/BiG M 400 / Bi G M 500/H auptmenüs/Mit Dr ehpoti M enüebene zur üc k @ 29\mod_1251353619073_78.doc @ 283963Pos : 1.21.49.14 /BA/-----Sei tenumbr uch------ @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.doc @ 4165Info centre "EasyTouch"5 65 65 61 2 3 47 81 2 3 47 81 2 3 47 8B C D BM 400 0094B C D BM 400 0095B C D BM 400 0096Fig. 185Page 2= Joystick= CU•CActivating the key or turning the rotary potentiometer causes the third page to bedisplayed on the rotary potentiometer.Page 3= ADM1• Activating theDkey or turning the rotary potentiometer causes the fourth page to bedisplayed on the rotary potentiometer.Page 4= DIOM• Activating the key or turning the rotary potentiometer causes the first page to bedisplayed on the rotary potentiometer.• Pressing the key on the rotary potentiometer takes you one menu level back.227
Pos : 1.21.49.15 /BA/Info-C enter/BiG M 400 / Bi G M 500/H auptmenüs/H auptmenü 4 Ser vic e/M enü 4- 4/Menü 4-4-3 Maschi ne @ 0\mod_1197985621606_78.doc @ 32485Pos : 1.22 /BA/-----Seitenumbruch------ @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.doc @ 4165Info centre "EasyTouch"6.12.3 Menu 4-4-3 MachineFig. 186The main menu "Information" is active.• Select menu 4-4-3 "Machine" with the rotary potentiometer.• Press the rotary potentiometer."Machine information" appears. The display shows machine information.228
Pos : 1.23 /BA/Info-C enter/H auptmenüs /Menü 5 Gr undbild/M enü 5 „ Grundbild“ BM 400 @ 46\mod_1283495571171_78.doc @ 450643Pos : 1.24 /BA/-----Seitenumbruch------ @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.doc @ 4165Info centre "EasyTouch"6.13 Menu 5 Basic ScreenFig. 187The main menu is active.• Select menu 5 "Machine" with the rotary potentiometer.• Press the rotary potentiometer.The "Basic screen" is displayed.229
Pos : 1.25 /Übersc hriften/Übersc hriften 3/F-J/F ehl ermel dungen @ 39\mod_1268635505910_78.doc @ 360426Pos : 1.26 /BA/Info-C enter/H auptmenüs /Menü 5 Gr undbild/F ehler meldung @ 39\mod_1268635725222_78.doc @ 360450Pos : 1.27 /BA/Bedi enung /Fals cher U mgang mit F ehler mel dungen @ 39\mod_1268149789980_78.doc @ 358355Pos : 1.28 /BA/-----Seitenumbruch------ @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.doc @ 4165Info centre "EasyTouch"6.13.1 Error Messages5 67 8B C D BM 400 0113_1Fig. 188If an error occurs on the machine, the error message appears in the display. The error messageand the fault code are displayed.• The error message can be confirmed with the key under softkey .• The acoustic signal can be turned off with theBkey under the softkey .NoteFor a list of error messages, error description and possible cause of error and remedy of error,see Appendix A – Error Messages.CAUTION! –Wrong handling with error messages, identification of faults and defects onthe machineEffect: serious subsequent damages to the machine• If an error message occurs or if a fault or a defect is recognized on the machine, themachine has to be stopped and gears and motor have to be switched off• Before continuing with work, eliminate the cause of the problem immediately230
Pos : 1.29 /BA/Info-C enter/H auptmenüs /Menü 5 Gr undbild/Infomeldung @ 0\mod_1197986377200_78.doc @ 32543Info centre "EasyTouch"6.13.2 Information messageFig. 189If one or several conditions are not met to carry out an action, the information message will bedisplayed in the information section of settings (IV). The information message and theinformation code are displayed.Acknowledging the information messageThe error message can be confirmed with the key under softkey .231
===== Ende der Stüc kliste =====Info centre "EasyTouch"232
Pos : 2.1 /Ü bers chriften/Ü bersc hriften 1/A- E/Erstinbetriebnahme @ 0\mod_1196314201498_78.doc @ 5855Pos : 2.2 /BA/Sic her heit/G efahrenhi nwei se/Fehlende Sc hutztüc her @ 0\mod_1196314289764_78.doc @ 5874Pos : 2.3 /Ü bers chriften/Ü bersc hriften 2/P-T /Sc hutztüc her monti eren @ 35\mod_1257494335719_78.doc @ 329260Pos : 2.4 /BA/Ersti nbetriebnahme/Big M 400 / 420/Schutz tüc her monti eren @ 0\mod_1196314517108_78.doc @ 5913Pos : 2.5 /Ü bers chriften/Ü bersc hriften 2/P-T /Seitliche M ähwer ke abkl appen @ 0\mod_1196407512074_78.doc @ 7929Pos : 2.6 /BA/Ersti nbetriebnahme/Big M 400 / 420/Vorrauss etz ung Mähwer ke abklappen BM 400 @ 0\mod_1196314613655_78.doc @ 5974Pos : 2.7 /BA/-----Seitenumbr uc h------ @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.doc @ 4165Commissioning7 CommissioningDanger! - Missing guard clothsEffect: Danger to life, serious injuries or serious damage to the machine.• The machine may be taken into operation only after all the safety devices have beeninstalled.7.1 Fitting the guard clothsThe lateral mowing units must be folded down to be able to install the guard cloths.7.2 Folding Down Lateral Mowing UnitsFig. 190Prerequisites:• The main battery switch (1) must be in position I (closed).• Release switch (3) "Parking brake" must be in position II (engaged).• Release switch (4) "Travelling gear" must be in position I (off).• Starting the engine.• Release switch (1) "Road/Field" must be in position II (Field mode).233
Pos : 2.8 /BA/Sic her heit/G efahrenhi nwei se/M ähwer ke/Absenken des M ähwer ks in Arbeitss tell ung BiGM 400 @ 0\mod_1196315401623_78.doc @ 5993Pos : 2.9 /BA/Ersti nbetriebnahme/Big M 400 / 420/Mähwer ke abs enken BM 400 Bild @ 0\mod_1196316763514_78.doc @ 6118CommissioningDanger! - Lowering mowing unit into working positionEffect: Danger to life, injuries or damage to the machine.• Do not lower the mowing units until you are absolutely sure that neither persons, animalsnor objects are in the swivel range of the mowing units.Fig. 191Pos : 2.10 /BA/Ersti nbetriebnahme/Big M 400 / 420/M ähwer ke absenken BM 400/420 T ext @ 49\mod_1287045101250_78.doc @ 464583• Using the (4, 6) keys with (12) key pressed on the multi-function lever, lower the lateralmowing unit from transport position to headland position.• Press the (4,6) keys on the multi-function lever again to lower the lateral mowing unitsfrom headland position to working position.• Switch off the engine and remove the ignition key.Pos : 2.11 /BA/-----Seitenumbruch------ @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.doc @ 4165234
Pos : 2.12 /Übersc hriften/Übersc hriften 3/F-J/Montagebeschr eibung @ 0\mod_1196317382342_78.doc @ 6137Pos : 2.13 /BA/Sicher heit/G efahr enhinweis e/U nvorhergesehene Inbetriebnahme @ 0\mod_1196317459889_78.doc @ 6156Pos : 2.14 /BA/Ersti nbetriebnahme/Big M 400 / 420/Darstellung Schutz tuchmontag e Big M 400 @ 0\mod_1196317641342_78.doc @ 6175Commissioning7.2.1 Description of InstallationDanger! - Accidental start-up of machine and rolling.Effect: Danger to life, injuries or damage to the machine.• Switch off the engine and remove the ignition key.• Secure the machine against the possibility of rolling back.33121 12 1BM 400 0195Fig. 1921 Side guard cloths2 Front guard cloths3 Mowing Unit235
Pos : 2.15 /BA/-----Seitenumbruch------ @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.doc @ 4165CommissioningFig. 193:Fit the guard cloths (1) to the mowing unit (5) using the enclosed strip (2), washer (3) and bolt(4).NoteThe hem of the guard cloths should always face the inside.7.2.2 Guard cloths (CRI with upper roller drive)258 622<strong>150</strong><strong>150</strong>232 163BMII-329_1Abb. 194236
Pos : 2.16 /BA/Ersti nbetriebnahme/Big M 400 / 420/Warntafel n eins tell en @ 0\mod_1196318422373_78.doc @ 6236Pos : 2.17 /Übersc hriften/Übersc hriften 2/A-E/Ei nbau der M ähklingen @ 0\mod_1196318620905_78.doc @ 6255Pos : 2.18 /BA/Sicher heit/G efahr enhinweis e/U nvorhergesehene Inbetriebnahme @ 0\mod_1196317459889_78.doc @ 6156Pos : 2.19 /BA/Ersti nbetriebnahme/Big M 400 / 420/Ei nbau der M ähkli ngen @ 0\mod_1196318744030_78.doc @ 6274Pos : 3 /BA/-----Seitenumbr uc h------ @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.doc @ 4165Commissioning7.2.3 Adjusting the Warning Panel1Fig. 19532BM 400 0148• Before transporting the vehicle on public roads, make sure that the rear warning signs (1)are fitted to the outside.• Mount the rear reflectors (2) on the lamp support (3).NoteThe rear reflectors are on the left side of the machine in the storage compartment with thehardware required to mount them.7.3 Installation of Cutter BladesDanger! - Accidental start-up of machine and rolling.Effect: Danger to life, injuries or damage to the machine.• Switch off the engine and remove the ignition key.• Secure the machine against the possibility of rolling back.The lateral mowing units must be folded down to be able to install the cutter blades.See chapter on initial start-up "Folding Down Lateral Mowing Units".To install cutter blades:See the chapter on maintenance of mowing units "Blade Changing on Cutting Discs with BladeScrew Connection" and "Blade Changing on Cutting Discs with Quick Blade Release"237
Pos : 4.1 /Ü bers chriften/Ü bersc hriften 1/F-J/Inbetriebnahme @ 0\mod_1196327075811_78.doc @ 6375Pos : 4.2 /Ü bers chriften/Ü bersc hriften 2/P-T /Pr üfungen vor Inbetriebnahme @ 0\mod_1196327145451_78.doc @ 6394Pos : 4.3 /BA/Sic her heit/G efahrenhi nwei se/Ei nstellarbeiten Selbsfahr er @ 0\mod_1196327276045_78.doc @ 6432Pos : 4.4 /BA/Inbetriebnahme/Big M 400/500/T ägliche Pr üfungen @ 0\mod_1196327<strong>02</strong>3811_78.doc @ 6451Pos : 4.5 /BA/-----Seitenumbr uc h------ @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.doc @ 4165Start-up8 Start-up8.1 Check before Start-upDanger! - Unexpected movement of the machineEffect: Danger to life or serious injuries.• Setting tasks must only be performed when the drive is switched off and the engine is ata standstill!• Switching off the engine• Secure the machine against the possibility of rolling back• Remove the ignition key.• Switch off the main battery switch.8.2 Daily checksTo perform daily tests, the lateral mowing units and the front mowing unit must be in workingposition.Note - Daily checksEffect: Ensures the safety of the machine and extends the machine’s service lifeRegular performance of daily checks on the machine will ensure its safety and significantlyextend the machine’s service life.238
Pos : 4.6 /BA/Inbetriebnahme/Big M 400/500/An der Gr undmaschi ne @ 0\mod_1196328443623_78.doc @ 6475Pos : 4.7 /BA/Inbetriebnahme/Big M 400/500/An den Mähwer ken BM 400 @ 0\mod_1196328709561_78.doc @ 6515Pos : 5 /BA/-----Seitenumbr uc h------ @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.doc @ 4165Start-up8.2.1 On the Basic Machine• Before starting up the machine, lubricate thoroughly.• Check the safety equipment and replace if necessary.• Check the fuel level• Make certain screws are in place and tight.• Coolant check• Clean the engine compartment and intake sieve• Check battery for cuts and breaks• Check the tyre pressure• Test of pilot lamps• Test of light function• Check the brakes for function• Check the oil level on• Hydraulic tank• Engine• Transfer gearboxFor further information about how tasks are designed, please refer to chapter"Maintenance of Basic Machine" and "Maintenance – Engine".8.2.2 On the mowing units• Always check the mowing units for damaged, missing or worn blades, retaining bolts, leafsprings and cutting discs/blade drum before starting operation; replace any parts that aredamaged, missing or worn!• Make certain screws are in place and tight.• Check safety devices and guard cloths for wear and damage and replace if necessary.Check oil level on:• Main gearbox for lateral mowing units• Angular gearbox/front mower• Input gearbox/front mower (CV/CRI)• Speed gearbox/front mower (CV)• Angular gearbox/front mower (CRI)• Gearbox for top roller drive (optional)• Cutter bar/front mower (CV/CRI)• Cutter bar / lateral mowing unitsFor further information about how tasks are designed, please refer to chapter"Maintenance – Mowing Units".239
Pos : 6.1 /Ü bers chriften/Ü bersc hriften 1/F-J/F ahren und Tr ans port @ 0\mod_1196330049217_78.doc @ 6553Pos : 6.2 /Ü bers chriften/Ü bersc hriften 2/P-T /Trans port Str aß enfahrt @ 0\mod_119633<strong>02</strong>70405_78.doc @ 6572Pos : 6.3 /BA/Fahren und Transport/Selbs tfahr er/Zum Trans port müs sen die Mähwer ke hochg eklappt s ei n. @ 0\mod_11963304<strong>02</strong>389_78.doc @ 6591Pos : 6.4 /BA/Sic her heit/F ahr en und Trans por t/G efahr Straß enfahrt,Mitfahren,F ahr ver halten BM 400 @ 0\mod_1196330503498_78.doc @ 6611Pos : 6.5 /BA/-----Seitenumbr uc h------ @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.doc @ 4165Driving and Transport9 Driving and Transport9.1 Transport / Road TravelThe mowing units must be folded up for transport.Danger! - Road travel, passengers and handlingEffect: Danger to life, injuries or damage to the machine.The following conditions must be met for road travel:• The mowing units must be in transport position.• Move the side guards of the front mowing unit right and left to transport position.• The "Road / Field" release switch must be in position I (road travel).• The "Travelling gear" release switch must be in position II (travelling gear on).• Close the shut-off valve on the front outrigger.• When driving on public roads, the provisions of the Road Traffic Licensing Regulationsmust be adhered to (lighting, identification).• To meet the requirements to maintain sufficient distance from overhead power lines thetotal height of the machine must not exceed 4 m (13 ft).• When driving on public roads, lower the front axle to achieve a transport height of max. 4m.• Do not ride as a passenger on the ladders or platform.• Never drive with an engaged parking brake.• Always adapt the travelling speed of the machine on road and field to the givenconditions.• When driving down hills, on inclines or through obstacles, adjust driving behaviour toprevailing driving conditions.• Note that the machine swings out when cornering.240
Pos : 6.6 /BA/Fahren und Transport/Selbs tfahr er/Vorberei tung für di e Tr ansport- /Str aßenfahrt @ 0\mod_1196330928139_78.doc @ 6630Pos : 6.7 /BA/Fahren und Transport/Selbs tfahr er/Sc hutz e hochkl appen @ 0\mod_1196331136248_78.doc @ 6733Pos : 6.8 /BA/-----Seitenumbr uc h------ @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.doc @ 4165Driving and Transport9.2 Preparation for transport/road travel• Fold up the guards on the mowing units.• Lower the hydraulic axle suspension. (See Info Centre chapter "Quick Access toHydraulic Axle Suspension".)• Fold up the mowing units. (See chapter "Operation – Mowing Units" (Transport Position).)• Move the front mowing unit to centre position. (with sideshift option)• Make certain the lock has engaged.• Close the shut-off valve on the front outrigger.• The "Road / Field" release switch must be in position (I) (road travel).• The "Travelling gear" release switch must be in position (II) (travelling gear on).9.2.1 Folding Up the GuardsCaution! - Effect: Damage to the machineCheck every time before transport to make certain the outer side guards (2) of the lateralmowing units right/left have automatically folded up into transport position.If they have not, repeat the process for folding up the lateral mowing units. It may be necessaryto move the outer side guards into transport position manually before the lateral mowing unitsare folded up.221 1BM 400 0196Fig. 196Always move the side guard (1) of the front mowing unit from the right and left sides to thetransport position before road travel.241
Pos : 6.9 /BA/Fahren und Transport/Selbs tfahr er/Frontmähwer k i n Mittelstellung bringen BM 400 @ 0\mod_1196332622<strong>123</strong>_78.doc @ 6752Pos : 6.10 /BA/-----Seitenumbruch------ @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.doc @ 4165Driving and Transport9.2.2 Move the front mowing unit to central position (with sideshift option)Fig. 197Move the front mowing unit to centre position with the foot pedals (3).NoteThe front mower is in central position, as soon as the arrow (1) is aligned to the centre of thetop link (2).242
Pos : 6.11 /BA/F ahren und Tr ans port/Sel bstfahrer/Verriegelung prüfen BM 400 @ 13\mod_1226329<strong>02</strong>2901_78.doc @ 165463Pos : 6.12 /BA/-----Seitenumbruch------ @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.doc @ 4165Driving and Transport9.2.3 Check lockDanger! - Check lockEffect: Danger to life, serious injuries or serious damage to the machine.In transport position the lateral mowing units must be folded back and locked mechanically intovertical position. In addition the mowing units must be raised as far as the stop device. Oncefolded back check the position of the mowing units.1BM 400 0147_1Fig. 198The sensors (1) on the ratchets (right and left-hand side of machine) detect whether themechanical interlocks of the lateral mowing units are properly engaged in transport position.If they are not, an error message appears when driving in Road mode, either "1414 Mowing unitright not in transport position" or "1415 Mowing unit left not in transport position".If one of the error messages above appears, stop the machine immediately and correct theerror (see also the list of errors in the Appendix).243
Pos : 6.13 /BA/F ahren und Tr ans port/Sel bstfahrer/Absperrhahn am Fr ontausl eger s perr en @ 0\mod_1196333122498_78.doc @ 6832Pos : 6.14 /Übersc hriften/Übersc hriften 3/F-J/Freigabesc halter Straße/Fel d @ 0\mod_1196320452967_78.doc @ 6351Pos : 6.15 /BA/F ahren und Tr ans port/Sel bstfahrer/Fr eigabes chalter Straß e/F eld in Position bring en @ 0\mod_1196333385858_78.doc @ 6851Pos : 6.16 /BA/-----Seitenumbruch------ @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.doc @ 4165Driving and Transport9.2.4 Disable the shut-off valve on the front outriggerBA1Fig. 199:BMII-285• Set the shut-off valve (1) on the front to the closed position (position B). The shut-offvalve is located under the front guard.9.2.5 Release switch – road/field1IIIBM 400 <strong>000</strong>7Fig. 200• Set the road safety switch to "Road travel" position. (Position I)244
Pos : 6.17 /Übersc hriften/Übersc hriften 3/F-J/Freigabesc halter F ahrantrieb @ 0\mod_1196319179092_78.doc @ 6293Pos : 6.18 /BA/F ahren und Tr ans port/Sel bstfahrer/Fr eigabes chalter Fahr antri eb in Position bring en @ 0\mod_1196333615201_78.doc @ 6870Pos : 6.19 /BA/-----Seitenumbruch------ @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.doc @ 4165Driving and Transport9.2.6 Release switch travelling gear1IIIBM 400 0010Fig. 201• Move the "Travelling gear" release switch to position (II) (travelling gear on).245
Pos : 6.20 /Übersc hriften/Übersc hriften 2/K-O /Motor anlass en @ 0\mod_1196338713030_78.doc @ 6889Pos : 6.21 /BA/Sicher heit/G efahr enhinweis e/M otor nic ht in g esc hloss enen R äumen l aufen l ass en. @ 0\mod_1196343428061_78.doc @ 6915Pos : 6.22 /BA/F ahren und Tr ans port/Sel bstfahrer/M otor starten Vorrauss etz ung BM 400 Bild @ 41\mod_1271921531365_78.doc @ 373705Driving and Transport9.3 Starting the engineDanger! - Do not allow the engine to run in enclosed areas.Effect: Danger, toxic exhaust!• Only start the engine from the driver's seat.• Always make certain there is no one in the danger zone of the machine.• Activate the horn.• Never allow the engine to run in closed rooms without an extraction unit.• Ensure sufficient ventilation.Fig. 2<strong>02</strong>Pos : 6.23 /BA/F ahren und Tr ans port/Sel bstfahrer/M otor starten Vorrauss etz ung BM 400/500 Text @ 0\mod_1196344454826_78.doc @ 6976Prerequisites:• The main battery switch must be in position I (closed).• Release switch (3) "Parking brake" must be in position II (engaged).• Release switch (1) "Road/Field" must be in position II (Field mode).• Release switch (4) "Travelling gear" must be in position I (off).Pos : 6.24 /BA/-----Seitenumbruch------ @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.doc @ 4165246
Pos : 6.25 /BA/F ahren und Tr ans port/Sel bstfahrer/M otor anl ass en @ 0\mod_1196344545436_78.doc @ 6995Pos : 6.26 /BA/F ahren und Tr ans port/Sel bstfahrer/Anlass vorgang Motor wi eder hol en @ 0\mod_1196344716561_78.doc @ 7014Pos : 6.27 /BA/-----Seitenumbruch------ @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.doc @ 4165Driving and TransportStarting the engine.BMII-187Fig. 203:The following conditions must be met to start the machine:• The main battery switch must be in position I (closed).• "Parking brake" release switch must be in position II (engaged).• "Travelling gear" release switch must be in position I (off).NoteNever activate the starter for longer than 20 seconds. Release the ignition key as soon as theengine is running.If the starting process needs to be repeated:• Switch off the ignition and wait for at least 2 minutes.• Repeat the starting process.After the engine is started the "Engine fault" control light shines briefly. Check immediatelywhether this pilot lamp goes out. If not, switch off the engine at once and remove the fault.The job computer carries out internal system check.After the ignition is switched on, depending on the position of the "Road / field" release switch,the basic screen "Road travel" or "Field mode" appears in the display.At lower temperatures:• In the cold season let the engine run at idling speed for a few minutes after starting.• Always use a so-called “winter diesel” fuel for operation in cold seasons at temperaturesbelow 10 °C (50 °F).247
Pos : 6.28 /BA/F ahren und Tr ans port/Sel bstfahrer/Abwürgen des M otors @ 0\mod_1196345072451_78.doc @ 7033Pos : 6.29 /Übersc hriften/Übersc hriften 3/P-T/Starten mi t ei ner Hilfs batteri e @ 0\mod_1196345290139_78.doc @ 7052Pos : 6.30 /BA/Sicher heit/Batterie/Batterieg ase sind hochexplosi v Version 2 @ 0\mod_1196345356733_78.doc @ 7071Pos : 6.31 /BA/F ahren und Tr ans port/Sel bstfahrer/kalte J ahresz eit @ 0\mod_1196345438248_78.doc @ 7090Pos : 6.32.1 /BA/F ahren und Tr ans port/Sel bstfahrer/Anfahr en @ 0\mod_1196345912842_78.doc @ 7109Pos : 6.32.2 /BA/-----Seitenumbruc h------ @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.doc @ 4165Driving and Transport9.3.1 Killing the engineCaution! - Killing the engineEffect: Damage to the machine• If an engine at operating heat stalls, immediately restart the engine to avoid anexcessive heat accumulation at functionally important parts. Allow the engine to run atidle speed for approx. 1 to 2 minutes before finally turning it off.9.3.2 Starting with an Auxiliary BatteryDanger! - Battery gases are highly explosiveEffect: Danger to life, injuries or damage to the machine.• Keep ignition sources and naked flames away from the battery.• Note the correct polarity when disconnecting and connecting the battery.The machine can be started with an additional 12-V battery in the cold season. The auxiliarybattery must be connected in parallel with the machine batteries.9.4 Starting to DriveDanger! - Starting to DriveEffect: Danger to life, injuries or damage to the machine.• Do not ride as a passenger on the ladders or platform.• Never drive with an engaged parking brake.• Always adapt the travelling speed of the machine on road and field to the givenconditions.• When driving down hills, on inclines or through obstacles, adjust driving behaviour toprevailing driving conditions.• Note that the machine swings out when cornering.248
Pos : 6.32.3 /BA/F ahren und Tr ans port/Sel bstfahrer/Beschl eunigungs verhalten einstellen F ahr hebel ALT @ 0\mod_1196346151295_78.doc @ 7212Pos : 6.32.4 /BA/F ahren und Tr ans port/Sel bstfahrer/Allgemei nes z um F ahr en Hec klenkung @ 0\mod_1196346869<strong>123</strong>_78.doc @ 7252Pos : 6.32.5 /BA/-----Seitenumbruc h------ @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.doc @ 4165Driving and Transport9.4.1 Setting the acceleration behaviourFig. 204:Four different acceleration stages can be selected while driving with the selector switchacceleration ramp (2) attached to the multi-function lever (1).With constant operation of the multi-function lever (1) in a direction and at a constant enginespeed, the driving speed will increase slowest in acceleration stage I and fastest in accelerationstage IV.• Switch the selector switch (2) into the desired acceleration stage.9.4.2 General on DrivingBM 400 149Fig. 205:Observe the following instructions when driving:• Handling the machine requires a certain amount of practice because of the rear steering.• The machine handles differently in level I and II.• In the case of an error message in the Info centre immediately stop and remove the error.If you cannot rectify the fault inform the customer service or your KRONE dealer.249
Pos : 6.32.6 /BA/F ahren und Tr ans port/Sel bstfahrer/Ü berhitz en des H ydrostats ystems ver mei den @ 0\mod_1196347119983_78.doc @ 7271Pos : 6.32.7 /BA/-----Seitenumbruc h------ @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.doc @ 4165Driving and Transport9.4.3 Preventing an overheating of the hydrostatic systemIf the hydrostatic system is overheated, an acoustic warning signal occurs and an opticalwarning symbol appears on the display. Switch off the engine and establish cause ofoverheating.Then improve the effectiveness of the hydrostatic travelling gear by selecting a lower speed,which will reduce the oil temperature.NoteWhen the travelling gear has been killed, never wait longer than 5 seconds to reset the drivinglever to “neutral”; subsequently select a lower speed.The drive moment which acts on the drive wheels depends on the oil pressure in thehydrostatic drive system. If the pressure requirement becomes higher than the pressure in thehydrostatic system, the pressure relief valve will open and the self-propelled high performancemower-conditioner will reduce speed or not move.As soon as the required drive moment decreases (this is achieved by selecting a lower speed),the self-propelled high performance mower-conditioner will drive on again.250
Pos : 6.32.8 /BA/F ahren und Tr ans port/Sel bstfahrer/Vorwärts fahren F ahrhebel ALT @ 0\mod_1196347622014_78.doc @ 7309Pos : 6.32.9 /BA/-----Seitenumbruc h------ @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.doc @ 4165Driving and Transport9.4.4 Driving forwards012BX1008<strong>02</strong>Fig. 206:Starting forwards from standstillAfter the engine is started and the travelling gear is released, the gearbox is in the neutralposition.• Press the activation button for the travelling gear (2) and keep it pressed.• Move the multi-function lever (1) to the front, the machine starts to move forwards andaccelerates.• If you release the multi-function lever (1), it returns automatically to the mid position (0),the speed remains constant.• If you move the multi-function lever (1) to the rear while travelling, the machinedecelerates, it is braked until is comes to a stop by friction.251
Pos : 6.32.10 /BA/F ahr en und Trans port/Selbstfahr er/R üc kwärtsfahr en F ahr hebel ALT @ 0\mod_1196347885936_78.doc @ 7328Pos : 6.32.11 /BA/-----Seitenumbruc h------ @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.doc @ 4165Driving and Transport9.4.5 Reversing012BX1008<strong>02</strong>Fig. 207:Starting in reverse from standstillAfter the engine is started and the travelling gear is released, the gearbox is in the neutralposition.• Press the activation button for the travelling gear (2) and keep it pressed.• Move the multi-function lever (1) to the rear, the machine starts to move in reverse andaccelerates.• If you release the multi-function lever (1), it returns automatically to the mid position (0),the speed remains constant.• If you move the multi-function lever (1) forward during travel, the machine decelerates. Itis braked until it comes to a stop by friction.NoteAn acoustic warning signal sounds when reversing.252
Pos : 6.32.12 /BA/F ahr en und Trans port/Selbstfahr er/T empomat F ahr hebel ALT @ 0\mod_1196348118811_78.doc @ 7410Driving and Transport9.5 Cruise controlThe cruise control can be activated only when travelling forwards. When cruise control isactivated, the machine is accelerated or braked at the set acceleration level for the speed thathas been saved forcruise control.9.5.1 Storing the speed for the cruise control modeThe speed is saved for the operating mode (road/field) the machine is currently in. One speedcan be saved for road and field mode each.Fig. 208• Accelerate the machine to the desired speed.• While travelling press the activation button for the travelling gear (2) and keep it pressed,move the multi-function lever (1) to the right and back to the middle position.The momentary travelling speed is stored.The stored speed (1) is displayed in the display of the Info centre in the travelling gear data Infoarea.253
Pos : 6.32.13 /BA/-----Seitenumbruc h------ @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.doc @ 4165Driving and Transport9.5.2 Activating cruise controlFig. 209• Move the multi-function lever (1) to the right without the activation key while travelling.The saved speed is reached and theInfo Centre display.9.5.3 Deactivating cruise controlicon for cruise control becomes active in theThe cruise control is deactivated by overriding the multi-function lever, operating the operatingbrake and switching off the travelling gear.If you switch into "Road/field" mode, the display switches to the value that is saved for thecurrently selected operating mode (field or road speed).254
Pos : 6.32.14 /BA/F ahr en und Trans port/Selbstfahr er/Anhal ten F ahrhebel ALT @ 0\mod_1196349230795_78.doc @ 7472Pos : 6.32.15 /BA/-----Seitenumbruc h------ @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.doc @ 4165Driving and Transport9.6 StoppingThe machine can be brought to a stop either with the multi-function lever or with the foot brake.9.6.1 Stopping with the multi-function leverFig. 210:Stopping from forward travel:If you move the multi-function lever (1) to the rear during forward travel, the machinedecelerates. It is braked until is comes to a stop.Note - AlternativelyIf you move the multi-function lever (1) to the left during forward travel, the machinedecelerates. It is braked until is comes to a stop.Stopping from reverse travel:Fig. 211:If you move the multi-function lever (1) forward during reverse travel, the machine decelerates.It is braked until is comes to a stop.255
Pos : 6.32.16 /BA/F ahr en und Trans port/Selbstfahr er/Anhal ten mit Fuß bremsen @ 0\mod_1196350380076_78.doc @ 7512Pos : 6.32.17 /BA/-----Seitenumbruc h------ @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.doc @ 4165Driving and Transport9.6.2 Stopping with Foot BrakesDanger!Effect: Danger to life, injuries or damage to the machine.• The brake function must be checked before the start of every trip.• The footbrake must take effect beginning with the first third of pedal travel.• Check the brake linings regularlyFig. 212:Brake the machine slightly:BM 400 <strong>02</strong>28• Depress the foot brake slightly• When you release the brake pedal, the machine accelerates and returns to its originaldriving speed.Brake the machine strongly (braking to avoid accident):• Press the foot brake forcefully downwards.The machine immedialety comes to acomplete stop.256
Pos : 6.32.18 /Ü berschriften/Ü berschriften 2/F-J/Fes tstellbremse @ 6\mod_1214898864996_78.doc @ 96776Pos : 6.32.19 /BA/F ahr en und Trans port/Selbstfahr er/F ests tell brems e @ 0\mod_1196350787826_78.doc @ 7531Pos : 6.32.20 /BA/-----Seitenumbruc h------ @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.doc @ 4165Driving and Transport9.7 Parking BrakeDanger! - Leaving the CabEffect: Danger to life, injuries or damage to the machine.• Before leaving the cab, always apply the parking brake.• Release the parking brake each time before starting to drive.Fig. 213:Note - Parking brake engagedEffect: Brake overheating• Do not drive with the parking brake engaged.I - Parking brake releasedII - Parking brake engaged257
Pos : 6.32.21 /BA/F ahr en und Trans port/Selbstfahr er/M otor abstellen @ 0\mod_1196351418608_78.doc @ 7571Pos : 6.32.22 /BA/F ahr en und Trans port/Selbstfahr er/M asc hine abs tell en @ 0\mod_1196352108780_78.doc @ 7590Pos : 6.32.23 /BA/-----Seitenumbruc h------ @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.doc @ 4165Driving and Transport9.8 Switch off the engineFig. 214:Note - Effect: Longer service lifeBefore finally switching off allow the engine 1 - 2 min. to run in the lower idling range so allimportant parts of the engine can cool down.• Turn the ignition key (1) to position “0”.9.9 Switch off the machineDanger! - Leaving the machineEffect: Danger to life, serious injuries or serious damage to the machine.• Move the mowing units into transport position.• Move the "Road/Field" release switch to the road position.• Apply the holding brake.• Move the "Travelling gear" release switch to position I (off).• Switch off the engine.• Remove the ignition key.• If necessary, fit wheel chocks in place.258
Pos : 6.32.24 /Ü berschriften/Ü berschriften 2/A-E/Abschl eppen @ 35\mod_1256130365838_78.doc @ 326611Pos : 6.32.25 /BA/F ahr en und Trans port/Selbstfahr er/Absc hl eppen @ 0\mod_1196352293795_78.doc @ 7609Pos : 6.32.26 /Ü berschriften/Ü berschriften 3/F-J/Fes tstellbremse manuell l ösen @ 0\mod_1196352596201_78.doc @ 7628Pos : 6.32.27 /BA/Sic herheit/Gefahrenhinweise/Unvor herges ehene Inbetri ebnahme @ 0\mod_1196317459889_78.doc @ 6156Pos : 6.32.28 /BA/F ahr en und Trans port/Unterl egkeile anbringen @ 0\mod_1196352858998_78.doc @ 7647Pos : 6.32.30 /BA/F ahr en und Trans port/Selbstfahr er/F ests tell brems e l ösen @ 0\mod_1196353036858_78.doc @ 7666Pos : 7 /BA/-----Seitenumbr uc h------ @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.doc @ 4165Driving and Transport9.10 TowingCaution!Only move machine out of the danger zone. Never tow over longer distances.If the machine no longer builds up the oil pressure for releasing the parking brake, then theparking brake must be released manually.9.10.1 Releasing the holding brake manuallyDanger! - Accidental start-up of machine and rolling.Effect: Danger to life, injuries or damage to the machine.• Switch off the engine and remove the ignition key.• Secure the machine against the possibility of rolling back.Fitting wheel chocks• Place wheel chocks (1) on both sides in front of or behind (according to slope) the drivingwheels (front axle).• Always place the wheel chocks (1) so that the machine cannot roll away.• Fold the wheel chocks (1) open completely and place then close up against the drivewheels.Pos : 6.32.29 /BA/F ahr en und Trans port/Selbstfahr er/F ests tell brems e l ösen Bild @ 41\mod_1270721094238_78.doc @ 368087221BM 400 <strong>02</strong>58Fig. 215The spring (1) must be set on a block to release the parking brake.To do this:• Loosen the nuts (2)• Set the spring (1) to block.• Tighten the nuts (2) and counter.Note - Towing• Switch on the ignition, so that the indicator (hazard warning flasher) and brake lightsfunction.• Switch the road/field release switch into the road travel position.• Increased steering and braking forces must be applied with the engine switched off.259
Pos : 8.1 /Ü bers chriften/Ü bersc hriften 1/A- E/Bedienung- M ähwer ke @ 0\mod_1196403531183_78.doc @ 7808Pos : 8.2.1 /Ü bers chriften/Ü bersc hriften 2/A- E/Bes timmungsgemäß er Gebrauc h @ 0\mod_1196401545090_78.doc @ 7728Pos : 8.2.2 /BA/Ei nleitung/Besti mmungsgemäß er G ebr auch/Eas yC ut/Besti mmungsgemäßer G ebr auc h (M ehrz ahl) @ 0\mod_1196403327543_78.doc @ 7789Pos : 8.2.3 /BA/Ei nleitung/Besti mmungsgemäß er G ebr auch/Nicht bes timmungs gemäss @ 0\mod_1196401324340_78.doc @ 7690Pos : 8.2.4 /BA/Ei nleitung/Besti mmungsgemäß er G ebr auch/Vertraut mi t Maschi ne @ 0\mod_11964<strong>02</strong>755699_78.doc @ 7770Pos : 8.3 /BA/Bedi enung /F alsc her U mg ang mit Fehler meldungen @ 39\mod_1268149789980_78.doc @ 358355Pos : 8.4 /BA/-----Seitenumbr uc h------ @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.doc @ 4165Operation – Mowing Units10 Operation – Mowing Units10.1 Intended UseThe disc mowers are designed solely for normal agricultural use (intended use).Any use of the machine for other purposes is deemed not to be in accordance with intendeduse. The manufacturer shall not be liable for any resulting damage; the user alone shall bearthe risk.Operation in accordance with intended use also includes observing the operating, maintenanceand service instructions specified by the manufacturer.Unauthorised modifications to the machine may affect the properties of the machine or disruptproper operation. For this reason, unauthorised modifications shall exclude any liability of themanufacturer for consequential damage.The disc mower must be used, maintained and repaired only by personnel who are acquaintedwith the machine and have been informed of the dangers involved.The applicable accident prevention regulations and all other generally recognised safety, healthand road traffic regulations must be observed.CAUTION! –Wrong handling with error messages, identification of faults and defects onthe machineEffect: serious subsequent damages to the machine• If an error message occurs or if a fault or a defect is recognized on the machine, themachine has to be stopped and gears and motor have to be switched off• Before continuing with work, eliminate the cause of the problem immediately260
Pos : 8.5 /Ü bers chriften/Ü bersc hriften 2/A- E/Bedienung der Mähwer ke @ 0\mod_1196404785480_78.doc @ 7850Pos : 8.6 /BA/Sic her heit/G efahrenhi nwei se/M ähwer ke/Ausheben_Senken_Ankl appen der M ähwer ke @ 0\mod_1196404051855_78.doc @ 7827Pos : 8.7 /BA/Bedi enung /M ähwer ke Big M 400/Bedi enung der M ähwer ke Bil d BM 400 @ 41\mod_1271766249227_78.doc @ 372950Pos : 8.8 /BA/Bedi enung /M ähwer ke Big M 400/Bedi enung der M ähwer ke T ext @ 0\mod_1196406980386_78.doc @ 7910Pos : 8.9 /BA/-----Seitenumbr uc h------ @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.doc @ 4165Operation – Mowing Units10.2 Operation of Mowing UnitsDanger!No one is permitted in the danger zone when lifting, lowering or folding up mowing units, orwhen turning on drives.Effect: Danger to life, serious injuries or serious damage to the machine.• Do not lift, lower or fold up the mowing unit until you are absolutely sure that neitherpersons, animals nor objects are in the swivel range of the mowing unit.Fig. 216Operation of mowing units is divided into three areas.1 Operating panelThe operating panel contains switches that are needed to operate the mowing units. (forexample "Road/Field" release switch)2 Multi-function leverThe multi-function lever combines all functions needed to operate the mowing units. (thisincludes lifting, lowering, folding up, switching to working position, transport position or headlandposition and turning on the mowing unit drives)3 Info CentreAll settings/specifications for automatic sequences are stored in the Info Centre. (for exampletime/path control, overcut, automatic cleaning time)For further information, please refer to the Chapter "Info Centre".261
Pos : 8.10 /Übersc hriften/Übersc hriften 2/P-T/Sei tliche M ähwer ke abkl appen @ 0\mod_1196407512074_78.doc @ 7929Pos : 8.11 /BA/Sicher heit/G efahr enhinweis e/M ähwer ke/Aus heben_Senken_Ankl appen der M ähwer ke @ 0\mod_1196404051855_78.doc @ 7827Pos : 8.12 /BA/Ersti nbetriebnahme/Big M 400 / 420/Vorraussetz ung M ähwer ke abkl appen BM 400 @ 0\mod_1196314613655_78.doc @ 5974Pos : 8.13 /BA/-----Seitenumbruch------ @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.doc @ 4165Operation – Mowing Units10.3 Folding Down Lateral Mowing UnitsDanger!No one is permitted in the danger zone when lifting, lowering or folding up mowing units, orwhen turning on drives.Effect: Danger to life, serious injuries or serious damage to the machine.• Do not lift, lower or fold up the mowing unit until you are absolutely sure that neitherpersons, animals nor objects are in the swivel range of the mowing unit.Fig. 217Prerequisites:• The main battery switch (1) must be in position I (closed).• Release switch (3) "Parking brake" must be in position II (engaged).• Release switch (4) "Travelling gear" must be in position I (off).• Starting the engine.• Release switch (1) "Road/Field" must be in position II (Field mode).262
Pos : 8.14 /BA/Bedi enung /Mähwer ke Big M 400/Sei tliche M ähwer ke/Seitlic he Mähwerke von Tr ans portstellung in di e Vorgewendestellung abs enken @ 12\mod_1225195968225_78.doc @ 154142Pos : 8.15 /BA/Bedi enung /Mähwer ke Big M 400/Hi nweis entspr echende T asten s olange gedr üc kt halten @ 31\mod_1252644434480_78.doc @ 306500Pos : 8.16 /BA/Bedi enung /Mähwer ke Big M 400/Sei tliche M ähwer ke/Seitlic he Mähwerke von Vorgewendestellung in di e Arbeitss tell ung absenken @ 0\mod_1196409614230_78.doc @ 8049Pos : 8.17 /BA/Bedi enung /Mähwer ke Big M 400/Hi nweis entspr echende T asten s olange gedr üc kt halten @ 31\mod_1252644434480_78.doc @ 306500Pos : 8.18 /BA/-----Seitenumbruch------ @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.doc @ 4165Operation – Mowing Units10.3.1 Lowering the Lateral Mowing Units from Transport Position to Headland PositionFig. 218:• Using the (4) keys with (12) key pressed on the multi-function lever, lower the left mowingunit from transport position to headland position.• Using the (6) keys with (12) key pressed on the multi-function lever, lower the rightmowing unit from transport position to headland position.or:• Using the (10) key with (12) key pressed on the multi-function lever, lower the right andleft mowing units simultaneously from transport position to headland position.NoteHold the relevant keys down until small movements are no longer visible on the mowing units.10.3.2 Lowering the Lateral Mowing Units from Headland Position to Working PositionFig. 219:• Using the (4) keys on the multi-function lever, lower the left mowing unit from headlandposition to working position.• Using the (6) keys on the multi-function lever, lower the right mowing unit from headlandposition to working position.NoteHold the relevant keys down until small movements are no longer visible on the mowing units.263
Pos : 8.19 /BA/Bedi enung /Mähwer ke Big M 400/Fr ontmähwer k/Frontmähwer k i n die Ar beitsstellung abs enken @ 0\mod_1196413830995_78.doc @ 8097Pos : 8.20 /BA/-----Seitenumbruch------ @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.doc @ 4165Operation – Mowing Units10.3.3 Lower the front mowing unit into working positionFig. 220:• Press the (11) key briefly.The mowing unit automatically lowers into working position.264
Pos : 8.21 /Übersc hriften/Übersc hriften 2/U-Z/Vorgewendestellung @ 0\mod_1196414916041_78.doc @ 8116Pos : 8.22 /BA/Sicher heit/G efahr enhinweis e/M ähwer ke/Aus heben_Senken_Ankl appen der M ähwer ke @ 0\mod_1196404051855_78.doc @ 7827Pos : 8.23 /BA/Bedi enung /Mähwer ke Big M 400/Alle Mähwer ke/Alle M ähwer ke automatisc h i n die Vorgewendestellung heben s enken @ 0\mod_1196414885057_78.doc @ 8135Pos : 8.24 /BA/-----Seitenumbruch------ @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.doc @ 4165Operation – Mowing Units10.4 Headland PositionDanger!No one is permitted in the danger zone when lifting, lowering or folding up mowing units, orwhen turning on drives.Effect: Danger to life, serious injuries or serious damage to the machine.• Do not lift, lower or fold up the mowing unit until you are absolutely sure that neitherpersons, animals nor objects are in the swivel range of the mowing unit.Move all mowing units automatically to headland positionFig. 221:Headland position can be activated by briefly pressing the "9" key (lift all mowers) or the "10"key (lower all mowers).The lateral mowing units are then lifted to the headland position or are lowered to the workingposition depending on the set mode (time / distance control).The mowing units are lifted or lowered in the following order.• Front mowing unit: always immediately (without delay)• lateral right/left mowing units: delayed according to the setting in the Info CentreSettings can only be made in the Info Centre. See Info Centre chapter "Machine Setting"Move the mowing units to the headland positionNoteThe "Lift all mowers" function is designed for full engine speed. If the engine speed is slower,the front mowing unit will not lift completely.265
Pos : 8.25.1 /Übersc hriften/Übersc hriften 2/K-O /Mähwer ksantrieb @ 0\mod_1196415953651_78.doc @ 8154Pos : 8.25.2 /BA/Sicherheit/G efahr enhinweis e/M ähwer ke/Aus heben_Senken_Ankl appen der Mähwer ke @ 0\mod_1196404051855_78.doc @ 7827Pos : 8.25.3 /BA/Ersti nbetriebnahme/Big M 400 / 420/Vorraussetz ung M ähwer ke abkl appen BM 400 @ 0\mod_1196314613655_78.doc @ 5974Pos : 8.25.6 /BA/-----Seitenumbruc h------ @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.doc @ 4165Operation – Mowing Units10.5 Mowing Unit DriveDanger!No one is permitted in the danger zone when lifting, lowering or folding up mowing units, orwhen turning on drives.Effect: Danger to life, serious injuries or serious damage to the machine.• Do not lift, lower or fold up the mowing unit until you are absolutely sure that neitherpersons, animals nor objects are in the swivel range of the mowing unit.Fig. 222Prerequisites:• The main battery switch (1) must be in position I (closed).• Release switch (3) "Parking brake" must be in position II (engaged).• Release switch (4) "Travelling gear" must be in position I (off).• Starting the engine.• Release switch (1) "Road/Field" must be in position II (Field mode).Pos : 8.25.4 /BA/Bedi enung /Mähwerke Big M 400/M ähwer ks antireb/Vorrauss etz ungen T eil 2_M ähwer ks antri eb @ 0\mod_1196416105979_78.doc @ 8173• Move the mowing units at least to the headland position.• Move the "Travelling gear" release switch (4) to position (II) "Travelling gear on".Pos : 8.25.5 /BA/Bedi enung /Mähwerke Big M 400/M ähwer ks antireb/Hi nweis M ähen_Mähwer ksantrieb @ 0\mod_1196416325666_78.doc @ 8192Note - MowingTo be able to switch on the mowing unit drives, the mowing units must be in at least theheadland position or lower.266
Pos : 8.25.7 /BA/Bedi enung /Mähwerke Big M 400/M ähwer ks antireb/M ähwer ks antriebe ei n- bz w. aus schalten @ 0\mod_1196416826651_78.doc @ 8230Pos : 8.25.8 /BA/Bedi enung /Mähwerke Big M 400/M ähwer ks antireb/M ähwer ks antrieb links ei n-/ aussc halten @ 0\mod_1196416988526_78.doc @ 8249Pos : 8.25.9 /BA/-----Seitenumbruc h------ @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.doc @ 4165Operation – Mowing Units10.5.1 Switching the Mowing Unit Drives On and OffNoteThe cross switch lever turns the mowing unit drives on and off.It is important when activating the cross switch lever for it always to be activated beyond thesecond resistor. If the (17) key is pressed in addition to the cross switch lever, make certain thekey remains activated during the entire search process. Do not release the key (17) until thecross switch has moved back to the central position.10.5.2 Switching the Left Mowing Unit Drive On/OffFig. 223:To switch on:• Press the key (17) on the cross switch lever (23).• With the key (17) pressed, move the cross switch lever to the left (G) beyond the secondresistor.• With the key (17) pressed, move the cross switch lever back to the central position (0).• Left mowing unit drive is turned on.To switch off:• Without the (17) key pressed, move the cross switch lever (23) to the left (G) beyond thesecond resistor. The left mowing unit drive is turned off.• If the cross switch lever is released, it automatically returns to the central position (0). Thedrive remains turned off.267
Pos : 8.25.10 /BA/Bedienung /M ähwer ke Big M 400/Mähwer ksantir eb/Mähwer ksantrieb r ec hts ei n-/ aus schalten @ 0\mod_1196418989401_78.doc @ 8587Pos : 8.25.11 /BA/-----Seitenumbruc h------ @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.doc @ 4165Operation – Mowing Units10.5.3 Switching the Right Mowing Unit Drive On/OffFig. 224:To switch on:• Press the key (17) on the cross switch lever (23).• With the key (17) pressed, move the cross switch lever to the right (J) beyond the secondresistor.• With the key (17) pressed, move the cross switch lever back to the central position (0).• Right mowing unit drive is turned on.To switch off:• Without the (17) key pressed, move the cross switch lever (23) to the right (J) beyond thesecond resistor. The right mowing unit drive is turned off.• If the cross switch lever is released, it automatically returns to the central position (0). Thedrive remains turned off.268
Pos : 8.25.12 /BA/Bedienung /M ähwer ke Big M 400/Mähwer ksantir eb/Mähwer ksantrieb front ein- / auss chalten @ 0\mod_1196419288713_78.doc @ 8607Pos : 8.25.13 /BA/-----Seitenumbruc h------ @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.doc @ 4165Operation – Mowing Units10.5.4 Switching the Front Mowing Unit Drive On/OffFig. 225:To switch on:• Press the key (17) on the cross switch lever (23).• With the key (17) pressed, move the cross switch lever forward (K) beyond the secondresistor.• With the key (17) pressed, move the cross switch lever back to the central position (0).• Front mowing unit drive is turned on.To switch off:• Without the (17) key pressed, move the cross switch lever (23) forward (K) beyond thesecond resistor. The front mowing unit drive is turned off.• If the cross switch lever is released, it automatically returns to the central position (0). Thedrive remains turned off.269
Pos : 8.25.14 /BA/Bedienung /M ähwer ke Big M 400/Mähwer ksantir eb/All e Mähwer ksantri ebe ein-/ auss chalten @ 0\mod_1196419828495_78.doc @ 8627Pos : 8.26 /BA/-----Seitenumbruch------ @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.doc @ 4165Operation – Mowing Units10.5.5 Switching All Mowing Unit Drives On/OffFig. 226:To switch on:• Press the key (17) on the cross switch lever (23).• With the key (17) pressed, move the cross switch lever back (M) beyond the secondresistor.• With the key (17) pressed, move the cross switch lever back to the central position (0).• All mowing unit drives are turned onTo switch off:• Without the (17) key pressed, move the cross switch lever (23) back (M) beyond thesecond resistor. All mowing unit drives are turned off.• If the cross switch lever is released, it automatically returns to the central position (0). Thedrives remain turned off.Note - Switch off all mowing unit drives• Pressing the (1) key on the multi-function lever also turns off all mowing unit drives.270
Pos : 8.27 /Übersc hriften/Übersc hriften 2/P-T/Sei tliche M ähwer ke ankl appen @ 0\mod_1196420119916_78.doc @ 8646Pos : 8.28 /BA/Sicher heit/G efahr enhinweis e/M ähwer ke/Aus heben_Senken_Ankl appen der M ähwer ke Stillstand abwarten @ 0\mod_1196420841213_78.doc @ 8665Pos : 8.29 /BA/Bedi enung /Mähwer ke Big M 400/Er klär ung Vorg ewendes tell ung / Trans portstell ung @ 0\mod_1196421528916_78.doc @ 8685Pos : 8.30 /BA/-----Seitenumbruch------ @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.doc @ 4165Operation – Mowing Units10.6 Folding Up Lateral Mowing UnitsDanger! - No one is permitted in the danger zone when lifting, lowering or folding upmowing units, or when turning on drives.Effect: Danger to life, serious injuries or serious damage to the machine.• Lateral mowing units may only be folded up when the mowing units have come to acomplete stop.• Do not lift, lower or fold up the mowing unit until you are absolutely sure that neitherpersons, animals nor objects are in the swivel range of the mowing unit.• After the mowing units are folded up, move the safety switch "Road/Field" to position I(Road travel).Note - Explanation of headland position / transport positionA distinction is made when lifting the mowing units between headland position and transportposition.In the headland position, the mowing units are automatically raised to the headland position.271
Pos : 8.31 /BA/Bedi enung /Mähwer ke Big M 400/Sei tliche M ähwer ke/Pr üfen der Verrieg elung an den seitlic hen M ähwer ken @ 13\mod_1226496860803_78.doc @ 166017Pos : 8.32 /BA/Bedi enung /Mähwer ke Big M 400/Sei tliche M ähwer ke/Seitlic he Mähwerke von Arbeitss tell ung i n die Vorgewendes tell ung ausheben @ 0\mod_1196423609307_78.doc @ 8744Pos : 8.33 /BA/-----Seitenumbruch------ @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.doc @ 4165Operation – Mowing Units10.6.1 Checking the Lock on the Lateral Mowing UnitsDanger! - Check interlockEffect: Danger of fatal or serious injuries or serious damage to the machine.• Before the lateral mowing units are brought in transport position, make a visualinspection of the mechanical fuses. If the mowing units are in working position the pawl(1) must be in the position as illustrated (a = approx. 5°). Ensure that the spring (2) is in acorrect position.Fig. 227:10.6.2 Lifting the Lateral Mowing Units from working Position to Headland PositionFig. 228:• The (9) key on the multi-function lever automatically lifts all mowing units to the headlandposition.272
Pos : 8.34 /Übersc hriften/Übersc hriften 3/P-T/Sei tliche M ähwer ke von Vorgewendes tell ung i n die Transports tell ung kl appen @ 0\mod_1196423977651_78.doc @ 8763Pos : 8.35 /BA/Sicher heit/G efahr enhinweis e/M ähwer ke/Aus heben_Senken_Ankl appen der M ähwer ke Stillstand abwarten @ 0\mod_1196420841213_78.doc @ 8665Pos : 8.36 /BA/Bedi enung /Mähwer ke Big M 400/Sei tliche M ähwer ke/s eitl M ähwer ke von Vorgewendes tell ung i n Tr ans portstellung BM 400 @ 12\mod_1225197346850_78.doc @ 154192Pos : 8.37 /BA/-----Seitenumbruch------ @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.doc @ 4165Operation – Mowing Units10.6.3 Folding the Lateral Mowing Units from Headland Position to Transport PositionDanger! - No one is permitted in the danger zone when lifting, lowering or folding upmowing units, or when turning on drives.Effect: Danger to life, serious injuries or serious damage to the machine.• Lateral mowing units may only be folded up when the mowing units have come to acomplete stop.• Do not lift, lower or fold up the mowing unit until you are absolutely sure that neitherpersons, animals nor objects are in the swivel range of the mowing unit.• After the mowing units are folded up, move the safety switch "Road/Field" to position I(Road travel).Fig. 229• The mowing unit drives must be turned off.All mowing units can coast down after the mower drives are turned off. Wait for themowing unit to come to a complete stop.• Using the (5) keys with (12) key pressed on the multi-function lever, move the left mowingunit from headland position to transport position.• Using the (7) keys with (12) key pressed on the multi-function lever, move the rightmowing unit from headland position to transport position.or:• Using the (9) key with (12) key pressed on the multi-function lever, move the right and leftmowing units simultaneously from headland position to transport position.NoteThe lifting cylinders are fitted with a hydraulic cushion. That means the lateral mowing unitsmove curbed before they reach the locking pawl (1).The keys on the multi-function lever should therefore be held 2 seconds longer than any motionis discernable on the mowing units.273
Pos : 8.38 /BA/F ahren und Tr ans port/Sel bstfahrer/Verriegelung prüfen BM 400 @ 13\mod_1226329<strong>02</strong>2901_78.doc @ 165463Pos : 8.40 /BA/-----Seitenumbruch------ @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.doc @ 4165Operation – Mowing Units10.6.4 Check lockDanger! - Check lockEffect: Danger to life, serious injuries or serious damage to the machine.In transport position the lateral mowing units must be folded back and locked mechanically intovertical position. In addition the mowing units must be raised as far as the stop device. Oncefolded back check the position of the mowing units.Fig. 2301BM 400 0147_1The sensors (1) on the ratchets (right and left-hand side of machine) detect whether themechanical interlocks of the lateral mowing units are properly engaged in transport position.If they are not, an error message appears when driving in Road mode, either "1414 Mowing unitright not in transport position" or "1415 Mowing unit left not in transport position".If one of the error messages above appears, stop the machine immediately and correct theerror (see also the list of errors in the Appendix).Pos : 8.39 /BA/Bedi enung /Mähwer ke Big M 400/Fr ontmähwer k/Frontmähwer k i n die Trans ports tell ung anheben @ 0\mod_1196425584651_78.doc @ 880110.7 Raising the Front Mowing Unit to Transport PositionFig. 231:• Press the (8) keys briefly. The mowing unit is raised to transport position274
Pos : 8.41 /Übersc hriften/Übersc hriften 2/K-O /Mähen @ 0\mod_1196426120010_78.doc @ 8839Pos : 8.42 /BA/Sicher heit/G efahr enhinweis e/U ner wartete Bewegung for tschl eudern von Steinen @ 0\mod_1196425801338_78.doc @ 8820Pos : 8.43 /BA/Sicher heit/G efahr enhinweis e/M ähwer ke/Reparatur _Wartung _Rei nigungs @ 0\mod_1196426193<strong>02</strong>6_78.doc @ 8858Pos : 8.44 /BA/-----Seitenumbruch------ @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.doc @ 4165Operation – Mowing Units10.8 MowingDanger! - Unexpected motion of cutting tools or mowing units and forcibly ejectedstones during operation.Effect: Danger to life, injuries or damage to the machine.• The mowing units are suitable for and intended for cutting crops growing on the ground!• To prevent any of the mowing units from overloading, when operating a single mowingunit do not drive faster than you would if you were operating all mowing unitssimultaneously.• The mowing units are not suitable for mowing embankments!• The support skids must rest on the ground before start-up and during work!• Always check the protective devices for damage before the machine is used. Replacedamaged protective devices immediately.• Move the protective devices into their protective positions.• Do not use the machine until you are absolutely sure that neither persons, animals norobjects are in the danger zone of the mowing units.Danger! - When performing repair, maintenance or cleaning work on the machine , or inthe case of technical intervention, drive elements may start moving.Effect: Danger to life, injuries or damage to the machine.• Work on the cutter blades or their fastenings must only be performed with the drivestopped and the cutting discs and drums stopped.• Switch off the mowing unit drives• Switch off the engine and remove the ignition key.• Wait until the cutting discs and/or drums have come to a complete stop• Remove the ignition key!• Secure the machine against accidental start-up and against rolling!• Support the lifted mower bed! Never step under suspended loads!• Safe operation is only guaranteed if the blades have been fitted according to theinstructions!• Always check the mowing unit for damaged, missing or worn blades, retaining bolts, leafsprings and cutting discs/blade drum before starting operation; replace any parts that aredamaged, missing or worn!275
Pos : 8.45 /BA/Sicher heit/G efahr enhinweis e/M ähwer ke/Ei nheit Zetterprall blec h bz w. Ei nheit Sc hnec kenquerför der er nicht angebaut. @ 14\mod_1227107737315_78.doc @ 168398Pos : 8.46 /BA/Bedi enung /Wildsc hutz @ 46\mod_1283864895734_78.doc @ 451321Pos : 8.48 /BA/Bedi enung /Mähwer ke Big M 400/Hi nweis absc halten der Sc hwi mmstellung währ end des Mähens @ 49\mod_1287055607937_78.doc @ 464739Operation – Mowing UnitsDanger! - Tedder deflector plate unit or auger-type cross conveyor unit not fitted.Effect: Danger to life or serious injuries.The machine must not be placed in operation until the tedder deflector plate unit or auger-typecross conveyor unit has been properly installed.10.9 Game animal protection5 67 8Pic. 232B C D BM 400 <strong>02</strong>66After the first switching on of the mowing unit drive an information picture with the correctmowing performance appears temporarily on the display.When mowing from “outside to inside”, the animals are slowly forced from the safe boundaryarea into the centre of the area, which makes the possibility for a life-saving escape for theanimal more difficult or takes it away.A remedy for this issue is the mowing method from “inside to outside” of the area.In doing so, you drive directly into the centre of the parcel without mowing the boundary areaand mow anticlockwise from “inside to outside”. Therefore the animal can leave the field incompliance with its flight behaviour without any harm.Pos : 8.47 /BA/Bedi enung /Mähwer ke Big M 400/Vor auss etz ung z um M ähen BM 400 @ 0\mod_1196427018838_78.doc @ 8878Precondition for mowing:• Open the shut-off valve on the front outrigger.• Starting the engine• Move release switch for "Road/field" to position II (field mode).• Move the mowing units to the working position.• The guard cloths must be in the working position.• Move the "Travelling gear" release switch to position II (on).• Switch on the mowing unit drives.• Move the "Parking brake" release switch to position I (released).• Increase rpms to working speed.• Drive into the crop.• The travel speed during mowing is determined by usage conditions (soil conditions,height, density and nature of the crop)Note - Reverse travel in Field mode!The disc mowers are designed to travel forwards. If the road safety switch is in field position,the mowing units are automatically lifted out when the machine is reversed.276
Pos : 8.50 /Übersc hriften/Übersc hriften 3/P-T/Sc hutze in Arbeits stellung bring en @ 35\mod_1258461422738_78.doc @ 335195Pos : 8.51 /BA/Bedi enung /Mähwer ke Big M 400/Sc hutze in Arbeits positi on bring en BM 400 @ 0\mod_1196427345510_78.doc @ 8918Pos : 8.52 /BA/-----Seitenumbruch------ @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.doc @ 4165Operation – Mowing UnitsNote!During mowing the mowing units are in “float position” so they can adapt to the groundcontours during mowing process. If the machine is switched off when the mowing unitsare in working position, the float position will be deactivated. When starting again inworking position the float position will stay deactivated. Only after the key for thefunction “lower all mowers” is shortly actuated, the mowing units will be in float positionagain (alternately the float position can be individually activated with the accordant keyfor each mowing unit).10.9.1 Moving the guards into the working position1Fig. 2331 11BM 400 0197• Switch off the engine. Remove the ignition key!• Secure the machine against accidental start-up and against rolling!• Check the guard cloths (1.3) regularly.• Replace worn or damaged guard cloths.• The guard cloth (3) must be tightened each time before using the mower so that it cannotbe caught by the conditioner auger.NoteThe protective equipment on the mowing units, e.g. cloths and hoods, protects against flyingstones and similar objects and also prevents access to dangerous parts.Fold down the side plates (1) before operation.277
Pos : 8.53 /BA/Bedi enung /Mähwer ke Big M 400/H albautomati k @ 0\mod_1196427924588_78.doc @ 8937Pos : 8.54 /BA/Bedi enung /Mähwer ke Big M 400/M ähwer ks antireb/M ähen mit einzel nen M ähwer ken @ 0\mod_1196428174510_78.doc @ 8956Pos : 8.55 /BA/-----Seitenumbruch------ @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.doc @ 4165Operation – Mowing Units10.9.2 Semi-automatic modeFig. 234:In semi-automatic mode, the mowing units can be switched step by step from working positionto headland position by using the keys (E, G, H).With the semi-automatic mode switched off when lifting, the mowing units are automaticallylifted from working position to headland position.• The semi-automatic mode is activated by pressing the (N) key (pilot lamp (O) lights up).• By pressing the (N) key again, the semi-automatic mode is exited and the pilot lamp (O)goes off.NoteWhen operating the Lift All Mowers key (J), it is not possible to lift the mowing units step by stepin semi-automatic mode. Even in semi-automatic mode, all mowing units are automatically liftedfrom mowing position to headland position.10.9.3 Mowing with Individual Mowing UnitsThe following options are available for mowing remaining pieces.• Lift the mowing units that are no longer required for mowing into headland position. To dothis, activate the appropriate keys on the multi-function lever.• The front mowing unit alone can be used to mow small parcels of crop or narrow sectionsin open fields. The lateral mowing units then remain in transport position.278
Pos : 8.56 /BA/Bedi enung /Mähwer ke Big M 400/Sc hnellstopp F ahrhebel ALT @ 0\mod_1196428282901_78.doc @ 8975Pos : 8.58 /BA/-----Seitenumbruch------ @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.doc @ 4165Operation – Mowing Units10.9.4 Quick stopFig. 235:Activating quick stop• Move the multi-function lever (1) to the left while driving.The machine decelerates to a complete stop.Pos : 8.57 /BA/Bedi enung /Mähwer ke Big M 400/Sc hneller F ahrtrichtungs wec hs el (Schnellr eversi erung) Fahrhebel ALT @ 31\mod_1252576008404_78.doc @ 30624310.9.5 Quick change of direction of travel (quick reversing)Fig. 236Activating fast reversing• While travelling press the activation button for the traction drive (2) and keep it pressed,move the multi-function lever (1) to the left and back to the central position.The forage machine decelerates down to standstill and accelerates in the opposite direction toapprox. 70% of the previous travelling speed.NoteFast reversing is possible only in the field mode.279
Pos : 8.59 /BA/Bedi enung /Mähwer ke Big M 400/Ac hstr ennung ein- /aussc halten @ 0\mod_1196428626854_78.doc @ 9055Pos : 9 /BA/-----Seitenumbr uc h------ @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.doc @ 4165Operation – Mowing Units10.9.6 Switching Axle Separation On and OffSwitch on axle separation to prevent the wheels from spinning on slippery surfaces. Axleseparation is only available in Field mode.Prerequisites for activating the axle separation:• Road/field release switch must be in the field mode position• Travelling gear release switch must be switched on.• Travel speed must be less than 14 km/h.Fig. 237:Switching on the axle separationActuate the axle separation button (1) – axle separation is switched onThe symbol (axle separation active) appears in the display of the Info centre.Switching off the axle separation• Actuate the axle separation button (1) again.Theicon (axle separation active) appears in the display of the Info Centre.280
Pos : 10.1 /Übersc hriften/Übersc hriften 1/A-E/Ei nstellungen der M ähwer ke @ 0\mod_1196660315463_78.doc @ 9095Pos : 10.2 /Übersc hriften/Übersc hriften 2/P-T/Spezi elle Sic her heitshi nweis e @ 0\mod_1196660495760_78.doc @ 9134Pos : 10.3 /BA/Sicher heit/G efahr enhinweis e/M ähwer ke/Aus führen von Instands etz ungs-, Pfleg e-, War tungs- und R einigungsar beiten @ 0\mod_1196660613260_78.doc @ 9153Pos : 10.4 /BA/-----Seitenumbruch------ @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.doc @ 4165Adjusting the mowing units11 Adjusting the mowing units11.1 Special Safety InstructionsDanger! - When performing repair, maintenance or cleaning work on the machine , or inthe case of technical intervention, drive elements may start moving.Effect: Danger to life, injuries or damage to the machine.• Switch off the engine and remove the ignition key.• Secure the machine against accidental start-up and against rolling!• The cutter blades can continue to rotate after the drive has been switched off. Onlyapproach the machine once the work tools have come to a complete standstill!• After completing maintenance work reattach all safety devices properly.• Avoid skin contact with oil and grease.• Seek medical help immediately should injuries caused by oil escaping under pressureoccur.281
Pos : 10.5.1 /Übersc hriften/Übersc hriften 2/A-E/Ei nstellen der Sc hni tthöhe @ 0\mod_1196660879619_78.doc @ 9191Pos : 10.5.2 /BA/Eins tell ung en/Mähwer ke/Sc hnitthöhe/Allgemein Sc hnitthöhe Big M 400 @ 0\mod_1196661001853_78.doc @ 9210Pos : 10.5.3 /Übersc hriften/Übersc hriften 3/F-J/Frontmähwer k @ 0\mod_1196675077463_78.doc @ 10648Pos : 10.5.4 /BA/Eins tell ung en/Mähwer ke/Sc hnitthöhe/Sc hnitthöhe am Frontmähwer k Bild @ 0\mod_1196661320135_78.doc @ 9250Pos : 10.5.5 /BA/Eins tell ung en/Mähwer ke/Sc hnitthöhe/Sc hnitthöhe größ er_geri nger @ 0\mod_1196661562478_78.doc @ 9269Pos : 10.5.6 /BA/-----Seitenumbruc h------ @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.doc @ 4165Adjusting the mowing units11.2 Adjusting the cutting heightThe cutting height can be adjusted to different soil conditions. Each of the mowing units isadjusted individually for height.Before making settings for cutting height, the hydraulic axle suspension must be in the mowingposition. (See Info Centre chapter "Quick Access to Hydraulic Axle Suspension".)Note - Good cutting patternFor a good cutting pattern, adjust the cutting height to the same height on all mowing units11.2.1 Front mowing unit1Fig. 238:BM 400 0175The cutting height is adjusted via the top link (1).To do this:• Lower the front mowing unit into working position• Rotate the top suspension arm (1)Top suspension arm longer = smaller cutting heightTop suspension arm shorter = bigger cutting height282
Pos : 10.5.7 /Übersc hriften/Übersc hriften 3/A-E/Aus hubhöhe ei nstellen @ 0\mod_1196675396916_78.doc @ 10668Pos : 10.5.8 /Übersc hriften/Übersc hriften 4/Frontmähwer k @ 0\mod_1196674467494_78.doc @ 10628Pos : 10.5.9 /BA/Eins tell ung en/Mähwer ke/Aushubhöhe des Fr ontmähwer ks einstellen @ 0\mod_119666183<strong>02</strong>91_78.doc @ 9309Pos : 10.5.10 /BA/-----Seitenumbruc h------ @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.doc @ 4165Adjusting the mowing units11.2.2 Adjusting the Lifting Height11.2.2.1 Front mowing unitPos.1Pos.2Pos.3BM 400 0176Fig. 239:The front mowing unit can be suspended in several positions by means of the ‘Weiste’ triangle.This causes the front mower to lift up to a higher or lower position.• In the upper position (1), the front mower lifts to a higher position• At mid position (2) the mower is in the normal position• In the lower position (3), the front mower lifts to a lower positionBy linking the upper rod into the lower positions (2, 3) on the ‘Weiste’ triangle, it is possible toobtain a smaller adjustment to the front mower inclination. This keeps the cutting heightconstant when making ground adjustments on very uneven land283
Pos : 10.5.11 /Ü berschriften/Ü berschriften 3/A-E/Eins tell en der Schnitthöhe @ 0\mod_11966742<strong>02</strong>135_78.doc @ 10608Pos : 10.5.12 /Ü berschriften/Ü berschriften 4/Seitenmähwerk @ 0\mod_1196675520994_78.doc @ 10687Pos : 10.5.13 /BA/Ei nstellungen/M ähwer ke/Schnitthöhe/Eins tell ung der Sc hnitthöhe am Seitenmähwer k @ 0\mod_1196664319228_78.doc @ 10095Pos : 10.5.14 /BA/-----Seitenumbruc h------ @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.doc @ 4165Adjusting the mowing units11.2.3 Adjusting the cutting height11.2.3.1 Lateral Mowing UnitFig. 240• Lower the lateral mowing unit into working position.• Remove the linch pin (1).• Put the locking clip (2) to one side.• Set the direction of rotation for the setting ratchet (4) on the lever (3).Lengthen threaded spindle = smaller cutting heightShorten threaded spindle = bigger cutting height• Twist the threaded spindle (3), until the locking clip (2) can be inserted.• Secure the locking clip (2) with the linch pin (1).284
Pos : 10.5.15 /BA/Ei nstellungen/M ähwer ke/Wasser waag e @ 0\mod_1196664592103_78.doc @ 10114Pos : 10.6 /BA/-----Seitenumbruch------ @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.doc @ 4165Adjusting the mowing unitsFig. 241Display(for example)TheoreticallyCutting height+6°approx. 11 cm+3°approx. 8 cm+0°approx. 6 cm-3°about 4 cm-5° approx. 3 cmTo suit usage conditionsHigh cut field forage moistdry groundField forageDry conditionsNormal conditionsIncreasingLow cut entails risk of damage to swardYou can set and read off the cutting height you require using the spirit level.• Unscrew the wing screw (1).• Set indicator (2) to the required angle on the angle scale (3).• Tighten the wing screw.• Change the mower setting on the setting ratchet until the bubble (4) is in the centre.NoteOne revolution on the top suspension arm sleeves of the lateral mowing units (12 ratchetmovements) corresponds to about 4 revolutions on the top suspension arm sleeve of the frontmowing unit.Additional adjusting skids should be fitted.285
Pos : 10.7.1 /Übersc hriften/Übersc hriften 2/A-E/Ei nstellung der Entlas tungsfedern @ 0\mod_1196666659447_78.doc @ 10133Pos : 10.7.2 /BA/Sicherheit/G efahr enhinweis e/Eins tell ung an den Entl astungsfedern nur in Transports tell ung @ 0\mod_1196666898416_78.doc @ 10171Pos : 10.7.3 /BA/Eins tell ung en/Mähwer ke/Eas yCut/Bodendruc k/Bodendruc k allgemeiner T ext all e EC @ 0\mod_1196667271181_78.doc @ 10190Pos : 10.7.4 /BA/-----Seitenumbruc h------ @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.doc @ 4165Adjusting the mowing units11.3 Adjusting the Compensation SpringsDANFER! – Setting on the compensation springsEffect: Danger to life or serious injuries• The compensation springs should be adjusted only while the front mower is in thetransport position. In the working position the compensation springs are subject to hightensile stress.• Severe injury can be caused if the compensation springs are removed while in theworking position.• The lower threaded blocks on the compensation springs must be fully screwed in.The ground pressure for the cutter bar is adjusted to local conditions by means of thecompensation springs. In order to protect the sward the load on the mowing spar must berelieved so that it does not jump when mowing, yet does not leave any skid marks on theground.286
Pos : 10.7.5 /Übersc hriften/Übersc hriften 3/F-J/Frontmähwer k @ 0\mod_1196675077463_78.doc @ 10648Pos : 10.7.6 /BA/Eins tell ung en/Mähwer ke/Entlas tungsfedern am Frontmähwer k BM 400 @ 0\mod_1196667362510_78.doc @ 1<strong>02</strong>09Pos : 10.7.7 /BA/-----Seitenumbruc h------ @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.doc @ 4165Adjusting the mowing units11.3.1 Front mowing unitFig. 242:• Move the hydraulic axle suspension to the mowing position (see Info Centre chapterentitled "Quick Access to Hydraulic Axle Suspension")• With the sideshift option, the front mowing unit must be in the central position. (seeSection 3.4, multi-function lever).• The front mowing unit must be put into the transport position before you adjust theadjusting piece (1).• Unscrew the linch pins (3).• Unhook the spring assemblies (2).• Insert the adjustment piece (1) into the required hole.• Insert the spring assemblies (2) and secure with the linch pin (3)• The spring assemblies (2) are fitted on the side of the mower into the top hole (6).If the adjusting piece (1) is in the upper position (4), this means there is less springtension, and thus, increased ground pressureIf the adjusting piece (1) is in the lower position (5), this means there is greater springtension, and thus, reduced ground pressure287
Pos : 10.7.8 /Übersc hriften/Übersc hriften 3/P-T/Sei tenmähwer k @ 0\mod_1196675974056_78.doc @ 10706Pos : 10.7.9 /BA/Eins tell ung en/Mähwer ke/Einstell ung der Entl astungs feder n an den s eitlichen M ähwer ken @ 0\mod_1196667911275_78.doc @ 1<strong>02</strong>28Pos : 10.8 /BA/-----Seitenumbruch------ @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.doc @ 4165Adjusting the mowing units11.3.2 Lateral Mowing UnitFig. 243:The load on the lateral mowing units is compensated by means of the four tension springs (1)on the left and right outriggers. The ground pressure can be adjusted by reinstalling the bolts(2).• Lift the lateral mowing units over the headland position, so that the compensation springsare not under tension.• Support the lateral mowing unit• Pull out the bolts (2) after you have removed the linch pin.• If the bolts are moved further to the left: lower ground pressure• If the bolts are moved further to the right: the ground pressure is increased• Insert the bolts (2) and secure with the linch pin.NoteWhen driving on the road fit the maximum spring compensation bolts at level 3 (centre hole)288
Pos : 10.9 /Übersc hriften/Übersc hriften 2/A-E/Ei nstellung der Z etter drehzahl @ 0\mod_1196668564463_78.doc @ 1<strong>02</strong>66Pos : 10.10 /BA/Sic herheit/Gefahrenhinweise/Ei nstellungen an der M asc hine @ 0\mod_1196668628056_78.doc @ 1<strong>02</strong>85Pos : 10.11 /Ü berschriften/Ü berschriften 3/P-T/Seitenmähwer k @ 0\mod_1196675974056_78.doc @ 10706Pos : 10.12 /BA/Ei nstellungen/M ähwer ke/Z etterdr ehzahl/An den s eitlichen Mähwer ken BiG M 400 @ 0\mod_1196668721994_78.doc @ 10304Pos : 10.13 /BA/-----Seitenumbruc h------ @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.doc @ 4165Adjusting the mowing units11.4 Adjusting the Tedder SpeedDanger! - Settings on the machineEffect: Danger to life, injuries or damage to the machine.• Setting tasks must only be performed when the drive is switched off and the engine is ata standstill! Remove the ignition key!11.4.1 Lateral Mowing UnitFig. 244Two conditioner speeds can be set on the main gearbox. This affects the conditioning effect andthe power consumption.Normal operation 700 rpm.Maximum operation: 1<strong>000</strong> rpm.Only use the speed 700 r.p.m. during the running in phase of the engine of approx. 25hours.• Unscrew the screw (2) on the actuating lever (1).• Turn the actuating lever 180 degrees.• Fasten the actuating lever with the screw (2).To synchronise the gear wheels while the change is being made, loosen the screws (3), openthe flap (4) and turn the drive shaft using a suitable tool.289
Pos : 10.14 /Ü berschriften/Ü berschriften 3/F-J/Frontmähwer k (CV) @ 0\mod_119667<strong>02</strong>25510_78.doc @ 10342Pos : 10.15 /BA/Ei nstellungen/M ähwer ke/Z etterdr ehzahl/Z etterdr ehzahl Bild Big M 400 @ 0\mod_119667<strong>02</strong>84744_78.doc @ 10361Pos : 10.16 /BA/Ei nstellungen/M ähwer ke/Z etterdr ehzahl/Z etterdr ehzahl eins tell en 700/1<strong>000</strong> @ 0\mod_1196670462416_78.doc @ 10380Pos : 10.17 /BA/-----Seitenumbruc h------ @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.doc @ 4165Adjusting the mowing units11.4.2 Front mowing unit (CV)7001<strong>000</strong>EC-219-0Fig. 245:Two conditioner speeds can be set on the speed gearbox. This affects the conditioning effectand the power consumption.Minimum speed: 700 rpm.Maximum speed: 1<strong>000</strong> rpm.• Unscrew the wing screw (1) from the actuating lever (2).• Turn the actuating lever (2) 180 degrees. (in doing so turn the mower drum (3) so that thecomplete actuating lever can be turned.• Secure the actuating lever (2) with the wing screw (1).290
Pos : 10.18.1 /Ü berschriften/Ü berschriften 2/A-E/Eins tell en des Aufber eitungs blec hs @ 0\mod_1196670615681_78.doc @ 10399Pos : 10.18.2 /BA/Sic herheit/Gefahrenhinweise/gebroc hene Zi nken @ 0\mod_1196670786291_78.doc @ 10437Pos : 10.18.3 /BA/Ei nstellungen/M ähwer ke/Ei nstellen Aufber eitungsbl ec h Bild ( BiG M C V)_1 @ 35\mod_1258634248392_78.doc @ 335275Pos : 10.18.4 /BA/Ei nstellungen/M ähwer ke/Vorgehens weis e @ 0\mod_1196671<strong>02</strong>6697_78.doc @ 10475Pos : 10.18.5 /BA/Ei nstellungen/M ähwer ke/Kontroll e der Zetter walz e @ 0\mod_1196671110947_78.doc @ 10456Pos : 10.19 /BA/-----Seitenumbruc h------ @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.doc @ 4165Adjusting the mowing units11.5 Adjusting the conditioner plateCaution! - Damaged or missing tinesEffect: Damages to the machine.• Bent and broken prongs cause an imbalance.• Straighten any bent tines.• Replace any broken tines.(Big M CV)Fig. 246The conditioning of the mowed crop can be influenced by adjusting the conditioning platethrough the crank (1). The adjustment depends on the desired degree of conditioning of thecrop:Clockwise rotation: Degree of conditioning is increasedAnticlockwise rotation: Degree of conditioning is decreasedNote - Checking the conditioner augerEffect: Longer service life• Before putting into operation, always check the conditioner roller (1) for damaged V-tines(2).• Straighten any bent tines.• Replace any broken tines.• Check the bearing bolts and bushes on the prong bearings. To prevent the loss of prongs,always replace bearing bolts and bushes in good time.291
Pos : 10.20 /BA/Ei nstellungen/M ähwer ke/R ollen-Conditi oners @ 0\mod_1196673043650_78.doc @ 10513Pos : 10.21 /BA/Ei nstellungen/M ähwer ke/Eins tellen des R ollenabs tandes @ 0\mod_1196673207822_78.doc @ 10532Pos : 10.22 /BA/-----Seitenumbruc h------ @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.doc @ 4165Adjusting the mowing units11.6 Adjusting the roller conditioner (optional extra/Big M CRI)xFig. 247:GeneralCRI-0-001The roller conditioner is supplied for use with leguminous vegetation or other leaf crops.The conditioning intensity is adjusted by the setting spindle (1). The setting spindle (1) is used tochange the distance or contact pressure of the rollers. The minimum distance (x) between therollers must always be at least 4 mm.11.6.1 Adjusting the roller distance2134BMII-372Fig. 248:• Loosen the locknut (1) with a hex key (W/F 24).• Turn the adjusting nut (2) on the threaded spindle with a hex key (W/F 46).Clockwise rotation: Roller distance is reduced.Anticlockwise rotation: Roller distance is increased.• Retighten the locknut (1) with a hex key (W/F 24).292
Pos : 10.23 /BA/Ei nstellungen/M ähwer ke/Eins tellen des R ollendr uc kes Big M 400 @ 0\mod_1196673373<strong>02</strong>5_78.doc @ 10551Pos : 10.24 /BA/-----Seitenumbruc h------ @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.doc @ 4165Adjusting the mowing units11.6.2 Adjusting the roller pressure21BM 400 0154Fig. 249• Loosen the locknut (2) with a hex key (W/F 41).• Turn the spindle on the screw head (1) with a hex key (W/F 55).Clockwise rotation: Greater insertion forceAnticlockwise rotation: Less insertion force• Retighten the locknut (1) with a hex key (W/F 41).Note - Optimising crop flow• Dimension "a" must be within the range 60 - 75 mm. If the distance is set to less than 60mm, the upper roller will not be able to swing out far enough, which will impede crop flow.• Reset the roller distance each time you make an adjustment.293
Pos : 10.25 /BA/Ei nstellungen/M ähwer ke/Abs treiferbl ec h am Q uer för der er @ 0\mod_1196673648681_78.doc @ 10570Pos : 10.26 /BA/-----Seitenumbruc h------ @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.doc @ 4165Adjusting the mowing units11.7 Setting of the Scraper on the Cross Conveyor (Optional)Fig. 250The scraper (1) on the cross conveyor (right and left) are used to scrape off crop and preventthe cross conveyor from becoming clogged.To achieve optimum working results, a dimension of X= 0-2 mm must be maintained.To adjust the scraper:• Loosen the screw (1)• Push the scraper into the oblong hole until a dimension of X= 0-2 mm is reached.• Tighten the screw (1) again.294
Pos : 10.27 /Ü berschriften/Ü berschriften 2/A-E/Einstell en Sc hwadbrei te @ 0\mod_1196673972744_78.doc @ 10589Pos : 10.28 /BA/Ei nstellungen/M ähwer ke/Schwadbr eite / Brei tablag e/Allgemeiner T ext @ 0\mod_1196676313885_78.doc @ 10726Pos : 10.29 /Ü berschriften/Ü berschriften 3/F-J/Frontmähwer k @ 0\mod_1196675077463_78.doc @ 10648Pos : 10.30 /BA/Ei nstellungen/M ähwer ke/Schwadbr eite / Brei tablag e/Ei nstellen Sc hwadbreite Fr ontmähwer k @ 0\mod_1196676466135_78.doc @ 10745Pos : 10.31 /BA/-----Seitenumbruc h------ @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.doc @ 4165Adjusting the mowing units11.8 Adjusting the swath widthFig. 251:The swath width is adjusted by means of the swath plates at the rear of the disc mowers.11.8.1 Front mowing unitSet the swath width so that the mower track is kept free.• Unscrew the ring nut (1).• Adjust the swath width.• Tighten the ring nut (1) again.NoteSwath width setting: with the swath grouping option (BSS), the swath width of the front mowingunit must be set as narrow as possible. This ensures that there is enough free space availableto hold the crop of the lateral mowing units.295
Pos : 10.32 /Ü berschriften/Ü berschriften 3/P-T/Seitenmähwer k @ 0\mod_1196675974056_78.doc @ 10706Pos : 10.33 /BA/Ei nstellungen/M ähwer ke/Schwadbr eite / Brei tablag e/Ei nstellen Sc hwadbreite Seitenmähwer k @ 0\mod_1196676735<strong>02</strong>5_78.doc @ 10764Pos : 10.34 /BA/-----Seitenumbruc h------ @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.doc @ 4165Adjusting the mowing units11.8.2 Lateral Mowing UnitFig. 252:Adjust the swath width.• Unscrew the ring nut (1).• Adjust the swath width.• Tighten the ring nut (1) again.NoteSet more free space for overcut.The narrower the swath width setting on the outer swath boards (2) of the lateral mowing units,the more free space for overcut is achieved.296
Pos : 10.35 /BA/Ei nstellungen/M ähwer ke/Eins tellung der Q uerlenker an den Seitenmähwer ken @ 0\mod_1196677014275_78.doc @ 10783Pos : 10.36 /Ü berschriften/Ü berschriften 2/K-O/Leitbl ec he @ 0\mod_1196677535<strong>02</strong>5_78.doc @ 108<strong>02</strong>Pos : 10.37 /Ü berschriften/Ü berschriften 3/F-J/Frontmähwer k @ 0\mod_1196675077463_78.doc @ 10648Pos : 10.38 /BA/Ei nstellungen/M ähwer ke/Leitbl eche Fr ontmähwer k @ 0\mod_1196677613072_78.doc @ 10821Pos : 10.39 /BA/-----Seitenumbruc h------ @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.doc @ 4165Adjusting the mowing units11.9 Adjusting the track control arm on the lateral mowing unitsCaution!If the cutting height is 0° the distance dimension "a" between the side plate (4) and theoutrigger (5) must not exceed 60 mm CV/100 mm CRI.31a24 5BM 400 0155Fig. 253The lateral mowing units (3) are aligned by means of the track control arm (1)• Loosen the counter nut (2) on the track control arm (1).• Adjust the track control arm (1) until the dimension a between the lateral mowing unit (4)and the outrigger (5) is set to 60 mm.• Tighten the counter nut (2) on the track control arm (1)11.10 Deflector Plates11.10.1 Front mowing unit1324BM 400 0156Fig. 254Deflector plates are located on the front mowing unit (3) in the swath former area (2); these arefitted to the housing with fastening screws (1).• If the swathing is uneven examine the deflector plates (4) for deformation, and straightenthem if necessary.297
Pos : 10.40 /BA/Ei nstellungen/M ähwer ke/D eakti vier en der Achs federung @ 0\mod_1196677719369_78.doc @ 10840Pos : 11 /BA/-----Sei tenumbruch------ @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.doc @ 4165Adjusting the mowing units11.11 Deactivating the axle suspensionFig. 255:The Big M front axle has a hydro-pneumatic suspension. If axle suspension is active, the twoball valves (1) and (2) are open, as illustrated in the figure.Fig. 256:The front axle suspension can be deactivated.• To deactivate the front axle suspension, shut the ball valve (1) for the left hydrauliccylinder and the ball valve (2) for the right hydraulic cylinder .Note - Lowering / lifting the front axleThe front axle can be moved both with activated and deactivated axle suspension.298
Pos : 12.1.1 /Übersc hriften/Übersc hriften 1/P-T/Sonder aus stattung- M ähwer ke @ 0\mod_1196678406869_78.doc @ 10859Pos : 12.1.2 /Übersc hriften/Übersc hriften 2/U-Z /U mbau der Einhei t Z etterpr allbl ech auf Sc hnec kenquerför der er @ 0\mod_1196679637806_78.doc @ 10918Pos : 12.1.3 /BA/Sicherheit/G efahr enhinweis e/Es können Antriebs elemente in Bewegung g eraten @ 0\mod_1196679836822_78.doc @ 10937Pos : 12.1.4 /BA/Sicherheit/G efahr enhinweis e/M ähwer ke/Ei nheit Zetterprall blec h bz w. Ei nheit Sc hnec kenquerför der er nicht angebaut. @ 14\mod_1227107737315_78.doc @ 168398Pos : 12.1.5 /BA/Sonder ausstatung/U mbau/U mbau Zetter prall blec h auf Schnec kenq uerförderer /Umbau Zetterprall blec h auf Sc hnec kenquer för der er @ 0\mod_1196678706338_78.doc @ 10879Pos : 12.1.6 /BA/-----Seitenumbruc h------ @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.doc @ 4165Special Equipment – Mowing Units12 Special Equipment – Mowing Units12.1 Converting the Tedder Deflector Plate to an Auger-Type Cross ConveyorDanger! - When performing repair, maintenance or cleaning work on the machine, or inthe case of technical intervention, drive elements may start moving.Effect: Danger to life or serious injuries• The cutting discs continue to run!• Switch off the engine and remove the ignition key.• Secure the machine against accidental start-up and against rolling!• Only use appropriate and authorised lifting gear for the installation and removal of theauger-type cross conveyor (total weight of the conveyors = approx. 300 kg).Danger! - Tedder deflector plate unit or auger-type cross conveyor unit not fitted.Effect: Danger to life or serious injuries.The machine must not be placed in operation until the tedder deflector plate unit or auger-typecross conveyor unit has been properly installed.NoteThe following description shows the installation of the auger-type cross conveyor on the righthand mower side. The installation on the left-hand mower side has to be carried out in ananalogous way.Depending on how the machine is equipped, the "tedder deflector plate" can optionally beconverted to an "auger-type cross conveyor" or vice versa.The process for converting the "tedder deflector plate" to an auger-type cross conveyor isdescribed below.Prerequisite:• Lower all lateral mowing units (1) on to a firm subsoil.• Switching off the engine• Remove the ignition key• Secure the machine against the possibility of rolling back.299
Pos : 12.1.7 /BA/Sonder ausstatung/U mbau/U mbau Zetter prall blec h auf Schnec kenq uerförderer /Zetter prall blec h abbauen @ 0\mod_1196684286525_78.doc @ 10996Pos : 12.1.8 /BA/Sonder ausstatung/U mbau/U mbau Zetter prall blec h auf Schnec kenq uerförderer /Spannsc hlöss er l ösen @ 0\mod_1196684641931_78.doc @ 11036Pos : 12.1.9 /BA/Sonder ausstatung/U mbau/U mbau Zetter prall blec h auf Schnec kenq uerförderer /Zetter prall blec h entfernen @ 0\mod_1196686072900_78.doc @ 11055Special Equipment – Mowing Units12.1.1 Removing the tedder deflector plateDanger! - DetachingEffect: Danger to life or serious injuries• Only use appropriate and authorised lifting gear for the installation and removal of theauger-type cross conveyor (total weight of the conveyors = approx. 300 kg).Fig. 257:Installing the retaining chains• Attach the retaining chains (2) to the ring bolts (3) and (4) of the tedder deflector plate (1).12.1.2 Releasing the tension jacks134325BM 400 <strong>02</strong>16Fig. 258Release the tension jacks (1) and (2) located at the outer side of the mower (3).Release the inner tension jacks (3) and (4) of the mowing unit (3).300
Pos : 12.1.10 /BA/-----Seitenumbruc h------ @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.doc @ 4165Special Equipment – Mowing Units12.1.3 Removing the tedder deflector plateFig. 259• Slightly raise the tedder deflector plate (1) and remove it sideways from the mowing unit(2).Note - Removed tedder deflector plateStore the tedder deflector plate (1) in a secure and dry place.301
Pos : 12.1.11 /Ü berschriften/Ü berschriften 3/U-Z/Zi nken pr üfen @ 0\mod_1196686894088_78.doc @ 11074Pos : 12.1.12 /BA/Sic herheit/Gefahrenhinweise/gebroc hene Zi nken @ 0\mod_1196670786291_78.doc @ 10437Pos : 12.1.13 /BA/Sonderauss tatung/U mbau/U mbau Z etter prallbl ec h auf Sc hnec kenquerförderer/Zi nken prüfen @ 0\mod_1196686959166_78.doc @ 11093Pos : 12.1.14 /BA/Sonderauss tatung/U mbau/U mbau Z etter prallbl ec h auf Sc hnec kenquerförderer/Schutzbl ec h demontier en @ 0\mod_1196688190822_78.doc @ 11112Pos : 12.2 /BA/-----Seitenumbruch------ @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.doc @ 4165Special Equipment – Mowing Units12.1.4 Checking the TinesCaution! - Damaged or missing tinesEffect: Damages to the machine.• Bent and broken prongs cause an imbalance.• Straighten any bent tines.• Replace any broken tines.Fig. 260:Check the V-shaped tines (1) and the retaining bolts (2) of the mowing unit (3) for damage.12.1.5 Removing the guardFig. 261:• Remove the hexagon head cap screws (1).• Remove the guard (2) and store it in a secure place.3<strong>02</strong>
Pos : 12.3.1 /BA/Sonder ausstatung/U mbau/Sc hnec kenquer för der er anbauen @ 0\mod_1196689156088_78.doc @ 11169Pos : 12.3.2 /BA/-----Seitenumbruc h------ @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.doc @ 4165Special Equipment – Mowing Units12.1.6 Installing the auger-type cross conveyorDanger! - Attaching / detachingEffect: Danger to life or serious injuries• Only use appropriate and authorised lifting gear for the installation and removal of theauger-type cross conveyor (total weight of the conveyors = approx. 300 kg).311254BM 400 0157Fig. 262Installing the retaining chains• Attach the retaining chains (1) to the ring bolts (2) and (3) of the auger-type crossconveyor (4).• Slowly lower the auger-type cross conveyor (4) onto the mowing unit (5).Abb. 263• Be sure to lower the auger-type cross conveyor into the guide pins (1) and (2).NoteThe surfaces (3) and (4) have to be flat against either side of the mowing unit.303
Pos : 12.3.3 /BA/Sonder ausstatung/U mbau/Spannschl öss er sc hließ en @ 0\mod_1196689498291_78.doc @ 11209Pos : 12.4 /Übersc hriften/Übersc hriften 2/K-O /Keilriemen s pannen @ 0\mod_1196690438916_78.doc @ 11228Pos : 12.5 /BA/Sonder ausstatung/U mbau/Keilriemen s pannen @ 0\mod_1196690564916_78.doc @ 11266Pos : 12.6 /BA/Sonder ausstatung/U mbau/Sc hutzbl ec h montieren @ 0\mod_1196690733244_78.doc @ 11285Special Equipment – Mowing Units12.1.7 Locking the tension jacksFig. 264• Lock the tension jacks (1) and (2) located on the inner side of the mowing unit (3).• Also lock the outer tension jacks (4) and (5).NoteBe sure the tension jacks (1) and (2) are under tension when locked; retighten as required.12.2 Tensioning the V-belts1324BM 400 0159Fig. 265• Use the mounting lever (1) to raise the idler pulley (2).• Place the V-belt (3) on to the pulley (4).• Lower the idler pulley (2) slowly and withdraw the mounting lever (1).Use the mounting lever (1) supplied in the on-board tool box.With the V-belt under tension, dimension X has to be equal to approx. 80 mm.304
Pos : 12.7 /BA/Sonder ausstatung/U mbau/Dr ehzahls ens or ans chli eßen @ 0\mod_119669085<strong>02</strong>75_78.doc @ 11304Pos : 12.8 /BA/-----Seitenumbruch------ @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.doc @ 4165Special Equipment – Mowing Units12.2.1 Installing the guardFig. 266• Install the guard (1) on to the mowing unit (3) using the hexagon head cap screws (2).12.2.2 Connecting the speed sensorFig. 267• Connect the speed sensor cable (1) to the speed sensor cable (2) of the auger-type crossconveyor.305
Pos : 12.9.1 /Übersc hriften/Übersc hriften 3/U-Z /Unter blec he demontier en @ 0\mod_1196691635447_78.doc @ 11342Pos : 12.9.2 /BA/Sicherheit/G efahr enhinweis e/M ähwer ke/Reparatur_Wartung _Rei nigungs _1 @ 0\mod_1196691273135_78.doc @ 11323Pos : 12.9.3 /BA/Sonder ausstatung/U mbau/U nterlegbl ec he/Teil 1 U nterlegbl ec h demontier en @ 0\mod_1196693166181_78.doc @ 11361Pos : 12.9.4 /BA/-----Seitenumbruc h------ @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.doc @ 4165Special Equipment – Mowing Units12.2.3 Removing the floor platesDanger! - No one is permitted in the danger zone when lifting, lowering or folding upmowing units, or when turning on drives.Effect: Danger to life, serious injuries or serious damage to the machine.• Do not lift, lower or fold up the mowing unit until you are absolutely sure that neitherpersons, animals nor objects are in the swivel range of the mowing unit.• Switch off the engine and remove the ignition key.• Secure the machine against accidental start-up and against rolling!• Lock the mowing units against lowering using appropriate retaining chains.or• Protect the mowing units against lowering by suitable means (for example a supportblock)NoteThe following steps are described only for the right-hand side of the later mowing unit. Theprocess of removing the floor plates for the left lateral mowing unit is analogous to the rightside.Fig. 268To prevent stones or other foreign bodies from accumulating inside the feed channel chamberduring the operation of the augers, the floor plates (1) and (2) of mowing unit (3) can beremoved as follows:• Raise the lateral mowing unit (1).• Fit retaining chains (2) to the lateral mowing unit (1).306
Pos : 12.9.5 /BA/Sonder ausstatung/U mbau/U nterlegbl ec he/Teil 2 U nterbl ec he demonti eren @ 0\mod_1196761039406_78.doc @ 12957Pos : 12.10 /BA/-----Seitenumbruc h------ @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.doc @ 4165Special Equipment – Mowing UnitsFig. 269• Remove the hexagonal nuts of the bolts (1).• Remove the connecting bolts (2).• Carefully the remove floor plate (3) to the rear.• Store floor plates, bolts and nuts in a secure place.• Remove the retaining chains• Lower the lateral mowing units into working positionFig. 270After the cross conveyor is attached, the side guard cloth (1) must be cut off on the right and leftmowing unit. It may also be necessary to shorten the clamping strap (2) appropriately.307
Pos : 12.11 /BA/Sonderauss tatung/U mbau/Schmi erleitung en uml egen @ 0\mod_1196695905681_78.doc @ 11909Pos : 12.12 /BA/-----Seitenumbruc h------ @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.doc @ 4165Special Equipment – Mowing Units12.2.4 Relaying the Lubrication LinesFig. 271When the machine is converted from a "Tedder deflector plate unit" to an "Auger-type crossconveyor", the lubrication lines must be relaid as described below.• Loosen lubrication line (1) at the T-screw connection (2).• Loosen the sealing screw (3) on the lubricating point connection.• Unto the lubrication connection (1) to the auger bearing (BSS).• Install the sealing screw (2) on the T-screw connection308
Pos : 12.13 /BA/Sonderauss tatung/U mbau/M ontageanleitung der Pr alltücher für Big M 400 mit BSS @ 0\mod_1196746211375_78.doc @ 11935Pos : 12.14 /BA/-----Seitenumbruc h------ @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.doc @ 4165Special Equipment – Mowing Units12.2.5 Installation Instructions – Bulge Bags for Big M 400 with BSS5246132BM 400 0160Fig. 272Placing bulge bags on the right and left auger hoods reduces the amount of dirt in the coolingair.Installation instructions:• Screw bulge bags securely onto the auger hoods (1). (Install coach bolts from below.)• Pull the rod (2) through the eyes of the bulge bag (3)• Insert the rod (2) from behind into the hole on the frame (4). Insert the rod (2) into thehole on the mowing unit support from above in front (5) and secure it with the springcotter pin (6).309
Pos : 12.15.1 /Ü berschriften/Ü berschriften 3/P-T/Schnec kenkontroll e ei nsc halten @ 0\mod_1196746530468_78.doc @ 11954Pos : 12.15.2 /BA/Sic herheit/Gefahrenhinweise/Motor nic ht i n ges chl oss enen R äumen laufen las sen. @ 0\mod_1196343428061_78.doc @ 6915Pos : 12.15.3 /BA/-----Seitenumbruc h------ @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.doc @ 4165Special Equipment – Mowing Units12.2.6 Switching on the auger monitoring modeDanger! - Do not allow the engine to run in enclosed areas.Effect: Danger, toxic exhaust!• Only start the engine from the driver's seat.• Always make certain there is no one in the danger zone of the machine.• Activate the horn.• Never allow the engine to run in closed rooms without an extraction unit.• Ensure sufficient ventilation.310
Pos : 12.15.4 /BA/Sonderauss tatung/U mbau/Schnec kenkontroll e einsc halten @ 46\mod_1283839613843_78.doc @ 451083Pos : 12.15.5 /BA/-----Seitenumbruc h------ @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.doc @ 4165Special Equipment – Mowing UnitsIn order to start the auger monitoring mode, it has to be activated in the info centre. Pleaseproceed as follows:• Set ignition key to position I or II.• Wait for the self test to run down.NoteAfter the ignition has been switched on, the start screen "Road Driving or Field Operation" willappear on the display.CVSemi50cmFig. 273• You can bring up a menu level with the key on the rotary potentiometer.• Select main menu 1 "Machine setting" with the rotary potentiometer.• Press the rotary potentiometer.• Select main menu 1-2 "Machine setting" with the rotary potentiometer.• Press the rotary potentiometer.The display shows menu level "Machine setting".• Activating theDkey brings up the basic screen.• You can use the rotary potentiometer to select the desired setting. The selection box ishighlighted in colour.• Pressing the rotary potentiometer allows you to jump to the selection box.• You can use the rotary potentiometer to set the desired value.• Pressing the rotary potentiometer causes the setting to be applied and returns you fromthe selection box.• Pressing the key on the rotary potentiometer takes you one menu level back.311
Pos : 12.15.6 /BA/Info-Center/Bi G M 400 / BiG M 500/Hauptmenüs/H auptmenü 1 Ei nstellungen/1-1 Parameter Big M 400 / 500/Eins tell ung: Sc hnec kenüber wac hung @ 0\mod_1196749161203_78.doc @ 12416Pos : 12.16 /BA/Sonderauss tatung/U mbau/U mbau Sc hnec kenq uerförderer auf " Einheit Z etter prallbl ec h" @ 0\mod_1196749796562_78.doc @ 12435Pos : 12.17 /BA/Sic herheit/Gefahrenhinweise/Mähwer ke/Ei nheit Z etter prallbl ec h bz w. Einheit Sc hnec kenq uerförder er nic ht angebaut. @ 14\mod_1227107737315_78.doc @ 168398Pos : 12.18 /BA/-----Seitenumbruc h------ @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.doc @ 4165Special Equipment – Mowing Units5) Setting: Auger monitoringBoth augers onRight auger onLeft auger onBoth augers off12.2.7 Converting an Auger-Type Cross Conveyor to a "Tedder deflector plate unit"The conversion process is in the in reverse order.Danger! – Stones are hurled up during operationEffect: Danger to life or serious injuries.• After the auger-type cross conveyor has been removed, the tedder deflectorplates must bereinstalled! (See chapter "Installing the Auger-Type Cross Conveyor".)(but in the opposite order) Otherwise license to operator becomes voidFig. 274Danger! - Tedder deflector plate unit or auger-type cross conveyor unit not fitted.Effect: Danger to life or serious injuries.The machine must not be placed in operation until the tedder deflector plate unit or auger-typecross conveyor unit has been properly installed.312
Pos : 12.19 /BA/Sonderauss tatung/U mbau/Z us atz ausr üstung- Mulc hgerät @ 0\mod_119675<strong>02</strong>42750_78.doc @ 12454Pos : 12.20 /BA/-----Seitenumbruc h------ @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.doc @ 4165Special Equipment – Mowing Units12.3 Additional Equipment – Mulching DeviceMulching devices can be used as additional equipment. For further information, please ask themulching device dealerAddress:Van Wamel BVEnergieweg 1NL-6658 AE Beneden-LeeuwenNoteOnly attachment and detachment of mowing units is described below.For information on operation, service, attaching, and detaching mulching devices, pleaseconsult the mulching device manufacturer.313
Pos : 12.21.1 /Ü berschriften/Ü berschriften 2/A-E/Abbau der M äheinheiten @ 0\mod_1196750875734_78.doc @ 12492Pos : 12.21.2 /BA/Sic herheit/Gefahrenhinweise/Mähwerke/U mbau_Wartungsar beiten @ 0\mod_1196750571265_78.doc @ 12473Pos : 12.21.3 /Ü berschriften/Ü berschriften 3/F-J/Frontmähwer k @ 0\mod_1196675077463_78.doc @ 10648Pos : 12.21.4 /BA/Sonderauss tatung/U mbau/Abbau der Mäheinheiten/Vorrauss etzung am Big M 400 @ 0\mod_1196751006250_78.doc @ 12530Pos : 12.21.6 /BA/-----Seitenumbruc h------ @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.doc @ 4165Special Equipment – Mowing Units12.4 Removing Mowing UnitsDanger! - Drive elements may be placed in motion during conversion and installationwork on the machine.Effect: Danger to life or serious injuries• The cutting discs continue to run!• Switch off the engine and remove the ignition key.• Do not leave the driver’s cab until the cutting discs/blade drums have come to a completestop.• Avoid skin contact with oil and grease.• Seek medical help immediately should injuries caused by oil escaping under pressureoccur.• Secure the machine against accidental start-up and against rolling!• After conversion and installation work is complete, mount all safety devices properlyagain.• Only use appropriate and authorised lifting gear for installation and removal of themowing units (weight approx. <strong>150</strong>0 kg).12.4.1 Front mowing unitThe following conditions must be met in advance on the Big M 400:• The front mowing unit is in transport position• Switch off the engine, remove the ignition key, and secure the machine from rolling away.• Move the "Travelling Gear" release switch to position I (off).• Move release switch for "Road/field" to position II (field mode).• Close the shut-off valve for the front outrigger.Pos : 12.21.5 /BA/Sonderauss tatung/U mbau/Abbau der Mäheinheiten/Abbau Sc hutztuc h @ 0\mod_1196751259531_78.doc @ 12549Removing the Guard ClothFig. 275• Detach the guard cloth (1) with the expander band (2)314
Pos : 12.21.7.1 /Ü berschriften/Ü berschriften 3/A-E/D emontage der Entl astungsfedern @ 0\mod_1196751819984_78.doc @ 12594Pos : 12.21.7.2 /BA/Sic herheit/Gefahrenhinweise/Mähwer ke/Einstellung an den Entlas tungsfedern @ 0\mod_1196751594562_78.doc @ 12575Pos : 12.21.7.3 /BA/Sonderauss tatung/U mbau/D emontage Entlas tungsfedern @ 0\mod_1196751888812_78.doc @ 12613Pos : 12.21.8 /BA/-----Seitenumbruc h------ @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.doc @ 4165Special Equipment – Mowing Units12.4.2 Removing of the compensation springsDanger! - Setting on the compensation springsEffect: Danger to life or serious injuries• The compensation springs must only be removed in transport position. In the workingposition the compensation springs are subject to high tensile stress.• Severe injury can be caused if the compensation springs are removed while in theworking position.• The lower threaded blocks on the compensation springs must be fully screwed in.2211BM 400 0161Fig. 276NoteDetach the compensation spring (1) in transport position.To do this:• Release the hinged cotter pin (2)• Detach the compensation springs (1) and set down the front mowing unit315
Pos : 12.21.9 /BA/Sonderauss tatung/U mbau/Abbau der Mäheinheiten/Abbau der G elenkwelle: @ 0\mod_1196752140328_78.doc @ 12651Pos : 12.21.10 /BA/-----Seitenumbr uch------ @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.doc @ 4165Special Equipment – Mowing Units12.4.3 To remove the PTO shaft:Fig. 277• Open the shut-off valve for the front outrigger.• Lower the front mowing unit into working position• Detach the support chain (1)• Remove the screw (2) from the PTO shaft• Pull the PTO shaft (3) off the front mower• Connect the PTO shaft (3) with support chain (1) to the "Weiste" triangle (4).316
Pos : 12.21.11 /BA/Sonderausstatung/U mbau/Abbau der M ähei nheiten/Bei Opti on Z entralsc hmier ung @ 0\mod_1196757373343_78.doc @ 12729Pos : 12.21.12 /BA/-----Seitenumbr uch------ @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.doc @ 4165Special Equipment – Mowing UnitsWith central lubrication optionFig. 278Disconnect the lubrication line (1) to the distributor (2).To do this:• Pull off the flap (3)• Press in the lock (4) with a screwdriver and pull out the line (1).NoteIf the pressure on the lubrication lines is too high, loosen a lubrication point first to reduce thepressure. Do not close the line (1)! (Grease under high pressure)317
Pos : 12.21.13 /BA/Sonderausstatung/U mbau/Abbau der M ähei nheiten/Abbau des Weis tedrei ec ks @ 0\mod_1196752658046_78.doc @ 12691Special Equipment – Mowing Units12.4.4 Removing the Weiste TriangleFig. 279To continue with disassembly of the front mowing unit, semi-automatic mode must be activated.To do this:• Press the key (13) on the multi-function lever to activate semi-automatic mode (LED (14)lit).• Raise the front lifting gear slightly with the (8) key on the multi-function lever.This will relieve the locking bolts (1) on the Weiste triangle.• Unscrew and remove the locking bolt (1).• Adjust the top suspension arm (2) until it is free of tension.Caution! - Do not lower the front mowing unit too farEffect: Damages to the machineIn the following work step, make certain not to lower the front lifting gear too far. Doing so willdamage the front mowing unit.• You can use the (11) key on the multi-function lever to lower the front lifting gear until thefront lifting gear is under the Weiste triangle.• Press the (8) key on the multi-function lever briefly to stop the lowering process.318
Pos : 12.21.14 /BA/-----Seitenumbr uch------ @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.doc @ 4165Special Equipment – Mowing UnitsCaution! - The front lifting gear is raised in reverse travel.Effect: Damages to the machineThe (Road/Field) release switch must be in "Road Travel" positionFig. 280Switch the (Road/Field) release switch into "Road Travel" position.NoteThis prevents the front lifting gear from automatically being raised during reverse travel.Moving the machine in reverse in Road mode319
Pos : 12.21.15 /BA/Sonderausstatung/U mbau/Abbau der M ähei nheiten/Anbau des Frontmähwer ks @ 0\mod_1196756376531_78.doc @ 12710Pos : 12.21.16 /BA/-----Seitenumbr uch------ @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.doc @ 4165Special Equipment – Mowing Units12.4.5 Attaching the Front Mowing Unit21BMII-313Fig. 281The front mowing unit is attached in the reverse order.NoteThe lifting gear must be raised in "Semi-automatic" modeConnect the PTO shaft (1) high on the Weiste triangle (2) to avoid a collision with the frontmower plate320
Pos : 12.21.17.1 /Ü bersc hriften/Ü bersc hriften 3/A- E/Abbau der sei tlichen Mäheinheit @ 0\mod_1196757669828_78.doc @ 12767Pos : 12.21.17.2 /BA/Sic her heit/G efahr enhi nweis e/M ähwer ke/U mbau_Wartungs arbeiten @ 0\mod_1196750571265_78.doc @ 12473Pos : 12.21.17.3 /BA/Sonderausstatung/U mbau/Abbau der s eitlic hen M ähei nheiten/Sc hritt 1 Vorrauss etz ung @ 0\mod_1196757867390_78.doc @ 12786Pos : 12.21.17.4 /BA/-----Sei tenumbr uch------ @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.doc @ 4165Special Equipment – Mowing Units12.4.6 Removing the Side Mowing UnitDanger! - Drive elements may be placed in motion during conversion and installationwork on the machine.Effect: Danger to life or serious injuries• The cutting discs continue to run!• Switch off the engine and remove the ignition key.• Do not leave the driver’s cab until the cutting discs/blade drums have come to a completestop.• Avoid skin contact with oil and grease.• Seek medical help immediately should injuries caused by oil escaping under pressureoccur.• Secure the machine against accidental start-up and against rolling!• After conversion and installation work is complete, mount all safety devices properlyagain.• Only use appropriate and authorised lifting gear for installation and removal of themowing units (weight approx. <strong>150</strong>0 kg).Step 1:The following conditions must be met in advance on the Big M 400:Move the "Travelling Gear" release switch to position I (off).• Move release switch for "Road/field" to position II (field mode).• Move the hydraulic axle suspension to the mowing position (see Info Centre chapterentitled "Quick Access to Hydraulic Axle Suspension")321
Pos : 12.21.17.5 /BA/Sonderausstatung/U mbau/Abbau der s eitlic hen M ähei nheiten/Sc hritt 2 Abbau s eitl. M ähei nheit @ 0\mod_1196758043531_78.doc @ 12805Pos : 12.21.17.6 /BA/-----Sei tenumbr uch------ @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.doc @ 4165Special Equipment – Mowing UnitsStep 2:for standard equipment:Fig. 282Set spring compensation to minimum.To do this:• Lift the lateral mowing units out through the headland position.• Switch off the engine, remove the ignition key, and secure the machine from rolling away.• Move the socket pin (1) to pos. I and secure it with a linch pin.• Lower the lateral mowing units into working position.322
Pos : 12.21.17.7 /BA/Sonderausstatung/U mbau/Abbau der s eitlic hen M ähei nheiten/Sc hritt 3 Abbau s eitl. M ähei nheit @ 46\mod_1283840472171_78.doc @ 451109Pos : 12.21.17.9 /BA/-----Sei tenumbr uch------ @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.doc @ 4165Special Equipment – Mowing UnitsStep 3:Fig. 283With hydraulic spring compensation design (optional):• Lower the lateral mowing units into working position.•5Pressing the or 6compensation.6key brings up hydraulically adjustable lateral springPos : 12.21.17.8 /BA/Sonderausstatung/U mbau/Abbau der s eitlic hen M ähei nheiten/Sc hritt 4 Abbau s eitl. M ähei nheit @ 0\mod_1196758874468_78.doc @ 12843• Pressing the keys and the key reduces the pressure of the lateral mowing unitsto "zero bar".• Remove the ignition key and secure the vehicle and machine against rolling.Step 4:Fig. 284• Insert the clamping plate (1) (Item No. 233 505 0) from above into the right and left springassemblies (2)NoteBoth clamping plates on the right and left sides are also required for dismantling just onemowing unit to make the outrigger arm free of tension.323
Pos : 12.21.17.1 /BA/Sic her heit/G efahr enhi nweis e/M ähwer ke/Eins tellung an den Entl astungsfedern @ 0\mod_1196751594562_78.doc @ 12575Pos : 12.21.17.1 /BA/Sonderausstatung/U mbau/Abbau der s eitlic hen M ähei nheiten/Sc hritt 5 Abbau s eitl. M ähei nheit @ 0\mod_1196759083031_78.doc @ 12862Pos : 12.21.17.1 /BA/-----Sei tenumbr uch------ @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.doc @ 4165Special Equipment – Mowing UnitsDanger! - Setting on the compensation springsEffect: Danger to life or serious injuries• The compensation springs must only be removed in transport position. In the workingposition the compensation springs are subject to high tensile stress.• Severe injury can be caused if the compensation springs are removed while in theworking position.• The lower threaded blocks on the compensation springs must be fully screwed in.Step 5:Fig. 285The spring assembly can be fitted to the outrigger arm instead of clamping plates.To do this:• Lift the lateral mowing unit (1) out through the headland position.• Switch off the engine, remove the ignition key, and secure the machine from rolling away.• Drive the clamping sleeve out of the attachment bolt (2) and remove the fastening bolt(2).• Use a suitable and reliable tool to secure the spring assemblies.NoteThe weight of a spring assembly is about 100 kg.324
Pos : 12.21.17.1 /BA/Sic her heit/G efahr enhi nweis e/M ähwer ke/G ewic ht der Mäheinhei t c a. <strong>150</strong>0 kg @ 0\mod_1196762216406_78.doc @ 12976Pos : 12.21.17.1 /BA/Sonderausstatung/U mbau/Abbau der s eitlic hen M ähei nheiten/Sc hritt 6 Abbau s eitl. M ähei nheit @ 0\mod_1196759408718_78.doc @ 12881Special Equipment – Mowing UnitsDanger!Remove the ignition key and secure the vehicle and machine against rolling.Only use appropriate and authorised lifting equipment for the installation and removal of themowing units (total weight of mowing unit = approx. <strong>150</strong>0 kg).Step 6:Fig. 286The mowing unit must be in the working position to be removed.• Move the opposite mower unit into headland position and support it there.• Connect the retaining chains (1) on the mowing unit (2).325
Special Equipment – Mowing Units451IIIIII22IV36VBM 400 0163Fig. 287• Remove the spring (1) on the right outrigger arm.• Detach the top suspension arm (2) for cutting height on the mowing unit. To do this, drivethe clamping sleeve out of the attachment bolt (3) and remove the attachment bolt andwasher.• Remove the cable plug (I) for mower speed.• If the BSS option is installed, disconnect the electrical line for speed monitoring on theplug connection (II).• With the central lubrication option, remove the line to the distributor (III) and the two linesto the bearing bolts (IV and V).• Expose all lines (lubrication lines and electrical lines) up to the universal joint mount. Cutthe relevant cable ties to do this.• Remove the top suspension arm (4) for mower cross position. To do this, unscrew theattachment bolts (5) and press the top suspension arm (4) off the bolts.• Remove the attachment bolt (6) on the universal joint bracket. Remove the universal jointmount.326
Pos : 12.22 /BA/-----Seitenumbruc h------ @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.doc @ 4165Special Equipment – Mowing UnitsFig. 288• Align the double joint (2). To do this, turn the mowing unit manually on the outer bladedrum until the attachment bolt (1) of the double joint is positioned vertically.• Raise the mowing unit slightly with lifting equipment until the bolts of the universal jointmount have come out of the universal joint bracket.• Move the mowing unit back to guide the double joint down from the shaft.• Move the mowing unit away from the machine with lifting equipment and set it downsecurely.Caution! - Lift the outrigger arms higher than the headland position.Effect: Damages to the machine• Never raise the outrigger arms higher than the headland position.327
Pos : 12.23.1 /Ü berschriften/Ü berschriften 3/A-E/Anbau der s eitlic hen M äheinheit @ 0\mod_1196760080906_78.doc @ 12900Pos : 12.23.2 /BA/Sic herheit/Gefahrenhinweise/Mähwerke/U mbau_Wartungsar beiten @ 0\mod_1196750571265_78.doc @ 12473Pos : 12.23.3 /BA/Sonderauss tatung/U mbau/Abbau der s eitlichen Mäheinhei ten/Schritt 1 Vorrauss etz ung @ 0\mod_1196757867390_78.doc @ 12786Pos : 12.23.5 /BA/-----Seitenumbruc h------ @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.doc @ 4165Special Equipment – Mowing Units12.4.7 Attaching the Lateral Mowing UnitDanger! - Drive elements may be placed in motion during conversion and installationwork on the machine.Effect: Danger to life or serious injuries• The cutting discs continue to run!• Switch off the engine and remove the ignition key.• Do not leave the driver’s cab until the cutting discs/blade drums have come to a completestop.• Avoid skin contact with oil and grease.• Seek medical help immediately should injuries caused by oil escaping under pressureoccur.• Secure the machine against accidental start-up and against rolling!• After conversion and installation work is complete, mount all safety devices properlyagain.• Only use appropriate and authorised lifting gear for installation and removal of themowing units (weight approx. <strong>150</strong>0 kg).Step 1:The following conditions must be met in advance on the Big M 400:Move the "Travelling Gear" release switch to position I (off).• Move release switch for "Road/field" to position II (field mode).• Move the hydraulic axle suspension to the mowing position (see Info Centre chapterentitled "Quick Access to Hydraulic Axle Suspension")Pos : 12.23.4 /BA/Sic herheit/Gefahrenhinweise/Mähwerke/G ewicht der M ähei nheit c a. <strong>150</strong>0 kg @ 0\mod_1196762216406_78.doc @ 12976Danger!Remove the ignition key and secure the vehicle and machine against rolling.Only use appropriate and authorised lifting equipment for the installation and removal of themowing units (total weight of mowing unit = approx. <strong>150</strong>0 kg).328
Pos : 12.23.6 /BA/Sonderauss tatung/U mbau/Anbau der s eitlichen Mäheinhei t/Schritt 2 Anbau s eitl. Mähei nheit @ 0\mod_1196763875859_78.doc @ 13<strong>000</strong>Pos : 12.23.7 /BA/-----Seitenumbruc h------ @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.doc @ 4165Special Equipment – Mowing UnitsStep2:Fig. 289• Remove the belt guard (1) on the outrigger arm• Connect the mowing unit to the retaining chains and guide up to the outrigger arm• Align the universal joint bracket (2) of the mowing unit to the universal joint mount (3) ofthe outrigger arm.329
Pos : 12.23.8 /BA/Sonderauss tatung/U mbau/Anbau der s eitlichen Mäheinhei t/Schritt 3 Anbau s eitl. Mähei nheit @ 0\mod_1196764155312_78.doc @ 13019Pos : 13 /BA/-----Sei tenumbruch------ @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.doc @ 4165Special Equipment – Mowing UnitsStep 3:Caution! - Attaching the double jointEffect: Elevated danger of crushing hands• Make certain when guiding in the double joint that the lifting equipment is not adjusted ormoved. Only the technician is permitted to move the mowing unit manually on the frontguard tube.Fig. 290• Align the double joint (2) until the attachment bolts (1) of the double joint are positionedvertically.• Guide the double joint onto the drive PTO shaftNoteTo make it possible to lock in the profile toothing, the drive shaft can be turned by moving thepower belt (4) on the outrigger arm.• Installation of the Belt Guard on the Outrigger ArmPos : 12.23.9 /BA/Sonderauss tatung/U mbau/Anbau der s eitlichen Mäheinhei t/Die weiter e Montage erfolgt i n umg ekehrter R eihenfolge wie der Abbau @ 0\mod_1196764466359_78.doc @ 1303812.4.8 The remainder of the installation is in reverse order to the removal procedure.Caution!Clamping plates not removed. (When using clamping plates)Effect: Damages to the machine• After attaching the mowing units, make certain the clamping plates have been removedAfter the mowing unit has been attached, lower the mowing unit down to the ground andremove the two clamping plates on the right and left side.330
Pos : 14.1 /Übersc hriften/Übersc hriften 1/U-Z/Wartung- Motor @ 0\mod_1196765008937_78.doc @ 13058Pos : 14.2 /BA/Sicher heit/G efahr enhinweis e/U nvorhergesehene Akti onen an der M aschi ne_1 @ 0\mod_1196765298062_78.doc @ 13096Pos : 14.3 /BA/Wartung/M otor Big M 400/Allgemein Kühlfl üssig kei t_Keilriemen_Sauber keit @ 0\mod_1196765525515_78.doc @ 13115Pos : 14.4 /BA/-----Seitenumbruch------ @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.doc @ 4165Maintenance – Engine13 Maintenance – EngineDanger! - Unexpected actions on the machineEffect: Danger to life, injuries or damage to the machine.• Always make certain that the drive and the engine are switched off before doing anyrepairs, maintenance or cleaning. Remove the ignition key!• When working on the engine, always switch off the main battery switch!• Store lubricants and fuels in suitable containers and make certain they are disposed ofproperly.• Exercise caution when draining hot oil or fluid - danger of burns!Cooling water and air intake hosesCheck the condition and fastening of cooling water and air intake hoses every 50 operatinghours. Replace cooling water hoses and non-metallic parts on the air intake system every 2years.Check the engine, water cooler and exhaust system daily to ensure it is clean. Clean it ifnecessary.CoolantThe engine cooling system is filled with a mixture of corrosion protection fluid and antifreeze inthe factory. The coolant consists of 50 % anti-corrosion antifreeze and 50 % water.Protection against freezing is ensured to approximately -37° C. See also the enginemanufacturer's specifications.BeltsAll belts must be kept continuously under the proper tension.For new belts, check the tension after the first 2 to 3 operating hours. If necessary, retighten.CleanlinessTo protect against the danger of fire, clean the engine area and especially the exhaust systemas well as the areas surrounding the brakes and gearbox, etc.If the crop is very dry and there is a lot of dust, check the spots listed above more frequently foraccumulations of dirt and clean if necessary.331
Pos : 14.5 /BA/Wartung/M otor Big M 400/Wartungstabell en/Wartungstabelle M otor @ 0\mod_1196765846062_78.doc @ 13134Pos : 14.6 /BA/-----Seitenumbruch------ @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.doc @ 4165Maintenance – Engine13.1 Maintenance Table – EngineMaintenance workMaintenance intervalOnce after 10 hoursBefore the beginning ofthe seasonEvery 10 hours but atleast 1x dailyEvery 50 hoursEvery 100 hoursEvery 200 hours but atleast 1x annuallyEvery 500 hours but atleast 1x annuallyAfter every third seasonAs requiredEngine1 Clean the engine compartment, radiator and radiatorscreen2 Engine - oil level check X X3 Engine oil change X4 Replacing the engine oil filter X5 Ribbed V-belt X6 Inspection of seal and general condition X7 Check valve play, adjust as needed XFuel System1 Replacing the Fuel Filter X2 Fuel filter insert X3 Fuel level X4 Add fuel X5 Venting the fuel system XCooling system1 Engine coolant - checks and controls X2 Change engine coolant X3 Air filter – main cartridge X4 Air filter – safety cartridge X5 Check the anti-freeze in the cooling system; top up withanti-freeze, if and when necessary.Check hose connections1 Check hoses and hose clamps of the air suction andcooling system for tight fit.2 Check the fuel injection pipe for loose connections. X3 Check the turbo charger screw connections and hoseconnections for tight fit.Have the starter checked.1 Have the three-phase generator checked. XXXXXX332
Pos : 14.7 /Übersc hriften/Übersc hriften 2/P-T/Sc hmutzablag erung im Motorraum @ 0\mod_1196766936875_78.doc @ 13173Pos : 14.8 /BA/Sicher heit/G efahr enhinweis e/Schmutzablag erung im Motorraum @ 0\mod_1196769316921_78.doc @ 13154Pos : 14.9 /BA/Wartung/M otor Big M 400/Bild Motorraum Big M 400 @ 0\mod_1196770414312_78.doc @ 13270Pos : 14.10 /Ü berschriften/Ü berschriften 2/K-O/M otorraum mit Dr uc kl uft säuber n @ 0\mod_1196769980062_78.doc @ 13192Pos : 14.11 /BA/Sic herheit/Gefahrenhinweise/Rei nigung mi t Druc kluft @ 0\mod_1196770018125_78.doc @ 13211Pos : 14.12 /BA/Wartung/Motor Big M 400/Versc hmutz ung en mit Druc kluft wegbl asen @ 0\mod_1196770153625_78.doc @ 13230Pos : 14.13 /BA/-----Seitenumbruc h------ @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.doc @ 4165Maintenance – Engine13.2 Contamination in the engine compartmentCaution! - Contamination in the engine compartmentEffect: Danger of fire• The build-up of dust, oil and grass inside the engine compartment is combustible andpresents an increased fire hazard.• Keep the engine and the engine compartment clean at all times.Fig. 291:13.3 Cleaning the Engine Compartment with Compressed AirWarning! - Cleaning with compressed air!Effect: Loss of eyesight!• Keep people well away from the working area.• Wear suitable work clothes to perform cleaning jobs with compressed air (for exampleeye protection).When necessary, blow away the dirt and contamination and wipe off oil deposits.333
Pos : 14.14 /Ü berschriften/Ü berschriften 2/K-O/M otoröls tand @ 41\mod_1272372368436_78.doc @ 376890Pos : 14.15 /BA/Wartung/Motor Big M 400/M otorölstand Ac htung! - Ölstand z u niedrig @ 41\mod_1272372487467_78.doc @ 376965Pos : 14.16 /BA/Wartung/Motor Big M 400/M otorölstand Bil d BM 400 @ 41\mod_1272373830811_78.doc @ 377<strong>02</strong>0Pos : 14.17 /BA/Wartung/Motor Big M 400/M otorölstand Text @ 40\mod_1270034947332_78.doc @ 365736Pos : 14.18 /BA/Wartung/Motor Big M 400/M otoröl und Filter wechsel @ 40\mod_1270034903316_78.doc @ 365711Pos : 14.19 /BA/-----Seitenumbruc h------ @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.doc @ 4165Maintenance – Engine13.4 Engine oil levelCaution! - The oil level is too low.Effect: Engine damage• It is absolutely essential for the life of the engine that you observe this oil level.• Check the oil level when the machine in at a horizontal position.• Do not start the engine if the level is below the bottom mark of the oil dipstick.Fig. 292• Before pulling out the oil dip stick, its environment must be thoroughly wiped clean.• The oil level must be between the min. and max. marks.• After the oil level has been checked, reinsert the oil dipstick.13.4.1 Engine oil and filter replacementNoteFor further information please refer to the engine manufacturer’s operating instruction includedwith delivery (chapter on Engine oil and Filter replacement)334
Pos : 14.20 /Ü berschriften/Ü berschriften 2/K-O/Kraftstoffvorfil ter / Wasser abscheider @ 41\mod_1272367873905_78.doc @ 376586Pos : 14.21 /BA/Wartung/Motor Big M 400/Kraftstoffvorfilter / Was ser abs cheider Bild BM 400 @ 41\mod_1272368<strong>02</strong>8358_78.doc @ 376661Pos : 14.22 /BA/Wartung/Motor Big M 400/Kraftstoffvorfilter / Was ser abs cheider T ext @ 0\mod_1196777562765_78.doc @ 14618Pos : 14.23 /BA/-----Seitenumbruc h------ @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.doc @ 4165Maintenance – Engine13.5 Fuel filter/water separator3214BM 400 0143Fig. 29313.5.1 Replacing the fuel filter• Close the fuel supply valve (2) (turn to the right).• Unscrew the filter pan (1).• Clean the filter pan and filter insert, if there is a heavy accumulation of dirt or damage,replace the filter insert.• Check the seal ring for the filter pan and replace it if necessary.• Wet the seal ring with diesel fuel and set it in place.• Place the filter insert in the filter pan and screw the filter pan (1) on the filter housing.• Open the fuel supply valve (2) (turn to the left).13.5.2 Empty the water separator• The water that is present in the fuel is collected in the inspection glass (3).• Drain the collected water by loosening the drain screw (4) and capture it in a container.335
Pos : 14.24 /BA/Wartung/Motor Big M 400/Kraftstoff-Filterei ns atz ers etz en BM 400 @ 0\mod_1196778039093_78.doc @ 14637Pos : 14.25 /BA/-----Seitenumbruc h------ @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.doc @ 4165Maintenance – Engine13.6 Replacing the fuel filter elementWarning! - Rupture in fuel return lineEffect: Danger of fireAfter completing maintenance and repairs or replacing the fuel filter, the three-way cock mustbe turned back to operating position, because otherwise, if the return line is closed and theengine is running, pressure will build up in this line which can cause the line to burst. Thisresults in a fire hazard inside the engine compartment.2I3II14BM 400 0164Fig. 294• Close the fuel return valve (2) at the fuel prefilter (1).• Set the three-way valve (3) (right engine side in direction of travel) to pos. II, so that thefuel runs out of the filter housing. Collect the fuel in a suitable vessel.• Unscrew the screw cap (4) with the filter element.• Replace the filter element and the sealing ring.• Screw in and tighten the screw cap (4) with filter element. Torque 25 Nm• Set three-way cock (3) to pos. I, so that the return line is closed (as in initial position).• Open the fuel return valve (2) at the fuel prefilter.NoteFor further information please refer to the engine manufacturer’s operating instruction includedwith delivery (chapter on replacing the fuel filter insert)336
Pos : 14.26 /BA/Wartung/Motor Big M 400/Kraftstoff @ 0\mod_1196779500703_78.doc @ 14656Pos : 14.27 /BA/-----Seitenumbruc h------ @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.doc @ 4165Maintenance – Engine13.7 FuelWarning! - Danger of explosion!• Never fill tank while the engine is running.• No smoking!Handle fuel carefully. It is readily flammable. Do not smoke when adding fuel to the machineand make certain there are no open flames or sources of sparks in the vicinity.Fuel must only be added outdoors. Prevent fires by keeping the machine free of dirt and greaseresidue. Always dispose of spilled fuel.Quality and purity of fuel are very important for consistent performance and a long engineservice life.For temperatures under 10°C (50°F), always use winter fuel.NoteFor further information please refer to:• Engine manufacturer’s operating instructions, included with delivery (chapter on fuels)• The engine manufacturer’s fuel specification, included with delivery337
Pos : 14.28 /Ü berschriften/Ü berschriften 2/P-T/T anken @ 41\mod_1271676291625_78.doc @ 372060Pos : 14.29 /BA/Wartung/Motor Big M 400/T anken Bild BM 400 @ 0\mod_1196779964656_78.doc @ 14675Pos : 14.30 /BA/Wartung/Motor Big M 400/T anken T ext @ 41\mod_1271676476609_78.doc @ 372085Pos : 14.31 /BA/Wartung/Motor Big M 400/F ass ungs ver mög en 700 Li ter @ 41\mod_1271832241976_78.doc @ 373233Pos : 14.32 /BA/-----Seitenumbruc h------ @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.doc @ 4165Maintenance – Engine13.8 TanksFig. 295• Switch off the engine, remove the ignition key, and secure the machine from rolling away.• Clean grass and dust from the area around the filler neck (1).• Open the tank cover.• Fill the fuel tank. (Use only clean fuel in the tank. If necessary, filter the fuel before addingit to the tank.)• Monitor tank filling on the fuel gauge in the Info Centre display.• Seal the tank cover tightly.• Dispose of spilled fuel.NoteFill the fuel tank daily after finishing operation to prevent condensation water from forming andfreezing in cold weather.• Capacity: about 700 litres338
Pos : 14.33 /BA/Wartung/Motor Big M 400/Kraftstoffanlage entl üften @ 0\mod_1196780180531_78.doc @ 14694Pos : 14.34 /BA/Wartung/Motor Big M 400/M otor kühl mittel @ 0\mod_119678<strong>02</strong>80015_78.doc @ 14713Pos : 14.35 /BA/-----Seitenumbruc h------ @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.doc @ 4165Maintenance – Engine13.9 Venting the fuel systemNoteFor further information please refer to :• Engine manufacturer’s operating instructions, included with delivery (chapter on ventingthe fuel system).The fuel system must be vented if necessary after a lengthy standstill.13.10 Engine coolantWhen the machine is first delivered the cooling system is filled with a special coolant. Thiscoolant protects against corrosion and provides frost protection up to –37° CNoteThe cooling system must be always filled with engine coolant, no matter what the season.Change the engine coolant every 3 years.If no coolant is available, then depending on the season, you should use a mixture of 50 %ethylene glycol antifreeze/anticorrosion agent and 50 % clear, soft water. This mixture alsoprovides corrosion protection and protection against freezing to –37° C. For further information,please refer to:The engine manufacturer’s fuel specification, included with delivery (sheet 325.2)Required quantity = 44 litresWarning!Cooling system density additives may not be used.339
Pos : 14.36 /BA/Wartung/Motor Big M 400/M otor kühl mittel - Kontr olle @ 15\mod_<strong>123</strong>2<strong>02</strong>8231833_78.doc @ 173109Pos : 14.37 /BA/-----Seitenumbruc h------ @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.doc @ 4165Maintenance – Engine13.11 Engine coolant - checks and controlsWarning! - Hot coverEffect: Hand burns• Never open the radiator cap (1) while the engine is hot. Switch off the engine and waituntil the engine has cooled down.1max.min.Fig. 296BM 400 <strong>02</strong>01_1Check:• Check the level of engine coolant every day.• The level of engine coolant must be between the min. and max. marks.• If necessary, top up the engine coolant.To top up:• Turn the cap (1) to the first notch and wait until the overpressure reduces.• Open the cover (1) completely and add engine coolant to midway between the max. andmin marks.• Close the cover (1) again.340
Pos : 14.38 /Ü berschriften/Ü berschriften 2/K-O/Luftfilter @ 41\mod_1271407012930_78.doc @ 371355Pos : 14.39 /BA/Wartung/Luftfilter/Luftfilter Text @ 0\mod_1196780781406_78.doc @ 14793Pos : 14.40 /Ü berschriften/Ü berschriften 3/P-T/Sic herheits patrone @ 0\mod_1196781597406_78.doc @ 14812Pos : 15 /BA/-----Sei tenumbruch------ @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.doc @ 4165Maintenance – Engine13.12 Air filterPerform air filter maintenance regularly, but at least when the error messagefilter appears in the Info Centre Display.Cleaning the Air Filterfor a dirty air• Unscrew the nut (2) and remove the cover (1).• Unscrew the nut (4) and carefully remove the filter insert (3).• Clean the interior area and the seal surfaces of the filter housing.• Blow out the filter insert with compressed air (max. 5 bar) from the inside to the outside.• Replace filter inserts that are excessively dirty or damaged. Filter inserts that wereinstalled more than 4 years ago must also be replaced.• Install the filter insert again.• Mount the cover (1).• Close the air filter intake sieve.13.12.1 Safety cartridge341
Pos : 16 /BA/Di es e Seite is t bewusst freig elass en worden. @ 1\mod_1201783680373_78.doc @ 54443Pos : 17 /BA/-----Sei tenumbruch------ @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.doc @ 4165Maintenance – EngineThis page has been left blank deliberately!!342
Pos : 18.1 /Übersc hriften/Übersc hriften 1/U-Z/Wartung- Mähwer ke @ 0\mod_1196781956937_78.doc @ 14832Pos : 18.2 /Übersc hriften/Übersc hriften 2/P-T/Spezi elle Sic her heitshi nweis e @ 0\mod_1196660495760_78.doc @ 9134Pos : 18.3 /BA/Sicher heit/G efahr enhinweis e/M ähwer ke/Unvor hergesehene Akti onen an der Mas chi ne_1 @ 0\mod_1196782315875_78.doc @ 14851Pos : 18.4 /BA/Sicher heit/G efahr enhinweis e/M ähwer ke/Bei unr egel mäßiger Kontroll e der M ess er klingen und Haltebolz en @ 0\mod_1196782406281_78.doc @ 14870Pos : 18.5 /BA/-----Seitenumbruch------ @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.doc @ 4165Maintenance – Mowing Units14 Maintenance – Mowing Units14.1 Special Safety InstructionsDanger! - Unexpected actions on the machineEffect: Danger to life, injuries or damage to the machine.• Always make certain that the drive and the engine are switched off before doing anyrepairs, maintenance or cleaning.• The cutting discs continue to run!• Switch off the engine and remove the ignition key.• Secure the machine against accidental start-up and against rolling!Danger! - When checking the cutter blades and retaining bolts only sporadicallyEffect: Danger to life, injuries or damage to the machine.• Always check the mowing units for damaged, missing or worn blades, retaining bolts, leafsprings and cutting discs/blade drum before starting operation; replace any parts that aredamaged, missing or worn!• Always replace missing and damaged blades in sets to prevent unbalanced rotation!• Never mount unevenly worn blades on a drum/disc!• Whenever a blade is changed, also inspect the fasteners and replace them, if necessary!343
Pos : 18.6 /Übersc hriften/Übersc hriften 3/P-T/Probel auf @ 0\mod_1196833698843_78.doc @ <strong>150</strong>23Pos : 18.7 /BA/Sicher heit/G efahr enhinweis e/M ähwer ke/Pr obel auf Mehrz ahll @ 0\mod_1196782825187_78.doc @ 14889Pos : 18.8 /Übersc hriften/Übersc hriften 2/A-E/Ers atz teil e @ 0\mod_119678299<strong>123</strong>4_78.doc @ 14927Pos : 18.9 /BA/Sicher heit/G efahr enhinweis e/M ähwer ke/Ver wendung von nic ht zug elass enen Ersatzteilen @ 0\mod_1196783037140_78.doc @ 14946Pos : 18.10 /BA/-----Seitenumbruc h------ @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.doc @ 4165Maintenance – Mowing Units14.1.1 Test runDanger! - Testing the machine after repair, maintenance or cleaning work and aftertechnical intervention.Effect: Danger to life or serious injuries• The mowing unit must be in working position• Do not switch on the drives until the mowing units are resting on the ground and you areabsolutely sure that neither persons, animals nor objects are in the danger zone.• Start a trial run of the machine only from the driver’s seat.14.2 Spare PartsDanger! - Using non-approved spare parts.Effect: Danger to life, serious injuries or loss of warranty claims as well as exclusion of liability• Use only authentic KRONE spare parts and accessories authorised by the manufacturer.The use of spare parts, accessories or additional equipment not manufactured, tested orapproved by KRONE will exclude any liability for consequential damage.344
Pos : 18.11 /BA/Wartung/Motor Big M 400/Wartungstabellen/Wartungstabelle- Mähwer ke BIG M 400 @ 38\mod_1266479418515_78.doc @ 352669Pos : 18.12 /BA/-----Seitenumbruc h------ @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.doc @ 4165Maintenance – Mowing Units14.3 Maintenance Table – Mowing UnitsMaintenance workMaintenance intervalOnce after 10 hoursBefore the beginning ofthe seasonEvery 10 hours but atleast 1x dailyFirst time after 50 hoursEvery 100 hoursEvery 200 hours but atleast 1x annuallyEvery 1<strong>000</strong> hoursAfter every third seasonAs required1 Main gearbox – CV lateral mowing unitsOil level check X XOil change X X X2 Angular gearbox for front mower CV+CRiOil level check X XOil change X X X3 Input gearbox for front mower CV+CRiOil level check X XOil change X X X4 Front mower speed gearbox (CV)Oil level check X XOil change X X X5 Angular gearbox for front mower CROil level check X XOil change X X X6 Gearbox for top roller drive CRi (optional)Oil level check X XOil change X X X7 Front mower cutter bar CV + CRiOil level check X XOil change8 Cutter bar for lateral mowing unitsOil level check X XOil change9 Cutter bladesCheck X Xscrew10 Mowing discs / mower drumCheck X XScrew11 Rotary hubCheck X XScrew12 Conditioner belt driveCleanScrew13 V-shaped tines and retaining boltsCheck X XScrewXXXXXXX345
Pos : 18.13 /Ü berschriften/Ü berschriften 2/U-Z/Wer kz eug kasten @ 0\mod_1196832731327_78.doc @ 14985Pos : 18.14 /BA/Wartung/Motor Big M 400/Wer kzeug kasten Bild Big M 400 @ 0\mod_1196946656311_78.doc @ 15234Pos : 18.16 /Ü berschriften/Ü berschriften 2/A-E/Anzugs drehmomente @ 45\mod_1277103093968_78.doc @ 410970Pos : 18.17 /BA/Wartung/Drehmomente / Anzugs momente/Dr ehmomente @ 45\mod_12771<strong>02</strong>920578_78.doc @ 410945Pos : 18.18 /BA/Wartung/Muttern und Sc hrauben (50h) anzi ehen @ 0\mod_1196949864530_78.doc @ 15293Pos : 18.19 /BA/-----Seitenumbruc h------ @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.doc @ 4165Maintenance – Mowing Units14.4 Tool boxBM 400 2<strong>02</strong>Fig. 29714.5 Tightening TorquesThe tightening torque MA is stated in Nm(unless otherwise indicated).AØ5.6 6.8 8.8 10.9 12.9MA (Nm)M 4 2.2 3 4.4 5.1M 5 4.5 5.9 8.7 10M 6 7.6 10 15 18M 8 18 25 36 43M 10 29 37 49 72 84M12 42 64 85 125 145M14 100 135 200 235M14x1.5 145 215 255M 16 160 210 310 365M16x1.5 225 330 390M 20 425 610 710M 24 730 1050 1220M 24x1.5 350M 24x2 800 1<strong>150</strong> 1350M 27 1100 1550 1800M 27x2 1<strong>150</strong> 1650 1950M30 1450 2100 2450A = Thread size(The stability class can be seen on the head of thescrew.)NOTEThe table above does not apply to countersunk screws with a hexagonal socket head if thecountersunk screw is tightened with the hexagonal socket head.NoteRegularly check that nuts and bolts are tightly in place (approx. every 50 hours) and tightenthem if necessary.346
Pos : 18.20 /Ü berschriften/Ü berschriften 2/A-E/Anzugs drehmomente über Innensechs kant @ 45\mod_1277106415765_78.doc @ 41<strong>123</strong>0Pos : 18.21 /BA/Wartung/Drehmomente / Anzugs momente/Dr ehmomente über Innens ec hs kant @ 45\mod_1277106232328_78.doc @ 411205Pos : 18.22 /Ü berschriften/Ü berschriften 3/A-E/Abweic hendes Drehmoment @ 0\mod_1196950054171_78.doc @ 15312Pos : 18.23 /BA/Wartung/Selbstfahr er/Gr undmasc hine/Abweic hendes Drehmoment Big M 400 @ 0\mod_1196949184374_78.doc @ 15274Pos : 18.24 /BA/Wartung/Muttern und Sc hrauben (50h) anzi ehen @ 0\mod_1196949864530_78.doc @ 15293Pos : 18.25 /BA/-----Seitenumbruc h------ @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.doc @ 4165Maintenance – Mowing Units14.6 Tightening Torques (Countersunk Screws)The tightening torque MA is stated in Nm(unless otherwise indicated).AØ5.6 8.8 10.9 12.9MA (Nm)M 4 2.5 3.5 4.1M 5 4.7 7 8M 6 8 12 15M 8 20 29 35M 10 23 39 58 67M 12 34 68 100 116M 14 108 160 188M 16 168 248 292M 20 340 488 568A = Thread size(The stability class can be seen on the head of thescrew.)ABM 400 <strong>02</strong>34NOTEThe table above applies only to countersunk screws with hexagonal socket heads and metricthreading that are tightened by the hexagonal socket head.14.6.1 Deviating TorqueScrews / nutsMA [Nm]Nut for shear protection (rotary hub) 300Bearing housing for cutting disc 42Bearing housing for blade drum 42NoteRegularly check that nuts and bolts are tightly in place (approx. every 50 hours) and tightenthem if necessary.347
Pos : 18.26 /BA/Wartung/Selbstfahr er/Frontschutz öffnen BiG M 400 @ 13\mod_1226398163617_78.doc @ 165608Pos : 18.27 /BA/-----Seitenumbruc h------ @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.doc @ 4165Maintenance – Mowing Units14.7 Opening the Front Guard41223BM 400 <strong>02</strong>29Fig. 298The front guard (2) on the cutter bar can be folded up for maintenance and repair work.To do this:• Use the special tool (1) (located in the tool box) to release the lock of the front guard (2).• Push the front guard (2) as far forward as it will go and the swivel it up.• Secure the front guard (2) against folding down with a tension spring (3).NoteAfter maintenance and repair work, fold down the front guard (2) and push it in until theinterlocks (4) have engaged (right and left).348
Pos : 18.28 /Ü berschriften/Ü berschriften 2/U-Z/Verstopfungen am Q uer för der er bes eitigen @ 13\mod_1226557103071_78.doc @ 166210Pos : 18.29 /BA/Sic herheit/Gefahrenhinweise/Unvor herges ehene Inbetri ebnahme_2 @ 13\mod_1226501654990_78.doc @ 166160Pos : 18.30 /BA/Wartung/Selbstfahr er/Verstopfungen am Querförderer besei tigen @ 13\mod_1226500830396_78.doc @ 166140Pos : 18.31 /BA/-----Seitenumbruc h------ @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.doc @ 4165Maintenance – Mowing Units14.8 Eliminating Blockages on the Cross ConveyorDanger! - Accidental start-up of the machine, moving parts of the machine and / orunexpected movement of the machine.Effect: Danger to life, injuries or damage to the machine.• Switch off the engine, apply the parking brake and remove the ignition key.• Wait until machine parts that are still in motion have coasted down to a stop.• Secure the machine against the possibility of rolling back by means of wheel chocks.1Pos.IPos.II122BM 400 <strong>02</strong>33Fig. 299The hydraulic auger hood (1) must be secured against folding down during maintenance,cleaning and repair work on the augers by means of the spring cotter pins (2).To do this:• Lower all mowing units to the ground.• Open the hydraulic auger hoods (1).• Secure the hydraulic auger hood (1) by moving the spring cotter pins (2) (right and left)from pos. I to pos. II.• After the fault is eliminated, move the spring cotter pins (2) (right and left) back to theiroriginal positions (from pos. II to pos. I).• Close the hydraulic auger hood.349
Pos : 18.32 /Ü berschriften/Ü berschriften 2/P-T/Scherbolz en am Aufber eiter @ 37\mod_1264082884090_78.doc @ 341094Pos : 18.33 /BA/Wartung/Selbstfahr er/Scherbolz en am Aufber eiter @ 37\mod_1264062362856_78.doc @ 340785Pos : 18.34 /BA/-----Seitenumbruc h------ @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.doc @ 4165Maintenance – Mowing Units14.9 Shear pins on the conditionerFig. 300BM 400 <strong>02</strong>57The conditioners of the front mowing units and lateral mowing units (right / left) on BiG M 400CRI are each secured with a shear pin (1). The shear pin shears off as soon as an overloadoccurs.The shear pin is located on the flange (2) between the gearbox tower and the conditionerrollers. The spare shear pins (3) and spare shear bushings (4) are located on the conditionerhousing.Replacement of shear pins• Front mowing unit and lateral mowing units right / left must be placed on the ground• Switch machine off, apply the parking brake and remove the ignition key; wait until themachine parts which keep on rotating stopped completely; secure the machine withwheel chocks against rolling.• If necessary, turn the cutter bar manually until the grooves of the flanges are positionednext to each other• Take the spare shear pin (3) with the two bushings (4) and preassemble the bushingswith a distance of 5mm• Place the preassembled shear pins with bushings (3, 4) into the grooves of the flange• Tighten the shear pins350
Pos : 18.35 /Ü berschriften/Ü berschriften 2/F-J/Füll mengen und Sc hmier mittel bez eic hnungen der Getriebe @ 0\mod_1196951094046_78.doc @ 15335Pos : 18.36 /BA/Wartung/Tabellen/M ähwer ke/Tabelle F üll mengen EC 32 CV Big M 400 @ 0\mod_1196951158265_78.doc @ 15354Pos : 18.37 /BA/Wartung/Zei tinter valle an den Getri eben @ 0\mod_1196951919921_78.doc @ 15373Pos : 18.38 /BA/-----Seitenumbruc h------ @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.doc @ 4165Maintenance – Mowing Units14.10 Filling Quantities and Lubrication Designations for GearboxesTankCapacityFiltered oilsBio-degradablelubricants[litres] Brand name Brand nameMain gearbox side mower 2 x L 1.7 SAE90Angular gearbox/front mower L 1.7 SAE90Input gearbox/front mower (CV/CRI) L 0.7 SAE90Speed gearbox/front mower (CV) L 1.7 SAE90Angular gearbox/front mower (CRI) 0,9 l SAE90On requestGearbox for Top Roller Drive (optional) 0,3 l SAE90Cutter bar/front mower (CV/CRI) 7,0 l SAE90Cutter bar/side mower 2 x 8,0 l SAE9014.10.1 Oil Level Check and Oil Change Intervals (Gearboxes)Note - Oil level check and oil change (gearboxes) and lubricating the machineEffect: Long expected service life of machine• First oil change on all gearboxes after 50 operating hours, then every 200 operatinghours (but at least once a year).• Before using the machine always check the oil level.• With bio-degradable oils the changing intervals must be complied with absolutelybecause of ageing of the oils.351
Pos : 18.39.1.1 /Ü berschriften/Ü berschriften 2/F-J/H auptgetriebe @ 0\mod_1197005740033_78.doc @ 15416Pos : 18.39.1.2 /Ü berschriften/Ü berschriften 3/P-T/Seitenmähwer k @ 0\mod_1196675974056_78.doc @ 10706Pos : 18.39.1.3 /BA/Wartung/Öl kontrolle_Wechsel/M ähwer ke/Bild H auptg etriebe s eit. Mähwer ke @ 0\mod_119700739<strong>02</strong>99_78.doc @ 15492Pos : 18.39.1.4 /BA/Wartung/Öl kontrolle_Wechsel/M ähwer ke/Ölwec hs el Hauptgetriebe seitl . Mähwer ke @ 0\mod_119700627<strong>02</strong>83_78.doc @ 15473Pos : 18.39.1.7 /BA/Wartung/Öl kontrolle_Wechsel/Altöl or dnungsgemäß entsorgen @ 0\mod_11970081170<strong>02</strong>_78.doc @ 15550Pos : 18.39.2 /BA/-----Seitenumbruc h------ @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.doc @ 4165Maintenance – Mowing Units14.11 Main gearbox14.11.1 Lateral Mowing UnitFig. 301Oil level check:• Screw the measuring rod (2) out of the main gearbox (1).• Clean the measuring rod (2) with absorbent paper or cloth.• Screw the measuring rod (2) completely back into the main gearbox (1).• Screw the measuring rod (2) back out of the main gearbox (1).• Check the oil level and check for abrasion. The oil level must be between the marks (3). Ifnecessary, add more oil (SAE 90) through the measuring rod opening.• Screw the measuring rod (2) back into the main gearbox (1).Pos : 18.39.1.5 /BA/Wartung/Öl kontrolle_Wechsel/Öl kontr olle H auptgetri ebe s eitl. Mähwer ke @ 0\mod_1196952482749_78.doc @ 15393Changing the oil:• Unscrew the measuring rod (2).• Unscrew the oil drain plug (4).• Collect the used oil in a suitable drip pan.• Fit the oil screw plug with a new seal.• Top up the oil from above (the dip stick hole); screw the dip stick (2) back in.Pos : 18.39.1.6 /BA/Wartung/Öl kontrolle_Wechsel/Ölqualität /Ölmenge: siehe Kapitel @ 0\mod_1197007859486_78.doc @ 15531Oil quality / oil quantity: see Chapter "Filling Quantities and Lubricant Designations forGearboxes"NoteThe used oil must be disposed of correctly352
Pos : 18.39.3.1 /Ü berschriften/Ü berschriften 2/U-Z/Wi nkelgetriebe @ 0\mod_1197005918299_78.doc @ 15435Pos : 18.39.3.2 /Ü berschriften/Ü berschriften 3/F-J/Fr ontmähwer k (CV+CRI) @ 0\mod_1197008615440_78.doc @ 15609Pos : 18.39.3.3 /BA/Wartung/Öl kontrolle_Wechsel/M ähwer ke/Bild Wi nkelg etriebe Frontmähwer k @ 0\mod_1197008732315_78.doc @ 15629Pos : 18.39.3.4 /BA/Wartung/Öl kontrolle_Wechsel/Öl kontr olle SAE 90 @ 0\mod_1197008973815_78.doc @ 15649Pos : 18.39.3.5 /BA/Wartung/Öl kontrolle_Wechsel/Öl wec hs el Bel üftungsfilter @ 0\mod_1197009428424_78.doc @ 15668Pos : 18.39.3.7 /BA/Wartung/Öl kontrolle_Wechsel/Altöl or dnungsgemäß entsorgen @ 0\mod_11970081170<strong>02</strong>_78.doc @ 15550Pos : 18.39.4 /BA/-----Seitenumbruc h------ @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.doc @ 4165Maintenance – Mowing Units14.12 Angular gearbox14.12.1 Front Mowing Unit (CV+CRI)13EC-152-0Fig. 3<strong>02</strong>:Oil level check:• For time intervals, see Chapter "Oil Level Check and Oil Change Intervals (Gearboxes)".• Unscrew the inspection screw (1)• Oil level up to bore hole (1)• If necessary, top up the oil (SAE 90)• Screw the check screw (1) back in.Oil change:• For time intervals, see Chapter "Oil Level Check and Oil Change Intervals (Gearboxes)".• Unscrew venting filter (3) and extract the oil• Collect the used oil in a suitable drip pan• Top up oil from above (oil level up to bore hole (1)).• Screw in the ventilation filter (3).Pos : 18.39.3.6 /BA/Wartung/Öl kontrolle_Wechsel/Ölqualität /Ölmenge: siehe Kapitel @ 0\mod_1197007859486_78.doc @ 15531Oil quality / oil quantity: see Chapter "Filling Quantities and Lubricant Designations forGearboxes"NoteThe used oil must be disposed of correctly353
Pos : 18.39.5.1 /Ü berschriften/Ü berschriften 2/A-E/Eing angsgetriebe @ 0\mod_1197005979596_78.doc @ 15454Pos : 18.39.5.2 /Ü berschriften/Ü berschriften 3/F-J/Fr ontmähwer k (CV+CRI) @ 0\mod_1197008615440_78.doc @ 15609Pos : 18.39.5.3 /BA/Wartung/Öl kontrolle_Wechsel/M ähwer ke/Bild Eing angsgetriebe Frontmähwer k @ 0\mod_1197009824221_78.doc @ 15727Pos : 18.39.5.4 /BA/Wartung/Öl kontrolle_Wechsel/Öl kontr olle SAE 90 @ 0\mod_1197008973815_78.doc @ 15649Pos : 18.39.5.7 /BA/Wartung/Öl kontrolle_Wechsel/Altöl or dnungsgemäß entsorgen @ 0\mod_11970081170<strong>02</strong>_78.doc @ 15550Pos : 18.39.6 /BA/-----Seitenumbruc h------ @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.doc @ 4165Maintenance – Mowing Units14.13 Input gearbox14.13.1 Front Mowing Unit (CV+CRI)EC-0-040Fig. 303:Oil level check:• For time intervals, see Chapter "Oil Level Check and Oil Change Intervals (Gearboxes)".• Unscrew the inspection screw (1)• Oil level up to bore hole (1)• If necessary, top up the oil (SAE 90)• Screw the check screw (1) back in.Pos : 18.39.5.5 /BA/Wartung/Öl kontrolle_Wechsel/Öl wec hs el Versi on1 ( Bel üftungsfilter) @ 0\mod_1197010<strong>02</strong>6283_78.doc @ 15747Oil change:• For time intervals, see Chapter "Oil Level Check and Oil Change Intervals (Gearboxes)".• Screw out the screw plug (2).• Collect the used oil in a suitable drip pan• Screw in the screw plug (2)• Fill oil (3) (oil level up to hole (1))• Screw the inspection screw (1) and ventilation filter (3) back in.Pos : 18.39.5.6 /BA/Wartung/Öl kontrolle_Wechsel/Ölqualität /Ölmenge: siehe Kapitel @ 0\mod_1197007859486_78.doc @ 15531Oil quality / oil quantity: see Chapter "Filling Quantities and Lubricant Designations forGearboxes"NoteThe used oil must be disposed of correctly354
Pos : 18.39.7.1 /Ü berschriften/Ü berschriften 2/P-T/Sc haltgetriebe @ 0\mod_1197010889455_78.doc @ 15766Pos : 18.39.7.2 /Ü berschriften/Ü berschriften 3/F-J/Fr ontmähwer k (CV) @ 0\mod_119667<strong>02</strong>25510_78.doc @ 10342Pos : 18.39.7.3 /BA/Wartung/Öl kontrolle_Wechsel/M ähwer ke/Bild Sc haltg etriebe CV-Fr ontmähwer k @ 0\mod_1197012856815_78.doc @ 15805Pos : 18.39.7.4 /BA/Wartung/Öl kontrolle_Wechsel/Öl kontr olle SAE 90 @ 0\mod_1197008973815_78.doc @ 15649Pos : 18.39.7.7 /BA/Wartung/Öl kontrolle_Wechsel/Altöl or dnungsgemäß entsorgen @ 0\mod_11970081170<strong>02</strong>_78.doc @ 15550Pos : 18.39.8 /BA/-----Seitenumbruc h------ @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.doc @ 4165Maintenance – Mowing Units14.14 Speed gearbox14.14.1 Front mowing unit (CV)EC-1-041Fig. 304:Oil level check:• For time intervals, see Chapter "Oil Level Check and Oil Change Intervals (Gearboxes)".• Unscrew the inspection screw (1)• Oil level up to bore hole (1)• If necessary, top up the oil (SAE 90)• Screw the check screw (1) back in.Pos : 18.39.7.5 /BA/Wartung/Öl kontrolle_Wechsel/Öl wec hs el Versi on1 ( Bel üftungsfilter) @ 0\mod_1197010<strong>02</strong>6283_78.doc @ 15747Oil change:• For time intervals, see Chapter "Oil Level Check and Oil Change Intervals (Gearboxes)".• Screw out the screw plug (2).• Collect the used oil in a suitable drip pan• Screw in the screw plug (2)• Fill oil (3) (oil level up to hole (1))• Screw the inspection screw (1) and ventilation filter (3) back in.Pos : 18.39.7.6 /BA/Wartung/Öl kontrolle_Wechsel/Ölqualität /Ölmenge: siehe Kapitel @ 0\mod_1197007859486_78.doc @ 15531Oil quality / oil quantity: see Chapter "Filling Quantities and Lubricant Designations forGearboxes"NoteThe used oil must be disposed of correctly355
Pos : 18.39.9.1 /Ü berschriften/Ü berschriften 2/U-Z/Wi nkelgetriebe @ 0\mod_1197005918299_78.doc @ 15435Pos : 18.39.9.2 /Abkürz ungen /Abkürz ung en spr ac hneutral/CR I @ 0\mod_1197013559580_0.doc @ 15825Pos : 18.39.9.3 /Ü berschriften/Ü berschriften 3/U-Z/U nterteil @ 10\mod_122164<strong>02</strong>27712_78.doc @ 135712Pos : 18.39.9.4 /BA/Wartung/Öl kontrolle_Wechsel/M ähwer ke/Bild Wi nkelg etriebe CRI @ 0\mod_1197013688111_78.doc @ 15844Pos : 18.39.9.5 /BA/Wartung/Öl kontrolle_Wechsel/Öl kontr olle SAE 90 @ 0\mod_1197008973815_78.doc @ 15649Pos : 18.39.9.6 /BA/Wartung/Öl kontrolle_Wechsel/Öl wec hs el Versi on2 @ 0\mod_1197016258486_78.doc @ 15884Pos : 18.39.9.8 /BA/Wartung/Öl kontrolle_Wechsel/Altöl or dnungsgemäß entsorgen @ 0\mod_11970081170<strong>02</strong>_78.doc @ 15550Pos : 18.39.10 /BA/-----Seitenumbr uch------ @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.doc @ 4165Maintenance – Mowing Units14.15 Angular gearbox14.15.1 CRI14.15.2 Bottom part21EC-189-0Fig. 305:Oil level check:• For time intervals, see Chapter "Oil Level Check and Oil Change Intervals (Gearboxes)".• Unscrew the inspection screw (1)• Oil level up to bore hole (1)• If necessary, top up the oil (SAE 90)• Screw the check screw (1) back in.Oil change:• For time intervals, see Chapter "Oil Level Check and Oil Change Intervals (Gearboxes)".• Screw out the screw plug (2).• Collect the used oil in a suitable drip pan• Screw in the screw plug (2)• Fill oil (1) (oil level up to hole (1))Pos : 18.39.9.7 /BA/Wartung/Öl kontrolle_Wechsel/Ölqualität /Ölmenge: siehe Kapitel @ 0\mod_1197007859486_78.doc @ 15531Oil quality / oil quantity: see Chapter "Filling Quantities and Lubricant Designations forGearboxes"NoteThe used oil must be disposed of correctly356
Pos : 18.39.11.1 /Ü bersc hriften/Ü bersc hriften 2/F-J/G etri ebe für ober en Walz enantrieb @ 11\mod_1223618840051_78.doc @ 148283Pos : 18.39.11.2 /BA/Wartung/Öl kontr olle_Wec hs el/M ähwer ke/Bil d G etri ebe für ober en Walz enantrieb @ 0\mod_1197016558018_78.doc @ 15923Pos : 18.39.11.3 /BA/Wartung/Öl kontr olle_Wec hs el/Öl kontroll e SAE 90 @ 0\mod_1197008973815_78.doc @ 15649Pos : 18.39.11.4 /BA/Wartung/Öl kontr olle_Wec hs el/Öl wec hs el Version2 @ 0\mod_1197016258486_78.doc @ 15884Pos : 18.39.11.6 /BA/Wartung/Öl kontr olle_Wec hs el/Altöl or dnungsgemäß ents orgen @ 0\mod_11970081170<strong>02</strong>_78.doc @ 15550Pos : 18.39.12 /BA/-----Seitenumbr uch------ @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.doc @ 4165Maintenance – Mowing Units14.16 Gearbox for Top Roller Drive1EC-186-0Fig. 306:Oil level check:• For time intervals, see Chapter "Oil Level Check and Oil Change Intervals (Gearboxes)".• Unscrew the inspection screw (1)• Oil level up to bore hole (1)• If necessary, top up the oil (SAE 90)• Screw the check screw (1) back in.Oil change:• For time intervals, see Chapter "Oil Level Check and Oil Change Intervals (Gearboxes)".• Screw out the screw plug (2).• Collect the used oil in a suitable drip pan• Screw in the screw plug (2)• Fill oil (1) (oil level up to hole (1))Pos : 18.39.11.5 /BA/Wartung/Öl kontr olle_Wec hs el/Ölq ualität /Öl meng e: si ehe Kapitel @ 0\mod_1197007859486_78.doc @ 15531Oil quality / oil quantity: see Chapter "Filling Quantities and Lubricant Designations forGearboxes"NoteThe used oil must be disposed of correctly357
Pos : 18.39.13.1 /Ü bersc hriften/Ü bersc hriften 2/K-O /Öls tands kontr olle und Öl wechsel am M ähhol m @ 0\mod_1197017549815_78.doc @ 15963Pos : 18.39.13.2 /Ü bersc hriften/Ü bersc hriften 3/F-J/Fr ontmähwer k @ 0\mod_1196675077463_78.doc @ 10648Pos : 18.39.13.3 /BA/Sic her heit/G efahr enhi nweis e/M ähwer ke/Schnell roti erende M ess erteller/M ess ertrommeln_1 @ 0\mod_1197017696736_78.doc @ 16001Pos : 18.39.13.4 /Ü bersc hriften/Ü bersc hriften 3/K-O /Mähhol m ausrichten @ 0\mod_1197017956815_78.doc @ 16042Pos : 18.39.13.5 /BA/Wartung/M ähwer ke/Vorrauss etz ung Ausrichten M ähhol m Big M 400 @ 0\mod_1197018894471_78.doc @ 16061Pos : 18.39.13.6 /BA/Wartung/M ähwer ke/M ähhol m ausrichten Big M 400 @ 0\mod_1197018990346_78.doc @ 16101Pos : 18.39.13.7 /BA/-----Sei tenumbr uch------ @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.doc @ 4165Maintenance – Mowing Units14.17 Oil level check and oil change on the cutter bar14.17.1 Front mowing unitDanger! - Rapidly rotating cutting discs/blade drums.Effect: Danger to life or serious injuries.• Switch off the engine and remove the ignition key.• The cutting discs/blade drums continue to run!• Do not leave the driver’s cab until the cutting discs/blade drums have come to a completestop.14.17.2 Aligning the Cutter BarPrerequisite:• Switch off the travelling gear release switch• Use the multi-function lever to move the 3 mowing units into working position (floatsetting).Fig. 307Aligning the mowing units crosswise• Place a manual spirit level centred on the cutter bars.Standard design:• Align the cutter bars horizontally (see Chapter "Setting for Cutting Height on the FrontMowing Unit" and Setting for Cutting Height on the Lateral Mowing Unit").With hydraulic cutting height option:• Align the cutting bars horizontally (See Info Centre chapter "Aligning the Mowing Units").Lengthwise• Place manual spirit level (1) on two cutting discs.• Use wedges to align the cutter bar horizontally.358
Pos : 18.39.13.8 /Ü bersc hriften/Ü bersc hriften 3/K-O /Öl kontroll e @ 0\mod_1197<strong>02</strong>1908190_78.doc @ 16120Pos : 18.39.13.9 /BA/Sic her heit/G efahr enhi nweis e/M ähwer ke/Schnell roti erende M ess erteller/M ess ertrommel_2 @ 0\mod_1197<strong>02</strong>2569252_78.doc @ 16165Pos : 18.39.13.1 /BA/Sic her heit/G efahr enhi nweis e/M ähwer ke/Schnell roti erende M ess erteller/M ess ertrommeln_1 @ 0\mod_1197017696736_78.doc @ 16001Pos : 18.39.13.1 /BA/Wartung/M ähwer ke/Öl kontroll e M ähholm Big M 400 @ 0\mod_1197<strong>02</strong>6101830_78.doc @ 16184Pos : 18.39.13.1 /BA/-----Sei tenumbr uch------ @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.doc @ 4165Maintenance – Mowing Units14.17.3 Checking the oil levelDanger! - Rapidly rotating cutting discs/blade drums.Effect: Danger to life or serious injuries.Lower guards. Nobody should be in the danger zone around the machine.Danger! - Rapidly rotating cutting discs/blade drums.Effect: Danger to life or serious injuries.• Switch off the engine and remove the ignition key.• The cutting discs/blade drums continue to run!• Do not leave the driver’s cab until the cutting discs/blade drums have come to a completestop.Allow the machine to run briefly. Do not leave the driver’s cab until the cutting discs/blade drumshave come to a complete stop.2BMII-362Fig. 308:• Unscrew one of the two oil level inspection screws (2) on the cutter bar.• The oil level must be up to the bore hole. If necessary, top up the oil (SAE 90)• Screw in the oil level inspection screw (2) again and tighten in securely.359
Pos : 18.39.13.1 /Ü bersc hriften/Ü bersc hriften 3/K-O /Öl wec hsel @ 0\mod_1197<strong>02</strong>1941955_78.doc @ 16139Pos : 18.39.13.1 /BA/Wartung/M ähwer ke/Öl wec hs el Mähhol m Big M 400 @ 0\mod_1197<strong>02</strong>6735955_78.doc @ 16203Pos : 18.39.13.1 /BA/Wartung/Öl kontr olle_Wec hs el/Ölq ualität /Öl meng e: si ehe Kapitel @ 0\mod_1197007859486_78.doc @ 15531Pos : 18.39.13.1 /BA/Wartung/Öl kontr olle_Wec hs el/Altöl or dnungsgemäß ents orgen @ 0\mod_11970081170<strong>02</strong>_78.doc @ 15550Pos : 18.39.13.1 /BA/-----Sei tenumbr uch------ @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.doc @ 4165Maintenance – Mowing Units14.17.4 Oil change21BMII-363Fig. 309:• Lift the mowing unit slightly and set a wooden beam underneath on the opposite side ofthe cover (2).• Lower the mowing unit so that the cutter bar is resting on the wooden beam.• Switch off the engine, remove the ignition key, and secure the machine from rolling away.• Collect the used oil in a suitable drip pan.• Remove cover (2) at the cutter bar end• Drain the oil.• Reinstall cover (2) with new seal.• Unscrew one of the two oil level inspection screws (2) on the cutter bar and add oil.• Screw in the oil level inspection screw (2) again and tighten in securely.• To check the oil level, align the cutter bar crosswise and lengthwise (see chapter"Aligning the Cutter Bar").Note• Always check the oil level after repair work on the cutter bar.Oil quality / oil quantity: see Chapter "Filling Quantities and Lubricant Designations forGearboxes"NoteThe used oil must be disposed of correctly360
Pos : 18.39.13.1 /Ü bersc hriften/Ü bersc hriften 2/K-O /Öls tands kontr olle und Öl wechsel am M ähhol m @ 0\mod_1197017549815_78.doc @ 15963Pos : 18.39.13.1 /Ü bersc hriften/Ü bersc hriften 3/P-T/Seitenmähwer k @ 0\mod_1196675974056_78.doc @ 10706Pos : 18.39.13.2 /BA/Sic her heit/G efahr enhi nweis e/M ähwer ke/Schnell roti erende M ess erteller/M ess ertrommel_2 @ 0\mod_1197<strong>02</strong>2569252_78.doc @ 16165Pos : 18.39.13.2 /BA/Sic her heit/G efahr enhi nweis e/M ähwer ke/Schnell roti erende M ess erteller/M ess ertrommeln_1 @ 0\mod_1197017696736_78.doc @ 16001Pos : 18.39.13.2 /BA/-----Sei tenumbr uch------ @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.doc @ 4165Maintenance – Mowing Units14.18 Oil level check and oil change on the cutter bar14.18.1 Lateral Mowing UnitDanger! - Rapidly rotating cutting discs/blade drums.Effect: Danger to life or serious injuries.Lower guards. Nobody should be in the danger zone around the machine.Danger! - Rapidly rotating cutting discs/blade drums.Effect: Danger to life or serious injuries.• Switch off the engine and remove the ignition key.• The cutting discs/blade drums continue to run!• Do not leave the driver’s cab until the cutting discs/blade drums have come to a completestop.361
Pos : 18.39.13.2 /Ü bersc hriften/Ü bersc hriften 3/K-O /Öl kontroll e @ 0\mod_1197<strong>02</strong>1908190_78.doc @ 16120Pos : 18.39.13.2 /BA/-----Sei tenumbr uch------ @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.doc @ 4165Maintenance – Mowing Units14.18.2 Checking the oil levelPos : 18.39.13.2 /BA/Wartung/M ähwer ke/Öl kontroll e Seitenmähwer ke Big M 400 @ 0\mod_1197<strong>02</strong>7611736_78.doc @ 16222• Allow the mowing unit to run briefly in working position.• Wait until the cutter bars have come to a complete stop.• Fold up the lateral mowing units.Fig. 310• Slightly loosen the lower oil level inspection screws (2) on the cutter bar (1) of theright/left lateral mowing units.NoteIf oil emerges from the hole, the oil level is correct. Otherwise add oil (SAE 90).• Tighten the oil level inspection screws (2) again.362
Pos : 18.39.13.2 /Ü bersc hriften/Ü bersc hriften 3/K-O /Öl wec hsel @ 0\mod_1197<strong>02</strong>1941955_78.doc @ 16139Pos : 18.39.13.2 /BA/Sic her heit/G efahr enhi nweis e/M ähwer ke/Schnell roti erende M ess erteller/M ess ertrommeln_1 @ 0\mod_1197017696736_78.doc @ 16001Pos : 18.39.13.2 /BA/Wartung/M ähwer ke/Öl wec hs el s eitliche M ähwer ke Big M 400 @ 0\mod_1197<strong>02</strong>8506408_78.doc @ 16241Pos : 18.39.13.2 /BA/Wartung/Öl kontr olle_Wec hs el/Ölq ualität /Öl meng e: si ehe Kapitel @ 0\mod_1197007859486_78.doc @ 15531Pos : 18.39.13.3 /BA/Wartung/Öl kontr olle_Wec hs el/Altöl or dnungsgemäß ents orgen @ 0\mod_11970081170<strong>02</strong>_78.doc @ 15550Pos : 18.40 /BA/-----Seitenumbruc h------ @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.doc @ 4165Maintenance – Mowing Units14.18.3 Oil changeDanger! - Rapidly rotating cutting discs/blade drums.Effect: Danger to life or serious injuries.• Switch off the engine and remove the ignition key.• The cutting discs/blade drums continue to run!• Do not leave the driver’s cab until the cutting discs/blade drums have come to a completestop.3Fig. 311• Fold up the right/left lateral mowing units (1).• Collect the used oil in a suitable drip pan.• Remove the lower cover (2) on the cutter bar.• Reinstall cover (2) with new seal.• Add oil at the lower inspection screws (3).• Check oil level (see chapter "Checking the Oil Level").BMII-371Note• Always check the oil level after repair work on the cutter bar.Oil quality / oil quantity: see Chapter "Filling Quantities and Lubricant Designations forGearboxes"NoteThe used oil must be disposed of correctly363
Pos : 18.41.1 /Ü berschriften/Ü berschriften 2/K-O/Kontr olle der Mähkling en und Messer hal ter ung @ 0\mod_1197265641329_78.doc @ 16323Pos : 18.41.2 /BA/Sic herheit/Gefahrenhinweise/Mähwerke/Fehlende und besc hädigte M ähkli ngen und M ähkli ngenhalterungen @ 0\mod_1197265722813_78.doc @ 16342Pos : 18.41.3 /Ü berschriften/Ü berschriften 3/K-O/M ähkli ngen @ 0\mod_1197265959110_78.doc @ 16361Pos : 18.41.5 /BA/Sic herheit/Gefahrenhinweise/Mähwerke/Zu g eringe Materials tär ke an den M ähkli ngen_neu @ 3\mod_1204727167898_78.doc @ 72588Pos : 18.41.6 /BA/Wartung/Mähwerke/M ähklingen beids eitig verwenbar_neu @ 3\mod_1204728012601_78.doc @ 72608Pos : 18.41.7 /BA/-----Seitenumbruc h------ @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.doc @ 4165Maintenance – Mowing Units14.19 Checking the Cutter Blades and Blade HolderWarning! - Missing and damaged cutter blades and cutter blade retainers.Effect: Danger to life, serious injuries or damage to the machine• Check cutter blades at least once per day and• check retaining bolts every time you change the blades or after contact with foreignobjects.• Immediately replace missing or damaged cutter blades and cutter blade retainers14.19.1 Cutter BladesPos : 18.41.4 /BA/Wartung/Mähwerke/Di e Bohrung der M ähklingen kann sich durc h Versc hleiß aufweiten. @ 10\mod_1221048982715_78.doc @ 131675The borehole on the cutter blades may spread due to wear.Danger! - Insufficient thickness of material on the cutter blades.Effect: Danger to life or serious injuries.• The cutter blades must be replaced at the latest when the wear limit is reached (seemark (1) on the cutter blade; dimension a less than or equal to 7 mm).a1EC 253 0Fig. 312Note - The cutter blades can be turned around and used on both sides.• When cutter blades are missing or damaged, they must be replaced as a complete set.This prevents dangerous unbalanced rotation364
Pos : 18.41.8 /BA/Wartung/Mähwerke/M ess ersc hraubversc hluss @ 0\mod_1197267907375_78.doc @ 16425Pos : 18.41.9 /BA/-----Seitenumbruc h------ @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.doc @ 4165Maintenance – Mowing Units14.19.2 Blade screw connectionDanger! - Insufficient thickness of material on the retaining bolts.Effect: Danger to life or serious injuries.• At every blade changing check the thickness of the holding bolts material.• Damage or worn retaining bolts must always be replaced by sets on each cuttingdisc/blade drum!• The material thickness of the retaining bolts must not be less than 14 mm at the weakestpoint.min. 14 mmEC-240-0Fig. 313365
Pos : 18.41.10 /BA/Di es e Seite is t bewuss t fr eigelas sen worden. @ 1\mod_1201783680373_78.doc @ 54443Pos : 18.41.11 /BA/-----Seitenumbr uch------ @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.doc @ 4165Maintenance – Mowing UnitsThis page has been left blank deliberately!!366
Pos : 18.41.12 /BA/Wartung/M ähwer ke/M ess erschnellversc hlus s @ 0\mod_1197268087875_78.doc @ 16444Pos : 18.41.13 /Ü bersc hriften/Ü bersc hriften 3/P-T/Prüfen der Materials tär ke der Haltebolz en U S @ 8\mod_1219048913565_78.doc @ 108655Pos : 18.41.14 /BA/Wartung/M ähwer ke/Prüfen der M aterialstär ke der H altebolz en/Bl attfeder n_U S @ 8\mod_1219047827550_78.doc @ 108614Pos : 18.41.15 /BA/Wartung/M ähwer ke/M aterialstär ke der H altebolzen über prüfen U S @ 8\mod_1219048235081_78.doc @ 108634Maintenance – Mowing Units14.19.3 Blade Quick-Fit DeviceDanger! - Insufficient thickness of material on the retaining bolts.Effect: Danger to life or serious injuries.• At every blade changing check the thickness of the holding bolts material.• Damage or worn retaining bolts must always be replaced by sets on each cuttingdisc/blade drum!• The material thickness of the retaining bolts must not be less than 14 mm at the weakestpoint.• The material thickness of the leaf spring must not be less than 3 mm at the weakestpoint.min. 14 mmEC-239-0Fig. 31414.19.4 Checking the Material Thickness of the Retaining Bolts21abEC-241-0Fig. 315The material thickness of the retaining bolts and the leaf springs is checked using the suppliedgauge (1). The gauge (1) is located on the special tool (2) {blade key}.Section (a) of the gauge is used to check the material thickness of the retaining bolts.Section (b) of the gauge is used to check the contour of the leaf springs.367
Pos : 18.41.16 /BA/-----Seitenumbr uch------ @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.doc @ 4165Maintenance – Mowing Units14.19.4.1 Checking the material thickness of the retaining bolts21EC-242-0Fig. 316• Remove the cutter• Clean the area to be checked• Place the gauge (1) with section (a) against the retaining bolt (2).• Rotate the gauge (1) by 90 degrees.• If it is not possible to slide the gauge over the retaining bolt during the rotation, then theretaining bolt is still in working order.• If it is possible to slide the gauge (2) over the retaining bolt during the rotation, theretaining bolt must be replaced immediately.368
Pos : 18.41.17 /BA/Wartung/M ähwer ke/R egel mäßig e Kontroll e der Blattfeder n U S @ 8\mod_1219049253925_78.doc @ 108717Pos : 18.41.18 /Ü bersc hriften/Ü bersc hriften 3/P-T/Prüfen der Materials tär ke der Bl attfedern U S @ 8\mod_1219048953143_78.doc @ 108676Pos : 18.41.19 /BA/Wartung/M ähwer ke/Prüfen der M aterialstär ke der H altebolz en/Bl attfeder n_U S @ 8\mod_1219047827550_78.doc @ 108614Pos : 18.41.20 /BA/Wartung/M ähwer ke/M aterialstär ke der Blattfedern überprüfen U S @ 8\mod_1219049061425_78.doc @ 108698Maintenance – Mowing Units14.19.5 Periodical Inspection of the Leaf SpringsDanger! - Worn application seam on the leaf springs.Effect: Danger to life or serious injuries.• Check the leaf springs for damage at least once a day or after contact with foreignobjects.• The wear limit of the leaf springs is reached when the application seam (1) is worn awayat one point. The wear limit must be checked with the gauge (2).1 1Fig. 317EC 225 0NoteUse only original Krone spare parts to replace the leaf springs.14.19.6 Checking the Material Thickness of the Leaf Springs21abEC-241-0Fig. 318The material thickness of the retaining bolts and the leaf springs is checked using the suppliedgauge (1). The gauge (1) is located on the special tool (2) {blade key}.Section (a) of the gauge is used to check the material thickness of the retaining bolts.Section (b) of the gauge is used to check the contour of the leaf springs.369
Pos : 18.41.21 /BA/Wartung/M ähwer ke/Blattfeder Kontur pr üfen <strong>US</strong> @ 8\mod_1219049656846_78.doc @ 108739Pos : 18.41.22 /BA/-----Seitenumbr uch------ @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.doc @ 4165Maintenance – Mowing Units14.19.6.1 Checking the material thickness of the leaf springs21EC-243-0Fig. 319• Remove the cutter• Clean the area to be checked• Push the gauge (1) with section (b) over the retaining bolt of the leaf spring (2), as far asit will go.2IC12IIC1EC-244-0Fig. 320• If the contour of the leaf spring (2) in section (IC) aligns completely with the contour of thegauge (1), the leaf spring has not yet reached its wear limit.• If the contour of the leaf spring disappears at any point in section (IIc) behind the contourof the gauge, the leaf spring has reached its wear limit. The leaf spring must be replaced.370
Pos : 18.41.23 /BA/Wartung/M ähwer ke/R egel mäßig e Kontroll e der M ess erteller bz w. -trommeln @ 0\mod_1197268487390_78.doc @ 16483Pos : 18.41.24 /BA/-----Seitenumbr uch------ @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.doc @ 4165Maintenance – Mowing Units14.19.7 Periodical Inspection of the Cutting Discs / Blade DrumsDanger! - Deformed Cutting Discs / Blade DrumsEffect: Danger to life or serious injuries.• Check the cutting discs or blade drums for damages at least once per day or aftercontact with foreign objects.• In case of deformed cuttings discs or drums, the dimension of A = 48 mm must never beexceeded.1AFig. 321EC-0-211NoteThe cutting discs or drums must be replaced by Original Krone spare parts only.371
Pos : 18.41.25 /BA/Wartung/M ähwer ke/Versc hleis sgrenz e für Aus waschungen @ 0\mod_1197268738875_78.doc @ 165<strong>02</strong>Pos : 18.41.26 /BA/-----Seitenumbr uch------ @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.doc @ 4165Maintenance – Mowing Units14.19.8 Abrasion LimitDanger! - Abrasion on the cutting discs / blade drumsEffect: Danger to life or serious injuries.• The abrasion limit (2) will be achieved if the min. material thickness of 3 mm is no longergiven.22Fig. 322EC-226-0NoteIf cutting discs or blade drums show deformations or wear in form of abrasions (2) or similar,these components have to be replaced by Original Krone spare parts .372
Pos : 18.41.27 /Ü bersc hriften/Ü bersc hriften 2/K- O/Messer wec hsel an M ess ertell ern @ 0\mod_1197269068562_78.doc @ 16521Pos : 18.41.28 /BA/Sic her hei t/G efahrenhi nweis e/M ähwer ke/Schnell roti erende Mess erteller/M ess ertrommeln_1 @ 0\mod_1197017696736_78.doc @ 16001Pos : 18.41.29 /BA/Sic her hei t/G efahrenhi nweis e/M ähwer ke/Sich lös ende M ähkli ngen @ 0\mod_1197269483265_78.doc @ 16540Pos : 18.41.30 /BA/-----Seitenumbr uch------ @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.doc @ 4165Maintenance – Mowing Units14.20 Blade Changing on Cutting DiscsDanger! - Rapidly rotating cutting discs/blade drums.Effect: Danger to life or serious injuries.• Switch off the engine and remove the ignition key.• The cutting discs/blade drums continue to run!• Do not leave the driver’s cab until the cutting discs/blade drums have come to a completestop.Danger! - Cutter blades coming looseEffect: Danger to life or serious injuries.• After changing the blades check that they fit perfectly and that they can move freely.• Whenever a blade is changed, also inspect the fasteners and replace them, if necessary!• Always replace missing and damaged blades in sets to prevent unbalanced rotation!• Never mount unevenly worn blades on a drum/disc!373
Pos : 18.41.31 /Ü bersc hriften/Ü bersc hriften 3/K- O/Messersc hr aubverschl uß @ 0\mod_1197270941296_78.doc @ 16578Pos : 18.41.32 /BA/Wartung/M ähwer ke/Bes chr eibung M ess er wec hs el M ess erschr aubversc hluss @ 47\mod_1285661949953_78.doc @ 456898Pos : 18.41.33 /BA/-----Seitenumbr uch------ @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.doc @ 4165Maintenance – Mowing Units14.20.1 Blade Screw ConnectionPic. 323EC-0-250• Fold up safety device• Clean the area• Remove damaged or worn blades• To fit the blades, insert the blade (5) between the wear skid (2) and the cutting disc (1)• Insert the retaining bolt (3) from below through the wear skid, the blade and the cuttingdisc• Place the locknut (4) on the retaining bolt from above and tighten it firmly (tighteningtorque refer to chapter “Torques”)• Repeat the process for all blades• After fitting the blades, fold the safety device down againNote• The cutter blades of anticlockwise rotating cutting discs / blade drums are different tothose of clockwise rotating ones. Make certain the direction of rotation is correct wheninstalling!• The arrow on the cutter blades must match the direction of rotation of the correspondingcutting discs / blade drums• The locknut (4) used to secure the retaining bolts must not be used more than onceOrder No. for clockwise rotating blade: 139-889Order No. for anticlockwise rotating blade: 139-888374
Pos : 18.41.34 /Ü bersc hriften/Ü bersc hriften 3/K- O/Messersc hnell versc hluß @ 0\mod_1197271019859_78.doc @ 16597Pos : 18.41.35 /BA/Wartung/M ähwer ke/Bes chr eibung M ess er wec hs el M ess erschnellversc hlus s @ 0\mod_1197271100500_78.doc @ 16616Pos : 18.41.36 /BA/-----Seitenumbr uch------ @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.doc @ 4165Maintenance – Mowing Units14.20.2 Blade Quick-Fit Device23 45EC-251-0Fig. 324• Clean the area.• Remove damaged or worn blades.• Push the special tool (1) {blade key} between the cutter disc (4) and leaf spring (3) andpress down with one hand.• Guide a new blade (2) onto the retaining bolt and allow the blade key to return upwards.• After fitting the blades, fold the protective device down again.Note• The cutter blades of anticlockwise rotating cutting discs / blade drums are different thanthose of clockwise rotating ones. Make certain the direction of rotation is correct wheninstalling!• The arrow on the cutter blades must match the direction of rotation of the correspondingcutting discs / blade drums.• The hex nut (4) used to secure the retaining bolts must not be used more than once.Order No. for clockwise rotating blade: 139-889Order No. for anticlockwise rotating blade: 139-888375
Pos : 18.41.37 /BA/Wartung/M ähwer ke/Stoß kanten erneuern @ 0\mod_1197271320468_78.doc @ 16636Pos : 18.42 /BA/-----Seitenumbruc h------ @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.doc @ 4165Maintenance – Mowing Units14.21 Replacing the liningsCaution! - If the linings are checked irregularly.Effect: Damage to the machine• Always check the mowing unit for damaged linings prior to start-up and replace linings, ifnecessary!• Adjust the welding current and the welding material to the cutter bar material and to thelining or carry out a trial welding if necessary.•Fig. 325EC-0-012• Open the welding seams of the old lining.• Remove the lining• Deburr the contact surface.23 45EC-251-0Fig. 326• Adapt the new lining (3).• Weld short I seams on the upper surface of the cutter bar in the areas marked (1) (eachshould be approx. 30 mm).• Do not weld the edges (2).• On the lower surface of the cutter bar, weld the lining (3) to the cutter bar along thewhole length in area (5).• Do not weld the edges (4).376
Pos : 18.43 /BA/Diese Seite ist bewusst freigel ass en wor den. @ 1\mod_1201783680373_78.doc @ 54443Pos : 18.44 /BA/-----Seitenumbruc h------ @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.doc @ 4165Maintenance – Mowing UnitsThis page has been left blank deliberately!!377
Pos : 18.45.1 /Ü berschriften/Ü berschriften 2/K-O/Kreis elnabe mi t Schersic her ung @ 0\mod_1197272352468_78.doc @ 16655Pos : 18.45.2 /BA/Sic herheit/Gefahrenhinweise/Mähwerke/Sc hnell rotier ende Messer teller /Mess ertr ommel n_1 @ 0\mod_1197017696736_78.doc @ 16001Pos : 18.45.3 /BA/Wartung/Mähwerke/Besc hreibung Sc hersicherung @ 6\mod_1214562895570_78.doc @ 95092Pos : 18.45.4 /BA/-----Seitenumbruc h------ @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.doc @ 4165Maintenance – Mowing Units14.22 Rotary hub with shear protectionDanger! - Rapidly rotating cutting discs/blade drums.Effect: Danger to life or serious injuries.• Switch off the engine and remove the ignition key.• The cutting discs/blade drums continue to run!• Do not leave the driver’s cab until the cutting discs/blade drums have come to a completestop.BiG M CV2314ba20 030 790 0 20 030 789 0BiG M CRI2b31 4a20 030 788 0 20 030 787 0BM 400 0141Fig. 327For protection against overload on the mowing units, the rotary hubs (1) are secured with nuts(2) and shear pins (3).If the machine strikes obstacles (for example stones), the 2 shear pins in the rotary hub will besheared off. The rotary hub and nut turn upward on the pinion shaft.• The cutting discs or drums which move the crop to the left (in direction of travel) have lefthandedthreading.• The cutting discs or drums which move the crop to the right (in direction of travel) haveright-handed threading.To distinguish between right-hand (clockwise) rotation (RH) and left-hand (anti-clockwise)rotation (LH), the nuts (2) and pinion shaft (4) for left-hand rotation (LH) have a distinctive grove(a, b).• Left-handed (LH) nuts (2) have distinctive grooves (a) on the bevel.• Left-handed (LH) pinion shafts (4) have a distinctive groove (b) on the face.378
Pos : 18.45.5 /BA/Wartung/Mähwerke/Sc hersic herung/Hinweis F orts etz en der Arbeit nach Ans prec hen der Sc hersicherung Bi G M 400 @ 4\mod_1211949254297_78.doc @ 84056Pos : 18.45.6 /BA/Wartung/Mähwerke/Sc hersic herung/Nac h dem Absc heren @ 4\mod_1211951454110_78.doc @ 84095Pos : 18.45.7 /BA/-----Seitenumbruc h------ @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.doc @ 4165Maintenance – Mowing UnitsNote - Continuation of work.To be able to work again as quickly as possible after a shear fuse engages, you should ordertwo left and two right bearing units from your dealer.Bearing housing, leftBearing housing, rightBiG M CV Order No. 20 030 789 0 Order No. 20 030 790 0BiG M CRI Order No. 20 030 787 0 Order No. 20 030 788 014.22.1 After Shearing OffCaution! - Correct installation position of the bearing housing not observed.Effect: Damage to the machine• Right-hand (RH) cutting discs and drums always have right-handed pinion shafts andnuts (no groove mark on the pinion shaft and nut).• Left-hand (LH) cutting discs and drums always have left-handed pinion shafts and nuts(with groove mark on the pinion shaft and nut).• Remove the cutting disc or drum.• Completely remove the sheared off bearing housing.• Install the replacement bearing housing after the cutter disc (BM 400 0141) is set up• Install the cutting disc or mower drum.379
Pos : 18.45.8 /BA/Wartung/Mähwerke/Sc hersic herung/Reparatur der abgesc her ten Lag erei nheit @ 4\mod_1211954689922_78.doc @ 84138Maintenance – Mowing Units14.22.2 Repairing the Sheared Off Bearing Unit78a923314dbc10BM 400 0170Fig. 328• Remove retaining ring (7).• Unscrew the hexagon head bolt (8).• Use the special key (10) included with delivery to remove the nut (2).• Remove the hub (1).• Remove the damaged shear pins (3).• Check the nut and hub for damage.• Fill the space above the taper roller bearing with grease (c).• Place the hub on the pinion shaft.• Drive the new shear pins (3) through the hub (1) and shaft (4).Note - Note the position of the shear pins!• Drive the shear pins (3) into the hole from outside until the end of the pin reaches thesurface of the hub (d).• The slots of the shear pins (3) must be mounted facing each other horizontally (see detail(I)).• Install the nut (2) using the special key (10) included with delivery (tighten to a tighteningtorque of 300 Nm).• Install and tighten the hexagon head bolts (8) with detent edges.• Install the retaining ring (7).380
Pos : 20.1 /Übersc hriften/Übersc hriften 1/U-Z/Wartung - Grundmas chi ne @ 0\mod_1197277779213_78.doc @ 16847Pos : 20.2 /BA/Sicher heit/G efahr enhinweis e/M ähwer ke/Unvor hergesehene Akti onen an der Mas chi ne_2 @ 0\mod_1197278033978_78.doc @ 16866Pos : 20.3 /Übersc hriften/Übersc hriften 2/A-E/Br emsen @ 0\mod_1197278385463_78.doc @ 16886Pos : 20.4 /BA/Sicher heit/Br emsen/Brems en nicht in Or dnung @ 0\mod_1197279276510_78.doc @ 17044Pos : 20.5 /BA/-----Seitenumbruch------ @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.doc @ 4165Maintenance – Basic Machine15 Maintenance – Basic MachineDanger! - Unexpected actions on the machineEffect: Danger to life, injuries or damage to the machine.• Always make certain that the drive and the engine are switched off before doing anyrepairs, maintenance or cleaning. Remove the ignition key!• Maintenance and repair work on safety-related components such as steering or brakesmust only be performed by authorised workshops.15.1 BrakesDanger! - Problem with brakesEffect: Danger to life, injuries or damage to the machine.• The brake function must be checked before the start of every trip.• The footbrake must take effect beginning with the first third of pedal travel.• Check the brake linings regularly.• Adjustment and repair work on the brake system must only be performed by professionalworkshops or recognised brake services!381
Pos : 20.6 /Übersc hriften/Übersc hriften 2/F-J/H ydrauli kanlag e @ 0\mod_1197278455041_78.doc @ 16905Pos : 20.7 /BA/Sicher heit/H ydr auli k/Ar beiten an der H ydrauli kanlag e @ 0\mod_1197279394885_78.doc @ 17063Pos : 20.8 /BA/-----Seitenumbruch------ @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.doc @ 4165Maintenance – Basic Machine15.2 Hydraulic systemDanger! - Caution with leaking linesEffect: Danger to life, injuries or damage to the machine.• When searching for leaks, use suitable aids, always use suitable tools and wearprotective goggles to avoid the risk of injury!• Escaping high-pressure fluids can penetrate the skin and cause serious injury. Therefore,you must depressurise the system before disconnecting lines.• Hydraulic oil escaping from a small opening can barely be seen. Because of this youshould use a piece of cardboard or something similar when searching for leaks. Protectyour hands and body.• If any fluid penetrates the skin, it must be removed immediately by a doctor who isfamiliar with this kind of injury; serious infections could otherwise result. Physicians whoare not familiar with this area should consult appropriate information from a competentmedical source.• Check the hydraulic hose lines at regular intervals and replace them if damaged or worn!The replacement lines must comply with the requirements of the device manufacturer.• Ensure that all line connections are tight before the pressure in the system builds upagain.• Repair work on the hydraulic system must only be performed by authorised KRONEprofessional workshops.382
Pos : 20.9 /BA/Wartung/M otor Big M 400/Wartungstabell en/Wartungstabelle - Grundmasc hine @ 13\mod_122640<strong>02</strong>78711_78.doc @ 165627Maintenance – Basic MachineMaintenance workMaintenance intervalOnceafter 10 hoursBefore the beginning of theseasonEvery 10 hours but at least1x dailyOnceafter 50 hoursEvery 100 hoursEvery 200 hours but at least1x annuallyEvery 500 hours but at least1x annuallyAfter every third seasonAs requiredHydraulic systemHydraulic oil level check X XChanging the hydraulic oilXReplacing the hydraulic oil filter X XTransfer gearboxOil level check X XOil change X XCabinReplace fresh air filterXClean fresh air filterXReplace circulation filterXClean circulation filterXWindshield wiper system X XPilot lamp testXLight function testXCheck the foot brake setting.XReadjust parking brake Bowden cable if necessary.XAir conditioning system/heatingCollector/drierRefrigerant condition and filling quantityChecking the capacitorXX383
Pos : 20.10 /BA/-----Seitenumbruc h------ @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.doc @ 4165Maintenance – Basic MachineMaintenance workMaintenance intervalBelt drivesOnceafter 10 hoursBefore the beginning of theseasonEvery 10 hours but at least1x dailyOnceafter 50 hoursFan wheel drive X X XDrive for outrigger arms X X XDrive for lateral mowing units X X XCross Conveyor Drive X X XTyreCheck tyres for cuts and breaks visuallyInspect tyre air pressure visuallyMeasure tyre air pressure with instrument: weeklyTighten wheel nuts for front/rear wheel to 630 Nm(466 lb-ft).Tighten boltsTighten the fastening screws of the guide cylinderanchor on the rear axle.Tighten the fastening screws of the guide cylinderanchor on the wheel hubs.Tighten the fastening screws on the track rod. X XTighten attachment bolts of outriggers on theframe.Check pressure filter (every <strong>150</strong>0 h)Steering pump pressure filterPressure filter, leakage oil pipe for wheel motorsWork pump pressure filterSupply pump pressure filterBatteryCheck the acid density of the battery; charge thebattery, if and when necessary, and top up withdistilled water.XXXXXXXEvery 100 hoursEvery 200 hours but at least1x annuallyEvery 500 hours but at least1x annuallyXXXXXAfter every third seasonAs required384
Pos : 20.11 /BA/Wartung/Selbstfahr er/Gr undmasc hine/Systemaufbau Ar beits- und Br ems hydr auli k Big M 400 @ 13\mod_1226499014537_78.doc @ 166114Pos : 20.12 /BA/Wartung/Selbstfahr er/Gr undmasc hine/Pumpen Big M 400 @ 13\mod_1226498778193_78.doc @ 166091Pos : 20.13 /BA/-----Seitenumbruc h------ @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.doc @ 4165Maintenance – Basic Machine15.3 Maintenance - hydraulic system15.3.1 System Description Operating and Brake Hydraulics15.3.2 Pumps2 1BMII-2<strong>02</strong>_2Fig. 3291. Brake and work hydraulics2. Steering pump385
Pos : 20.14 /BA/Wartung/Selbstfahr er/Gr undmasc hine/H auptbloc k @ 0\mod_1197292256400_78.doc @ 17161Pos : 20.15 /BA/-----Seitenumbruc h------ @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.doc @ 4165Maintenance – Basic Machine15.3.3 Main blockY19Y26Y271 2Y9Y10Y83Y25 Y16Y23 Y21Y7Y6BM 400 <strong>02</strong>21Fig. 330NO. Designation1 Suspension pressure control2 Drive pressure control3 Master control valve pressure controlY6 Switching to front axleY7 Switching to rear axleY8 Front driveY9 Right driveY10 Left driveY11 Parking BrakeY15 Lift suspensionY16 Lower suspensionY19 Main valveY20 Lift frontY21 Lower frontY22 Lift rightY23 Lower rightY24 Lift leftY25 Lower leftY26 Push off leftY27 Push off right386
Pos : 20.16 /BA/Wartung/Selbstfahr er/Gr undmasc hine/Ü ber druc kventil e @ 0\mod_1197295754<strong>02</strong>5_78.doc @ 17180Pos : 20.17 /Ü berschriften/Ü berschriften 3/A-E/Einstell bar e Dr oss eln @ 0\mod_1197295918463_78.doc @ 17218Pos : 20.18 /BA/Wartung/Selbstfahr er/Gr undmasc hine/Fr ontmähwer k Zuschaltgeschwi ndig keit @ 13\mod_1225784997962_78.doc @ 163013Pos : 20.19 /BA/-----Seitenumbruc h------ @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.doc @ 4165Maintenance – Basic Machine15.3.4 Over-pressure valvesNoteOver-pressure valves set in the factoryWork on the over-pressure valve must be carried out only by the customer service department.The valve blocks have been equipped with pressure control valves. These valves were set atthe factory and must not be changed.15.3.5 Adjustable ThrottlesSpeed of moving the front mowing unit into operating position1Fig. 331BMII-364_1The adjustable throttle (1) to set the speed to move the front mowing unit is located next to thehydraulic tank, on the left-hand side in direction of travel.387
Pos : 20.20 /Ü berschriften/Ü berschriften 2/F-J/H ydr auli köl @ 0\mod_1197296812478_78.doc @ 17265Pos : 20.21 /BA/Sic herheit/M odul e Achtung/Niemals versc hiedene Öle misc hen @ 0\mod_1197297008369_78.doc @ 17285Pos : 20.22 /BA/Wartung/Selbstfahr er/Gr undmasc hine/Aufstellung von Mi ner alöl en für di e H ydrauli kanl age @ 0\mod_1197297399525_78.doc @ 17323Pos : 20.23 /BA/Wartung/Selbstfahr er/Gr undmasc hine/Aufstellungs_T abelle von Mi neralöl en @ 0\mod_1197297178806_78.doc @ 17304Pos : 20.24 /BA/-----Seitenumbruc h------ @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.doc @ 4165Maintenance – Basic Machine15.4 Hydraulic oilCaution!Never mix different oils.• Before changing types of oil please consult our Customer Service.Never use engine oil.15.4.1 List of Mineral Oils for the Hydraulic SystemISO viscosityclassManufacturerList of mineral oils of quality class HLP (HM) and environmentally friendly HEPGpressure fluids that decompose quickly.HEPG VG 46 HLP VG 46 ISO viscosityclassManufacturerHEPG VG 46 HLP VG 46ADDINOLHydraulic oilHLP 46FRAGOL Hydraulic TR46AGIP OSO 46 FUCHS Renolin PGE46RENOLINMR 15VG 46RENOLINB15VG 46ARAL BAF 46Vitam Aral Vitam GF Houghton Syntolubric 464ASEOL Aqua VG 46 KLÜBER LAMORA HLP46AVIA Avia Hydrosynth46KUWAITAVILUB RSL46Avia Fluid ZAD46BECHEM Hydrostar UWF46BP Biohyd PEG 46 Energol HLP46CASTROLHYSPIN AWS46Q8Haydn 46Holst 46Hydraulic S46LIQUIMOLYHLP 46 ISOMobil Mobil DTE 25MobilHydraulicOil MediumSHELL Fluid BD 46 Shell TellusOil 46Shell HydrolDO 46COFRANCofraline extra46 SStuartTheunissenHydrocor E46ISOCOR E46Cofralineextra 46 SDEA Econa PG 46 Astron HLP 46 TOTAL Azolla ZS 46ELF ELFOLNA 46ELFOLNA DS46ENGENESSOFINAHydraulic oil PGK46Hydraulic oilD3031.46 HYDRAN 46TRIBOL Tribol 772Tribol ET 1140-46Tribol 943 AW46EngenTQH 20/46VALVOLINE Ultrasyn PG46NUTO H 46 VERKOL Vesta HLP 46WINTERSHALL WIOLAN HS 46WIOLAN HX 4388
Pos : 20.25 /Ü berschriften/Ü berschriften 2/F-J/H ydr auli kölstand @ 0\mod_1197297631728_78.doc @ 17342Pos : 20.26 /BA/Sic herheit/Gefahrenhinweise/Unvor herges ehene Aktionen an der Masc hi ne_2 @ 0\mod_1197297750885_78.doc @ 17361Pos : 20.27 /BA/Wartung/Selbstfahr er/Gr undmasc hine/H ydrauli köl tank Kontr olle_Wechs el BM 400 @ 13\mod_1225787591212_78.doc @ 163063Pos : 20.28 /BA/Wartung/Öl kontroll e_Wechsel/Altöl ordnungsgemäß entsorgen @ 0\mod_11970081170<strong>02</strong>_78.doc @ 15550Pos : 20.29 /BA/-----Seitenumbruc h------ @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.doc @ 4165Maintenance – Basic Machine15.5 Hydraulic oil levelDanger! - Unexpected actions on the machineEffect: Danger to life, injuries or damage to the machine.• When working on the hydraulic system, always switch off the engine.• Remove the ignition key• Secure the machine against rolling (parking brake, wheel chocks)213BM 400 0165_1Fig. 332Before checking oil level:• Park the machine horizontally• Lower all mowing units and switch off the engine.Oil level check:• Time interval: Daily• The oil must be visible in the inspection window (1).• Refill oil if necessary (2)Oil change:• Time intervals: every 500 hours or when the filter warning indicator lights, but at leastonce a year• Drain oil with suitable hose via plug-in connection (3)• Collect the used oil in a suitable collection vessel.• Top up the oil (2)• Oil level (oil must be visible in inspection window (1)).Capacity: approx. 80 l (approx. 21 U.S. gal)NoteThe used oil must be disposed of correctly389
Pos : 20.30 /BA/Wartung/Selbstfahr er/Gr undmasc hine/H ydrauli köl filter ers etz en BM 400 @ 13\mod_1225788077446_78.doc @ 163114Pos : 20.31 /BA/-----Seitenumbruc h------ @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.doc @ 4165Maintenance – Basic Machine15.6 Replacing the hydraulic oil filter213BM 400 <strong>02</strong>18_1Fig. 333NoteEnsure total cleanliness when changing the filterProperly dispose of filter cartridge that was removed• Replace the filter element (3) the first time after 50 operating hours, then every 500operating hours or after each mowing season (at the same time as changing thehydraulic oil).• Release the filter (2) and unscrew it from its holding.• Replace the filter with a new filter.Screw on new filter as follows:• Moisten the sealing surface of the filter with oil.• Once the filter seal touches the sealing surface of the filter housing, tighten the filtermanually making a 3/4 to 1-1/4 turn. Do not over tighten.• Check the filter for leaks while the engine is running and tighten if necessary.390
Pos : 20.32 /Ü berschriften/Ü berschriften 2/U-Z/Verteil ergetriebe @ 2\mod_12<strong>02</strong>991526780_78.doc @ 64104Pos : 20.33 /BA/Wartung/Selbstfahr er/Gr undmasc hine/Verteilergetriebe BM 400 @ 0\mod_1197298717806_78.doc @ 17418Pos : 20.34 /BA/-----Seitenumbruc h------ @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.doc @ 4165Maintenance – Basic Machine15.7 Transfer gearbox132BMII-203Fig. 334NoteUse only gearbox oil (synthetic DIN 5<strong>150</strong>2-PGLP) and dispose of used oil properly.Oil level check:• Time interval: before every use• Unscrew the inspection screw (2)• Oil level up to bore hole• If necessary, top up oil (synthetic DIN 5<strong>150</strong>2-PGLP)• Screw the check screw (2) back in.Oil change:• Change the oil after the first 30 to 50 operating hours. Thereafter, ever 500 hours (but atleast once a year)• Screw out the screw plug (3).• Collect the used oil in a suitable drip pan• Screw in the screw plug (3)• Top up the oil (1) (oil level up to hole (2))Capacity: 6,0 l391
Pos : 20.35 /BA/Wartung/Selbstfahr er/Gr undmasc hine/Luftans augung und -Verteil ung @ 0\mod_1197299076041_78.doc @ 17457Pos : 20.36 /BA/-----Seitenumbruc h------ @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.doc @ 4165Maintenance – Basic Machine15.8 Air intake and distributionBMII-217Fig. 335BMII-216Fig. 336392
Pos : 20.37 /BA/Wartung/Selbstfahr er/Gr undmasc hine/Frisc hluftfilter @ 0\mod_1197299258088_78.doc @ 17497Pos : 20.38 /BA/-----Seitenumbruc h------ @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.doc @ 4165Maintenance – Basic Machine15.8.1 Fresh air fan132BM 400 0166Fig. 337A fresh air filter (3) in the form of a wedge filter cell is located in the upper cab area behind thegill screen (2) on the left hand side in direction of travel. This filter (3) protects the driver in thecab against dust or airborne dirt, which is outside the cab. Check the filter for soiling prior to anyoperation.NoteIf filters are not properly maintained they may become very soiled, no longer ensuring thatsufficient fresh air is passed into the cab.• Open the closing device (1) by turning 90° clockwise.• Pull the gill screen (2) out; check the wedge filter cell (3) for soiling and clean, if and whennecessary.Shake out the filter (3); never use compressed air. In case of severe soiling, the filter (3) has tobe replaced.393
Pos : 20.39 /BA/Wartung/Selbstfahr er/Gr undmasc hine/U mluftsi eb @ 0\mod_1197299889400_78.doc @ 17546Pos : 20.40 /BA/-----Seitenumbruc h------ @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.doc @ 4165Maintenance – Basic Machine15.8.2 Circulation filterBX200550Fig. 338NoteIf the circulating air filter (1) is very dirty, the output of the air conditioning system may bereduced and it may heat up.• Clean the circulating air filter (1) regularly.394
Pos : 20.41 /Ü berschriften/Ü berschriften 2/P-T/Scheibenwas chanl age @ 0\mod_1197300179760_78.doc @ 17565Pos : 20.42 /BA/Wartung/Selbstfahr er/Gr undmasc hine/Schei benwaschanlage Bil d Big M 400 @ 46\mod_1283853814312_78.doc @ 451240Pos : 20.43 /BA/Wartung/Selbstfahr er/Gr undmasc hine/Schei benwaschanlage auffüll en @ 0\mod_1197300671119_78.doc @ 17605Pos : 20.44 /BA/-----Seitenumbruc h------ @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.doc @ 4165Maintenance – Basic Machine15.9 Windscreen washer system21BM 400 <strong>02</strong>04Fig. 339Check the level of the windscreen washer system daily. Refill the reservoir if necessary.• To fill the windscreen washer container (1) open cover (2).NoteTo achieve better cleaning effect under extreme crop and road conditions, add windshieldcleaner/antifreeze. In winter empty the washer unit or fill with special frost protection agent.395
Pos : 20.45.1 /BA/Wartung/Selbs tfahr er/Sens oren/Lage der Sens oren RH @ 35\mod_1256740088428_78.doc @ 327404Maintenance – Basic Machine15.10 Position of Sensors (Right-Hand Side of the Machine)51 6 314971<strong>02</strong>4131211BM4<strong>000</strong>231_1Fig. 340396
Pos : 20.45.2 /BA/Wartung/Selbs tfahr er/Sens oren/Lage der Sens oren LH @ 35\mod_1256739593146_78.doc @ 327349Maintenance – Basic MachineItem Sensor designation Sensor type Tightening torque1 Air filter contamination Negative pressureswitch2 Filling level, fuel Dipstick sensor3 Suction return air filter Manometric switch4 Service brake Pressure sensor5 Mowing unit lock right Namur sensor 10 Nm (a= 3mm)6 Spring compensation with twocylindersPressure sensor7 Flush valve temperature Temperature switch(optional)9 Auger speed Namur sensor 10 Nm (a= 3mm)10 Cutting height, right mower Rotation anglepotentiometer(optional)11 Front mowing unit speed Namur sensor 10 Nm (a= 3mm)12 Position of axle suspension Namur sensor 10 Nm (a= 3mm)13 Cutting height of front mower Path measurement (optional)14 Position of mowing arm Namur sensor 10 Nm (a= 3mm)397
Maintenance – Basic Machine15.11 Position of sensors (left side of machine)Fig. 341:398
Pos : 20.45.3 /Ü berschriften/Ü berschriften 3/A-E/Eins tell ung der Sensor en @ 0\mod_1199962173428_78.doc @ 37635Pos : 20.45.4 /BA/Wartung/Sensor en/Namursens or d = 12 mm BM 400 @ 35\mod_1258362555125_78.doc @ 335159Pos : 20.46 /BA/-----Seitenumbruc h------ @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.doc @ 4165Maintenance – Basic MachinePos. Sensor designation Sensor type Tightening torque5 Mowing unit lock left Namur sensor 10 Nm (a= 3mm)8 Pressure sensor drivinghydraulicsPressure sensor10 Switch service brake Namur sensor 10 Nm (a= 2mm)12 Brake tank pressure Manometric switch13 Over pressure/negative pressure- air conditioning systemManometric switch14 Feedback - drive pumps Captive washerpotentiometer15 Position of mowing arm Namur sensor 10 Nm (a= 3mm)16 Speed of auger drive Namur sensor Optional 10 Nm (a= 3mm)17 Speed of lateral mowing unitdriveNamur sensor10 Nm (a= 3mm)18 Cutting height of left mower Rotation anglepotentiometerOptional19 Charge pressure Manometric switch21 Hydraulic oil tank level Level sensor15.11.1 Adjusting the Sensors15.11.1.1 Namur sensor d = 12 mm312aBP-VFS-088-1Fig. 342The dimension “a” between the encoder (2) and the sensor (1) must be set differentlyaccording to function (see table “Position of the sensors”)Setting• Loosen the nuts on either side of the sensor• Turn the nuts until dimension "a" (see table “Position of the sensors”) is reached• Tighten the nuts again399
Pos : 20.47.1 /Ü berschriften/Ü berschriften 2/U-Z/Wartung Klimaanl age und H eiz ung @ 0\mod_1197301016697_78.doc @ 17643Pos : 20.47.2 /Ü berschriften/Ü berschriften 2/P-T/Speziell e Si cherheits hinweis e @ 0\mod_1196660495760_78.doc @ 9134Pos : 20.47.3 /BA/Sic herheit/Gefahrenhinweise/Berührung von Kältemittel @ 0\mod_1197301139072_78.doc @ 17682Pos : 20.47.4 /BA/Wartung/Selbs tfahr er/Gr undmasc hine/Klimaanl age/Komponenten der Kli maanlag e @ 0\mod_1197301531697_78.doc @ 17701Pos : 20.47.5 /BA/-----Seitenumbruc h------ @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.doc @ 4165Maintenance – Basic Machine15.12 Maintenance - air conditioning system and heating15.13 Special Safety InstructionsWarning! - Contact with refrigerantEffect: Injuries• In case of repair, maintenance and cleaning work on the refrigerant circuit, refrigerantemissions may occur; these emissions may be liquid or gaseous and are a hazard forman and the environment. Take suitable protective measures (wear protective gogglesand protective gloves).• Switch off the engine and remove the ignition key.• Secure the machine against the possibility of rolling back.• Repair, upkeep, maintenance and cleaning work must be carried out only by authorisedspecialists.• In the case of refrigerant burns, always seek medical attention. Bring the datasheet topresent to a physician (see Chapter "Refrigerant Data Sheet R 134a (excerpt)).• Ensure sufficient ventilation when working on the refrigerating system.• During refill and repair do not allow refrigerants to escape; dispose of them into arecycling container.• Spare parts that are used must correspond to the technical requirements of the machinemanufacturer. For this reason, use KRONE original spare parts only.• Extreme caution is advised when welding close to the air conditioning system15.13.1 Air conditioning componentsA Compressoron engine at the left-hand side of the vehicle, driven via V-beltB Capacitorbehind the radiator unit, accessible from the left and rightC Dryer/collectorbehind the radiator unit at the left-hand side of the vehicleD Evaporatorin the cab roofE Manometric switchon drier, behind the radiator unit at the left-hand side of the vehicleF Expansion valveat the evaporator inletG Air conditioning system/heating rotary switchin cab, roof panel400
Pos : 20.47.6 /BA/Wartung/Selbs tfahr er/Gr undmasc hine/Klimaanl age/Käl temittel datenblatt R 134a (Ausz ug) @ 0\mod_1197351117948_78.doc @ 17726Pos : 20.47.7 /BA/Wartung/Selbs tfahr er/Gr undmasc hine/Klimaanl age/T ec hnis che D aten @ 0\mod_1197351532839_78.doc @ 17745Pos : 20.47.8 /BA/-----Seitenumbruc h------ @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.doc @ 4165Maintenance – Basic Machine15.13.2 Refrigerant data sheet R 134a (excerpt)Refrigerant R 134a:Chemical designation:1,1,1,2-tetrafluorethaneChemical formula:CH2F CF3Molecular weight:1<strong>02</strong>.0 g/molBoiling point (at 1.013 bar):-26.1°CFreezing point:-101.0°CCritical temperature:-101.1°CCritical pressure:40.60 barDensity (liquid at +25° Celsius): 1.206 kg/m 3Flammability limitsin air - not flammableEnvironmental dataFKW 134a:ODP - Ozonolysis potential ODP = 0CLP - Chlorine load potential CLP = 0HGWP - Greenhouse effect HGWP = 0.26PCR - Photochemical reactivity PCR = 0.515.13.3 Technical dataTechnical DataComponentEvaporatorHeaterFanVoltageCurrent consumptionRefrigerantPerformance dataRefrigerating capacity* 5;200 Watt*Heating capacity 4;<strong>000</strong> Watt1<strong>000</strong> m 3 /h free blowing12 Volt15 amperesR 134a (CFC free)* measured at +30° Celsius ambient temperature (data rendered by the manufacturer)401
Pos : 20.47.9 /BA/Wartung/Selbs tfahr er/Gr undmasc hine/Klimaanl age/Käl temittel BM 400 @ 0\mod_1197352311855_78.doc @ 17764Pos : 20.47.10 /BA/Wartung/Sel bstfahrer /Grundmas chi ne/Kli maanlage/Druc ksc halter @ 0\mod_1197352444386_78.doc @ 17783Pos : 20.47.11 /BA/-----Seitenumbr uch------ @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.doc @ 4165Maintenance – Basic Machine15.13.4 RefrigerantNote• The air conditioning system is operated with 2<strong>000</strong> g of refrigerant R134a(tetrafluoroethane). This substance does not contain any chlorine atoms, and thus isinoffensive to the ozone in the atmosphere of the world.• Nonetheless, the refrigerant must not be drained; it must be collected at a recycling plant.For this reason do not sever any connecting pipes. Have maintenance and repair workon the air conditioning system carried out only by your Krone dealer with a suitabledisposal and recycling equipment.15.13.5 Manometric switchFig. 343:NoteWhen the fan speed is at the highest still pleasant performance, set the cooling performance ofthe air conditioning system to an average value. Let the air conditioning system not operate atthe lowest fan speed and highest cooling performance.The air conditioning system has been fitted with a manometric switch (1) which shuts down thesystem in case of excess pressure or negative pressure (on the dryer behind the combinedradiator on the left hand side in direction of travel).4<strong>02</strong>
Pos : 20.47.12 /BA/Wartung/Sel bstfahrer /Grundmas chi ne/Kli maanlage/Sammler / Tr oc kner @ 0\mod_1197352605245_78.doc @ 17844Pos : 20.47.13 /BA/-----Seitenumbr uch------ @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.doc @ 4165Maintenance – Basic Machine15.13.6 Collector/drierBMII-134Fig. 344:Since the refrigerant collector is pressurised, it is subject to the pressurised containerregulations during production and testing.According to this regulation the pressurised tank is classified as test group II in accordance withthe permissible overpressure p in bar, the volume l in litres and the pressure product p x l.According to Section 10 of the Pressurised Vessel Regulations these pressurised containersmust be subjected to recurring tests by an expert in accordance with section 32. In this case therecurring tests consist, as a rule, of external inspections of the tank in use. In combination withthe inspection the refrigerant collector must be subjected to a visual inspection twice a year.Special attention shall be given to corrosion and mechanical damage. If the container is not in acorrect state, for safety reasons it must be replaced to ensure sufficient protection to the userand third parties due to the hazard which may be caused in handling or operating pressurisedcontainers.NoteThe ambient temperature must exceed the temperature set at the thermostat (generally +1°Celsius) for the compressor to switch on.403
Pos : 20.47.14 /BA/Wartung/Sel bstfahrer /Grundmas chi ne/Kli maanlage/Kältemittelzustand und di e F üllmeng e prüfen @ 0\mod_1197353140558_78.doc @ 17863Pos : 20.47.15 /BA/-----Seitenumbr uch------ @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.doc @ 4165Maintenance – Basic Machine15.13.7 Checking refrigerant condition and levelFig. 345NoteThe quantity of refrigerant is checked using the white ball float.Loss of refrigerant through hoses in the air conditioning system is unavoidable. Check therefrigerant level every 200 hours. Check the window (2) of the drier (1) with the engine runningand with the air conditioning system switched on (set to highest cooling action).• If the white float (5) is at the top, the volume of refrigerant is okay.• If the white float (5) is at the bottom, the refrigerant must be topped up (specialistworkshop).NoteHumidity saturation is checked using the orange indicator pearl.Moisture in the coolant circuit is collected in the filter desiccator.• If the indicator pearl (3) is orange, the degree of moisture is okay.• If the indicator pearl (3) has turned colourless, the collector unit of the drier must bereplaced (specialist workshop).NoteObserve the instructions on the label (4) on the dryer (1).404
Pos : 20.47.16 /BA/Wartung/Sel bstfahrer /Grundmas chi ne/Kli maanlage/Kondensator prüfen BM 400 @ 0\mod_1197353463745_78.doc @ 17882Pos : 20.48 /BA/-----Seitenumbruc h------ @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.doc @ 4165Maintenance – Basic Machine15.14 Checking the capacitor1 3b4ba2BM 400 <strong>02</strong>05Fig. 346Warning! - Unintentional opening of the rear hoodEffect: Injuries or damage to the machineMake certain before start-up that the rear hood is properly locked.Keep the capacitor and radiator compartment clean at all times.To do this:• Open the rear hood (1) by tightening the lock (2) to the right/left and rotating by about 90degrees.• Clean dirt from the area (a) in front of the adjustment plate.• Clean the adjustment plate (3) with compressed air.• Open the rear side guard.• Clean dirt from the radiator compartment (a) in front of the capacitor.• Clean the condenser block (4) depending on its degree of soiling, but at least once everymonth.• Blow through the condenser block with compressed air from the inside to the outside,making sure that the fins are not damaged.• After cleaning, close the rear hood (1) by tightening the lock (2) to the right/left androtating by about 90 degrees.405
Pos : 20.49.1 /Ü berschriften/Ü berschriften 2/P-T/Riementriebe @ 0\mod_1197276279135_78.doc @ 16733Pos : 20.49.2 /BA/Sic herheit/Gefahrenhinweise/Unvor herges ehene Aktionen an der Masc hi ne_3 @ 0\mod_1197353885870_78.doc @ 17920Pos : 20.49.3 /BA/Sic herheit/Gefahrenhinweise/Durc hrutsc hende Ri ementri ebe @ 0\mod_1197354754964_78.doc @ 17940Pos : 20.49.4 /BA/Wartung/Riementriebe/Selbs tfahr er/Riemen allgemein @ 13\mod_1226488106287_78.doc @ 165850Pos : 20.49.5 /BA/-----Seitenumbruc h------ @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.doc @ 4165Maintenance – Basic Machine15.15 Belt drivesDanger! - Unexpected actions on the machineEffect: Danger to life, injuries or damage to the machine.• Always make certain that the drive and the engine are switched off before doing anyrepairs, maintenance or cleaning. Remove the ignition key!Caution! - Slipping belt drivesEffect: Danger of fire• The build-up of dust, oil and grass inside the engine compartment is combustible andpresents an increased fire hazard.• Keep the engine and the engine compartment clean at all times.• Retighten or replace slipping belt drives immediately.Note• Keep all belts at good tension constantly.• Clean dirty belts with caustic cleaning fluid. Do not use petrol or similar products forcleaning.• Check the tension of new belts after the first 10 operating hours and retension ifnecessary.406
Pos : 20.49.6 /BA/Wartung/Riementriebe/Selbs tfahr er/Vorauss etz ung Riementriebe pr üfen_korrigieren @ 0\mod_1197353671339_78.doc @ 17959Pos : 20.49.7 /BA/Wartung/Riementriebe/Selbs tfahr er/Antri eb Lüfterrad @ 0\mod_1197356850011_78.doc @ 17978Pos : 20.49.8 /BA/-----Seitenumbruc h------ @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.doc @ 4165Maintenance – Basic MachineNoteCheck the V-belt tension and condition of all belt drives after the first 10, 50 hours of operationand thereafter every 200 operating hours.• Replace damaged or worn V-belts.Prerequisite:• Lower the mowing unit into working position• Switching off the engine• Remove the ignition key• Secure the machine against rolling (parking brake, wheel chocks)15.15.1 Fan wheel drive45a132SFM1-510Fig. 347:Check belt tensionLength of spring under tension a = approx. 200 mmCorrecting the belt tension:• Increase or reduce the spring tension of the tension spring (2) until distance a = approx.200 mm is set.To replace belt (1):• Relieve the spring (2) in the tension roller (3).• Remove belt (1).• The belt pulley (4) must be exactly aligned.• If necessary, adjust the belt pulleys (4) with the screws (5).• Set a new belt in place and tension the spring in the tension roller a = 200 mmNoteMake sure the fan blade is in a central position in the radiator cover.407
Pos : 20.49.9 /BA/Wartung/Riementriebe/Selbs tfahr er/Ausl egerar me @ 12\mod_1225198179100_78.doc @ 154214Pos : 20.49.10 /BA/-----Seitenumbr uch------ @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.doc @ 4165Maintenance – Basic Machine15.15.2 Outrigger armsSFM1-450aaSFM1-460Abb. 348Outrigger right / leftCheck belt tensionLength of spring under tension a = approx. 87 mmCorrecting the belt tension:• Increase or reduce the spring tension of the tension spring (2) until distance a= about 87mm is set.NoteTighten the left and right tensioning system only until the distance tube makes contact in thespring. (Do not overstretch!)408
Pos : 20.49.11 /BA/Wartung/Ri ementri ebe/Sel bstfahrer/Ri emen der Ausl egerar me ersetzen @ 0\mod_1197357554355_78.doc @ 18037Pos : 20.49.12 /BA/-----Seitenumbr uch------ @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.doc @ 4165Maintenance – Basic MachineReplace the belt on the outrigger.3412BM 400 0167Fig. 349• Remove the belt covers.• Relieve the springs (1) in the tension rollers.NoteRemove the cover plate (3) on the right side.• Loosen the lubrication lines (2).• Replace the belt (4) and check to make certain it is correctly seated.• Tighten the springs (1) to a length of 90 mm.• Install the cover plate (3) on the right side.• Install the belt covers.409
Pos : 20.49.13 /BA/Wartung/Ri ementri ebe/Sel bstfahrer/Antriebsriemen M ähwer k @ 0\mod_1197357675011_78.doc @ 18056Maintenance – Basic Machine15.15.3 Drive of mowing unitFig. 350BMII-218• The belt tension is produced using the hydraulic cylinder (pressure 50 bar). Reset thesingle-acting cylinder using the springs.Replace the lateral mowing unit V-belt1211221BM2<strong>02</strong>340Fig. 351• Remove the attachment bolts (1) of the belt covers (2) on both sides.• Remove the belt covers (2).• Replace the belt and check to make certain it is correctly seated.• Install the belt covers (2) again.Pos : 20.49.14 /BA/Wartung/Ri ementri ebe/Sel bstfahrer/Antrrieb Q uerför der er @ 13\mod_1226401985570_78.doc @ 165677410
Pos : 20.50 /BA/-----Seitenumbruc h------ @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.doc @ 4165Maintenance – Basic Machine15.15.4 Cross Conveyor Drive8126 73546BM 400 <strong>02</strong>30Fig. 352Check belt tensionLength of spring under tension a = approx. 80 mmCorrecting the belt tension:• Remove the guard (1)• Increase or reduce the spring tension of the tension spring (2) until distance a = approx.80 mm is set.• Install the guard (1)To replace belt (3):• Remove the guard (1)• Remove the protective strut (7) and sensor holder (8).• Use the mounting lever (4) to raise the idler pulley (5).• Remove the old belt (3).• Place the new belt (3) onto the pulleys (6).• Lower the idler pulley (5) slowly and withdraw the mounting lever (4).With the V-belt under tension, dimension a must be equal to approx. 80 mm. Correct thebelt tension as necessary• Install the protective strut (7) and sensor holder (8).• Install the guard (1)411
Pos : 20.51.1 /Ü berschriften/Ü berschriften 2/P-T/Rei fen @ 0\mod_1197357995667_78.doc @ 18075Pos : 20.51.2 /BA/Sic herheit/Gefahrenhinweise/Fals che R eifenmontag e @ 0\mod_1197358162433_78.doc @ 18132Pos : 20.51.3 /BA/-----Seitenumbruc h------ @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.doc @ 4165Maintenance – Basic Machine15.16 TyresWarning! - Tyre fitting incorrectEffect: Injuries or damage to the machine• Fitting tyres requires sufficient knowledge and the availability of proper tools!• If tyres are not correctly fitted, it could explode when pumped up. This can cause seriousinjury. If you do not have sufficient experience of fitting tyres, have tyres fitted by theKRONE dealer or a qualified tyre specialist.• When fitting tyres on the wheel rims, the maximum pressure given by the tyremanufacturer must not be exceeded. The tyre or even the wheel rim could explodeand/or burst.• If the tyre heels do not fit properly when the maximum permitted pressure is reached, letout the air, align tyres, lubricate the tyre heels and pump up the tyre again.• Detailed information about how to fit tyres onto agricultural machinery can be obtainedfrom the tyre manufacturers.412
Pos : 20.51.4 /Ü berschriften/Ü berschriften 3/P-T/Rei fen prüfen und pfl egen @ 0\mod_1197358037214_78.doc @ 18094Pos : 20.51.5 /BA/Wartung/Reifen/R eifen prüfen Bild Big M 400 @ 41\mod_1272004363611_78.doc @ 374596Pos : 20.51.6 /BA/Wartung/Reifen/R eifen prüfen Big M 400 T ext @ 0\mod_1197358379792_78.doc @ 18172Pos : 20.51.7 /BA/-----Seitenumbruc h------ @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.doc @ 4165Maintenance – Basic Machine15.16.1 Checking and maintaining tyresFig. 353Check the tyres for damage and air pressure every day as the service life of tyres depends onthe air pressure.• Repair any cuts or tears in the tyres as soon as possible or change the tyres.• Do not expose tyres to oil, grease, fuel, or chemicals; nor should you let them stand in thesunlight for long periods.• Drive carefully; avoid driving over sharp stones or edges.• Use a precisely working tyre gauge to check the tyre pressure at least once a week (seechapter entitled "Technical Data").NoteNever operate the machine at the tyre pressure usual for transport of the tyres. Keep the valvecaps fitted on the valves to keep dirt out. Check the tyre pressure frequently!413
Pos : 20.51.8 /BA/Wartung/Reifen/R adbefestigung @ 0\mod_1197359014933_78.doc @ 18210Pos : 20.52 /BA/Wartung/Selbstfahr er/Gr undmasc hine/Befes tigungss chr auben am Ausleger nac hziehen BM 400 @ 0\mod_1197386860573_78.doc @ 2<strong>02</strong>09Pos : 21 /BA/-----Sei tenumbruch------ @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.doc @ 4165Maintenance – Basic Machine15.16.2 Wheel mounting630 NmFig. 354:BM 400 <strong>02</strong>56Tighten the wheel nuts after the first and then every 20 to 25 operating hours to a torque of 630Nm.15.16.3 Retightening the Attachment Bolts on the Outrigger1BMII-365Fig. 355:• Retighten (annually) the four fastening bolts (1) on the frame arms to a tightening torqueof 640 Nm.414
Pos : 22.1 /Übersc hriften/Übersc hriften 1/U-Z/Wartung - Sc hmier plan @ 0\mod_1197359304198_78.doc @ 18232Pos : 22.2 /Übersc hriften/Übersc hriften 2/A-E/Absc hmier en der G el enkwelle @ 0\mod_1197359496183_78.doc @ 18251Pos : 22.3 /BA/Wartung/Sel bstfahrer/Sc hmierpl an/Big M 400/Absc hmier en der Gel enkwelle BM 400 @ 0\mod_1197359557776_78.doc @ 18392Pos : 22.4 /BA/Wartung/Sel bstfahrer/Sc hmierpl an/Big M 400/Absc hmier en der D oppelgelenke am Hauptgetriebe @ 0\mod_11973600<strong>150</strong>73_78.doc @ 18473Pos : 22.5 /BA/-----Seitenumbruch------ @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.doc @ 4165Maintenance – lubrication chart16 Maintenance – lubrication chart16.1 Lubricating the PTO shaft50h50h50h50h20hBM 400 <strong>02</strong>11Fig. 356All other grease nipples on the PTO shafts must be lubricated as shown in the illustration.16.2 Lubricating the double joints on the main gearbox2x30hFig. 357:BMII-328All other grease nipples on the double joints must be lubricated as shown in the illustration tothe side.NoteThe lateral mowing units must be moved into the transport position first when using hydraulicauger hoods.415
Pos : 22.6 /Übersc hriften/Übersc hriften 2/P-T/Sc hmierpl an @ 0\mod_1197361829<strong>02</strong>6_78.doc @ 18495Pos : 22.7 /Abkürzungen /Abkürzungen s prac hneutr al/CV @ 0\mod_1197361944355_0.doc @ 18533Pos : 22.8 /BA/Wartung/Sel bstfahrer/Sc hmierpl an/Big M 400/Sc hmi erplan C V @ 0\mod_1197361999480_78.doc @ 18552Pos : 23 /BA/-----Sei tenumbruch------ @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.doc @ 4165Maintenance – lubrication chart16.3 Lubrication Chart(CV)382 2831 17 61141 2 32x30h30h50h45650h50h50h50h730h850h30hBM 400 <strong>02</strong>12Fig. 3581. Crank for conditioner plate2. Double joint (universal joint bracket)3. Double joint (main gearbox)4. Horizontal PTO shaft (front mowing unit)5. Full floating axle6. Front outrigger suspension arm7. PTO shaft (transfer gearbox/front mowing unit)8. Spring compensation cylinder416
Pos : 24.1 /Übersc hriften/Übersc hriften 1/U-Z/Wartung - El ektri k @ 0\mod_1197362427261_78.doc @ 18572Pos : 24.2 /BA/Sicher heit/G efahr enhinweis e/U nvorhergesehene Akti onen an der M aschi ne_4 @ 0\mod_1197365392761_78.doc @ 18610Pos : 24.3 /BA/Wartung/Sel bstfahrer/Wartung - Elektri k/T echnisc he Daten der el ektrisc hen @ 0\mod_1197365664870_78.doc @ 18629Pos : 24.4 /BA/-----Seitenumbruch------ @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.doc @ 4165Maintenance – electrical system17 Maintenance – electrical systemDanger! - Unexpected actions on the machineEffect: Danger to life, injuries or damage to the machine.• Always make certain that the drive and the engine are switched off before doing anyrepairs, maintenance or cleaning. Remove the ignition key!• Switch off the engine and remove the ignition key.• Secure the machine against accidental start-up and against rolling!• During repair work (welding) always switch off the engine, set main battery switch (1) topos. II (circuit interrupted) and remove the cable plug from the MR2 control unit on theengine!17.1 Electrical equipment - technical dataGenerator power14V /<strong>150</strong> ANumber of batteries 2Battery voltage -Battery capacity12V(2x) 135 Ah417
Pos : 24.5 /Übersc hriften/Übersc hriften 2/A-E/Batterie @ 0\mod_1197366520558_78.doc @ 18648Pos : 24.6 /BA/Sicher heit/Batterie/Batterieg ase sind hochexplosi v Version 1 @ 0\mod_1197366598276_78.doc @ 18667Pos : 24.7 /BA/Wartung/Sel bstfahrer/Wartung - Elektri k/Batteri en Big M 400 Bild @ 41\mod_1271913925381_78.doc @ 373655Pos : 24.8 /BA/Wartung/Sel bstfahrer/Wartung - Elektri k/Batteri en Big M 400/500 Text @ 0\mod_1197367396698_78.doc @ 18749Pos : 24.9 /BA/-----Seitenumbruch------ @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.doc @ 4165Maintenance – electrical system17.2 BatteryDanger! - Battery gases are highly explosiveEffect: Danger to life, injuries or damage to the machine.• Batteries develop a highly explosive electrolytic gas. Do not allow sparks or naked flamesanywhere near the battery.• During repair work (welding work) on the electrical system or engine, always switch theengine off.• Interrupt the electrical power circuit with the main battery switch.• Disconnect the cable plug (2) from the MR2 control unit on the engine!• Note the correct polarity when disconnecting and connecting the battery.• When jump-starting the battery, make certain that only a voltage of 12 V is connected toeach battery!Fig. 359The Big M is equipped with two batteries (1) of 12 V (135 Ah) each, which are connected inseries (24 V) for starting.A switching relay (2) is used to switch.The operating voltage is only 12 V!NoteKeep the battery clean of dust and chaff.418
Pos : 24.10 /Ü berschriften/Ü berschriften 3/A-E/Batterie-Hauptsc halter @ 45\mod_1276841104984_78.doc @ 409039Pos : 24.11 /BA/Wartung/Selbstfahr er/War tung - El ektri k/Batterie-H aupts chalter BM 400 Bil d @ 49\mod_1287041480828_78.doc @ 464450Pos : 24.12 /BA/Wartung/Selbstfahr er/War tung - El ektri k/Batterie-H aupts chalter BM 400 Text @ 49\mod_1287041651562_78.doc @ 464476Pos : 24.13 /BA/Wartung/Selbstfahr er/War tung - El ektri k/Batterie-H aupts chalter Hinweis @ 49\mod_1287041037031_78.doc @ 464424Pos : 24.14 /BA/-----Seitenumbruc h------ @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.doc @ 4165Maintenance – electrical system17.2.1 Main battery switchFig. 360The main battery switch is used to turn on or interrupt the machine ’s power supplyThe main battery switch is on the left rear side as seen in direction of travelI – Electrical power circuit turned onII – Electrical power circuit interruptedNote - Ignition to level 1 or 2Effect: Battery discharges• The battery is discharging even when the main battery switch interrupts the electricalpower circuit. (Position II)).• Before extended times with no usage, disconnect the electrical power circuit with themain battery switch (position II).• Disconnect cables from battery terminal for winter storage (you may wish to charge ordischarge the battery).419
Pos : 24.15 /Ü berschriften/Ü berschriften 3/A-E/Batterie aufladen @ 0\mod_1197368701995_78.doc @ 18795Pos : 24.16 /BA/Sic herheit/Batterie/Batteriegas e, Batteriesäure @ 0\mod_1197369332058_78.doc @ 18853Pos : 24.17 /BA/Wartung/Selbstfahr er/War tung - El ektri k/Sc hnellladung @ 0\mod_1197369592011_78.doc @ 18915Pos : 24.18 /BA/Wartung/Selbstfahr er/War tung - El ektri k/Batterie r einigen @ 0\mod_11973698<strong>02</strong>542_78.doc @ 18934Pos : 24.19 /BA/-----Seitenumbruc h------ @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.doc @ 4165Maintenance – electrical system17.2.2 Charging BatteriesDanger! - Battery gases, battery acidEffect: Danger to life, injuries or damage to the machine.• Remove the plastic covers of the battery in order to prevent highly explosive gas fromgathering.• Battery acid inside the batteries causes burns on contact with skin and eyes.• Avoid contact with skin, eyes, or clothing.• Wear suitable protective clothing, since battery acid will corrode its way through normalclothing, safety boots and safety goggles.• Rinse away splashed acid immediately with clear water and if appropriate seek medicalattention.17.2.3 Quick chargeFig. 361:When quick charging the battery, disconnect the battery negative cable and open all batterycells to avoid damage to the electrical system.Removing the battery:Always disconnect the earth cable first and then the positive cable before removing the battery.17.2.4 Cleaning the battery• Wipe the battery clean as and when necessary.• Use a brush to remove any oxidation on the pole terminals.• Use pole grease on the battery poles and the pole terminals.• Keep the venting holes of the plugs open.420
Pos : 24.20 /Ü berschriften/Ü berschriften 3/A-E/Batterie prüfen @ 0\mod_1197368742605_78.doc @ 18814Pos : 24.21 /BA/Sic herheit/Batterie/Batteries äur en @ 0\mod_1197368825761_78.doc @ 18833Pos : 24.22 /BA/Wartung/Selbstfahr er/War tung - El ektri k/Säur estand prüfen @ 0\mod_1197369919339_78.doc @ 18953Pos : 24.23 /BA/-----Seitenumbruc h------ @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.doc @ 4165Maintenance – electrical system17.2.5 Check batteryDanger! - Battery acidsEffect: Chemical burns• Battery acid inside the batteries causes burns on contact with skin and eyes.• Avoid contact with skin, eyes, or clothing.• Wear suitable protective clothing, since battery acid will corrode its way through normalclothing, safety boots and safety goggles.• Rinse away splashed acid immediately with clear water and if appropriate seek medicalattention.• If you top up the distilled water during the winter, allow the engine to run for about 30minutes to ensure a better mixture of water and acid.• Use distilled water only.17.2.6 Check acid levelFig. 362:Check the acid level every 250 operating hours.• The acid level should be at the mark above the upper plate edge.NoteUse only properly filled and maintained batteries.Coat the battery terminals with acid protection grease (terminal grease).421
Pos : 24.24 /BA/Wartung/Selbstfahr er/War tung - El ektri k/M ess en der Säur edic hte @ 0\mod_119737<strong>02</strong>72823_78.doc @ 18972Pos : 24.25 /BA/-----Seitenumbruc h------ @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.doc @ 4165Maintenance – electrical system17.2.7 Measuring Acid DensityFig. 363:• Use an acid tester to measure the acid density of each battery cell.A fully charged battery should have an acid density of 1.28 in normal climatic conditions.• Recharge the battery, if the density drops below 1.20.422
Pos : 24.26 /BA/Wartung/Selbstfahr er/War tung - El ektri k/Batterien einbauen und polrichtig ansc hließ en @ 0\mod_1197370412776_78.doc @ 19054Pos : 24.27 /BA/-----Seitenumbruc h------ @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.doc @ 4165Maintenance – electrical system17.3 Fitting the batteries and connecting the poles correctlyCaution! - Installation of BatteriesEffect: Damages to the machine• Always connect batteries with the correct polarity3142Fig. 364:To do this:• Connect the positive cable from the starter (3) to the positive pole of the battery (1).• Connect the positive cable of the battery (1) with the positive pole (30a) of the batterychangeover relay (4).• Connect the negative cable of the battery (1) with the negative pole (31a) of the batterychangeover relay (4).• Connect the negative cable from the starter (3) to the negative pole of the battery (2).• Connect the negative cable of the battery (2) with the negative pole (31) of the batterychangeover relay (4).• Connect the positive cable of the battery (2) with the positive pole (30) of the batterychangeover relay (4).423
Pos : 24.28 /Ü berschriften/Ü berschriften 2/A-E/Dr ehstromgenerator @ 0\mod_1197370865698_78.doc @ 19073Pos : 24.29 /BA/Sic herheit/Gefahrenhinweise/Ar beiten an der elektrischen Anlag e @ 0\mod_1197370959323_78.doc @ 19111Pos : 24.30 /BA/Wartung/Selbstfahr er/War tung - El ektri k/Dr ehstromg enerator Big M 400 Bild @ 41\mod_1272363175811_78.doc @ 376450Pos : 24.31 /BA/Wartung/Selbstfahr er/War tung - El ektri k/Dr ehstromg enerator T ext @ 0\mod_1197371243636_78.doc @ 19130Pos : 24.32 /BA/-----Seitenumbruc h------ @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.doc @ 4165Maintenance – electrical system17.4 Three-phase generatorCaution! - Working on the electrical systemEffect: Damages to the machine• When working on the electrical system, remove the positive lines on the batteries.• Interrupt the electrical power circuit with the main battery switch.• The cable contacts of the positive cable are to be protected against inadvertent contactwith the battery contacts.Fig.BM 400 0144NoteFor further information please refer to the manufacturer’s operating instructions included withdelivery (chapter "Fitting and Dismantling V-Ribs")Have the three-phase generator checked once a year at a specialist workshop.424
Pos : 24.33 /Ü berschriften/Ü berschriften 2/P-T/Starter @ 0\mod_1197370892620_78.doc @ 19092Pos : 24.34 /BA/Sic herheit/Gefahrenhinweise/Ar beiten an der elektrischen Anlag e @ 0\mod_1197370959323_78.doc @ 19111Pos : 24.35 /BA/Wartung/Selbstfahr er/War tung - El ektri k/Starter Bil d Big M 400 @ 41\mod_1272371846936_78.doc @ 376839Pos : 24.36 /BA/Wartung/Selbstfahr er/War tung - El ektri k/Starter Text @ 0\mod_1197371466761_78.doc @ 19149Pos : 24.37 /BA/-----Seitenumbruc h------ @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.doc @ 4165Maintenance – electrical system17.5 StarterCaution! - Working on the electrical systemEffect: Damages to the machine• When working on the electrical system, remove the positive lines on the batteries.• Interrupt the electrical power circuit with the main battery switch.• The cable contacts of the positive cable are to be protected against inadvertent contactwith the battery contacts.Fig. 365BM 400 <strong>02</strong>07NoteIf the electrical power circuit is interrupted by the main battery switch, 12 V is still present on thestarter.If the starter fails or does not work properly, investigate the cause of the problem. If thesuggestions listed below do not remove the damage, please seek the advice of your KRONEdealer. Have the starter checked thoroughly once a year at a specialist workshop.Loose, soiled or corroded cable connections:• Clean the cable connections on the starter and tighten the connections.• Clean the earth cable on the engine and tighten the connection to the engine.Battery performance too low:• Check the electrolyte as well as acid density, and recharge the battery, if and whennecessary.Discharged battery:• Charge the battery.Use of a wrong engine oil viscosity:• Always use the right engine oil according to the specification.Starter safety relay is defective:• Replace the relay.425
Pos : 24.38 /BA/Wartung/Selbstfahr er/War tung - El ektri k/Steuer einhei ten und Sic her ungen Big M 400 @ 0\mod_11973742<strong>02</strong>386_78.doc @ 19231Pos : 24.39 /BA/-----Seitenumbruc h------ @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.doc @ 4165Maintenance – electrical system17.6 Control units and fusesA412BM 400 <strong>02</strong>0853Fig. 366NoteHave work on the electronic system carried out by KRONE after-sales service or KRONEdealer only!The control units listed below are located behind the cover (1) of the operating panel in thedriver’s cab.1. CU control unit console2. ADM engine control3. SmartDrive (travelling gear)4. KMC1 Krone machine controller5. DIOM output moduleDesignations of fuses, relays and LEDs for the control units listed above are located on theconsole circuit board. The console circuit board is located behind the cover (A) of the operatingpanel in the driver’s cab. For an overview of the console circuit board, see the chapter entitled"Console Circuit Board"426
Pos : 24.40 /BA/Wartung/Selbstfahr er/War tung - El ektri k/MR 2-Motors teuer ung @ 0\mod_1197374603480_78.doc @ 19250Pos : 24.41 /BA/Wartung/Selbstfahr er/War tung - El ektri k/Kabi nen-Rel ais plati ne BM 400 @ 0\mod_1197374727073_78.doc @ 19290Pos : 24.42 /BA/-----Seitenumbruc h------ @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.doc @ 4165Maintenance – electrical system17.6.1 MR2 engine control1Fig. 367:BM 400 <strong>02</strong>09The MR2 engine control (1) is located at the front right on the engine in direction of travel. MR2engine control (1). For more information, please refer to the operating instructions of the enginemanufacturer. Designations of fuses, relays and LEDs for the MR2 engine control are locatedon the console circuit board.The console circuit board is located behind the cover (1) of the operating panel in the driver’scab. For an overview of the console circuit board, see the chapter entitled "Console CircuitBoard"17.6.2 Cab relay PCB1BX5<strong>000</strong>88Fig. 368:Designations of fuses, relays and LEDs for the cab are located on the cab relay circuit board.The cab relay circuit board is located behind the cover (1) on the rear wall of the cab. For anoverview of the console circuit board, see the chapter entitled "Cab Circuit Board"427
Pos : 24.43 /BA/Wartung/Selbstfahr er/War tung - El ektri k/Sic her ung en/Pl atine Kons ole BM 400 @ 0\mod_1197376346526_78.doc @ 19395Pos : 24.44 /BA/-----Seitenumbruc h------ @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.doc @ 4165Maintenance – electrical system17.6.3 Console Circuit BoardFig. 369428
Pos : 24.45 /BA/Wartung/Selbstfahr er/War tung - El ektri k/Sic her ung en/Pl atine Kabi ne BM 400 @ 0\mod_1197376540870_78.doc @ 19414Pos : 24.46 /BA/-----Seitenumbruc h------ @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.doc @ 4165Maintenance – electrical system17.6.4 Cab Circuit BoardAllroundlightsF120AReserveSeatcompressorSidewindscreenwiperFront windscreenwiperWashingwaterpumpTraveldirectionindicatorHorn,headlampflasherMirroradjustmentF2F3F4F5F6F7F87.5A15A15A15A7.5A5A5AF17 15A F20 7.5AReserve DippedbeamrightF21 7.5ADippedbeamleftF22 7.5AFull beamleftF23 7.5AFull beamrightLD20Dipped/highbeamSwitchingup / downLD38HeadlampflasherF930ALD39Full beamLD40DippedbeamCoolerF10Controlunit -Klimatronik15AF11Reserve F12HazardwarninglightsF13F14F15F165A5A5AAir conditionercompressorRadio/CB/GPS/GSMIgnitionstage115A7.5ARadio/CB/GPS/GSMContinuousvoltage15AF<strong>US</strong>ETESTLD18LD34Ignitionstage2F24LD35Radio,air conditioningS1S2S3S41111S5 1S6 1ONONONONONONF2630AWorkingfloodlightscab roofmiddleLD36 F25 30AWindscreenwiper WorkingfloodlightsHorncab roofleft/rightoutsideLD37Side windowwasherWorkingfloodlightsrearWorkingfloodlightsreardelaylightsWorkingfloodlightsReserveWorkingfloodlightsfor delaylightsplatformWorkingfloodlightsfor lampcarrierSide delaylightsWorkingfloodlightsfor platform,Side lampcarrierBiG M 400 Cab Circuit Board20 080 643 030AWorkingfloodlightsrearF27 30AWorkingfloodlightsplatform,lamp carriersideF28 15AWorkingfloodlightsfront lampcarrierF29 10AReversingsignalReversinglightsF30 10ABrakelightF31F32 7.5ASidelight/perimeterlight rightF19 5AInterior F33 10Alighting, LocatorlightingspotlightF347.5ADelaylights viaignitionstage 2S7 1 ONS8 1 ONDelaylightsExternalcontrol7.5ASide light/perimeterlightleftControlvoltagedippedbeam,full beamLD24AWorkingfloodlightscab roofmiddleLD24BWorkingfloodlightsCab roofMiddleLD25AWorkingfloodlightscab roofleftLD25BWorkingfloodlightscab roofrightLD26AWorkingfloodlightsreserveLD26BWorkingfloodlightsrearLD27AWorkingfloodlightsplatformLD27BWorkingfloodlightsside lampcarrierLD28Workingfloodlightsfront lampcarrierLD29ReversingsignalReversinglightsLD30BrakelightLD31LightingequipmentleftLD32LightingequipmentrightLD33LocatorlightingLD41SeatswitchF35Controlvoltagefor locatorlighting,side light/perimeterlightLD42Door switchLD43DelaylightsControlsignalFig. 370429
Pos : 24.47 /BA/Wartung/Selbstfahr er/War tung - El ektri k/Sic her ung en/Pl atine Krone-Masc hinen-Contoller (KMC 1) BM 400 @ 14\mod_1228745762224_78.doc @ 170867Pos : 25 /BA/-----Sei tenumbruch------ @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.doc @ 4165Maintenance – electrical system17.6.5 Krone Machine Controller circuit board (KMC1)Fig. 371430
Pos : 26.1 /Übersc hriften/Übersc hriften 1/U-Z/Wartung - Zentr alschmi erung @ 0\mod_1197378235308_78.doc @ 19471Pos : 26.2 /BA/Wartung/Sel bstfahrer/Wartung - Z entralsc hmi erung/Vogel/Schmi erstoffbefüllung @ 0\mod_1197381873901_78.doc @ 19851Pos : 26.3 /BA/-----Seitenumbruch------ @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.doc @ 4165Maintenance – Central Lubrication18 Maintenance – Central Lubrication18.1 Lubricant fill21Fig. 372:Hydraulic-type grease nippleBX11<strong>000</strong>7The lubricant is filled through the hydraulic-type lubricating nipple DIN 71412-AM10x1 by meansof a commercially available grease gun.1. Hydraulic-type grease nipple2. Mounting connectionThe hydraulic-type lubricating nipple can be screwed to position 2. As an alternative, connection2 can be used to mount potential lubricant return systems.18.2 Fill coupling3412BX11<strong>000</strong>8Fig. 373:For spare parts, please refer to Vogel brochure 1-9430, page 51.• Remove the lubrication nipple (3) and replace by filler neck 995-<strong>000</strong>-705 (4).• The coupling box 995-001-500 (2) must be fitted to the filling pump (1).431
Pos : 26.4 /BA/Wartung/Sel bstfahrer/Wartung - Z entralsc hmi erung/Vogel/Befüllz yli nder @ 0\mod_1197382107730_78.doc @ 19870Pos : 26.5 /BA/-----Seitenumbruch------ @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.doc @ 4165Maintenance – Central LubricationFilling cylinderM20x1,5321Fig. 374:BX11<strong>000</strong>9• Remove the M20x1.5 closure screw (3) and replace by filler socket 940 392 0 (2).• For filling remove the protective cap on the socket (2) and the filling cylinder 940 393 0(1).Hinged lidKFG3-5KFGS3-5KFG5-5KFGS5-5BX110010Fig. 375:For the KFG3-5, KFG5, KFG3-5 and KFGS5-5 series, a lubricant filling method has beenprovided through a special hinged lid as an optional feature.NoteAdd only clean lubricant using a suitable tool! Dirty lubricants result in serious system faults.432
Pos : 26.6 /BA/Wartung/Sel bstfahrer/Wartung - Z entralsc hmi erung/Vogel/Schmi erstoff @ 0\mod_11973823<strong>02</strong>761_78.doc @ 19909Pos : 26.7 /BA/Wartung/Sel bstfahrer/Wartung - Z entralsc hmi erung/Vogel/Ver wenden von falsc hen Sc hmiers toffen @ 11\mod_1222685784<strong>02</strong>3_78.doc @ 142396Pos : 26.8 /BA/-----Seitenumbruch------ @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.doc @ 4165Maintenance – Central Lubrication18.3 LubricantTo ensure continuous problem-free operation of the central lubrication system, we recommendusing the following greases that we have tested. (Greases with sodium soap must not be usedin either the on-road or off-road area because they are soluble in water.)NoteTo ensure the system works properly, be careful no impurities enter the system when refillinglubricant. Dirt will cause malfunctions in the central lubrication system and will damage ordestroy parts an friction points.Grease can be changed from conventional grease to bio-degradable greases (and vice-versa)for the products listed here without resulting disadvantage.Standard commercial greases or greases recommended by the manufacturer of the vehicle orgrease should be used as lubricants . Greases should still exhibit adequate suction and flowingbehaviour at –25 °C (max. flow pressure 700 mb).They must not have a tendency to bleed out, since this can result in blockages during extendedoperation.MoS2 greases (up to 5 % molybdenum disulphide) can be distributed and pumped with VOGELprogressive pumps.Warning - Use of incorrect lubricantsEffect: Bearing damage to the machineUse only the lubricants listed here. The central lubrication must never under any circumstancesbe filled with fluid grease.433
Pos : 26.9 /BA/Wartung/Sel bstfahrer/Wartung - Z entralsc hmi erung/Vogel/F ettsorten @ 0\mod_1197382597474_78.doc @ 19894Pos : 26.10 /BA/-----Seitenumbruc h------ @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.doc @ 4165Maintenance – Central Lubrication18.3.1 Grease types, NLGIClass 2Manufacturer Type designationWith soapMinimumpumpingtemperature [°C]AGIP Autol Top 2<strong>000</strong> Spec. Ca –10ARAL Long-term grease H Li –25BECHEM High–Lub L4742 Li –20BP Energrease LS EP 9346 Li –25Energrease LS-EP2 Li –20CASTROL Spheerol EP L2 Li –20ESSO Exxon multi-purpose grease Li –20ELF ELF Multi 2 Li –20FINA EP multi-purpose grease Li –20FUCHS LZR 2 Li –25KROON OIL Lithep Grease Li –10MOBIL Mobilux EP 2 Li –15Mobilgrease MB 2 Li –20MOGUL LV 1 EP Li –25ÖMV ÖMV Signum M283 Li/Ca –25OPTIMOL Olit EP 2 Li –25SHELL Retinax EP L2 Li –20TEXACO Multifak EP2 Li –15TOTAL Multis EP2 Li –20Zeller & Gmelin Divinol multi-purpose grease 2 Li –20Lubrication greases with fast bio-degradable timesARAL BAB EP 2 Li/Ca –20AVIA Syntogrease Li –25BECHEM UWS VE 42 Li/Ca –25DEA Dolon E EP2 Li/Ca –20FINA Biolical EP S2 Li/Ca –25FUCHS Plantogel 0120S Li –25LUBRITECH Stabyl Eco EP2 Li/Ca –20ÖMV ÖMV ecodur EP2 Ca –25TEXACO Starfak 2 Ca –20Zeller & Gmelin Divinol E2 Li –25434
Pos : 26.11 /BA/Wartung/Selbstfahr er/War tung - Z entr alsc hmier ung/Vog el/Fülls tands kontr olle @ 0\mod_1197383251089_78.doc @ 19928Pos : 26.12 /BA/-----Seitenumbruc h------ @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.doc @ 4165Maintenance – Central Lubrication18.4 Checking the fill level1minBX101960Fig. 376:VisualThe transparent lubricant tank permits a visual inspection of the fill. For safety reason, thisinspection should take place in regular intervals.NoteIf the tank level has dropped to below the "min." mark, the entire system must be deaerated.Switching conditions for central lubrication• Turn on the ignition (ignition key position II)• Move release switch for road/field to position II (field mode).To reprogram the central lubrication system (lubrication interval times) and start centrallubrication manually, the following conditions must be met:• Turn on the ignition (ignition key position II)• Move release switch for road/field to position II (field mode).Deaerating the system• Dismount the main pipes on the unit.• Pump until bubble-free lubricant penetrates from the screw top.• Mount the main pipes again.• Dismount the main pipe on the main distributor. Pump until there is no more air in thepipe. Mount the main pipe again.• Dismount the side pipe on the main distributor.• Pump until bubble-free lubricant penetrates from all connections of the main distributor.Mount the side pipes again.• Subsequently deaerate the side lines, side distributors, lubricating pipes and lubricationpoints and check for correct function.435
Pos : 26.13 /BA/Wartung/Selbstfahr er/War tung - Z entr alsc hmier ung/Vog el/Zei ten des Schmi erinter valls änder n @ 0\mod_1197379303520_78.doc @ 19625Pos : 26.14 /BA/-----Seitenumbruc h------ @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.doc @ 4165Maintenance – Central Lubrication18.5 Changing the times of the lubricating intervalCarry out step 1 to 2.Default setting upon delivery:Pause time: 30 minLubrication period: 14 minNote on step 2:If the works code <strong>000</strong> has been changed already, use thekeys to select thechanged code, and use thekey to acknowledge.Step Key Display1Press longer than 2secondsDisplay flashes <strong>000</strong>(Code <strong>000</strong> is factory setting)23Press the LED briefly(confirm code)Press brieflyAutomatic display of firstparameter "Pause in timer mode""Pause" LED flashesPause time 1 h(factory setting)4 Set new valueExample: 6.8 h = 6 h 48 min56Press briefly(Confirm new value)Press brieflyDisplay of next parameter"Pump running time in timer mode""Contact" LED flashesPump running time 4 min(factory setting)7 Set new valueExample: 3 min89Press brieflyLonger than 2seconds keysConfirm new valueChanges are written to memoryand the display disappears.436
Pos : 26.15 /BA/Wartung/Selbstfahr er/War tung - Z entr alsc hmier ung/Vog el/Fehl ersuc he und Bes eitigung @ 0\mod_1197384877011_78.doc @ 19947Pos : 27 /BA/-----Sei tenumbruch------ @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.doc @ 4165Maintenance – Central Lubrication18.6 TroubleshootingJam in the system or at a connected lubrication point.• Unscrew the outlet screw connections from the main distributor to the subdistributor oneafter the other. If lubricant suddenly exits under pressure when one of the outlet screwconnections is loosened, the connected subdistributor is blocked. If lubricant does not exitfrom any of the outlet screw connections, the main distributor is blocked. Clean the maindistributor or replace it.• Reinstall the outlet screw connections.• Loosen the outlet screw connections on the blocked subdistributor. If lubricant suddenlyexits under pressure when unscrewing one of the outlet screw connections, theconnected lubrication point is blocked. If lubricant does not exit from any of the outletscrew connections, the subdistributor is blocked. Clean the blocked subdistributor andreplace it if required.• Remove the blockage at the lubrication point.NoteFor more information on the maintenance of the central lubricating system, please refer to theoperating instructions on the central lubricating system (Vogel).437
Pos : 28.1 /Übersc hriften/Übersc hriften 1/A-E/Ei nlager ung @ 0\mod_1197385459120_78.doc @ 19966Pos : 28.2 /Übersc hriften/Übersc hriften 2/A-E/Am Ende der Er ntesais on @ 0\mod_1197385501276_78.doc @ 19985Pos : 28.3 /BA/Einl agerung/Sel bstfahrer/Einl agerung Big M 400 @ 0\mod_1197385531370_78.doc @ 2<strong>000</strong>4Pos : 28.4 /Übersc hriften/Übersc hriften 2/K-O /Motor ber eich @ 0\mod_1197385875776_78.doc @ 20043Pos : 28.5 /BA/Einl agerung/Sel bstfahrer/Hi nweis auf Motor hersteller @ 0\mod_1197385918276_78.doc @ 20062Pos : 28.6 /BA/-----Seitenumbruch------ @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.doc @ 4165Placing in Storage19 Placing in Storage19.1 At the End of the Harvest SeasonPlacing the machine in storage at the end of the harvest season is the best possible way topreserve the machine.• Park the machine in a dry place protected from the elements where no commercialfertilisers are stored.• Support the machine on blocks so that the entire weight is not resting on the wheels.• Clean the machine thoroughly through the maintenance openings inside and out. Chaffand dirt attract moisture, which causes steel parts to begin rusting.NoteIf a high pressure washing device is used for cleaning, do not point the water jet at the bearingor electrical system/electronic components.• Lubricate the machine according to the lubrication chart. Grease the threadings of settingscrews and similar items; relieve springs.• Transport interlock ratchet mechanism for side mowers: grease the bolt.• Lubricate the plunger rods of all hydraulic cylinders liberally and insert as far as possible.• Moisten with oil all lever joints, cutter bars, and bearing points that cannot be lubricated.Write down all repair jobs that must be performed by the next harvest and arrange for them tobe done with sufficient lead time. Your KRONE dealer is better able to perform maintenanceservice and any required repairs outside of harvest season.19.2 Engine areaNoteFor further information, please refer to the engine manufacturer’s operating instructionsincluded with delivery (chapter on cleaning and preservation)438
Pos : 28.7 /Übersc hriften/Übersc hriften 2/U-Z/Vor Beginn der neuen Sais on @ 0\mod_1197386<strong>02</strong>4448_78.doc @ 20081Pos : 28.8 /BA/Einl agerung/Sel bstfahrer/T ext vor Beginn der Sai son Big M 400 @ 0\mod_1197386062214_78.doc @ 20100Pos : 28.9 /BA/-----Seitenumbruch------ @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.doc @ 4165Placing in Storage19.3 Before the Start of the New SeasonBefore the start of the new harvest season, conduct a thorough inspection of the machine.Keeping the machine in flawless condition will rule out the possibility of costly malfunctionsduring harvest time.If this was not already done after the last harvest, the machine must be thoroughly cleanedinside and out.• Refit any belts and V-belts that were removed and check belt tensions.• Remove the covers from the engine openings.• Lubricate the machine completely according to the lubrication chart.• Check to make certain all bolts are tightened and all cotter pins are in place.• Check all seals and the filling quantity of the cooling system. Antifreeze and anticorrosionagent must remain in the cooling system even during summer months, since they protectthe system against corrosion.• Check the batteries. Check the charge state and height of the battery acid. If necessary,charge the batteries.• Check the tyre pressures.• Retighten the four attachment bolts on the frame arms to a tightening torque of 640 Nm(annually).• After these tasks are complete, let the machine run about one hour at half speed. Thencheck all bearings for overheating.439
Pos : 28.10 /BA/Ei nlag erung/Selbstfahr er/R eibkuppl ung BYPY entl üften @ 0\mod_1197387210183_78.doc @ 2<strong>02</strong>28Pos : 29 /BA/-----Sei tenumbruch------ @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.doc @ 4165Placing in Storage19.4 Friction clutch –ByPyFig. 377:Completely loosen the four hexagonal socket head screws (2). These screws are not entirelythreaded. Therefore they cannot be screwed out of the coupling.The coupling is now ready for use.19.4.1 Venting the Friction Clutch on the PTO ShaftFig. 378Tighten the hexagonal socket head screws (2) on the friction clutch at the beginning of thestorage period. This will relieve the disc springs' pressure on the friction lining and prevent thetendency to adhere. The flange coupling is vented.To place the machine in service again, follow the instructions in chapter "Friction Clutch".440
Pos : 30 /Ü bersc hriften/Übersc hriften 1/A-E/Anhang @ 1\mod_12<strong>02</strong>278612285_78.doc @ 58360Pos : 31 /Ü bersc hriften/Übersc hriften 2/F-J/F ehl ermel dungen @ 13\mod_1226558727524_78.doc @ 166264===== Ende der Stüc kliste =====Appendix20 Appendix20.1 Error Messages441
Error No. Description Meaning Possible Reason Recommend Check Remedial measureReplace the dynamoDynamo defective Check the dynamo Replace the dynamoInternal SmartDrive error See Remedy Replace SmartDriveLED -22-LD60 not lit Check fuse -22-F60Check fuse -22-F92Wiring defective Check the cables. Replace wiringBattery dead Measure battery voltage; checkbattery acidDynamo defective Check the excitation voltage,check wiringCharge indicator lamp defective Check the charge indicator lamp,check the wiringReplace battery; charge batteryReplace the dynamoReplace charge indicator lamp;replace wiringStatus: 11.10.2010 Turn Page please!Page No. 1/79Error descriptions BiG M 4001 1 SmartDrive overvoltage! Error: SmartDrive power supplyvoltage too highThe controller of the dynamo isdefectiveWhile engine is running, measureat batteries. Voltage must not beabove 14.8VBattery change-over relaydefectiveCheck relay according to circuitdiagram for proper functionReplace battery change-overrelay2 2 SmartDrive undervoltage! Error: SmartDrive power supplyvoltage too lowSmartDrive power supply voltagetoo lowCentral electrical power supplyvoltage defectiveLED -22-LD31 not lit Check fuse -22-F77LED -22-LD63 not lit Check fuse -22-F63
Error No. Description Meaning Possible Reason Recommend Check Remedial measureInternal SmartDrive error See Remedy Replace SmartDriveLED -22-LD60 not lit Check fuse -22-F60Check fuse -22-F92Wiring defective Check the cables. Replace wiringBattery dead Charge battery; check batteryacidCharge battery; replace batteryShort circuit in a 12V sensor Check 12 V sensors Replace 12 V sensorsInternal SmartDrive error See Remedy Replace SmartDriveLED -22-LD60 not lit Check fuse -22-F60Status: 11.10.2010 Turn Page please!Page No. 2/79Error descriptions BiG M 4003 3 SmartDrive voltage 12 VsensorsError: 12 V sensor supply voltagetoo low12-sensors power supply too low LED -22-LD31 not lit Check fuse -22-F77Central electrical power supplyvoltage defectiveLED -22-LD63 not lit Check fuse -22-F63Short circuit in the wiring to a 12VsensorCheck wiring to the 12 V sensors Replace wiring to the 12 Vsensors4 4 SmartDrive voltage 5V sensors Error: 5 V sensor supply voltagetoo low5-sensors power supply too low LED -22-LD31 not lit Check fuse -22-F77Central electrical power supplyvoltage defectiveLED -22-LD63 not lit Check fuse -22-F63
Error No. Description Meaning Possible Reason Recommend Check Remedial measureCheck fuse -22-F92Wiring defective Check the cables. Replace wiringBattery dead Check battery voltage; checkbattery acidCharge battery; replace batteryShort circuit in a 5V sensor Check 5V sensors Replace 5V sensorsInternal SmartDrive error See Remedy Replace Smart DriveIncorrect values in EEPROM Check parameters Load parameter file in SmartDriveEEPROM defective See Remedy Replace SmartDriveInternal SmartDrive error See Remedy Replace SmartDriveIncorrect values in EEPROM Check parameters Load parameter file in SmartDriveEEPROM defective See Remedy Replace SmartDriveStatus: 11.10.2010 Turn Page please!Page No. 3/79Error descriptions BiG M 400Short circuit in the wiring to a 5VsensorCheck wiring to the 5V sensors Replace wiring to the 5 V sensors16 16 SmartDrive CS parameters Error: EEPROM checksum No update of new parametersperformedCheck software version Load parameter file in SmartDrive17 17 SmartDrive parametermin/maxError: Min/Max parameters Incorrect parameter filedownloadedCheck parameter file Load parameter file in SmartDrive
Error No. Description Meaning Possible Reason Recommend Check Remedial measureInternal SmartDrive error See Remedy Replace SmartDrive18 18 SmartDrive EEPROM Error: EEPROM EEPROM defective See Remedy Replace SmartDriveInternal SmartDrive error See Remedy Replace SmartDrive20 20 SmartDrive EV DAC Error: EV DAC Internal SmartDrive error See Remedy Replace SmartDrive21 21 SmartDrive I2C error Error: I2C Bus Internal SmartDrive error See Remedy Replace SmartDriveValve plug defective Check valve plug Replace valve plugCoil for solenoid valves defective Check coil Replace coilSolenoid valve defective Check solenoid valve Replace the solenoid valveThe charge pressure is too low Check charge pressure Replace supply pressure valve(30+/-3 bar)The drive pump 1 is defective Check drive pump 1 for properfunctionReplace the drive pump 1Internal SmartDrive error See Remedy Replace SmartDrivePage No. 4/79Error descriptions BiG M 40019 19 SmartDrive digitalpotentiometerError: Digital Pot Internal SmartDrive error See Remedy Replace SmartDrive30 30 SmartDrive pump 1 controlloopError: Control loop drive pump 1front axleShort circuit/broken cable inwiring for pump valvesCheck wiring to pump valves Replace wiring to pump valvesStatus: 11.10.2010
Error No. Description Meaning Possible Reason Recommend Check Remedial measureValve plug defective Check valve plug Replace valve plugCoil for solenoid valves defective Check coil Replace coilSolenoid valve defective Check solenoid valve Replace the solenoid valveThe charge pressure is too low Check charge pressure Replace supply pressure valve(30+/-3 bar)The drive pump 2 is defective Check drive pump 2 for properfunctionReplace the drive pump 2Internal SmartDrive error See Remedy Replace SmartDrivePage No. 5/79Error descriptions BiG M 40031 31 SmartDrive pump 2 controlloopError: Control loop drive pump 2rear axleShort circuit/broken cable inwiring for pump valvesCheck wiring to pump valves Replace wiring to pump valves32 32 SmartDrive feedback sensor 1 Error: Pivoting angle pump 1 frontaxle - signal out of range (B38)Determination via terminal Run travelling gear diagnosticsCalibration of the pivoting anglesensor not correct (B38)Measure the voltage in neutralpositionSet sensor pivoting angle (B38);there must be a signal of approx.2.5 volts present in neutralpositionShort circuit/broken cable inwiring for pivoting angle sensors(B38)Sensor plug for pivoting angledefectivePivoting angle sensor defective(B38)Check wiring to sensors forpivoting angle (B38)Replace wiring to sensors forpivoting angle (B38)Check sensor plug Replace sensor plugCheck voltage on sensor pivotingangle (B38)Replace and adjust sensorpivoting angle (B38). There mustbe a signal of approx. 2.5 voltspresent in neutral positionStatus: 11.10.2010
Error No. Description Meaning Possible Reason Recommend Check Remedial measureRemove dirtStatus: 11.10.2010 Turn Page please!Page No. 6/79Error descriptions BiG M 40033 33 SmartDrive feedback sensor 2 Error: Pivoting angle pump 2 rearaxle - signal out of range (B39)Determination via terminal Run travelling gear diagnosticsCalibration of the pivoting anglesensor (B39) not correctMeasure the voltage in neutralpositionSet sensor pivoting angle (B39);there must be a signal of approx.2.5 volts present in neutralpositionShort circuit/broken cable inwiring for pivoting angle sensors(B39)Sensor plug for pivoting angle(B39) defectivePivoting angle sensor (B39)defectiveCheck wiring to sensors forpivoting angle (B39)Replace wiring to sensors forpivoting angle (B39)Check sensor plug Replace sensor plugMeasure voltage on sensor (B39) Replace and adjust sensorpivoting angle (B39). There mustbe a signal of approx. 2.5 voltspresent in neutral position34 34 SmartDrive feedback sensor 1too highError: Pivoting angle drive pump 1front axle - pivoting anglechanges too rapidly (B38)Determination via terminal Run travelling gear diagnosticsDirt in the hydraulics (actuatorvalves, for example)Check hydraulic components fordirtCalibration of the pivoting anglesensor (B38) not correctMeasure voltage on sensor (B38) Set sensor pivoting angle (B38);there must be a signal of approx.2.5 volts present in neutralpositionShort circuit/broken cable inwiring for pivoting angle sensors(B38)Sensor plug for pivoting angle(B38) defectiveCheck wiring to sensors forpivoting angle (B38)Replace wiring to sensors forpivoting angle (B38)Check sensor plug Replace sensor plug
Error No. Description Meaning Possible Reason Recommend Check Remedial measureBrake pedal switch not adjusted See Remedy Adjust brake pedal switch so thatthe switching of the brake pedalswitch is within a range of 70 - 90bar brake pressure; observeinstallation distance!Status: 11.10.2010 Turn Page please!Page No. 7/79Error descriptions BiG M 400Pivoting angle sensor (B38)defectiveMeasure voltage on sensor (B38) Replace and adjust sensorpivoting angle (B38). There mustbe a signal of approx. 2.5 voltspresent in neutral position35 35 SmartDrive feedback sensor 2too highError: Pivoting angle drive pump 2rear axle - pivoting angle changestoo rapidly (B39)Determination via terminal Run travelling gear diagnosticsDirt in the hydraulics (actuatorvalves, for example)Check hydraulic components fordirtRemove dirtCalibration of the pivoting anglesensor (B39) not correctMeasure voltage on sensor (B39) Set sensor pivoting angle (B39);there must be a signal of approx.2.5 volts present in neutralpositionShort circuit/broken cable inwiring for pivoting angle sensors(B39)Sensor plug for pivoting angle(B39) defectivePivoting angle sensor (B39)defectiveCheck wiring to sensors forpivoting angle (B39)Replace wiring to sensors forpivoting angle (B39)Check sensor plug Replace sensor plugMeasure voltage on sensor (B39) Replace and adjust sensorpivoting angle (B39). There mustbe a signal of approx. 2.5 voltspresent in neutral position36 36 SmartDrive brake pressuresensorError: Brake pressure sensor(B22/B40)Determination via terminal Run travelling gear diagnostics
Error No. Description Meaning Possible Reason Recommend Check Remedial measureReplace wiring to sensors forbrake pedal sensor (B22) andbrake pedal switchBrake pedal switch defective See Remedy Replace and adjust brake pedalswitch so that the switching of thebrake pedal switch is within arange of 70 - 90 bar brakepressure; observe installationdistance!Brake pressure defective Check brake pressureReplace brake pressure sensor(B22)Internal SmartDrive error See Remedy Replace SmartDriveInternal error - KMC1 See Remedy Replace KMC1Internal SmartDrive error See Remedy Replace SmartDriveInternal fault ADMStatus: 11.10.2010 Turn Page please!Page No. 8/79Error descriptions BiG M 400Short circuit/broken cable inwiring for brake pressuresensor/brake pedal switch (B22)Check wiring to sensors for brakepedal sensor (B22) and brakepedal switchSensor plug for brake pressuresensor, brake pedal switchdefectiveCheck sensor plug Replace sensor plugBrake pressure sensor (B22)defectiveCheck brake pressure sensor(B22)37 37 SmartDrive pump speed tooslowError: Pump speed too slow Engine speed too low Check engine speed Adjust engine speed
Error No. Description Meaning Possible Reason Recommend Check Remedial measureSee Remedy Replace the ADMRun travelling gear diagnosticsAccumulator defective See Remedy Replace accumulatorInternal SmartDrive error See Remedy Replace SmartDrive39 39 SmartDrive CAN error Error: CAN bus communication Determination via terminal Perform CAN diagnosticsStatus: 11.10.2010 Turn Page please!Page No. 9/79Error descriptions BiG M 40038 38 SmartDrive brake tankpressureError: Brake tank pressure toolow (B25)The brake tank pressure is toolowSee Remedy Start diesel engine so that theaccumulator is filledAccumulator charging valvedefectiveCheck accumulator chargingvalveReplace accumulator chargingvalveShort circuit/broken cable inwiring for brake tank pressuresensor (B25)Sensor plug for brake tankpressure (B25) defectiveSensor for brake tank pressure(B25) defectiveCheck wiring to brake tankpressure sensor (B25)Replace wiring to brake tankpressure sensor (B25)Check sensor plug Replace sensor plugCheck sensor for brake tankpressure (B25)Replace sensor for brake tankpressure (B25)SmartDrive power supplydefectiveCentral electrical power supplyvoltage defectiveLED -22-LD31 not lit Check fuse -22-F77LED -22-LD63 not lit Check fuse -22-F63
Error No. Description Meaning Possible Reason Recommend Check Remedial measureCheck fuse -22-F92Joystick power supply defective Check fuse +22-F65 Replace fuse +22-F65Internal joystick error See Remedy Replace joystickKMC1 power supply defective LED -22-LD61 not lit Check fuse -22-F61LED -22-LD60 not lit Check fuse -22-F60Check fuse -22-F92Internal error - KMC1 See Remedy Replace KMC1Internal SmartDrive error See Remedy Replace SmartDriveStatus: 11.10.2010 Turn Page please!Page No. 10/79Error descriptions BiG M 400Short circuit/broken cable in thewiring for the CAN1 busCheck wiring Replace wiringCAN1 terminating resistorsdefectiveCheck wiring and terminatingresistorsReplace wiring and terminatingresistors, if required40 40 SmartDrive high pressuresensorError: High-pressure sensor (B7) -signal out of rangeDetermination via terminal Run travelling gear diagnosticsShort circuit/broken cable inwiring for high-pressure sensor(B7)Sensor plug, high pressure -defectiveCheck wiring to high-pressuresensor (B7)Replace wiring to high-pressuresensor (B7)Check sensor plug Replace sensor plug
Error No. Description Meaning Possible Reason Recommend Check Remedial measureHigh pressure incorrect Check high pressure (420 bar)Internal SmartDrive error See Remedy Replace SmartDriveParking brake switch defective Measure switching characteristicof switchCheck fuse -22-F72.1Replace wiring to parking brakeswitchReplace parking brake switchReplace wiring bridge at parkingbrake pressure inputInternal SmartDrive error See Remedy Replace SmartDriveHydraulic leakage Check machine hydraulics forleakageRepair the leakageSupply pump defective Check charge pressure Replace feed pump (30+/-3 bar)Status: 11.10.2010 Turn Page please!Page No. 11/79Error descriptions BiG M 400High-pressure sensor (B7)defectiveCheck high-pressure sensor (B7) Replace high-pressure sensor(B7)42 42 SmartDrive parking brk. act. Error: Attempt to move againstthe parking brakeParking brake switch is actuated Check switch position of parkingbrake switchSwitch off the parking brakeswitchShort circuit in the wiring of theswitchCheck the wiring to the parkingbrake switchBroken cable in the wiring bridgeof the parking brake pressureinput at the SmartDriveCheck wiring bridge at the parkingbrake pressure input43 43 SmartDrive charge pressuretoo lowError: The charge pressure is toolowNo engine speed or speed tooslowSee Remedy Start engine or increase speed
Error No. Description Meaning Possible Reason Recommend Check Remedial measureSupply pressure valve defective Check charge pressure valve Replace the supply pressurevalveReplace wiring to chargepressure sensorInternal SmartDrive error See Remedy Replace SmartDriveRadiator dirty Check radiator for dirt Clean the radiatorDetermination via terminal Run travelling gear diagnosticsInternal SmartDrive error See Remedy Replace SmartDriveDetermination via terminal Perform operating paneldiagnosticsStatus: 11.10.2010 Turn Page please!Page No. 12/79Error descriptions BiG M 400Short circuit/broken cable in thewiring for the supply pressuresensorCheck wiring to supply pressuresensor44 44 SmartDrive oil temperature toohighError: Oil temperature too high Hydraulic oil too hot See Remedy Allow the machine to cool downShort circuit/broken cable inwiring for temperature sensorflush valve (B5)Check wiring for temperaturesensor flush valve (B5)Replace wiring for temperaturesensor flush valve (B5)Flush valve temperature sensor(B5) defectiveCheck flush valve temperaturesensor (B5)Replace flush valve temperaturesensor (B5)45 45 Release travelling gear switchnot actuatedError: Attempt to move withoutrelease travelling gearRelease travelling gear switch isnot actuatedSee Remedy Switch on the travelling gearswitch
Error No. Description Meaning Possible Reason Recommend Check Remedial measureReplace wiring to releasetravelling gear switchInternal SmartDrive error See Remedy Replace SmartDriveCoil (Y2) defective Check coil Replace coilInternal SmartDrive error See Remedy Replace SmartDriveCoil (Y1) defective Check coil Replace coilInternal SmartDrive error See Remedy Replace SmartDriveCoil (Y4) defective Check coil Replace coilInternal SmartDrive error See Remedy Replace SmartDriveStatus: 11.10.2010 Turn Page please!Page No. 13/79Error descriptions BiG M 400Short circuit/broken cable in thewiring of the switchCheck the wiring to the releasetravelling gear switchRelease travelling gear switchdefectiveMeasure switching characteristicof switchReplace release travelling gearswitch46 46 SmartDrive pump 1 coil 1 Error: Coil 1, pump 1 Short circuit/broken cable inwiring for coil (Y2)Check wiring to valve (Y2) Replace wiring to valve (Y2)47 47 SmartDrive pump 1 coil 2 Error: Coil 2, pump 1 Short circuit/broken cable inwiring for coil (Y1)Check wiring to valve (Y1) Replace wiring to valve (Y1)48 48 SmartDrive pump 2 coil 1 Error: Coil 1 pump 2 (Y4) Short circuit/broken cable inwiring for coil (Y4)Check wiring to valve (Y4) Replace wiring to valve (Y4)49 49 SmartDrive pump 2 coil 2 Error: Coil 2 pump 2 (Y3) Short circuit/broken cable inwiring for coil 2 (Y3)Check wiring to valve (Y3) Replace wiring to valve (Y3)
Error No. Description Meaning Possible Reason Recommend Check Remedial measureInternal SmartDrive error See Remedy Replace SmartDriveCoil (Y3) defective Check coil Replace coilJoystick power supply defective Check fuse -22-F57 Replace fuse -22-F57Check fuse -22-F65 Replace fuse -22-F65LED -22-LD63 not lit Check fuse -22-F63Check fuse -22-F92Driving lever defective Check functions of driving lever Replace driving leverInternal SmartDrive error See Remedy Replace SmartDriveValve plug defective Check valve plug Replace valve plugCoil for solenoid valves defective Check coil for solenoid valves Replace coilStatus: 11.10.2010 Turn Page please!Page No. 14/79Error descriptions BiG M 40050 50 SmartDrive joystick error Error: Driving lever - signalincorrect/defectiveDetermination via terminal Perform joystick diagnosticsCentral electrical power supplyvoltage defectiveLED -22-LD31 not lit Check fuse -22-F7760 60 SmartDrive current pump 1coil 1Error: Actuator valve 1 drivepump 1 - front axle forward (Y2)Short circuit/broken cable inwiring for actuator valve 1 pump 1(Y2)Check wiring to actuator valve 1pump 1 (Y2)Replace wiring to actuator valve 1pump 1 (Y2)
Error No. Description Meaning Possible Reason Recommend Check Remedial measureInternal SmartDrive error See Remedy Replace SmartDriveReplace wiring to actuator valve 2pump 1 (Y1)Valve plug defective Check valve plug Replace valve plugCoil for solenoid valves defective Check coil for solenoid valves Replace coilInternal SmartDrive error See Remedy Replace SmartDriveValve plug defective Check valve plug Replace valve plugInternal SmartDrive error See Remedy Replace SmartDriveReplace wiring to actuator valve 1pump 2 (Y4)Valve plug defective Check valve plug Replace valve plugReplace coil (Y4)Status: 11.10.2010 Turn Page please!Page No. 15/79Error descriptions BiG M 40061 61 SmartDrive current pump 1coil 2Error: Actuator valve 2 drivepump 1 - front axle backward (Y1)Short circuit/broken cable inwiring for actuator valve 2 pump 1(Y1)Check wiring to actuator valve 2pump 1 (Y1)62 62 SmartDrive wiring pump 1 coil3Error: Stop valve drive pump 1 -front axle (Y45)Short circuit/broken cable inwiring for stop valve pump 1(Y45)Check wiring to stop valve forpump 1 (Y45)Check/replace wiring to stopvalve for pump 1 (Y45)Coil for solenoid valve defective(Y45)Check coil for solenoid valve(Y45)Replace coil (Y45)63 63 SmartDrive current pump 2coil 1Error: Actuator valve 1 drivepump 2 - rear axle forward (Y4)Short circuit/broken cable in thewiring for actuator valve 1 pump 2Check wiring to actuator valve 1pump 2 (Y4)Coil for solenoid valves (Y4)defectiveCheck coil for solenoid valves(Y4)
Error No. Description Meaning Possible Reason Recommend Check Remedial measureInternal SmartDrive error See Remedy Replace SmartDriveReplace wiring to actuator valve 2pump 2 (Y3)Valve plug defective Check valve plug Replace valve plugInternal SmartDrive error See Remedy Replace SmartDriveValve plug defective Replace valve plugInternal SmartDrive error See Remedy Replace SmartDriveDetermination via terminal Run travelling gear diagnosticsBrake valve defective or jammed Check brake valve Replace brake valveStatus: 11.10.2010 Turn Page please!Page No. 16/79Error descriptions BiG M 40064 64 SmartDrive current pump 2coil 2Error: Actuator valve 2 drivepump 2 - rear axle backward (Y3)Short circuit/broken cable inwiring for actuator valve 2 pump 2(Y3)Check wiring to actuator valve 2pump 2 (Y3)Coil for solenoid valves (Y3)defectiveMeasure coil (Y3) Replace coil (Y3)65 65 SmartDrive wiring pump 2 coil3Error: Stop valve drive pump 2 -rear axle (Y46)Short circuit/broken cable inwiring for stop valve pump 2(Y46)Check wiring to stop valve forpump 2 (Y46)Replace wiring to stop valve forpump 2 (Y46)Coil for solenoid valve (Y46)defectiveCheck coil for solenoid valve(Y46)Replace coil (Y46)95 95 Error - Brake valve Error: Brake valve Brake was applied continuously(for example, braking pressuregreater than 10 bar and longerthan 3 min.)See Remedy Remove foot from the brake
Error No. Description Meaning Possible Reason Recommend Check Remedial measureReplace brake pressure sensor(B22)Internal SmartDrive error See Remedy Replace SmartDriveLED -22-LD60 not lit Check fuse -22-F60Check fuse -22-F92Life signal from SmartDrive faulty LED -22-LD116 not lit Check the SmartDrive powersupply and check wiringIf necessary, replace wiringand/or replace terminatingresistorsStatus: 11.10.2010 Turn Page please!Page No. 17/79Error descriptions BiG M 400Brake pressure sensor (B22)defectiveCheck brake pressure sensor(B22)96 96 CAN to SmartDrive Error: CAN bus communication -SmartDrive to terminalDetermination via terminal Perform CAN diagnosticsSmartDrive power supplydefectiveCentral electrical power supplyvoltage defectiveLED -22-LD31 not lit Check fuse -22-F77LED -22-LD63 not lit Check fuse -22-F63Safety output for travelling gearfrom KMC1 faultyKMC LD2 not lit; LED -22-LD1<strong>02</strong>not litCheck the safety output of KMC1(output is always active withengine shut off) and check wiringShort circuit/broken cable in thewiring for the CAN1 busCheck wiring Replace wiringCAN1 terminating resistorsdefectiveCheck wiring and terminatingresistors
Error No. Description Meaning Possible Reason Recommend Check Remedial measureInternal SmartDrive error See Remedy Replace SmartDrive113 113 Joystick undervoltage 12V Error: 12 V supply voltage too low Determination via terminal Perform joystick diagnosticsCheck fuse -22-F65Check fuse -22-F92Wiring defective Check the cables. Replace wiringBattery dead Check battery acid; check batteryvoltageCharge indicator lamp defective Check charge indicator lamp;check wiringCharge battery; replace batteryIf necessary, check chargeindicator lamp and/or replacewiringDynamo defective Check dynamo Replace the dynamoInternal joystick error See Remedy Replace joystickReplace the dynamoStatus: 11.10.2010 Turn Page please!Page No. 18/79Error descriptions BiG M 400Joystick power supply voltage toolowCheck fuse -22-F57 Replace fuse -22-F57Central electrical power supplyvoltage defectiveLED -22-LD63 not lit Check fuse -22-F63114 114 Joystick overvoltage 12V Error: 12 V supply voltage toohighDetermination via terminal Perform joystick diagnosticsThe controller of the dynamo isdefectiveWhile engine is running, measureat batteries. Voltage must not beabove 14.8V
Error No. Description Meaning Possible Reason Recommend Check Remedial measureDynamo defective Check the dynamo Replace the dynamoReplace battery change-overrelayInternal joystick error See Remedy Replace joystickBattery dead Check battery acid; check batteryvoltageCharge indicator lamp defective Check the charge indicator lamp,check the wiringCheck fuse -22-F65Check fuse -22-F92Charge battery; replace batteryIf necessary, replace chargeindicator lamp and/or replacewiringDynamo defective Check the dynamo Replace the dynamoInternal joystick error See Remedy Replace joystickPage No. 19/79Error descriptions BiG M 400Battery change-over relaydefectiveCheck relay according to circuitdiagram for proper function115 115 joystick undervoltage 8 Error: 8.5 V joystick supplyvoltage too lowDetermination via terminal Perform joystick diagnosticsJoystick power supply voltage toolowCheck fuse -22-F57 Replace fuse -22-F57Central electrical power supplyvoltage defectiveLED -22-LD63 not lit Check fuse -22-F63Status: 11.10.2010
Error No. Description Meaning Possible Reason Recommend Check Remedial measureCharge indicator lamp defective Check the charge indicator lamp,check the wiringCharge battery; replace batteryIf necessary, replace chargeindicator lamp and/or replacewiringDynamo defective Check the dynamo Replace the dynamoInternal joystick error See Remedy Replace joystickBattery dead Check battery acid; check batteryvoltageCharge indicator lamp defective Check charge indicator lamp;check wiringCharge battery; replace batteryIf necessary, replace chargeindicator lamp and/or replacewiringDynamo defective Check the dynamo Replace the dynamoInternal joystick error See Remedy Replace joystickCharge indicator lamp defective Check the charge indicator lamp,check the wiringCharge battery; replace batteryIf necessary, replace chargeindicator lamp and/or replacewiringStatus: 11.10.2010 Turn Page please!Page No. 20/79Error descriptions BiG M 400116 116 Joystick button voltage 12V Error: 12 V button voltage -voltage out of rangeBattery dead Check battery acid; check batteryvoltage117 117 Joystick power supply LED Error: 12 V LED power supply -voltage out of rangeDetermination via terminal Perform joystick diagnostics118 118 Joystick power supplyoutputsError: Power supply for 12 Voutputs - voltage out of rangeBattery dead Check battery acid; check batteryvoltage
Error No. Description Meaning Possible Reason Recommend Check Remedial measureDynamo defective Check the dynamo Replace the dynamoInternal joystick error See Remedy Replace joystickEEPROM defective See Remedy Replace joystickInternal joystick error See Remedy Replace joystickFLASH defective See Remedy Replace joystickInternal joystick error See Remedy Replace joystick124 124 CU undervoltage 12V Error: 12 V supply voltage too low Determination via terminal Perform operating paneldiagnosticsCheck fuse -22-F48LED -22-LD64 not lit Check fuse -22-F64Status: 11.10.2010 Turn Page please!Page No. 21/79Error descriptions BiG M 400119 119 Joystick parameter error Error: Min/Max parameters Incorrect values in EEPROM Check parameters120 120 Joystick checksum errorFLASHError: FLASH checksum Download was interrupted See Remedy Repeat downloadPower supply for operating paneltoo lowLED -16-LD1 not lit Check fuse -22-F47Central electrical power supplyvoltage defectiveLED -22-LD62 not lit Check fuse -22-F62
Error No. Description Meaning Possible Reason Recommend Check Remedial measureWiring defective Check the cables. Replace wiringBattery dead Check battery acid; check batteryvoltageCharge indicator lamp defective Check charge indicator lamp;check wiringCharge battery; replace batteryIf necessary, replace chargeindicator lamp and/or replacewiringDynamo defective Check the dynamo Replace dynamoInternal error, operating panel See Remedy Replace operating panelDynamo defective Check the dynamo Replace the dynamoInternal error, operating panel See Remedy Replace operating panelStatus: 11.10.2010 Turn Page please!Page No. 22/79Error descriptions BiG M 400125 125 CU overvoltage 12V Error: 12 V supply voltage toohighDetermination via terminal Perform operating paneldiagnosticsThe controller of the dynamo isdefectiveWhile engine is running, measureat batteries. Voltage must not beabove 14.8VReplace the dynamoBattery change-over relaydefectiveCheck relay according to circuitdiagramReplace battery change-overrelay126 126 CU vlt. 5V electronics too low Error: 5 V electronics supplyvoltage too lowDetermination via terminal Perform operating paneldiagnostics
Error No. Description Meaning Possible Reason Recommend Check Remedial measureBattery dead Check battery acid; check batteryvoltageCharge indicator lamp defective Check the charge indicator lamp,check the wiringCharge battery; replace batteryIf necessary, replace chargeindicator lamp and/or replacewiringDynamo defective Check the dynamo Replace the dynamoInternal error, operating panel See Remedy Replace operating panelDynamo defective Check the dynamo Replace the dynamoInternal error, operating panel See Remedy Replace operating panelDynamo defective Check the dynamo Replace the dynamoStatus: 11.10.2010 Turn Page please!Page No. 23/79Error descriptions BiG M 400127 127 CU vlt. 5V elctrncs too high Error: 5 V electronics supplyvoltage too highDetermination via terminal Perform operating paneldiagnosticsThe controller of the dynamo isdefectiveWhile engine is running, measureat batteries. Voltage must not beabove 14.8VReplace the dynamoBattery change-over relaydefectiveCheck battery change-over relayaccording to circuit diagram forproper functionReplace battery change-overrelay129 129 CU vlt. 12V LEDs too high Error: 12 V LED supply voltagetoo highDetermination via terminal Perform operating paneldiagnostics
Error No. Description Meaning Possible Reason Recommend Check Remedial measureReplace battery change-overrelayInternal error, operating panel See Remedy Replace operating panelEEPROM defective See Remedy Replace CUInternal error, operating panel See Remedy Replace operating panelFLASH defective See Remedy Replace CUInternal error, operating panel See Remedy Replace operating panelInternal error, operating panel See Remedy Replace operating panelStatus: 11.10.2010 Turn Page please!Page No. 24/79Error descriptions BiG M 400Battery change-over relaydefectiveCheck relay according to circuitdiagram for proper functionThe controller of the dynamo isdefectiveWhile engine is running, measureat batteries. Voltage must not beabove 14.8VReplace the dynamo130 130 CU parameter err Error: Min/Max parameters Incorrect values in EEPROM Check parameters131 131 CU checksum error FLASH Error: FLASH checksum Download was interrupted Repeat download132 132 CU keyboard error Error: Keyboard error (at leastone key is pressed continuously)Keyboard defective See Remedy Replace keyboard1100 1100 KMC1 fault vlt. Electronics Error: Electronic voltage - voltageout of rangeDetermination via terminal Run electronics diagnostics
Error No. Description Meaning Possible Reason Recommend Check Remedial measureKMC1 power supply defective LED -22-LD61 not lit Check fuse -22-F61KMC1 LD36 not litCheck fuse -22-F92Wiring defective Check the cables. Replace wiringCharge indicator lamp defective Check the charge indicator lamp,check the wiringBattery dead Check battery acid; check batteryvoltageIf necessary, replace chargeindicator lamp and/or replacewiringCharge battery; replace batteryReplace battery change-overrelayInternal error - KMC1 See Remedy Replace KMC11101 1101 KMC1 elctr. vlt. too low Error: Electronics voltage too low Determination via terminal Run electronics diagnosticsStatus: 11.10.2010 Turn Page please!Page No. 25/79Error descriptions BiG M 400Central electrical power supplyvoltage defectiveLED -22-LD60 not lit Check fuse -22-F60Short circuit in the wiring to a 12VsensorCheck wiring Replace wiringThe controller of the dynamo isdefectiveCheck the excitation voltage,check wiringReplace dynamo or replace wiringBattery change-over relaydefectiveWhile engine is running, measureat batteries. Voltage must not beabove 14.8V
Error No. Description Meaning Possible Reason Recommend Check Remedial measureCheck fuse -22-F92Wiring defective Check the cables. Replace wiringCharge indicator lamp defective Check the charge indicator lamp,check the wiringIf necessary, replace chargeindicator lamp and/or replacewiringDynamo defective Replace the dynamo Replace the dynamoBattery dead Check battery acid; measurebattery voltageInternal error - KMC1 See Remedy Replace KMC1Charge battery; replace batteryPage No. 26/79Error descriptions BiG M 400Power supply voltage of KMC1too lowLED -22-LD61 not lit Check fuse -22-F61Central electrical power supplyvoltage defectiveLED -22-LD60 not lit Check fuse -22-F60KMC1 LD36 not litShort circuit in the wiring to a 12VsensorCheck wiring Replace wiringThe controller of the dynamo isdefectiveCheck excitation voltage; checkwiringReplace dynamo or replace wiringBattery change-over relaydefectiveWhile engine is running, measureat batteries. Voltage must not beabove 14.8VReplace battery change-overrelayStatus: 11.10.2010
Error No. Description Meaning Possible Reason Recommend Check Remedial measureWiring defective Check the cables. Replace wiringCharge indicator lamp defective Check the charge indicator lamp,check the wiringIf necessary, replace chargeindicator lamp and/or replacewiringReplace dynamo or replace wiringDynamo defective Check the dynamo Replace the dynamoBattery dead Check battery acid; measurebattery voltageCharge battery; replace batteryReplace battery change-overrelayInternal error - KMC1 See Remedy Replace KMC11103 1103 KMC1 voltage V1 defective! Error: KMC1 output voltage of V1 Determination via terminal Run electronics diagnosticsOutput voltage of V1 defective LED -22-LD40 not lit Check fuse -22-F87Status: 11.10.2010 Turn Page please!Page No. 27/79Error descriptions BiG M 40011<strong>02</strong> 11<strong>02</strong> KMC1 elctr. vlt. too high Error: Electronics voltage too high Power supply voltage of KMC1too highRun electronics diagnosticsShort circuit in the wiring to a 12VsensorCheck wiring Replace wiringThe controller of the dynamo isdefectiveCheck the excitation voltage,check wiringBattery change-over relaydefectiveCheck relay according to circuitdiagram for proper functionCentral electrical power supplyvoltage defectiveLED -22-LD60 not lit Check fuse -22-F60
Error No. Description Meaning Possible Reason Recommend Check Remedial measureLED -22-LD63 not lit Check fuse -22-F63KMC1 LD36 not litCheck fuse -22-F92Fuse F13 in KMC1 defective KMC1 LD37 not lit Check fuse F13 in KMC1Wiring of release switch defective Check wiring Replace wiringRelease switch defective See Remedy Replace release switchGAL component defective See Remedy Replace GAL componentCharge indicator lamp defective Check the charge indicator lamp,check the wiringDynamo defective Check the excitation voltage,check wiringBattery dead Check battery acid; measurebattery voltageIf necessary, replace chargeindicator lamp and/or replacewiringInternal error - KMC1 See Remedy Replace KMC1Replace dynamo or replace wiringPage No. 28/79Error descriptions BiG M 400GAL component release logicwrong (wrong GAL component)Check release logic Replace GAL componentStatus: 11.10.2010
Error No. Description Meaning Possible Reason Recommend Check Remedial measure1104 1104 KMC1 voltage V2 defective! Error: KMC1 output voltage of V2 Determination via terminal Run electronics diagnosticsOutput voltage of V2 defective LED -22-LD38 not lit Check fuse -22-F86LED -22-LD63 not lit Check fuse -22-F63Check fuse -22-F92Fuse F6 in KMC1 defective KMC1 LD37 not lit Check fuse F6 in KMC1Wiring of release switch defective Check wiring Replace wiringRelease switch defective See Remedy Replace release switchGAL component defective See Remedy Replace GAL componentCharge indicator lamp defective Check the charge indicator lamp,check the wiringDynamo defective Check the excitation voltage,check wiringBattery dead Check battery acid; measurebattery voltageIf necessary, replace chargeindicator lamp and/or replacewiringReplace the dynamoCharge battery; replace batteryStatus: 11.10.2010 Turn Page please!Page No. 29/79Error descriptions BiG M 400Central electrical power supplyvoltage defectiveLED -22-LD60 not lit Check fuse -22-F60GAL component release logicwrong (wrong GAL component)Check release logic Replace GAL component
Error No. Description Meaning Possible Reason Recommend Check Remedial measureInternal error - KMC1 See Remedy Replace KMC11105 1105 KMC1 voltage V3 defective! Error: KMC1 output voltage of V3 Determination via terminal Run electronics diagnosticsOutput voltage of V3 defective LED -22-LD37 not lit Check fuse -22-F85LED -22-LD63 not lit Check fuse -22-F63Check fuse -22-F92Fuse F12 in KMC1 defective KMC1 LD40 not lit Check fuse F12 in KMC1Wiring of release switch defective Check wiring Replace wiringRelease switch defective See Remedy Replace release switchGAL component defective See Remedy Replace GAL componentCharge indicator lamp defective Check the charge indicator lamp,check the wiringDynamo defective Check the excitation voltage,check wiringIf necessary, replace chargeindicator lamp and/or replacewiringReplace the dynamoStatus: 11.10.2010 Turn Page please!Page No. 30/79Error descriptions BiG M 400Central electrical power supplyvoltage defectiveLED -22-LD60 not lit Check fuse -22-F60GAL component release logicwrong (wrong GAL component)Check release logic Replace GAL component
Error No. Description Meaning Possible Reason Recommend Check Remedial measureBattery dead Check battery acid; measurebattery voltageInternal error - KMC1 See Remedy Replace KMC11106 1106 KMC1 voltage V4 defective! Error: KMC1 output voltage of V4 Determination via terminal Run electronics diagnosticsCharge battery; replace batteryOutput voltage of V4 defective LED -22-LD36 not lit Check fuse -22-F84LED -22-LD63 not lit Check fuse -22-F63Check fuse -22-F92Fuse F2 in KMC1 defective KMC1 LD41 not lit Check fuse F2 in KMC1Wiring of release switch defective Check wiring Replace wiringRelease switch defective See Remedy Replace release switchGAL component defective See Remedy Replace GAL componentCharge indicator lamp defective Check the charge indicator lamp,check the wiringIf necessary, replace chargeindicator lamp and/or replacewiringStatus: 11.10.2010 Turn Page please!Page No. 31/79Error descriptions BiG M 400Central electrical power supplyvoltage defectiveLED -22-LD60 not lit Check fuse -22-F60GAL component release logicwrong (wrong GAL component)Check release logic Replace GAL component
Error No. Description Meaning Possible Reason Recommend Check Remedial measureDynamo defective Check the excitation voltage,check wiringBattery dead Check battery acid; measurebattery voltageReplace the dynamoInternal error - KMC1 See Remedy Replace KMC1Charge battery; replace batteryDigital sensor defective Check sensors Replace sensorsCharge indicator lamp defective Check charge indicator lamp;check wiringDynamo defective Check the excitation voltage,check wiringBattery dead Check battery acid; measurebattery voltageIf necessary, replace chargeindicator lamp and/or replacewiringReplace the dynamoInternal error - KMC1 See Remedy Replace KMC1Charge battery; replace batteryAnalogue sensor defective Check sensors Replace sensorsStatus: 11.10.2010 Turn Page please!Page No. 32/79Error descriptions BiG M 4001108 1108 KMC1 voltage 8Vdig.sensorsDetermination via terminal Run electronics diagnosticsShort circuit in the wiring to adigital sensorCheck wiring Replace wiring1109 1109 KMC1 voltage 8Vana.sensorsError: 8 V voltage of analoguesensorsDetermination via terminal Run electronics diagnosticsShort circuit in the wiring to ananalogue sensorCheck wiring Replace wiring
Error No. Description Meaning Possible Reason Recommend Check Remedial measureCharge indicator lamp defective Check the charge indicator lamp,check the wiringDynamo defective Check the excitation voltage,check wiringBattery dead Check battery acid; measurebattery voltageIf necessary, replace chargeindicator lamp and/or replacewiringReplace the dynamoInternal error - KMC1 See Remedy Replace KMC1Charge battery; replace batteryDischarge the backup battery See Remedy Replace the backup battery inKMC1Internal error - KMC1 See Remedy Replace KMC1Sensor (B20) defective Check sensor (B20) Replace sensor (B20)Internal error - KMC1 See Remedy Replace KMC1Status: 11.10.2010 Turn Page please!Page No. 33/79Error descriptions BiG M 4001110 1110 KMC1 vlt. batt. 3V too low Error: Backup battery voltage 3volts too lowDetermination via terminal Run electronics diagnostics1200 1200 sensor B20, position axlesuspensionError: Position sensor axlesuspension (B20)Determination via terminal Performing axle suspensiondiagnosticsShort circuit/broken cable in thewiringCheck wiring Replace wiring1203 1203 sensor B14, positionmowing unit rightError: Mower position sensor right Determination via terminal Perform work diagnostics
Error No. Description Meaning Possible Reason Recommend Check Remedial measureSensor (B14) defective Check sensor (B14) Replace sensor (B14)Internal error - KMC1 See Remedy Replace KMC1Sensor (B15) defective Check sensor (B15) Replace sensor (B15)Internal error - KMC1 See Remedy Replace KMC1Sensor (B11) defective Check sensor (B11) Replace sensor (B11)Internal error - KMC1 See Remedy Replace KMC1Status: 11.10.2010 Turn Page please!Page No. 34/79Error descriptions BiG M 400Short circuit/broken cable in thewiringCheck wiring Replace wiring1205 1205 sensor B15, positionmowing unit leftError: Mower position sensor left(B15)Determination via terminal Perform work diagnosticsShort circuit/broken cable in thewiringCheck wiring Replace wiring1207 1207 sensor B11, speed mowingunit frontError: Speed sensor, mower drivefront (B11)Determination via terminal Perform work diagnosticsShort circuit/broken cable in thewiringCheck wiring Replace wiring1208 1208 sensor B12, speed mowingunit rightError: Speed sensor, mower driveright (B12)Determination via terminal Perform work diagnosticsShort circuit/broken cable in thewiringCheck wiring Replace wiring
Error No. Description Meaning Possible Reason Recommend Check Remedial measureSensor defective (B12) Check sensor (B12) Replace sensor (B12)Internal error - KMC1 See Remedy Replace KMC1Sensor (B13) defective Check sensor (B13) Replace sensor (B13)Internal error - KMC1 See Remedy Replace KMC1Sensor (B28) defective Check sensor (B28) Replace sensor (B28)Internal error - KMC1 See Remedy Replace KMC1Sensor (B29) defective Check sensor (B29) Replace sensor (B29)Status: 11.10.2010 Turn Page please!Page No. 35/79Error descriptions BiG M 4001209 1209 sensor B13, speed mowingunit leftError: Speed sensor, mower driveleft (B13)Determination via terminal Perform work diagnosticsShort circuit/broken cable in thewiringCheck wiring Replace wiring1212 1212 sensor B28, speed augerrightError: Speed sensor, auger driveright (B28)Determination via terminal Perform work diagnosticsShort circuit/broken cable in thewiringCheck wiring Replace wiring1213 1213 sensor B29, speed augerleftError: Speed sensor, auger driveleft (B29)Determination via terminal Perform work diagnosticsShort circuit/broken cable in thewiringCheck wiring Replace wiring
Error No. Description Meaning Possible Reason Recommend Check Remedial measureInternal error - KMC1 See Remedy Replace KMC1Determination via terminal Performing cutting heightdiagnosticsSensor (B43) defective Check sensor (B43) Replace sensor (B43)Internal error - KMC1 See Remedy Replace KMC1Determination via terminal Performing cutting heightdiagnosticsSensor (B42) defective Check sensor (B42) Replace sensor (B42)Internal error - KMC1 See Remedy Replace KMC1Status: 11.10.2010 Turn Page please!Page No. 36/79Error descriptions BiG M 4001300 1300 sensor B43, inclinationmowing unit frontError: Cutting height sensor front -signal out of range (B43)Hydr. cutting height activatedeven though there is no hydr.cutting height presentSee Remedy Deactivate hydr. cutting height indisplayShort circuit/broken cable in thewiringCheck wiring Replace wiring1301 1301 sensor B42, inclinationmowing unit rightError: Cutting height sensor right -signal out of range (B42)Hydr. cutting height activatedeven though there is no hydr.cutting height presentSee Remedy Deactivate hydr. cutting height indisplayShort circuit/broken cable in thewiringCheck wiring Replace wiring13<strong>02</strong> 13<strong>02</strong> sensor B41, inclinationmowing unit leftError: Cutting height sensor left -signal out of range (B41)Hydr. cutting height activatedeven though there is no hydr.cutting height presentSee Remedy Deactivate hydr. cutting height indisplay
Error No. Description Meaning Possible Reason Recommend Check Remedial measureDetermination via terminal Performing cutting heightdiagnosticsSensor (B41) defective Check sensor (B41) Replace sensor (B41)Internal error - KMC1 See Remedy Replace KMC1Determination via terminal Performing spring compensationpressure diagnosticsPressure sensor (B45) defective Check pressure sensor (B45) Replace pressure sensor (B45)Internal error - KMC1 See Remedy Replace KMC1Determination via terminal Performing spring compensationpressure diagnosticsStatus: 11.10.2010 Turn Page please!Page No. 37/79Error descriptions BiG M 400Short circuit/broken cable in thewiringCheck wiring Replace wiring1304 1304 sensor B45, springcompensation pressure rightError: Pressure sensor for springcompensation - signal out ofrange (B45)Spring compensation activatedeven though no hydraulic springcompensation is presentSee Remedy Deactivate spring compensationin the displayShort circuit/broken cable in thepressure sensor wiringCheck wiring Replace wiring1305 1305 sensor B44, springcompensation pressure leftError: Pressure sensor for springcompensation - signal out ofrange (B44)Spring compensation activatedeven though no hydraulic springcompensation is presentSee Remedy Deactivate spring compensationin the displayShort circuit/broken cable in thepressure sensor wiringCheck wiring Replace wiring
Error No. Description Meaning Possible Reason Recommend Check Remedial measurePressure sensor (B44) defective Check pressure sensor (B44) Replace pressure sensor (B44)Internal error - KMC1 See Remedy Replace KMC1Determination via terminal Perform work diagnosticsSensor (B48) defective Check sensor (B48) Replace sensor (B48)Internal error - KMC1 See Remedy Replace KMC1Determination via terminal Perform work diagnosticsSensor (B49) defective Check sensor (B49) Replace sensor (B49)Internal error - KMC1 See Remedy Replace KMC1Status: 11.10.2010 Turn Page please!Page No. 38/79Error descriptions BiG M 4001307 1307 sensor B48, transportposition mowing unit rightError: Position sensor transportposition right (B48)Monitoring of transport positionactivated even though there is notransport position sensorSee Remedy Deactivate monitoring of transportposition in the displayShort circuit/broken cable in thewiringCheck wiring Replace wiring1308 1308 sensor B49, transportposition mowing unit leftError: Position sensor transportposition left (B49)Monitoring of transport positionactivated even though there is notransport position sensorSee Remedy Deactivate monitoring of transportposition in the displayShort circuit/broken cable in thewiringCheck wiring Replace wiring1311 1311 sensors B48 and B14transport position and position ofmowing unit right are both alive.Error: Sensor for transportposition (B48) and position (B14)of mowing unit rightDetermined via the terminal Perform work diagnostics
Error No. Description Meaning Possible Reason Recommend Check Remedial measureReplace sensor (B48) and/orsensor (B14)Internal error - KMC1 See Remedy Replace KMC1Replace sensor (B49) and/orsensor (B15)Internal error - KMC1 See Remedy Replace KMC11400 1400 slip, mowing unit front Error: Slip, mower drive front Determination via terminal Perform work diagnosticsSpeed sensor (B11) defective Check speed sensor (B11) Replace speed sensor (B11)1401 1401 slip, mowing unit right Error: Slip, mower drive right V-belt not tightened Check the V-belt Retighten V-beltStatus: 11.10.2010 Turn Page please!Page No. 39/79Error descriptions BiG M 400Sensor (B48) and/or sensor (B14)defectiveCheck sensor (B48) and/orsensor (B14)Sensor (B48) and/or sensor (B14)not in positionCheck position and fastening Move/fasten sensors into positionsee Operating Instructions p. 3921312 1312 sensors B49 and B15transport position and position ofmowing unit left are both alive.Error: Sensor for transportposition (B49) and position (B15)of mowing unit leftDetermined via the terminal Perform work diagnosticsSensor (B49) and/or sensor (B15)defectiveCheck sensor (B49) and/orsensor (B15)Sensor (B49) and/or sensor (B15)not in positionCheck position and fastening Move/fasten sensors into positionsee Operating Instructions p. 392Short circuit/broken cable inwiring for speed sensor (B11)Check wiring Replace wiringDistance from sensor (B11) tometalCheck distance Calibrate distance
Error No. Description Meaning Possible Reason Recommend Check Remedial measureDetermination via terminal Perform work diagnosticsSpeed sensor (B12) defective Check speed sensor (B12) Replace speed sensor (B12)14<strong>02</strong> 14<strong>02</strong> slip, mowing unit left Error: Slip, mower drive left V-belt not tightened Check the V-belt Retighten V-beltDetermination via terminal Perform work diagnosticsSpeed sensor (B13) defective Check speed sensor (B13) Replace speed sensor (B13)V-belt not tightened Check the V-belt Retighten V-beltDetermination via terminal Perform work diagnosticsStatus: 11.10.2010 Turn Page please!Page No. 40/79Error descriptions BiG M 400Short circuit/broken cable inwiring for speed sensor (B12)Check wiring Replace wiringDistance from sensor (B12) tometalCheck distance Calibrate distanceShort circuit/broken cable inwiring for speed sensor (B13)Check wiring Replace wiringDistance from sensor (B13) tometal1405 1405 slip, auger right Error: Slip, worm drive right Auger monitoring mode activatedeven though there is no augerpresentCheck distance Calibrate distanceSee Remedy Deactivate auger monitoringmode in the displayShort circuit/broken cable inwiring for speed sensor (B28)Check wiring Replace wiring
Error No. Description Meaning Possible Reason Recommend Check Remedial measureSpeed sensor (B28) defective Check speed sensor (B28) Replace speed sensor (B28)V-belt not tightened Check the V-belt Retighten V-beltDetermination via terminal Perform work diagnosticsSpeed sensor (B29) defective Check speed sensor (B29) Replace speed sensor (B29)Position sensor (B14) defective Check position sensor (B14) Replace position sensor (B14)Status: 11.10.2010 Turn Page please!Page No. 41/79Error descriptions BiG M 400Distance from sensor (B28) tometalCheck distance Calibrate distance1406 1406 slip, auger left Error: Slip, worm drive left Auger monitoring mode activatedeven though there is no augerpresentSee Remedy Deactivate auger monitoringmode in the displayShort circuit/broken cable inwiring for speed sensor (B29)Check wiring Replace wiringDistance from sensor (B29) tometalCheck distance Calibrate distance1408 1408 leave position mowing unitrightError - mower position sensorright - mower not in work or readyposition (B14)Mower has gone out of the"Mow/ready" settingSetting for sensor (B14) or metallinkCheck distance Calibrate sensor (B14)Short circuit/broken cable inwiring for position sensor (B14)Check wiring Replace wiring1409 1409 leave position mowing unitleftError - mower position sensor left- mower not in work or readyposition (B15)Mower has gone out of the"Mow/ready" setting
Error No. Description Meaning Possible Reason Recommend Check Remedial measurePosition sensor (B15) defective Check position sensor (B15) Replace position sensor (B15)Sensor (B48) defective Check sensor (B48) Replace sensor (B48)Sensor (B49) defective Check sensor (B49) Replace sensor (B49)<strong>150</strong>4 <strong>150</strong>4 KMC1 parameters min/max Error: Min/Max parameters Incorrect values in EEPROM. Check parameters Save the adequate values toEEPROMStatus: 11.10.2010 Turn Page please!Page No. 42/79Error descriptions BiG M 400Setting for sensor (B15) or metallinkCheck distance Calibrate sensor (B15)Short circuit/broken cable inwiring for position sensor (B15)Check wiring Replace wiring1414 1414 right mowing unit not intransport positionError - sensor transport positionright - mower not in transportposition (B48)Mower is not in transport position Check transport position Bring mower into transportpositionStop machine immediately andeliminate fault!Setting for sensor (B48) or metallinkCheck distance Calibrate sensor (B48)1415 1415 left mowing unit not intransport positionError - sensor transport positionleft - mower not in transportposition (B49)Short circuit / broken cable inwiring for sensor (B48)Check wiring Replace wiringMower is not in transport position Check transport position Bring mower into transportpositionStop machine immediately andeliminate fault!Setting for sensor (B49) or metallinkCheck distance Calibrate sensor (B49)Short circuit / broken cable inwiring for sensor (B49)Check wiring Replace wiring
Error No. Description Meaning Possible Reason Recommend Check Remedial measureEEPROM defective See Remedy Replace KMC1Internal error - KMC1 See Remedy Replace KMC1LED -22-LD60 not lit Check fuse -22-F60LED -22-LD63 not lit Check fuse -22-F63LED -22-LD 116 flashesCheck fuse -22-F92Internal error - Smart Drive See Remedy Replace Smart DriveInternal error - KMC1 See Remedy Replace KMC1Protective resistor defective Check protective resistor Replace protective resistorStatus: 11.10.2010 Turn Page please!Page No. 43/79Error descriptions BiG M 400<strong>150</strong>5 <strong>150</strong>5 SmartDrive safety signalmissingError: Safety signal - Smart Driveto KMC1Determination via terminal Run travelling gear diagnosticsSmartDrive power supplydefectiveLED -22-LD31 not lit Check fuse -22-F77Short circuit/broken cable in thewiring of the safety signalKMC1 LD2 not lit Check wiring<strong>150</strong>6 <strong>150</strong>6 tank sensor B34 defective Error: Filling level fuel tank sensor(B34)Error in wiring of filling level fueltank sensor (B34)Check wiring to filling level fueltank sensor (B34)Replace wiring to filling level fueltank sensor (B34)
Error No. Description Meaning Possible Reason Recommend Check Remedial measureReplace filling level fuel tanksensor (B34)Internal error - KMC1 See Remedy Replace KMC1<strong>150</strong>8 <strong>150</strong>8 Air filter contamination Error: Air filter contamination Air filter dirty CU LD11 lit Clean air filter and replace ifnecessaryInternal error - KMC1 See Remedy Replace KMC1<strong>150</strong>9 <strong>150</strong>9 Fill level hydr. oil Error: Hydraulic tank filling level The hydraulic oil level is too low Check level of hydraulic fluid Refill hydraulic fluidStatus: 11.10.2010 Turn Page please!Page No. 44/79Error descriptions BiG M 400Filling level fuel tank sensor (B34)defectiveCheck filling level fuel tank sensor(B34)Short circuit in the wiring toanother KMC1 sensorCheck wiring Replace wiring<strong>150</strong>7 <strong>150</strong>7 maintenance Note: Maintenance work must beperformedThe maintenance interval haselapsedSee Remedy Have maintenance performed atthe intended factory, and havethe maintenance reminders resetShort circuit/broken cable inwiring for air filter contaminationsensor (B36)Check wiring to air filtercontamination sensor (B36)Replace wiring to air filtercontamination sensor (B36)Air filter contamination sensor(B36) defectiveCheck air filter contaminationsensor (B36)Replace air filter contaminationsensor (B36)Short circuit/broken cable inwiring for hydraulic oil filling levelsensor (B33)CU LD13 lit Check wiringFilling level hydraulic oil sensor(B33) defectiveCheck filling level hydraulic tanksensor (B33)Replace filling level hydraulic tanksensor (B33)
Error No. Description Meaning Possible Reason Recommend Check Remedial measureInternal error - KMC1 See Remedy Replace KMC1Determination via terminal Perform work diagnosticsInternal error - KMC1 See Remedy Replace KMC1Status: 11.10.2010 Turn Page please!Page No. 45/79Error descriptions BiG M 400Power supply voltage foranalogue sensors incorrectCheck power supply voltageShort circuit in the wiring toanother KMC1 sensorCheck wiring Replace wiring1510 1510 Fault suct. rtn. filter 1 Error: Suction return filter 1 fillinglevelSuction return filter 1 dirty Check suction return filter 1 Clean suction return filter 1 andreplace if necessaryShort circuit/broken cable inwiring for sensor suction returnfilter 1 (B10)CU LD12 lit Check wiringSensor for suction return filter 1(B10) defectiveCheck sensor for suction returnfilter 1 (B10)Replace sensor for suction returnfilter 1 (B10)If external temperatures arebelow zero degrees Celsius, theengine oil has a high viscosityand the dynamic pressure in frontof the filter is very high in the startphase.See Remedy Allow diesel engine to run at lowidle so that the engine oil will heatup; continue until error messagedisappears.1511 1511 Central lube fault Error: Central lubricationIMPORTANT: All malfunctionmessages from the centrallubrication system must beconfirmed and deleted using the
Error No. Description Meaning Possible Reason Recommend Check Remedial measureDetermination via terminal Perform work diagnosticsSee also Central LubricationSystem in the operatinginstructionsSensor (B28) defective Check sensor (B28) Replace sensor (B28)Page No. 46/79Error descriptions BiG M 400DK key on the central lubricationsystem. This will simultaneouslydelete any intermediatelubrication. Before deleting theerror message, determine thecause of the error, and eliminateit. See also Central LubricationSystem in the operatinginstructions.Power supply voltage for centrallubrication defectiveLED -22-LD42 not lit Check fuse -22-F89No grease present Check whether grease is stillpresentAdd grease as described in theBiG M operating instructions,chapter Maintenance centralLubrication System. See alsoCentral Lubrication System in theoperating instructionsJam in the system or at aconnected lubrication point.Check main distributor,subdistributor and lubricationpoints for blockagesClean main distributor,subdistributor and lubricationpoints and replace, if necessary1512 1512 Hay hood Right not intransport positionError: Sensor speed of auger right- hay hood not in transportposition (B28)Stop machine immediately andeliminate error!Variant with hay hood selectedeven though none is presentHay hood is not in transportpositionSee Remedy Check machine settingsCheck transport position Move the hay hood into transportpositionSetting for sensor (B28) or metallinkCheck distance Calibrate sensor (B28)Short circuit/broken cable inwiring for sensor (B28)Check wiring Replace wiringStatus: 11.10.2010
Error No. Description Meaning Possible Reason Recommend Check Remedial measureSensor (B29) defective Check sensor (B29) Replace sensor (B29)KMC1 power supply defective LED -22-LD60 not lit Check fuse -22-F60LED -22-LD61 not lit Check fuse -22-F61Check fuse -22-F92Status: 11.10.2010 Turn Page please!Page No. 47/79Error descriptions BiG M 4001513 1513 Hay hood Left not intransport positionError: Sensor speed of auger right- hay hood not in transportposition (B29)Stop machine immediately andeliminate error!Variant with hay hood selectedeven though none is presentHay hood is not in transportpositionSee Remedy Check machine settingsCheck transport position Move the hay hood into transportpositionSetting for sensor (B29) or metallinkCheck distance Calibrate sensor (B29)Short circuit/broken cable inwiring for sensor (B29)Check wiring Replace wiring1600 1600 CAN to KMC1 Error: CAN bus communication -KMC1 to terminalDetermination via terminal Perform CAN diagnosticsCentral electrical power supplyvoltage defectiveShort circuit/broken cable in thewiring for the CAN1 busCAN1 terminating resistorsdefectiveCheck wiring Replace wiringCheck wiring and terminatingresistorsReplace wiring and terminatingresistors
Error No. Description Meaning Possible Reason Recommend Check Remedial measureInternal error - KMC1 See Remedy Replace KMC<strong>150</strong>00 5<strong>000</strong> Display battery empt Error: Backup battery voltage Discharge the backup battery See Remedy Replace backup battery in displayInternal error display See Remedy Replace displaySensor defective Check the sensor Replace the sensorInternal engine control error See Remedy Replace engine controlRadiator dirty Check the radiator Clean the radiatorCheck the fan reversing Activate fan reversingTemperature sensor defective Check the temperature sensor Replace the temperature sensorStatus: 11.10.2010 Turn Page please!Page No. 48/79Error descriptions BiG M 40050<strong>02</strong> 50<strong>02</strong> KMC1 software - incorrectmachine typeError: Wrong software Wrong software loaded Check software version Load new software5009 5009 Diesel engine oil pressuretoo low!Error: Diesel engine oil pressuretoo lowThe oil pressure is too low Check the oil pressure Check engine oil filling levelShort circuit / broken cable in thewiring to the sensorSee Remedy Check wiring5010 5010 Cooling water temperaturetoo high!Error: The cooling watertemperature is too highCooling water to hot See Remedy Allow the machine to cool downShort circuit/broken cable in thetemperature sensor wiringCheck the temperature sensorwiringReplace the temperature sensorwiring
Error No. Description Meaning Possible Reason Recommend Check Remedial measureInternal engine control error See Remedy Replace engine controlCheck fuse -22-F92Internal error terminal See Remedy Replace terminalJoystick power supply defective Check fuse -22-F57 Replace fuse -22-F57Check fuse -22-F65Status: 11.10.2010 Turn Page please!Page No. 49/79Error descriptions BiG M 4009914 9914 CAN to terminal Error: CAN bus communication -CAN to terminalDetermination via terminal Perform CAN diagnosticsPower supply voltage TerminaldefectiveCentral electrical power supplyvoltage defectiveCheck fuse -22-F46.1 Replace fuse -22-F46.1LED -22-LD63 not lit Check fuse -22-F63Short circuit/broken cable in thewiring for the CAN1 busCAN1 terminating resistorsdefectiveCheck wiring Replace wiringCheck wiring and terminatingresistorsReplace wiring and terminatingresistorsShort circuit/broken cable in thewiring for the CAN2 busCAN2 terminating resistorsdefectiveCheck wiring Replace wiringCheck wiring and terminatingresistorsReplace wiring and terminatingresistors9920 9920 CAN to joystick Error: CAN bus communication -joystick to terminalDetermination via terminal Perform CAN diagnostics
Error No. Description Meaning Possible Reason Recommend Check Remedial measureCheck fuse -22-F92Replace wiring and terminatingresistorsInternal joystick error See Remedy Replace joystickCheck fuse -22-F48Check fuse -22-F92Internal error, operating panel See Remedy Replace operating panelPage No. 50/79Error descriptions BiG M 400Central electrical power supplyvoltage defectiveLED -22-LD63 not lit Check fuse -22-F63Short circuit/broken cable in thewiring for the CAN1 busCheck wiring Replace wiringCAN1 terminating resistorsdefectiveCheck wiring and terminatingresistors9921 9921 CAN to CU Error: CAN bus communication -CU to terminalDetermination via terminal Perform CAN diagnosticsPower supply voltage operatingpanel defectiveLED -16-LD1 not lit Check fuse -22-F47Central electrical power supplyvoltage defectiveLED -22-LD63 not lit Check fuse -22-F63Short circuit/broken cable in thewiring for the CAN1 busCAN1 terminating resistorsdefectiveCheck wiring Replace wiringCheck wiring and terminatingresistorsReplace wiring and terminatingresistorsStatus: 11.10.2010
Error No. Description Meaning Possible Reason Recommend Check Remedial measureLED -22-LD27 not lit Check fuse -22-F73Check fuse -22-F92Internal error DIOM See Remedy Replace DIOMCheck fuse -22-F70LED -22-LD63 not lit Check fuse -22-F63Status: 11.10.2010 Turn Page please!Page No. 51/79Error descriptions BiG M 4009925 9925 CAN to DIOM Error: CAN bus communication -DIOM to terminalDetermination via terminal Perform CAN diagnosticsPower supply voltage DIOMdefectiveLED -22-LD59 not lit Check fuse -22-F59Central electrical power supplyvoltage defectiveLED -22-LD63 not lit Check fuse -22-F63Short circuit/broken cable in thewiring for the CAN1 busCAN1 terminating resistorsdefectiveCheck wiring Replace wiringCheck wiring and terminatingresistorsReplace wiring and terminatingresistors9926 9926 CAN to ADM1 Error: CAN bus communication -DM1 to terminalDetermination via terminal Perform CAN diagnosticsPower supply voltage ADM 1defectiveLED -22-LD17 not lit Check fuse -22-F68Central electrical power supplyvoltage defectiveLED -22-LD64 not lit Check fuse -22-F64
Error No. Description Meaning Possible Reason Recommend Check Remedial measureCheck fuse -22-F92Internal error ADM1 See Remedy Replace ADM1LED -22-LD60 not lit Check fuse -22-F60LED -22-LD63 not lit Check fuse -22-F63Check fuse -22-F92Check fuse -22-F92Wiring faulty Check wiring and plug Replace wiring and plugStatus: 11.10.2010 Turn Page please!Page No. 52/79Error descriptions BiG M 400Short circuit/broken cable in thewiring for the CAN2 busCheck wiring Replace wiringCAN2 terminating resistorsdefectiveCheck wiring and terminatingresistorsReplace wiring and terminatingresistors9942 9942 hardw. restart to SmartDrive Error: Restart hardwareSmartDriveSmartDrive power supplydefectiveLED -22-LD31 not lit Check fuse -22-F77Central electrical power supplyvoltage defectiveLED -22-LD63 not lit Check fuse -22-F63Safety output for travelling gearfrom KMC1 faultyCheck the safety output of KMC1(output is always active withengine shut off) and check wiring
Error No. Description Meaning Possible Reason Recommend Check Remedial measureLife signal from SmartDrive faulty LED -22-LD116 not flashing Check the power supply voltageon the SmartDriveInternal SmartDrive error See Remedy Replace SmartDrive9953 9953 hardw. restart KMC1 Error: Restart KMC1 hardware KMC1 power supply defective LED -22-LD61 not lit Check fuse -22-F61Check fuse -22-F92Wiring faulty Check wiring and plug Replace wiring and/or plugInternal error - KMC1 See Remedy Replace KMC1Check fuse -22-F46 Replace fuse -22-F46Check fuse -22-F92Wiring faulty Check wiring and plug Replace wiring and/or plugInternal error terminal See Remedy Replace terminalPage No. 53/79Error descriptions BiG M 400Central electrical power supplyvoltage defectiveLED -22-LD63 not lit Check fuse -22-F639954 9954 hardw. restart terminal Error: Restart terminal hardware Power supply voltage TerminaldefectiveCheck fuse -22-F46.1 Replace fuse -22-F46.1Central electrical power supplyvoltage defectiveLED -22-LD63 not lit Check fuse -22-F63Status: 11.10.2010
Error No. Description Meaning Possible Reason Recommend Check Remedial measure9960 9960 hardw. restart joystick Error: Restart joystick hardware Joystick power supply defective Check fuse -22-F57 Replace fuse -22-F57Check fuse -22-F65 Replace fuse -22-F65Check fuse -22-F92Wiring faulty Check wiring and plug Replace wiring and/or plugInternal joystick error See Remedy Replace joystickCheck fuse -22-F48LED -22-LD64 not lit Check fuse -22-F64Wiring faulty Check wiring and plug Replace wiring and/or plugInternal error, operating panel See Remedy Replace operating panelStatus: 11.10.2010 Turn Page please!Page No. 54/79Error descriptions BiG M 400Central electrical power supplyvoltage defectiveLED -22-LD63 not lit Check fuse -22-F639961 9961 hardw. restart CU Error: Restart CU hardware Power supply voltage CUdefectiveLED -16-LD1 not lit Check fuse -22-F47Central electrical power supplyvoltage defectiveLED -22-LD62 not lit Check fuse -22-F629965 9965 hardw. restart DIOM Error: Restart DIOM hardware Power supply voltage DIOMdefectiveLED -22-LD59 not lit Check fuse -22-F59
Error No. Description Meaning Possible Reason Recommend Check Remedial measureLED -22-LD27 not lit Check fuse -22-F73LED -22-LD60 not lit Check fuse -22-F60Check fuse -22-F92Wiring faulty Check wiring and plug Replace wiring and/or plugInternal error DIOM See Remedy Replace DIOMCheck fuse -22-F70LED -22-LD63 not lit Check fuse -22-F63Check fuse -22-F92Wiring faulty Check wiring and plug Replace wiring and/or plugInternal error ADM1 See Remedy Replace ADM1Page No. 55/79Error descriptions BiG M 400Central electrical power supplyvoltage defectiveLED -22-LD63 not lit Check fuse -22-F639966 9966 hardw. restart ADM1 Error: Restart ADM1 hardware Power supply voltage ADM1defectiveLED -22-LD17 not lit Check fuse -22-F68Central electrical power supplyvoltage defectiveLED -22-LD64 not lit Check fuse -22-F64Status: 11.10.2010
Error No. Description Meaning Possible Reason Recommend Check Remedial measureInternal SmartDrive error See Remedy Replace SmartDriveInternal error - KMC1 See Remedy Replace KMC1Internal error terminal See Remedy Replace terminalStatus: 11.10.2010 Turn Page please!Page No. 56/79Error descriptions BiG M 4009982 9982 restart CAN to SmartDrive Error: Interruption in CANcommunication to SmartDriveShort circuit/broken cable in thewiring for the CAN1 busCheck wiring Replace wiringCAN1 terminating resistorsdefectiveCheck wiring and terminatingresistorsReplace wiring and/ terminatingresistors9993 9993 restart CAN to KMC1 Error: Interruption of CANcommunication to KMC1Short circuit/broken cable in thewiring for the CAN1 busCAN1 terminating resistorsdefectiveCheck wiring Replace wiringCheck wiring and terminatingresistorsReplace wiring and/or terminatingresistors9994 9994 restart CAN to terminal Error: Interruption in CANcommunication to terminalShort circuit/broken cable in thewiring for the CAN1 busShort circuit/broken cable in thewiring for the CAN2 busCAN1 terminating resistorsdefectiveCheck wiring Replace wiringCheck wiring Replace wiringCheck wiring and terminatingresistorsReplace wiring and/or terminatingresistorsCAN2 terminating resistorsdefectiveCheck wiring and terminatingresistorsReplace wiring and/or terminatingresistors<strong>150</strong>00 <strong>150</strong>00 restart CAN to joystick Error: Interruption in CANcommunication to JoystickShort circuit/broken cable in thewiring for the CAN1 busCheck wiring Replace wiring
Error No. Description Meaning Possible Reason Recommend Check Remedial measureInternal joystick error See Remedy Replace joystickReplace wiring and/or terminatingresistorsInternal error, operating panel See Remedy Replace operating panelInternal error DIOM See Remedy Replace DIOMInternal error ADM1 See Remedy Replace ADM1Replace wiring and/or terminatingresistorsStatus: 11.10.2010 Turn Page please!Page No. 57/79Error descriptions BiG M 400CAN1 terminating resistorsdefectiveCheck wiring and terminatingresistors<strong>150</strong>01 <strong>150</strong>01 restart CAN to CU Error: Interruption in CANcommunication to C<strong>US</strong>hort circuit/broken cable in thewiring for the CAN1 busCheck wiring Replace wiringCAN1 terminating resistorsdefectiveCheck wiring and terminatingresistorsReplace wiring and terminatingresistors<strong>150</strong>05 <strong>150</strong>05 restart CAN to DIOM Error: Interruption in CANcommunication to DIOMShort circuit/broken cable in thewiring for the CAN1 busCheck wiring Replace wiringCAN1 terminating resistorsdefectiveCheck wiring and terminatingresistorsReplace wiring and/or terminatingresistors<strong>150</strong>06 <strong>150</strong>06 restart CAN to ADM1 Error: Interruption in CANcommunication to ADM1Short circuit/broken cable in thewiring for the CAN2 busCheck wiring Replace wiringCAN2 terminating resistorsdefectiveCheck wiring and terminatingresistors16<strong>000</strong> 16<strong>000</strong> DIOM communication Error: Communication - DIOM toCANDetermination via terminal Perform CAN diagnostics
Error No. Description Meaning Possible Reason Recommend Check Remedial measureLED -22-LD27 not lit Check fuse -22-F73LED -22-LD60 not lit Check fuse -22-F60Check fuse -22-F92Internal error DIOM See Remedy Replace DIOM16001 16001 DIOM temperature Error: DIOM temperature too high DIOM has overheated Check temperature Allow DIOM to cool downDetermination via terminal Perform DIOM diagnosticsInternal error DIOM See Remedy Replace DIOMLED -22-LD27 not lit Check fuse -22-F73Status: 11.10.2010 Turn Page please!Page No. 58/79Error descriptions BiG M 400Power supply voltage DIOMdefectiveLED -22-LD59 not lit Check fuse -22-F59Central electrical power supplyvoltage defectiveLED -22-LD63 not lit Check fuse -22-F63Short circuit/broken cable in thewiring for the CAN1 busCAN1 terminating resistorsdefectiveCheck wiring Replace wiringCheck wiring and terminatingresistorsIf necessary, replace wiringand/or replace terminatingresistors160<strong>02</strong> 160<strong>02</strong> DIOM voltage Internal Error: Internal voltage in DIOMincorrectInternal voltage in DIOM incorrect LED -22-LD59 not lit Check fuse -22-F59
Error No. Description Meaning Possible Reason Recommend Check Remedial measureLED -22-LD60 not lit Check fuse -22-F60Check fuse -22-F92Wiring faulty Check wiring and plug Replace wiring and/or plugInternal error DIOM See Remedy Replace DIOM16003 16003 DIOM voltage UB Error: DIOM UB voltage incorrect Determination via terminal Run electronics diagnosticsLED -22-LD27 not lit Check fuse -22-F73LED -22-LD60 not lit Check fuse -22-F60Check fuse -22-F92Wiring faulty Check wiring and plug Replace wiring and/or plugInternal error DIOM See Remedy Replace DIOMPage No. 59/79Error descriptions BiG M 400Central electrical power supplyvoltage defectiveLED -22-LD63 not lit Check fuse -22-F63Power supply voltage DIOMdefectiveLED -22-LD59 not lit Check fuse -22-F59Central electrical power supplyvoltage defectiveLED -22-LD63 not lit Check fuse -22-F63Status: 11.10.2010
Error No. Description Meaning Possible Reason Recommend Check Remedial measureDIOM overall current incorrect LED -22-LD59 not lit Check fuse -22-F59LED -22-LD27 not lit Check fuse -22-F73LED -22-LD60 not lit Check fuse -22-F60Check fuse -22-F92Wiring faulty Check wiring and plug Replace wiring and/or plugInternal error DIOM See Remedy Replace DIOMInternal error DIOM See Remedy Replace DIOM16007 16007 DIOM voltage UC Error: DIOM UC voltage incorrect Determination via terminal Run electronics diagnosticsStatus: 11.10.2010 Turn Page please!Page No. 60/79Error descriptions BiG M 40016004 16004 DIOM overall current Error: DIOM overall currentincorrectDetermination via terminal Run electronics diagnosticsCentral electrical power supplyvoltage defectiveLED -22-LD63 not lit Check fuse -22-F6316005 16005 current at output16006 16006 DIOM hardware Error: DIOM hardware defective Short circuit/broken cable in thewiringCheck wiring Replace wiringPower supply voltage DIOMdefectiveLED -22-LD59 not lit Check fuse -22-F59
Error No. Description Meaning Possible Reason Recommend Check Remedial measureLED -22-LD27 not lit Check fuse -22-F73LED -22-LD60 not lit Check fuse -22-F60Check fuse -22-F92Wiring faulty Check wiring and plug Replace wiring and/or plugInternal error DIOM See Remedy Replace DIOMLED -22-LD27 not lit Check fuse -22-F73LED -22-LD60 not lit Check fuse -22-F60Check fuse -22-F92Wiring faulty Check wiring and plug Replace wiring and/or plugInternal error DIOM See Remedy Replace DIOMPage No. 61/79Error descriptions BiG M 400Central electrical power supplyvoltage defectiveLED -22-LD63 not lit Check fuse -22-F6316008 16008 DIOM voltage 7.5V Error: DIOM 7.5 V voltageincorrectPower supply voltage DIOMdefectiveLED -22-LD59 not lit Check fuse -22-F59Central electrical power supplyvoltage defectiveLED -22-LD63 not lit Check fuse -22-F63Status: 11.10.2010
Error No. Description Meaning Possible Reason Recommend Check Remedial measure16009 16009 DIOM EEPROM Error: EEPROM defective EEPROM defective See Remedy Replace DIOMInternal error DIOMSee Remedy Replace DIOM16010 16010 DIOM PWM1 current Error: Overcurrent Determination via terminal Run electronics diagnosticsValve plug defective Check valve plug Replace valve plugCoil for solenoid valve defective Check coil Replace coilSolenoid valve defective Check solenoid valve Replace the solenoid valveInternal error DIOM See Remedy Replace DIOM16011 16011 DIOM PWM2 current Error: Overcurrent Determination via terminal Run electronics diagnosticsValve plug defective Check valve plug Replace valve plugCoil for solenoid valve defective Check coil Replace coilStatus: 11.10.2010 Turn Page please!Page No. 62/79Error descriptions BiG M 400Short circuit/broken cable in thewiring for the valveCheck wiring to valve Replace wiring to valveShort circuit/broken cable in thewiring for the valveCheck wiring to valve Replace wiring to valve
Error No. Description Meaning Possible Reason Recommend Check Remedial measureSolenoid valve defective Check solenoid valve Replace the solenoid valveInternal error DIOM See Remedy Replace DIOM16012 16012 DIOM PWM3 current Error: Overcurrent Determination via terminal Run electronics diagnosticsValve plug defective Check valve plug Replace valve plugCoil for solenoid valve defective Check coil Replace the solenoid valveInternal error DIOM See Remedy Replace DIOM16013 16013 DIOM PWM4 current Error: Overcurrent Determination via terminal Run electronics diagnosticsValve plug defective Check valve plug Replace valve plugCoil for solenoid valve defective Check coil Replace the solenoid valveInternal error DIOM See Remedy Replace DIOM16014 16014 DIOM DIG1 current Error: Overcurrent Determination via terminal Run electronics diagnosticsStatus: 11.10.2010 Turn Page please!Page No. 63/79Error descriptions BiG M 400Short circuit/broken cable in thewiring for the valveCheck wiring to valve Replace wiring to valveShort circuit/broken cable in thewiring for the valveCheck wiring to valve Replace wiring to valve
Error No. Description Meaning Possible Reason Recommend Check Remedial measureValve plug defective Check valve plug Replace valve plugInternal error DIOM See Remedy Replace DIOM16015 16015 DIOM DIG2 current Error: Overcurrent Determination via terminal Run electronics diagnosticsValve plug defective Check valve plug Replace valve plugInternal error DIOM See Remedy Replace DIOM16016 16016 DIOM DIG3 current Error: Overcurrent Determination via terminal Run electronics diagnosticsValve plug defective Check valve plug Replace valve plugStatus: 11.10.2010 Turn Page please!Page No. 64/79Error descriptions BiG M 400Short circuit/broken cable inwiring for valve (Y30)Check wiring to valve (Y30) Replace wiring to valve (Y30)Coil for solenoid valve (Y30)defectiveCheck coil (Y30) Replace solenoid valve (Y30)Short circuit/broken cable inwiring for valve (Y32)Check wiring to valve (Y32) Replace wiring to valve (Y32)Coil for solenoid valve (Y32)defectiveCheck coil (Y32) Replace solenoid valve (Y32)Short circuit/broken cable inwiring for valve (Y33)Check wiring to valve (Y33) Replace wiring to valve (Y33)Coil for solenoid valve (Y33)defectiveCheck coil (Y33) Replace solenoid valve (Y33)
Error No. Description Meaning Possible Reason Recommend Check Remedial measureInternal error DIOM See Remedy Replace DIOMValve plug defective Check valve plug Replace valve plugInternal error DIOM See Remedy Replace DIOMValve plug defective Check valve plug Replace valve plugCoil for solenoid valve defective Check coil Replace the solenoid valveInternal error DIOM See Remedy Replace DIOMValve plug defective Check valve plug Replace valve plugCoil for solenoid valve defective Check coil Replace the solenoid valveInternal error DIOM See Remedy Replace DIOMPage No. 65/79Error descriptions BiG M 40016017 16017 DIOM DIG4 current Error: Overcurrent Short circuit/broken cable inwiring for valve (Y41)Check wiring to valve (Y41) Replace wiring to valve (Y41)Coil for solenoid valve (Y41)defectiveCheck coil (Y41) Replace solenoid valve (Y41)16018 16018 DIOM PWM1 status Error: Status Short circuit/broken cable in thewiring for the valveCheck wiring to valve Replace wiring to valve16019 16019 DIOM PWM2 status Error: Status Short circuit/broken cable in thewiring for the valveCheck wiring to valve Replace wiring to valveStatus: 11.10.2010
Error No. Description Meaning Possible Reason Recommend Check Remedial measureValve plug defective Check valve plug. Replace valve plug.Coil for solenoid valve defective Check coil Replace the solenoid valveInternal error DIOM See Remedy Replace DIOMValve plug defective Check valve plug Replace valve plugCoil for solenoid valve defective Check coil Replace the solenoid valveInternal error DIOM See Remedy Replace DIOM16<strong>02</strong>2 16<strong>02</strong>2 DIOM DIG1 status Error: Status Determination via terminal Run electronics diagnosticsValve plug defective Check valve plug Replace valve plugInternal error DIOM See Remedy Replace DIOMPage No. 66/79Error descriptions BiG M 40016<strong>02</strong>0 16<strong>02</strong>0 DIOM PWM3 status Error: Status Short circuit/broken cable in thewiring for the valveCheck wiring to valve Replace wiring to valve16<strong>02</strong>1 16<strong>02</strong>1 DIOM PWM4 status Error: Status Short circuit/broken cable in thewiring for the valveCheck wiring to valve Replace wiring to valveShort circuit/broken cable inwiring for valve (Y30)Check wiring to valve (Y30) Replace wiring (Y30)Coil for solenoid valve (Y30)defectiveCheck coil (Y30) Replace solenoid valve (Y30)Status: 11.10.2010
Error No. Description Meaning Possible Reason Recommend Check Remedial measure16<strong>02</strong>3 16<strong>02</strong>3 DIOM DIG2 status Error: Status Determination via terminal Run electronics diagnosticsValve plug defective Check valve plug Replace valve plugInternal error DIOM See Remedy Replace DIOM16<strong>02</strong>4 16<strong>02</strong>4 DIOM DIG3 status Error: Status Determination via terminal Run electronics diagnosticsValve plug defective Check valve plug Replace valve plugInternal error DIOM See Remedy Replace DIOM16<strong>02</strong>5 16<strong>02</strong>5 DIOM DIG4 status Error: Status Determination via terminal Run electronics diagnosticsValve plug defective Check valve plug Replace valve plugStatus: 11.10.2010 Turn Page please!Page No. 67/79Error descriptions BiG M 400Short circuit/broken cable inwiring for valve (Y32)Check wiring to valve (Y32) Replace wiring to valve (Y32)Coil for solenoid valve (Y32)defectiveCheck coil (Y32) Replace solenoid valve (Y32)Short circuit/broken cable inwiring for valve (Y33)Check wiring to valve (Y33) Replace wiring to valve (Y33)Coil for solenoid valve (Y33)defectiveCheck coil (Y33) Replace solenoid valve (Y33)Short circuit/broken cable inwiring for valve (Y41)Check wiring to valve (Y41) Replace wiring to valve (Y41)
Error No. Description Meaning Possible Reason Recommend Check Remedial measureInternal error DIOM See Remedy Replace DIOM16041 16041 DIOM PWM6 current Error: Overcurrent Determination via terminal Run electronics diagnosticsValve plug defective Check valve plug Replace valve plugCoil for solenoid valve defective Check coil Replace coilSolenoid valve defective Check solenoid valve Replace the solenoid valveInternal error DIOM See Remedy Replace DIOM16042 16042 DIOM PWM7 current Error: Overcurrent Determination via terminal Run electronics diagnosticsValve plug defective Check valve plug Replace valve plugCoil for solenoid valve defective Check coil Replace the solenoid valveInternal error DIOM See Remedy Replace DIOMPage No. 68/79Error descriptions BiG M 400Coil for solenoid valve (Y41)defectiveCheck coil (Y41) Replace solenoid valve (Y41)Short circuit/broken cable in thewiring for the valveCheck wiring to valve Replace wiring to valveShort circuit/broken cable in thewiring for the valveCheck wiring to valve Replace wiring to valveStatus: 11.10.2010
Error No. Description Meaning Possible Reason Recommend Check Remedial measure16043 16043 DIOM PWM8 current Error: Overcurrent Determination via terminal Run electronics diagnosticsValve plug defective Check valve plug Replace valve plugCoil for solenoid valve defective Check coil Replace the solenoid valveInternal error DIOM See Remedy Replace DIOM16044 16044 DIOM DIG5 current Error: Overcurrent Determination via terminal Run electronics diagnosticsValve plug defective Check valve plug Replace valve plugInternal error DIOM See Remedy Replace DIOM16045 16045 DIOM DIG6 current Error: Overcurrent Determination via terminal Run electronics diagnosticsValve plug defective Check valve plug Replace valve plugStatus: 11.10.2010 Turn Page please!Page No. 69/79Error descriptions BiG M 400Short circuit/broken cable in thewiring for the valveCheck wiring to valve Replace wiring to valveShort circuit/broken cable inwiring for valve (Y35)Check wiring to valve (Y35) Replace wiring to valve (Y35)Coil for solenoid valve (Y35)defectiveCheck coil (Y35) Replace solenoid valve (Y35)Short circuit/broken cable inwiring for valve (Y36)Check wiring to valve (Y36) Replace wiring to valve (Y36)
Error No. Description Meaning Possible Reason Recommend Check Remedial measure16046 16046 DIOM DIG7 current Error: Overcurrent Determination via terminal Run electronics diagnosticsValve plug defective Check valve plug Replace valve plugInternal error DIOM See Remedy Replace DIOMValve plug defective Check valve plug Replace valve plugInternal error DIOM See Remedy Replace DIOMValve plug defective Check valve plug Replace valve plugCoil for solenoid valve defective Check coil Replace the solenoid valveStatus: 11.10.2010 Turn Page please!Page No. 70/79Error descriptions BiG M 400Coil for solenoid valve (Y36)defectiveCheck coil (Y36) Coil for solenoid valve (Y36)defectiveShort circuit/broken cable inwiring for valve (Y37)Check wiring to valve (Y37) Replace wiring to valve (Y37)Coil for solenoid valve (Y37)defectiveCheck coil (Y37) Replace solenoid valve (Y37)16047 16047 DIOM DIG8 current Error: Overcurrent Short circuit/broken cable inwiring for valve (Y38)Check wiring to valve (Y38) Replace wiring to valve (Y38)Coil for solenoid valve (Y38)defectiveCheck coil (Y38) Replace solenoid valve (Y38)16048 16048 DIOM PWM5 status Error: Status Short circuit/broken cable in thewiring for the valveCheck wiring to valve Replace wiring to valve
Error No. Description Meaning Possible Reason Recommend Check Remedial measureInternal error DIOM See Remedy Replace DIOMValve plug defective Check valve plug Replace valve plug.Coil for solenoid valve defective Check coil Replace the solenoid valveInternal error DIOM See Remedy Replace DIOMValve plug defective Check valve plug. Replace valve plug.Coil for solenoid valve defective Check coil Replace the solenoid valveInternal error DIOM See Remedy Replace DIOMValve plug defective Check valve plug Replace valve plugCoil for solenoid valve defective Check coil Replace the solenoid valveInternal error DIOM See Remedy Replace DIOMPage No. 71/79Error descriptions BiG M 40016049 16049 DIOM PWM6 status Error: Status Short circuit/broken cable in thewiring for the valveCheck wiring to valve Replace wiring to valve16050 16050 DIOM PWM7 status Error: Status Short circuit/broken cable in thewiring for the valveCheck wiring to valve Replace wiring to valve16051 16051 DIOM PWM8 status Error: Status Short circuit/broken cable in thewiring for the valveCheck wiring to valve Replace wiring to valveStatus: 11.10.2010
Error No. Description Meaning Possible Reason Recommend Check Remedial measure16052 16052 DIOM DIG5 status Error: Status Determination via terminal Run electronics diagnosticsValve plug defective Check valve plug Replace valve plugInternal error DIOM See Remedy Replace DIOM16053 16053 DIOM DIG6 status Error: Status Determination via terminal Run electronics diagnosticsValve plug defective Check valve plug Replace valve plugInternal error DIOM See Remedy Replace DIOM16054 16054 DIOM DIG7 status Error: Status Determination via terminal Run electronics diagnosticsValve plug defective Check valve plug Replace valve plugStatus: 11.10.2010 Turn Page please!Page No. 72/79Error descriptions BiG M 400Short circuit/broken cable inwiring for valve (Y35)Check wiring to valve (Y35) Replace wiring to valve (Y35)Coil for solenoid valve (Y35)defectiveCheck coil (Y35) Replace solenoid valve (Y35)Short circuit/broken cable inwiring for valve (Y36)Check wiring to valve (Y36) Replace wiring to valve (Y36)Coil for solenoid valve (Y36)defectiveCheck coil (Y36) Replace solenoid valve (Y36)Short circuit/broken cable inwiring for valve (Y37)Check wiring to valve (Y37) Replace wiring to valve (Y37)
Error No. Description Meaning Possible Reason Recommend Check Remedial measureReplace DIOM16055 16055 DIOM DIG8 status Error: Status Determination via terminal Run electronics diagnosticsValve plug defective Check valve plug Replace valve plugInternal error DIOM See Remedy Replace DIOM16071 16071 DIOM PWM10 current Error: Overcurrent Determination via terminal Run electronics diagnosticsValve plug defective Check valve plug Replace valve plugCoil for solenoid valve defective Check coil Replace coilSolenoid valve defective Check solenoid valve Replace the solenoid valveStatus: 11.10.2010 Turn Page please!Page No. 73/79Error descriptions BiG M 400Coil for solenoid valve (Y37)defectiveCheck coil (Y37) Replace solenoid valve (Y37)Internal error DIOM See RemedyShort circuit/broken cable inwiring for valve (Y38)Check wiring to valve (Y38) Replace wiring to valve (Y38)Coil for solenoid valve (Y38)defectiveCheck coil (Y38) Replace solenoid valve (Y38)Short circuit/broken cable in thewiring for the valveCheck wiring to valve Replace wiring to valve
Error No. Description Meaning Possible Reason Recommend Check Remedial measureInternal error DIOM See Remedy Replace DIOM16072 16072 DIOM PWM11 current Error: Overcurrent Determination via terminal Run electronics diagnosticsValve plug defective Check valve plug Replace valve plugCoil for solenoid valve defective Check coil Replace the solenoid valveInternal error DIOM See Remedy Replace DIOM16073 16073 DIOM PWM12 current Error: Overcurrent Determination via terminal Run electronics diagnosticsValve plug defective Check valve plug Replace valve plugCoil for solenoid valve defective Check coil Replace the solenoid valveInternal error DIOM See Remedy Replace DIOM16074 16074 DIOM DIG9 current Error: Overcurrent Determination via terminal Run electronics diagnosticsStatus: 11.10.2010 Turn Page please!Page No. 74/79Error descriptions BiG M 400Short circuit/broken cable in thewiring for the valveCheck wiring to valve Replace wiring to valveShort circuit/broken cable in thewiring for the valveCheck wiring to valve Replace wiring to valveShort circuit/broken cable inwiring for valve (Y39)Check wiring to valve (Y39) Replace wiring to valve (Y39)
Error No. Description Meaning Possible Reason Recommend Check Remedial measureValve plug defective Check valve plug Replace valve plugInternal error DIOM See Remedy Replace DIOM16075 16075 DIOM DIG10 current Error: Overcurrent Determination via terminal Run electronics diagnosticsValve plug defective Check valve plug Replace valve plugInternal error DIOM See Remedy Replace DIOM16076 16076 DIOM DIG11 current Error: Overcurrent Determination via terminal Run electronics diagnosticsValve plug defective (Y31) Check valve plug (Y31) Replace valve plug (Y31)Internal error DIOM See Remedy Replace DIOMPage No. 75/79Error descriptions BiG M 400Coil for solenoid valve (Y39)defectiveCheck coil (Y39) Replace solenoid valve (Y39)Short circuit/broken cable inwiring for valve (Y34)Check wiring to valve (Y34) Replace wiring to valve (Y34)Coil for solenoid valve (Y34)defectiveCheck coil (Y34) Replace solenoid valve (Y34)Short circuit/broken cable inwiring for valve (Y31)Check wiring to valve (Y31) Replace wiring to valve (Y31)Coil for solenoid valve (Y31)defectiveCheck coil (Y31) Replace solenoid valve (Y31)Status: 11.10.2010
Error No. Description Meaning Possible Reason Recommend Check Remedial measureValve plug defective Check valve plug Replace valve plugInternal error DIOM See Remedy Replace DIOMValve plug defective Replace valve plug Replace valve plugCoil for solenoid valve defective Check coil Replace the solenoid valveInternal error DIOM See Remedy Replace DIOMValve plug defective Check valve plug Replace valve plugCoil for solenoid valve defective Check coil Replace the solenoid valveInternal error DIOM See Remedy Replace DIOMStatus: 11.10.2010 Turn Page please!Page No. 76/79Error descriptions BiG M 40016077 16077 DIOM DIG12 current Error: Overcurrent Short circuit/broken cable inwiring for valve (Y42)Check wiring to valve (Y42) Replace wiring to valve (Y42)Coil for solenoid valve (Y42)defectiveCheck coil (Y42) Replace solenoid valve (Y42)16078 16078 DIOM PWM9 status Error: Status Short circuit/broken cable in thewiring for the valveCheck wiring to valve Replace wiring to valve16079 16079 DIOM PWM10 status Error: Status Short circuit/broken cable in thewiring for the valveCheck wiring to valve Replace wiring to valve16080 16080 DIOM PWM11 status Error: Status Short circuit/broken cable in thewiring for the valveCheck wiring to valve Replace wiring to valve
Error No. Description Meaning Possible Reason Recommend Check Remedial measureValve plug defective Check valve plug. Replace valve plug.Coil for solenoid valve defective Check coil Replace the solenoid valveInternal error DIOM See Remedy Replace DIOMValve plug defective Check valve plug Replace valve plugCoil for solenoid valve defective Check coil Replace the solenoid valveInternal error DIOM See Remedy Replace DIOM16082 16082 DIOM DIG9 status Error: Status Determination via terminal Run electronics diagnosticsValve plug defective Check valve plug Replace valve plugInternal error DIOM See Remedy Replace DIOM16083 16083 DIOM DIG10 status Error: Status Determination via terminal Run electronics diagnosticsStatus: 11.10.2010 Turn Page please!Page No. 77/79Error descriptions BiG M 40016081 16081 DIOM PWM12 status Error: Status Short circuit/broken cable in thewiring for the valveCheck wiring to valve Replace wiring to valveShort circuit/broken cable inwiring for valve (Y39)Check wiring to valve (Y39) Replace wiring to valve (Y39)Coil for solenoid valve (Y39)defectiveCheck coil (Y39) Replace solenoid valve (Y39)
Error No. Description Meaning Possible Reason Recommend Check Remedial measureValve plug defective Check valve plug Replace valve plugInternal error DIOM See Remedy Replace DIOM16084 16084 DIOM DIG11 status Error: Status Determination via terminal Run electronics diagnosticsValve plug defective Check valve plug Replace valve plugInternal error DIOM See Remedy Replace DIOMValve plug defective Check valve plug Replace valve plugStatus: 11.10.2010 Turn Page please!Page No. 78/79Error descriptions BiG M 400Short circuit/broken cable inwiring for valve (Y34)Check wiring to valve (Y34) Replace wiring to valve (Y34)Coil for solenoid valve (Y34)defectiveCheck coil (Y34) Replace solenoid valve (Y34)Short circuit/broken cable inwiring for valve (Y31)Check wiring to valve (Y31) Replace wiring to valve (Y31)Coil for solenoid valve (Y31)defectiveCheck coil (Y31) Replace solenoid valve (Y31)16085 16085 DIOM DIG12 status Determination via terminal Run electronics diagnosticsShort circuit/broken cable inwiring for valve (Y42)Check wiring to valve (Y42) Replace wiring to valve (Y42)Coil for solenoid valve (Y42)defectiveCheck coil (Y42) Replace solenoid valve (Y42)
Error No. Description Meaning Possible Reason Recommend Check Remedial measureInternal error DIOM See Remedy Replace DIOMStatus: 11.10.2010 Turn Page please!Page No. 79/79Error descriptions BiG M 400
AAbrasion Limit ................................................... 372Activating fast reversing.................................... 279Actuating release switches ................................. 80Adjustable air jets ............................................. 101Adjusting the Compensation Springs ............... 286Adjusting the conditioner plate ......................... 291Adjusting the cutting height ...................... 282, 284Adjusting the Lifting Height ............................... 283Adjusting the mowing units ............................... 281Adjusting the roller conditioner (optional extra) 292Adjusting the Sensors ....................................... 399Adjusting the swath width ................................. 295Adjusting the Tedder Speed ............................. 289Adjusting the track control arm on the lateralmowing units ................................................. 297Adjusting the Warning Panel ............................ 237Affixing the Adhesive Safety and InformationLabels ............................................................. 21After Shearing Off ............................................. 379Air comfort seat ................................................... 52Air filter .............................................................. 341Air intake and distribution ................................. 392Aligning the Cutter Bar ...................................... 358Allround lights (optional) ..................................... 71Angular gearbox ....................................... 353, 356At the End of the Harvest Season .................... 438Attaching the Front Mowing Unit ...................... 320Attaching the Lateral Mowing Unit .................... 328Autopilot .............................................................. 42Autopilot release switch / - optional .................... 82Axle separation key ............................................ 85BBasic screen - road travel ................................. 106Battery......................................................... 44, 418Before the Start of the New Season ................. 439Belt drives ......................................................... 406Blade Changing on Cutting Discs ..................... 373Blade Quick-Fit Device ............................ 367, 375Blade screw connection ................................... 365Blade Screw Connection ................................. 374Brake light .......................................................... 66Brakes .............................................................. 381Bringing up a Menu Level ................................ 124CCab Circuit Board ............................................. 429Cab relay PCB ................................................. 427Cabin .................................................................. 49Changing a customer record (1) or creating a newone ............................................................... 117Changing the times of the lubricating interval .. 436Charge indicator lamp ........................................ 86Charging Batteries ........................................... 420Check battery ................................................... 421Check before Start-up ...................................... 238Check lock ............................................... 243, 274Checking and maintaining tyres ....................... 413Checking refrigerant condition and level .......... 404Checking the capacitor .................................... 405Checking the Cutter Blades and Blade Holder 364Checking the Lock on the Lateral Mowing Units..................................................................... 272Checking the material thickness of the leaf springs..................................................................... 370Checking the Material Thickness of the LeafSprings ......................................................... 369Checking the material thickness of the retainingbolts.............................................................. 368Checking the Material Thickness of the RetainingBolts ............................................................. 367Circulation filter ................................................ 394Cleaning the Engine Compartment withCompressed Air ........................................... 333Collector/drier ................................................... 403Commissioning ................................................ 233Console Circuit Board ...................................... 428Contact ............................................................... 21Contamination in the engine compartment ...... 333442
Control units and fuses ..................................... 426Converting the Tedder Deflector Plate to anAuger-Type Cross Conveyor ........................ 299Cooling system ................................................... 44Cross Conveyor Drive ....................................... 411Cruise control .................................................... 253Cutter Blades .................................................... 364DDaily checks ...................................................... 238Dangers in Case of Non-compliance with theSafety Instructions .......................................... 39Deactivating the axle suspension ..................... 298Deflector Plates ................................................ 297Delete customer counter................................... 119Description of Installation.................................. 235Deviating Torque .............................................. 347Diagnosis socket - motor .................................... 58Diagnostics socket / <strong>US</strong>B connection ................. 89Diesel engine error storage .............................. 221Disable the shut-off valve on the front outrigger...................................................................... 244Drive data information section (VI) ................... 110Drive of mowing unit ......................................... 410Driving and Transport ....................................... 240Driving forwards ................................................ 251EEliminating Blockages on the Cross Conveyor. 349Emergency exit ............................................. 44, 57Empty the water separator................................ 335Engine area ...................................................... 438Engine coolant .......................................... 339, 340Engine failure pilot lamp ..................................... 86Engine oil and filter replacement ...................... 334Engine oil level .................................................. 334Entering parameters ......................................... 127Error Messages ........................................ 230, 441FFan wheel drive ................................................ 407Field mode basic screen ................................... 106Filling Quantities and Lubrication Designations forGearboxes ................................................... 351Fire preventions ................................................. 45Fitting the batteries and connecting the polescorrectly ....................................................... 423Fitting the guard cloths..................................... 233Folding Down Lateral Mowing Units ........ 233, 262Folding the Lateral Mowing Units from HeadlandPosition to Transport Position ...................... 273Folding Up Lateral Mowing Units ..................... 271Folding Up the Guards ..................................... 241Fresh air fan ..................................................... 393Friction clutch ................................................... 440Front mowing unit 28, 36, 282, 287, 295, 297, 314,358Fuel .................................................................. 337Fuel filter/water separator ................................ 335Full beam ........................................................... 62GGame animal protection ................................... 276Gearbox for Top Roller Drive ........................... 357General on Driving ........................................... 249Grease types, NLGIClass 2 ............................. 434HHeadlamp flasher ............................................... 62Headland Position ............................................ 265Horn ................................................................... 61Hydraulic system .............................................. 382IIdentification Plate .............................................. 15Identifying Symbols in the Operating Instructions....................................................................... 38Ignition lock ........................................................ 87Implements ........................................................ 43Indicator switch .................................................. 61Indicator, hazard warning flasher and brake light....................................................................... 66Info centre EasyTouch ..................................... 104Information message ....................................... 231Information Required for Questions and Orders 16Information section ........................................... 106443
Information section of settings (IV and V) ......... 110Information section of the travelling gear data (III)...................................................................... 109Input gearbox .................................................... 354Inside mirror ........................................................ 75Installation of Cutter Blades .............................. 237Installing the auger-type cross conveyor .......... 303Intended Use .............................................. 16, 260Interior lighting .................................................... 72Introduction ......................................................... 15KKilling the engine .............................................. 248-Klimatronik / heating .......................................... 93Krone Machine Controller circuit board (KMC1)...................................................................... 430LLadder to driver's cabin ...................................... 49Lateral Mowing Unit ......... 288, 289, 296, 352, 361Left outside mirror ............................................... 74Lifting the Lateral Mowing Units from workingPosition to Headland Position ....................... 272Lighting ............................................................... 65Lower the front mowing unit into working position...................................................................... 264Lowering the Lateral Mowing Units from HeadlandPosition to Working Position ......................... 263Lowering the Lateral Mowing Units from TransportPosition to Headland Position ....................... 263Lubricant ........................................................... 433Lubricant fill ....................................................... 431Lubricating the PTO shaft ................................. 415Lubrication Chart .............................................. 416MMachine Data Counter ...................................... 141Machine overview ............................................... 17Main battery switch ..................................... 47, 419Main block ......................................................... 386Main gearbox .................................................... 352Main Menu 1 Settings ....................................... 125Main Menu 2 Counters ..................................... 141Main Menu 3 Maintenance ............................... 143Main Menu 4 Service ....................................... <strong>150</strong>Maintenance ...................................................... 46Maintenance – Basic Machine ......................... 381Maintenance – Central Lubrication .................. 431Maintenance – electrical system ...................... 417Maintenance - Engine ...................................... 331Maintenance – lubrication chart ....................... 415Maintenance – Mowing Units ........................... 343Maintenance Table – Engine ........................... 332Maintenance Table – Mowing Units ................. 345Manometric switch ........................................... 4<strong>02</strong>Measuring Acid Density ................................... 422Menu 1-1 Parameters ...................................... 126Menu 1-2 Machine setting ............................... 128Menu 1-3 Units ................................................. 133Menu 1-4 Language ......................................... 134Menu 1-5 Display ............................................. 135Menu 1-5-1 Contrast ........................................ 136Menu 1-5-2 Beeper .......................................... 137Menu 1-5-4 Direction of Rotation ..................... 139Menu 1-6 Date/time ......................................... 140Menu 3-1 .......................................................... 144Menu 3-4 Manual mode ................................... 147Menu 4-1 Diagnostics ...................................... 151Menu 4-1-1 Diagnostics of axle suspension .... 154Menu 4-1-10 Diagnostics Work ....................... 187Menu 4-1-11 CAN bus ..................................... 198Menu 4-1-12 Travelling gear ............................ 199Menu 4-1-13 Electronics .................................. 210Menu 4-1-14 Diesel engine .............................. 211Menu 4-1-15 Joystick ....................................... 213Menu 4-1-16 Control unit console .................... 215Menu 4-1-17 Display ........................................ 217Menu 4-1-3 Diagnostics of spring compensation..................................................................... 157Menu 4-1-4 Diagnostics of cutting height ........ 163Menu 4-1-5 Diagnostics of hydraulic auger hood..................................................................... 171Menu 4-1-6 Sideshift diagnostics ..................... 177Menu 4-1-7 Diagnostics front guard flaps ........ 182Menu 4-2 Error list ........................................... 218444
Menu 4-3 Service level ..................................... 223Menu 4-4 Information ........................................ 224Menu 4-4-1 Joystick .......................................... 225Menu 4-4-2 Software ........................................ 226Menu 4-4-3 Machine ......................................... 228Menu 5 Basic Screen ........................................ 229Menu Level / Short overview ............................ <strong>123</strong>Motor data (II) information section .................... 108Move all mowing units automatically to headlandposition.......................................................... 265Move the front mowing unit to central position . 242Moving the guards into the working position .... 277Mowing.............................................................. 275Mowing Unit Drive ............................................. 266Mowing with Individual Mowing Units ............... 278MR2 engine control ........................................... 427Multi-function lever .............................................. 90NNamur sensor ................................................... 399OOil Level Check and Oil Change Intervals(Gearboxes) .................................................. 351Oil level check and oil change on the cutter bar.............................................................. 358, 361Opening the cabin door ...................................... 50Opening the Front Guard .................................. 348Operation – Mowing Units ................................ 260Operation of Mowing Units ............................... 261Operators controls .............................................. 51Outrigger arms .................................................. 408Outside mirrors ................................................... 74Over-pressure valves ........................................ 387PPanel switches and pilot lamps .......................... 79Parking Brake ................................................... 257Passenger seat ................................................... 56Periodical Inspection of the Cutting Discs / BladeDrums ........................................................... 371Periodical Inspection of the Leaf Springs ......... 369Personnel Qualification and Training .................. 39Placing in Storage ............................................ 438Position of sensors ........................................... 398Position of Sensors .......................................... 396Position of the Adhesive Safety Stickers on theMachine ......................................................... 22Position of the General Information Labels on theMachine ......................................................... 30Precondition for mowing .................................. 276Pumps .............................................................. 385QQuick access Customer Data Counter ............ 116Quick access Hydraulic axle suspension......... 120Quick access Hydraulically adjustable cuttingheight (optional) ........................................... 112Quick access Hydraulically adjustable lateralspring compensation (ground pressure)(optional) ...................................................... 114Quick Access Keys in the Basic Screen .......... 111Quick access Machine settings ....................... 122Quick access Reverse ventilation .................... 111Quick change of direction of travel (quickreversing) ..................................................... 279Quick charge .................................................... 420Quick stop ........................................................ 279RRadio ................................................................ 1<strong>02</strong>Raising the Front Mowing Unit to TransportPosition ........................................................ 274Refrigerant ....................................................... 4<strong>02</strong>Refrigerant data sheet R 134a (excerpt) ......... 401Release switch - holding brake .......................... 83Release switch – road/field ........................ 81, 244Release switch travelling gear ................... 84, 245Releasing the holding brake manually ............. 259Removing Mowing Units .................................. 314Removing of the compensation springs........... 315Removing the Side Mowing Unit ...................... 321Removing the tedder deflector plate ................ 300Removing the Weiste Triangle ......................... 318Re-Ordering the Adhesive Safety and InformationLabels ............................................................ 21Repairing the Sheared Off Bearing Unit .......... 380445
Replacing the fuel filter ..................................... 335Replacing the fuel filter element ....................... 336Replacing the hydraulic oil filter ........................ 390Replacing the linings ......................................... 376Retightening the Attachment Bolts on theOutrigger ....................................................... 414Reversing .......................................................... 252Right outside mirror and anti-collision mirror ...... 75SSafety .................................................................. 20Safety cartridge ................................................. 341Safety-conscious work practices ........................ 39Self-propelled working machine ......................... 41Semi-automatic mode ....................................... 278Setting of the Scraper on the Cross Conveyor(Optional) ...................................................... 294Setting the acceleration behaviour ................... 249Setting the anti-collision mirror ........................... 75Setting the right outside mirror ........................... 75Shear pins ......................................................... 350Side light/dipped beam ....................................... 67Spare Parts ....................................................... 344Special Equipment – Mowing Units .................. 299Speed gearbox ................................................. 355Spotlight .............................................................. 73Starter ............................................................... 425Starting the engine ............................................ 246Starting to Drive ................................................ 248Starting with an Auxiliary Battery ...................... 248Start-up ............................................................. 238Status line (I) ..................................................... 107Steering column adjustment ............................... 60Steering column and foot pedals ........................ 59Stopping ............................................................ 255Stopping with Foot Brakes ................................ 256Storage compartment for first-aid kit/operatinginstructions ...................................................... 55Sun blind ............................................................. 76Switch group roof panel ...................................... 64Switch off the engine ........................................ 258Switch off the machine ...................................... 258Switch panel ....................................................... 78Switching All Mowing Unit Drives On/Off ......... 270Switching Axle Separation On and Off ............ 280Switching on the dipped beam ........................... 67Switching on the hazard warning flasher ........... 66Switching on the indicator .................................. 66Switching on the parking light ............................ 67Switching the counter on or off ........................ 118Switching the Front Mowing Unit Drive On/Off 269Switching the Left Mowing Unit Drive On/Off... 267Switching the Mowing Unit Drives On and Off . 267Switching the Right Mowing Unit Drive On/Off 268System Description Operating and BrakeHydraulics .................................................... 385TTanks ............................................................... 338Technical data ............................................ 18, 401Technical Data / Mower CRI .............................. 19Technical Data / Mower CV ............................... 19Technical Data / Vehicle .................................... 18Telephone and radio sets .................................. 46Tensioning the V-belts ..................................... 304Test run ............................................................ 344Three-phase generator .................................... 424Tightening Torques .......................................... 346Tightening Torques (Countersunk Screws) ..... 347Tool box ........................................................... 346Towing ............................................................. 259Transfer gearbox .............................................. 391Transport / Road Travel ................................... 240Troubleshooting ............................................... 437Tyres .......................................................... 44, 412UUsing the operating brake .................................. 63VVenting the fuel system.................................... 339WWasher system .................................................. 77Wheel chocks ..................................................... 46446
Wheel mounting ................................................ 414Windscreen washer system .............................. 395Windshield wipers ............................................... 76Working floodlight Bottom front .......................... 70Working floodlight rear ........................................ 70Working floodlights ............................................. 68Working floodlights ............................................. 69Working floodlights Cab ..................................... 69Working in the vicinity of power transmission lines....................................................................... 45447
. . . konsequent, kompetentMaschinenfabrikBernard Krone GmbHHeinrich-Krone-Straße 10, D-48480 SpellePostfach 11 63, D-48478 SpellePhone +49 (0) 59 77/935-0Fax +49 (0) 59 77/935-339Internet: http://www.krone.deeMail: info.ldm@krone.de
Change language